Site Layout Str. & Arc.

SAUDI RAILWAY (SAR) PROJECT
RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA
GROUPING # 2- AL NARIYAH YARD

SEGMENT 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CIVIL, STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
TENDERER
RH0522A
December 2010
RIYADH
December 2010
North South Railway Project

Grouping # 2 - Al Nariyah Yard Segment 7
Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL
VOLUME 2
PART 1
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section
01010
General Instructions
01010/1
01010/6
Section
01012
Summary of Work
01012/1
01012/2
Section
01025
Measurement and Payment
01025/1
01025/3
Section
01041
Coordination
01041/1
01041/5
Section
01045
Cutting and Patching
01045/1
01045/5
Section
01050
Field Engineering
01050/1
01050/3
Section
01060
Regulatory Requirements
01060/1
01060/2
Section
01200
Project Meetings
01200/1
01200/6
Section
01300
Submittals
01300/1
01300/21
Section
01310
Construction Schedule
01310/1
01310/4
Section
01400
Quality Control
01400/1
01400/12
Section
01421
Reference Standards and Definitions
01421/1
01421/5
Section
01500
Temporary Facilities
01500/1
01500/13
Section
01600
General Materials Plant and Equipment
01600/1
01600/10
Section
01630
Substitutions
01630/1
01630/4
Section
01700
Project Closeout
01700/1
01700/6
Section
01710
Cleaning
01710/1
01710/3
Section
01720
Project Record Documents
01720/1
01720/11
Section
01740
Warranties
01740/1
01740/3
Section
01750
Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
01750/1
01750/4
Section
01770
Take-Over Procedures
01770/1
01770/3
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Contents
C/1
December 2010

Specifications
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

Section
02200
Earthwork
02200/1
02200/12
Section
02500
Road Work
02500/1
02500/1
Section
02600
Environmental Works
02600/1
02600/25
Section
02780
Unit Pavers
02780/1
02780/8
Section
02900
Landscaping
02900/1
02900/10
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE WORK

Section
03100
Concrete Formwork
03/1
03/5
Section
03300
Cast-In Place Concrete
03/6
03/72
Section
03500
Beds and Screed
03/73
03/78
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Section
04100
Mortar
04100/1
04100/3
Section
04200
Unit Masonry
04200/1
04200/13
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Contents
C/2
December 2010
VOLUME 2

Specifications
PART 2
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section
05500
Metal Fabrications
05500/1
05500/12
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

Section
06100
Rough Carpentry
06100/1
06100/6
Section
06200
Finish Carpentry
06200/1
06200/8
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section
07100
Waterproofing and Roofing
07100/1
07100/13
Section
07210
Thermal Insulation
07210/1
07210/5
Section
07841
Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals
07841/1
07841/6
Section
07920
Joint Sealants
07920/1
07920/11
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section
08110
Steel Doors and Frames
08110/1
08110/9
Section
08520
Aluminium Windows
08520/1
08520/12
Section
08540
Aluminium Doors
08540/1
08540/11
Section
08710
Finish Hardware
08710/1
08710/13
Section
08800
Glass and Glazing
08800/1
08800/12
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section
09220
Plastering
09220/1
09220/10
Section
09310
Ceramic Tiles
09310/1
09310/8
Section
09350
Cement Tiles and Terrazzo
09350/1
09350/7
Section
09800
Special Coatings
09800/1
09800/14
Section
09900
Painting
09900/1
09900/13
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Contents
C/3
December 2010

Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL
VOLUME 2
PART 1
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section
01010
01010/1
01010/6
Section
01012
Summary of Work
01012/1
01012/2
Section
01025
01025/1
01025/3
Section
01041
Coordination
01041/1
01041/5
Section
01045
01045/1
01045/5
Section
01050
Field Engineering
01050/1
01050/3
Section
01060
01060/1
01060/2
Section
01200
Project Meetings
01200/1
01200/6
Section
01300
Submittals
01300/1
01300/21
Section
01310
01310/1
01310/4
Section
01400
Quality Control
01400/1
01400/12
Section
01421
01421/1
01421/5
Section
01500
01500/1
01500/13
Section
01600
General Materials Plant and Equipment
01600/1
01600/10
Section
01630
Substitutions
01630/1
01630/4
Section
01700
Project Closeout
01700/1
01700/6
Section
01710
Cleaning
01710/1
01710/3
Section
01720
01720/1
01720/11
Section
01740
Warranties
01740/1
01740/3
Section
01750
01750/1
01750/4
Section
01770
Take-Over Procedures
01770/1
01770/3
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Contents
C/1
December 2010

Specifications
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

Section
02200
Earthwork
02200/1
02200/12
Section
02500
Road Work
02500/1
02500/1
Section
02600
Environmental Works
02600/1
02600/25
Section
02780
Unit Pavers
02780/1
02780/8
Section
02900
Landscaping
02900/1
02900/10
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE WORK

Section
03100
Concrete Formwork
03/1
03/5
Section
03300
Cast-In Place Concrete
03/6
03/72
Section
03500
Beds and Screed
03/73
03/78
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Section
04100
Mortar
04100/1
04100/3
Section
04200
Unit Masonry
04200/1
04200/13
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Contents
C/2
December 2010
VOLUME 2

Specifications
PART 2
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section
05500
Metal Fabrications
05500/1
05500/12
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

Section
06100
Rough Carpentry
06100/1
06100/6
Section
06200
Finish Carpentry
06200/1
06200/8
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section
07100
07100/1
07100/13
Section
07210
Thermal Insulation
07210/1
07210/5
Section
07841
07841/1
07841/6
Section
07920
Joint Sealants
07920/1
07920/11
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section
08110
08110/1
08110/9
Section
08520
Aluminium Windows
08520/1
08520/12
Section
08540
Aluminium Doors
08540/1
08540/11
Section
08710
Finish Hardware
08710/1
08710/13
Section
08800
Glass and Glazing
08800/1
08800/12
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section
09220
Plastering
09220/1
09220/10
Section
09310
Ceramic Tiles
09310/1
09310/8
Section
09350
09350/1
09350/7
Section
09800
Special Coatings
09800/1
09800/14
Section
09900
Painting
09900/1
09900/13
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Contents
C/3
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01010
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Summary
.1
1.2
1.3
Conform to the General Conditions of the Contract as amended herein and articles
contained in Division 1.
Project Documents
.1
The Project Documents comprises the written Tender/Bid Documents, Contract

Documents, Technical Specifications, Finish/Detail Schedules. The Project Documents
will consist of several volumes, and accompanies the larger Drawings, the combination of
which provides the details to tender and complete the construction of the Project Work
under this Contract.
.2
Ensure that Subcontractors and suppliers carefully read and study the General Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1, before commencing their respective work. Claims for
delay and/or extra expense will not be accepted as a reason for non-compliance with this
requirement.
.3
The Project Documents has been divided into Divisions and Sections for reference, but a
Section may consist of the work of more than one Subcontractor or supplier. The
responsibility for determining which Subcontractor or supplier shall provide labour,
material, products, equipment and services to complete the work rests solely with the
Contractor.
.4
This Project Documents is not intended as a detailed description of installation methods,

but serves to indicate particular requirements in the completed work.
.5
Mention in the Project Documents or indication on the Drawings of materials, products,

operations, or methods, requires that the Contractor provide each item mentioned or
indicated of the quality or subject to the qualifications noted; perform according to the
conditions stated each operation prescribed; and provide labour, materials, products,
equipment and services to complete the Work.
Discrepancies/Conflicts/Omissions
.1
If discrepancies or conflicts in, or omissions from Drawings, Specifications or other

Contract Documents are suspected, or if there is doubt as to the meaning or intent thereof,
notify the Engineer at once.
Khatib and Alami
Section 01010/1
December 2010
.2
.3
1.4
1.5

Specifications
Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents are intended to be in compliance

with local laws, by-laws, regulations and other requirements of local jurisdictional
authorities. Perform work in conformity with such requirements. If discrepancies,
conflicts or omissions are suspected, notify the Engineer at once.
Comply with Engineer's written instructions or explanations.
.4
In the event that a discrepancy has not been reported to the Engineer or clarified by
Addendum (prior to submission of Bids), Bidders shall include in their Bid Price, the
more stringent requirements.
.5
Failure to notify the Engineer of any discrepancies, shall result in the Contractor incurring
the responsibility for resulting costs and conditions.
Examination
.1
Make a careful examination of the site of the Work, and investigate and be satisfied as to
all matters relating to the nature of the Work to be undertaken, as to the means of access
and egress thereto and therefrom, as to the obstacles to be met with, as to the rights and
interests which may be interfered with during the construction of the Work, as to the
extent of the Work to be performed and any and all matters which are referred to in the
Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents, or which are necessary for the
full and proper understanding of the Work and the conditions under which it will be
performed. No allowances shall be made subsequently by the Employer or Engineer for
error or negligence in connection with this requirement.
.2
Before commencing any of the work, carefully examine the work of other Sections upon
which it may depend. Report in writing to the Engineer, defects which might affect new
work. Commencement of new work implies acceptance of all work by other Sections and
Other Contractors upon which the new work depends.
Dimensions
.1
Check all dimensions at the site before fabrication and installation commences and report
all discrepancies to the Engineer.
.2
Where dimensions are not available before fabrication commences, ensure that the
dimensions required are agreed upon between the parties concerned.
.3
Wall thicknesses shown on the Drawings are nominal only; ascertain the actual sizes at
the building.
.4
Verify dimensions of shop fabricated portions of the building on the site before shop
drawings and fabrications are commenced. The Employer will not accept claims for extra
expense by reason of non-compliance with this requirement.
Khatib and Alami
Section 01010/2
December 2010
1.6

Specifications
.5
In areas where equipment is to be installed, check dimensional data on equipment to

ensure that area and equipment dimensions are compatible with necessary access and
clearance provided. Ensure that equipment supplied is dimensionally suitable for space
provided.
.6
The Mechanical and Electrical Drawings are intended to show approximate locations of
mechanical and electrical apparatus, mechanical fixtures, mechanical equipment, piping
and duct runs, electrical fixtures, electrical outlets, electrical equipment, electrical units,
and conduit in diagrammatic form. In locations where spatial characteristics or job
conditions make it difficult to determine or comply with the intended location of these
items obtain direction from the Engineer. If relocation of such item(s) is necessary it
shall be done without change to the Contract Price.
.7
Leave areas clear where space is indicated to be reserved for future equipment, including
access to such future equipment.
.8
Leave adequate space and provision for servicing of equipment and removal and
reinstallation of replaceable items including, but not limited to such items as motors, coils
and tubes.
.9
Furr in exposed pipes and conduit located not more than 300 mm from the wall
(exception - storage rooms, janitor, service, mechanical and electrical, telephone, garage),
and/or ceiling surfaces, and finish similar to the respective wall and/or ceiling surfaces.
.10
Ensure that pipes, conduit, service lines and ducts are concealed in chases, behind furring
or above ceiling except where such items are noted as being exposed and except where no
ceiling is provided.
.11
Install equipment, materials and products to present a neat appearance. Run piping, ducts
and conduit parallel to or perpendicular to the building planes. Install piping, ducts, and
conduit as close to underside of structure as possible, unless shown otherwise.
.12
Install ceiling mounted components, including but not limited to air registers, sprinkler
heads and lighting fixtures, in accordance with final reflected ceiling plans.
Overloading
.1
Do not load the structure during construction with a load greater than it is calculated to
bear safely. Be solely responsible and liable for damages resulting from violation of this
requirement. Provide temporary bracing and supports equivalent in strength to the
permanent support. Do not place loads on concrete floors until they have obtained their
design strength.
.2
Do not cut, bore or sleeve load bearing members unless shown on structural Drawings or
otherwise accepted by the Engineer in writing.
Khatib and Alami
Section 01010/3
December 2010
1.7
1.8
1.9

Specifications
Relocation of Doors and/or Partitions

.1
The Employer and the Engineer reserve the right to relocate doors and frames and/or
partitions at any time prior to installation, without additional cost to the Employer,
assuming that there will be no increase in the number of doors and/or frames, nor greater
lengths or heights of partition incurred.
.2
Should there be an increase or decrease in doors, frames or lengths of partition after such
relocation, the Contract Price will be adjusted in accordance with the provisions for
changes in the Contract Documents.
Relocation of Mechanical/Electrical Items

.1
The Employer and the Engineer reserve the right to relocate electrical outlets at any time
prior to installation, without additional cost to the Employer, assuming that the relocation
per outlet does not exceed 3000 mm from the original location. No credits will be
anticipated where relocation per outlet of up to and including 3000 mm reduces materials,
products and labour.
.2
Should relocations per outlet exceed 3000 mm from the original location the Contract
Price will be adjusted in accordance with the provisions for changes in the Contract
Documents.
.3
Alter the location of pipes and other equipment, without additional cost to the Employer,
if approved, provided the change is made before installation.
Codes and Standards

.1
Consider contract forms, codes, specifications, standards, manuals, and installation and
application instructions referred to in these Specifications to be the latest published
editions at the date of submission of the bid unless otherwise stated in the applicable
building code, Specifications or otherwise required by the jurisdictional authorities.
.2
The purpose of referring to standards in the Specifications is to establish minimum

acceptable standards of materials, products and workmanship. Ensure that materials,
products and workmanship meet or exceed requirements of the reference standards
specified. Obtain from the manufacturer an independent test report stating that product
meets specified requirements.
.3
Where a material or product is specified in conjunction with a referenced standard, do not

supply the material or product if it does not meet the requirements of the standard.
Supply another specified material or product, or an acceptable material or product of
other accepted alternative which does meet the requirements of the standard, at no
additional cost to the Employer. Testing may be required by the Engineer to ensure that
the alternative material or equipment meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Khatib and Alami
Section 01010/4
December 2010
.4
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
.1
Where existing public service lines are indicated to be removed and/or relocated, perform
the work in compliance with the requirements of jurisdictional authorities.
.2
Repair public roads, walkways and curbs soiled or damaged due to construction to the
requirements of the local jurisdictional authorities.
Public Utilities
.1
Before commencement of the work, confirm that areas to be occupied by public utilities,
including but not necessarily limited to electric, water, telephone, meet the correct
requirements of the respective utility company.
.2
If the requirements of the utility companies are not met, notify the Engineer in writing.
Expansion and Contraction

.1
Ensure building movements induced by temperature changes are absorbed without

damage of any kind to building components and assemblies.
.2
Make provisions for expansion and contraction due to temperature changes within
components, products and assemblies, and between adjacent component products and
assemblies, and due to building movements including but not limited to creep, column
shortening, deflection, sway and twist. Ensure provisions for expansion, contraction, and
building movements prevent damages from occurring to and within components,
products, systems and assemblies.
Air and Fluid Movements

Make provisions in pipes, plenums, ducts and vessels containing air and fluids as is
necessary to prevent damages and generation of noise due to fluid and air induced
pressure, surges and vibrations, to pipes, plenums, ducts and vessels and to adjacent
components, assemblies and constructions to which pipes, ducts, plenums and vessels are
attached or pass through.
Building Voltages
.1
1.15
Where no standard is referred to, provide materials, products and workmanship which
meet requirements of the applicable standards of the Place of Work.
Existing Public Service Lines
.1
1.14

Specifications
Comply with available building voltages as indicated in Electrical Specifications and

Drawings.
Fossils
Deem fossils, coins, articles of value or antiquity and structure and other remains or items of
geological or archaeological interest discovered on or in the area of the site of the work to be
the absolute property of the Employer. Take reasonable precautions to prevent workmen or
Khatib and Alami
Section 01010/5
December 2010

Specifications
persons from removing or damaging such articles or items, and immediately upon discovery
thereof and before removal, inform the Engineer of such discovery and carry out at the expense
of the Employer, the Employer's instructions as to the specialized disposal of the same.
1.16
Documents on Site
Contractor shall keep on site an up-to-date copy of all standards quoted herein, all relevant
building codes and regulations and a complete set of Drawings and Specifications.
1.17
Powder Actuated Fasteners

Do not use powder actuated fastening systems on site unless prior approval of Engineer has
been obtained.
1.18
Fire Rating
Where a material, component or assembly is required to be fire rated, the fire rating shall be as
determined or listed by one of the testing authorities acceptable to the jurisdictional authorities,
or well known internationally and to acceptable by the Engineer.
1.19
Existing Public Service Lines

1
Where existing public service lines are indicated to be removed and/or relocated, perform
the work in compliance with the requirements of jurisdictional authorities.
Repair public roads, walkways and curbs soiled or damaged due to construction to the
requirements of the local jurisdictional authorities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Section 01010/6
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01012
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Conditions of
Particular Application and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.2
Project Description
The work involves the Construction, Completion, Maintenance and Handing over Saudi
Railway (SAR) Project Batch No. 3, Site GROUPING # 2 AL NARIYAH YARD
SEGMENT 7 All complete as specified, detailed on drawings, and to the approval of the
Engineer.
1.2.1.
Project Location: Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
1.2.2.
Work Covered by Contract Documents
1.3.1.
Contract Documents:
1- Drawings.
2- Specifications.
3- Conditions of Contract.
4- Tender Queries
5- Bills of Quantities
1.3.2.
Contract Work: Contract shall include but not limited to the following: Excavation where
required, Backfilling, Site Work, Concrete Work, Block Work, Waterproofing , Wood work,
Aluminium and Metal, all finishes, Mechanical systems, electrical systems and all related work
for proper operation.
1.4
Contract Method
Construct the work under a Remeasured Contract.
1.5
Contractor Use of Premises

.1
The Contractor shall coordinate the Work to accommodate the work with other
Contractors.
.2
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and
available to the Employer, the Employer's employees, and emergency vehicles at all
times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to
minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
Khatib and Alami
Summary of Work
Section 01012/1
December 2010

Specifications
1.6
Occupancy Requirements
1.6.1
Partial Employer Occupancy: The Employer reserves the right to occupy and to place and
install furniture in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion, provided
such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of furniture and
partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
The Engineer shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied prior to Employer occupancy.
Prior to partial Employer occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon
occupancy, the Employer will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of the building.
END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Summary of Work
Section 01012/2
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01025
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section Include
.1
Payments.
.2
Payments Withheld.
.3
Payments to Subcontractors.
Related Sections
.1
General Conditions.
.2
Special Conditions.
Payments
.1
Payments to the Contractor will be made in accordance with the General Conditions and
Special Conditions of the Contract.
.2
Prior to submittal of monthly applications for payment the Contractor shall request his
Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors to submit their applications for payment to the
Consulting Engineers of Record for evaluation and approval prior to being incorporated
into the Contractor's application.
Payment Withheld
.1
The Engineer may withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any application for payment
represented by the Contractor's estimate or any Certificate for Payment to such extent as
may be necessary to protect the Employer from loss because of:
.1
Defective work not remedied;
.2
Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims;
.3
Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for

material or labour;
.4
A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed, and all unpaid claims,
charges, liens and encumbrances satisfied, for the balance then unpaid;
Khatib and Alami

Section 01025/1
December 2010
.2
1.5

Specifications
.5
Damage to another Contractor;
.6
Erroneous estimates by the Contractor of the value of the Work performed;
.7
Unauthorized deviations by the Contractor from the Contract Documents;
.8
Unsatisfactory progress of the Project Work by the Contractor;
.9
Contractor not complying with instructions issued to him in accordance with the
terms of the Contract.
When the above grounds are removed, payments will be made for amounts withheld
because of them. No interest will be paid on payments withheld. The Engineer's
determination as to the issuance or withholding of, or the amount of payment reflected by
Certificates for Payments, shall be final and binding and shall subject the Engineer to no
liability whatsoever to the Employer, Contractor, Surety or any other person.
Payments to Subcontractors
.1
Subcontractors shall notify the Engineer in writing if the Contractor fails to make
payments when due to Subcontractors who have contracts with the Contractor. The
Engineer will consider payments have been made if no such written notice is received.
.2
Should the Engineer find that the Contractor is not paying Subcontractors then the
Engineer will require the Contractor to provide a legal declaration. With the legal
declaration the Contractor shall also provide the following information:
.1
The Contract date with the Employer.
.2
The name of the Contractor.
.3
The Project name and legal description.
.4
The name and address of the Subcontractor and/or Subcontractors.
.5
The date the Subcontractor was complete on the Project.
.6
The amount of money of the Contract with the Subcontractor(s).
.7
The amount of money of any approved extras to the Subcontract(s).
.8
The last day of work on the Project for the Subcontractor.
.9
A statement that the Work is complete.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01025/2
December 2010

Specifications
.10
The amount of money paid to date to the Subcontractor(s).
.11
The amount of money owing to the Subcontractor(s).
.12
The date the holdback money is due to be released to the Contractor and
Subcontractor (this date is as stipulated in the Contract).
.13
The name of the person swearing the declaration and the name of the jurisdictional
authority certifying the legal declaration.
.14
Person swearing the legal declaration must be an officer of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami

Section 01025/3
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01041
COORDINATION
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
Conditions of Particular Application and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to
work of this Section.
1.2
Summary
This section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for
coordinating construction operations on the Project to be collectively fulfilled by the prime
Contractor including, but not limited to, the following:
General project coordination procedures

Coordination drawings
Administrative and supervisory personnel
Cleaning and protection
Certain areas bf responsibility may be assigned to a specific contractor, and the Prime
Contractor shall be assigned responsibility for overall coordination.
1.3
Related Sections
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
Division 1 Section 01200"Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination

meetings, 'and preinstallation conferences.
Division 1 Section 01300 "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
Division 1 Section 01600" General Plant Materials and Equipment" for coordinating
general installation
Division 1 Section 01700"Contract Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout.
Khatib and Alami
Coordination
Section 01041/1
December 2010

Specifications
1.4
Coordination
1.4.1
Coordination: Contractor shall coordinate its construction activities included in various

sections of these specifications with those of other contractors and other entities involved
to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall
coordinate its operations with operations included under different Sections of the
Specifications that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
Contractor shall schedule its construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the
best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other
components, before or after its own installation.
Where availability of space is limited, Contractor shall coordinate installation of different
components with other contractors to assure maximum accessibility for required
maintenance, service, and repair.
Contractor shall make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later
installation.
Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining
special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,
reports, and attendance at meetings.
Prepare similar memoranda for the Engineer.
1.4.2
Administrative Procedures: Contractor shall coordinate scheduling and timing of its

required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other
contractors to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative
activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.4.3
Preparation of schedules
Installation and removal of temporary facilities
Delivery and processing of submittals
Progress meetings
Project closeout activities
Conservation: Contractor shall coordinate construction activities to assure that operations

are carried out with consideration of energy, water, and materials.
Khatib and Alami
Coordination
Section 01041/2
December 2010

Specifications
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is

needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare
coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization
of space for efficient installation of different components.
Show the relationship of components shown on separate shop drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals".
1.5.2
Preparation Responsibility: Preparation of coordination drawings is the responsibility of

the Contractor principally involved, where involvement by other contractors is minor.
Where the Drawings reflect substantial participation by more than one contractor, the
Contractor shall coordinate preparing of coordination drawings.
1.5.3
Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, each

contractor shall submit a list of its principal staff assignments, including the superintendent
and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties
and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers.
Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each
temporary telephone.
1.6
Administrative and Supervisory Personnel
1.6.1
General: in addition to its Project superintendent, Contractor shall provide other

administrative and supervisory personnel, as required for proper performance of the Work.
Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.
1.6.2
Project - Coordinator: The Contractor shall provide a full-time project coordinator,

experienced in administration and supervision of building construction, including
mechanical and electrical work. The Project Coordinator shall be authorized to act as the
coordinator of construction activities between the separate Contracts.
Khatib and Alami
Coordination
Section 01041/3
December 2010

Specifications
Construction activities requiring coordination by the Project Coordinator include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Scheduling and sequencing the Work

Sharing access to work spaces
Installations
Protection of each other's Work
Cutting and patching
Preparation of coordination drawings
Inspections and tests
Temporary services and facilities
PART 2
PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
General Coordination Provisions
3.1.1
Inspection of Coordination: The Prime Contractor shall require the installer of each major
component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which work is to be
performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an
acceptable manner.
3.1.2
Coordinate Temporary Enclosures: With required inspections and tests to minimize the
necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
3.2
Cleaning and Protection
3.2.1
Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place during handling
and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage
or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components
to assure operability without damaging effects.
Khatib and Alami
Coordination
Section 01041/4
December 2010
3.2.2

Specifications
Limiting Exposures: Contractor shall supervise the construction operations of other

Contractors, to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to
harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction
period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following:
Excessive static or dynamic loading

Excessive internal or external pressures
Excessively high or low temperatures
Thermal shock
Excessively high or low humidity
Air contamination or pollution
Water
Solvents
Chemicals
Light
Radiation
Puncture
Abrasion
Heavy traffic
Soiling, staining, and corrosion
Combustion
Electrical current
High-speed operation
Improper lubrication
Unusual wear or other misuse
Contact between incompatible materials
Destructive testing
Misalignment
Excessive weathering
Unprotected storage
Improper shipping or handling
Theft
END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Coordination
Section 01041/5
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
Related Documents
1.2
Summary
This section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching to install or attach
something to or in an existing surface, or to cut an existing surface to gain access to
concealed supports or other services.
1.3
Cutting, is the removal of existing construction to permit the installation or

performance of the Work.
Patching is the fitting and repair required to restore surfaces to original conditions
following the installation or performance of the Work.
Related Sections
Division I: Section 01041 "Coordination" for coordination cutting and patching with other
construction activities.
Requirements of this Section apply specially to mechanical and electrical installations.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance
of the time cutting and patching will be performed. Request approval to proceed. Include
the following information, as applicable, in the proposal:
Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed
and indicate why it cannot be avoided.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01045/1
December 2010

Specifications
Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include

changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the
building's appearance and other significant visual elements.
List products to be used.

Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit
details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original
structure.
Approval by the Engineer to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the
Engineer's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1.4.2
Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching shall disturb or affect. List utilities that
shall be relocated and those that shall be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long
services shall be disrupted.
1.5
Quality Assurance
1.5.1
Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner
that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the
following structural elements:
1.5.2
Foundation construction
Bearing and retaining walls
Structural concrete
Structural steel
Lintels
Structural decking
Stair systems
Miscellaneous structural materials
Equipment supports
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment
Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in
a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut
and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01045/2
December 2010
1.5.3

Specifications
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in
occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Engineers opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched
in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
Use materials identical to existing materials, for exposed surfaces, use materials that
visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials
are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or
surpass that of existing materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
Inspection
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is
to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take
corrective action before proceeding.
Before proceeding, meet parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical
and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict, resolve potential
conflicts before proceeding.
3.2
Preparation
Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be
removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3
Performance
Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01045/3
December 2010

Specifications
Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
3.3.1
Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction.
In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not
in use.
To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side
into concealed surfaces.
Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Comply with requirements of applicable Division - 2 Sections where cutting and patching
requires excavating and backfilling.
Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services,
such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting.
3.3.2
Patching: Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent
construction by selective demolition operations.
Patch to produce surfaces suitable to new materials.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
Completely fill holes and depression in existing concrete or masonry walls to remain with an
approved concrete or masonry patching material.
Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining construction in a manner that shall eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01045/4
December 2010

Specifications
Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and
repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform colour,
and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials,
if necessary, to achieve uniform colour and appearance.
Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of
uniform appearance.
3.3.3
Plaster Installation: Comply with specifications and install thickness and coats as
indicated.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide 3-coat work.
Finish plaster to match existing adjacent surfaces. Sand lightly to remove trowel marks and
arises.
Cut, patch, point-up, and repair plaster to accommodate other construction.
3.4
Cleaning
Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove
pint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar
features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering
to its original conditions.
END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami

Section 01045/5
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section Includes
.1
Field engineering survey services to measure and stake the site and building works.
.2
Survey services to establish and confirm invert measurements for the Work.
.3
Subsurface conditions.
.4
The related sections article contained herein is included for reference only. All items
contained therein are an assessment of the work, which should not be presumed to be
complete.
Related Sections
.1
Section 01300 - Submittals: Record Drawings.
.2
Section 01720 - Project Record Documents.
.3
Employer's identification of existing survey control points and property limits.
Qualifications of Surveyor
.1
1.4
Qualified land surveyor, registered to practice in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, acceptable to

Employer.
Survey Reference Points

.1
Existing base horizontal and vertical control points are designated on drawings.
.2
Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to starting site work. Preserve permanent
reference points during construction.
.3
Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Engineer.
.4
Report to Engineer when a reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation

because of necessary changes in grades or location.
.5
Require surveyor to replace control points in accordance with original survey control.
Khatib and Alami
Field Engineering
Section 01050/1
December 2010
1.5
1.6

Specifications
Survey Requirements
.1
Establish two (2) permanent bench marks on site in widely separate places, referenced to
established bench marks by survey control points. Record locations, with horizontal and
vertical data in Project Record Documents. As the work progresses, establish bench
marks at each floor.
.2
Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation.
.3
Verify grades, lines, levels and dimensions indicated and report any errors or
inconsistencies to the Engineer before commencing work. Confirm job dimensions at
once to allow prompt checking of shop and other Drawings. Be responsible for work
done prior to the receipt of the Engineer's decision regarding reported discrepancies.
.4
Stake for grading, fill and topsoil placement and landscaping features.
.5
Stake slopes and berms.
.6
Establish pipe invert elevations.
.7
Stake batter boards at corners for foundations.
.8
Establish foundation column locations and floor elevations.
.9
Locate and fix location of walls, partitions, shafts and all parts of construction, as work
proceeds, as a guide to the various Sections. Check the layout of other Sections.
Building Dimensions
.1
Ensure that necessary job dimensions are taken and Subcontractors are coordinated for
the proper execution of the Work. Assume complete responsibility for the accuracy and
completeness of such dimensions, and for coordination.
.2
Verify that work as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions and positions
indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out by
requirements of the Drawings, and ensure that work installed in error is rectified before
construction continues.
.3
Check and verify dimensions referring to work and interfacing of services. Verify
dimensions, when pertaining to the Work of other Subcontractors, with the Subcontractor
concerned. Ensure that various Subcontractors cooperate for the proper performance of
the Work.
.4
Do not scale directly from the Drawings. If there is ambiguity or lack of information,
immediately inform the Engineer. Any change resulting from the disregard of this clause
will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Khatib and Alami
Field Engineering
Section 01050/2
December 2010
.5
1.7
All details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform with work
installed shall be taken at the site.
Records
.1
1.8

Specifications
Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
Subsurface Conditions
.1
Promptly notify the Engineer in writing if subsurface conditions at the Place of the Work
differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or a reasonable
assumption of probable conditions based thereon.
.2
After prompt investigation, should Engineer determine that the conditions do differ
materially, instructions will be issued for changes in the Work as provided in the
Contract.

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Field Engineering
Section 01050/3
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01060
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
Section Includes
.1
Regulatory documents.
.2
Fire safety features.
Related Sections
.1
1.3
Section 01010 - General Instructions.
Regulatory Documents
.1
Conform to the local Building Code and requirements of the jurisdictional authorities,
hereinafter referred to as Codes.
.2
Engage a registered Professional Engineer, registered in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, to

design formwork and falsework for concrete.
.3
Requirements of jurisdictional authorities shall apply to Work in precedence to the

requirements of the Contract, except that more stringent requirements of the Contract
shall take precedence over requirements of jurisdictional authorities.
.4
Nothing contained in the Drawings or Specifications is to be so construed as to be in

conflict with any law, bylaw or regulation of the jurisdictional authorities. In case of
discrepancy between regulatory requirements and Contract Documents, regulatory
requirements take precedence over Contract Documents, except under no circumstances,
reduce the standards established by the Contract Documents.
.5
Contract forms, codes, specifications, standards, manuals, and installation, application

and maintenance instructions, referred to in these Specifications are to be of the latest
published editions at the date of signing the Contract.
.6
Provide copies of Standards referred to in the Specification for joint use of Contractor
and Engineer on site, when so requested by the Engineer.
.7
Unless otherwise indicated, obtain and pay for all permits, licences and certificates of
inspection required by the jurisdictional authorities.
Khatib and Alami
Section 01060/1
December 2010
1.4

Specifications
.8
Be responsible for making arrangement with and obtaining necessary permits from
jurisdictional authorities to ensure access to the site for construction equipment, and
performance of the Work. The Employer will not be responsible for obtaining
permissions for access or for any payments required by the jurisdictional authorities for
provision of access.
.9
Except where special permission is obtained, maintain clear access for roads and
sidewalks on public property.
Fire Safety Features

.1
The safety features called for in the Contract Documents are supplied and installed to
meet fire safety standards established by the jurisdictional authorities.
.2
Ensure that the work of Subcontractor is properly coordinated to achieve the intent of
these Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Section 01060/2
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
General provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Conditions of
Particular Application and other Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of
this section.
1.2
Description
Project meetings provide the Employer, Engineer and Contractor an opportunity to
communicate directly with each other and with other parties involved in the Project.
This Section covers the administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings,
including but not limited to
1.3
Preconstruction conference
Progress meetings
Coordination meetings
Related Sections
The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
Section 01014: Coordination
Section 01300: Submittals
1.4
Attendees
Unless other-wise specified or required by the Engineer, the meetings shall be attended
by the Employer, the Engineer and the Contractor and his Superintendent. Contractor of
special packages, subcontractors and suppliers may attend when involved in the matters
to be discussed or resolved, but only when requested by the Employer, Engineer or
Contractor.
All participants shall be authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Meetings
Section 01200/1
December 2010
1.5

Specifications
Meeting Records
The Engineer shall record minutes of each meeting and shall furnish copies to the
Employer and the Contractor within 7 working days thereafter. If either of the Employer
or Contractor does not submit written objection to the contents of such minutes within 7
days after presentation to them it shall be understood and agreed that the Employer and
the Contractor accept the minutes as a true record of the meeting.
1.6
Meeting Schedule
The Engineer is responsible for scheduling and conducting the meetings, insofar as
possible, the dates, times and locations for the various meetings shall be agreed upon
and recorded at the preconstruction conference. Then after, changes to the schedule shall
be by agreement between the Engineer and Contractor, with appropriate written notice
to all parties involved.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
Preconstruction Conference
A preconstruction conference and organizational meeting shall be held before starting
construction at the Project Site or another convenient location, date and time designated
by the Engineer, not later than 21 days after the Letter of Acceptance. In addition to the
attendees listed in Clause 1.3 the meeting may be attended by the representatives of
regulatory agencies having jurisdiction of the project if required, employers of affected
utilities and such other persons the Employer may designate.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
3.1.1
Execution and Submittal of Documents At the preconstruction conference: unless

otherwise specified or agreed by the Employer and Contractor, the Contract Agreement
shall be executed by the parties thereto and the Contractor shall present to the Employer
the Performance Security, certificates of insurance, construction schedule, submittals
schedule, schedule of values and all other preconstruction documents required of him by
the Contract Documents.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Meetings
Section 01200/2
December 2010
3.1.2

Specifications
Agenda: In general, items of significance that could affect progress shall be discussed.
The matters to be resolved and the instructions and information to be furnished to or
given by the Contractor - at the preconstruction conference include; but shall not be
limited to the following:
a. Project meeting schedule.

b. Contractor's Construction, schedule and submittals schedule as submitted by the
Contractor.
c. Communication procedures between the parties.
d. The names and titles of all persons authorized by the Contractor to represent and execute
documents for him, with samples of all authorized signatures.
e. The names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all those authorized by the Contractor to
act for him in emergencies.
f
Construction permit requirements, procedures and posting.
g. Public notice of starting work.

h. Procedures concerning the installation of Work on public property not owned by the
Employer.
i. Access and rights-of-way furnished by the Employer.
j. Forms and procedures for Contractor's submittals.
k. Change order forms and procedures.
a. Payment application forms and procedures and progress reports to accompany the
applications.
b. Contractor's safety and training program and designation of the Contractor's safety
officer and his qualifications
c. First aid and medical facilities to be furnished by the Contractor.
d. Contractor's provisions for barricades, traffic control, utilities, sanitary facilities
and other temporary facilities and controls.
e. Project signs for the Employer.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Meetings
Section 01200/3
December 2010

Specifications
f. The Engineer and his duties.

g. Contractor's surveyor and initiation of surveying and monitoring services.
h. Testing laboratory or agency and testing procedures.
i. Construction equipment and methods proposed by the Contractor.
j. Issuance of the order to commence.
k. Matters concerning salvage items.
l. Contractor's policy, rules restrictions and protection measures to provide protection
of the environment in the project site.
m. Other administrative and general matters as needed.
3.2
Preinstallation Conference
Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity
or work package that requires coordination with other construction works.
3.2.1
Attendees: The separate specialized contractor, installer, or fabricator involved in or

affected by the work or installation and its coordination or integration with other works,
materials and installations that have proceeded or shall follow, shall attend the meeting.
Review the progress of other construction activities and relations for the particular
activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference including the following:
3.3
Contract Documents
Possible Conflicts
Time Schedule
Compatibility of Materials
Space and Access Limitation
Safety
Progress Meetings
The meetings shall be field at the Project site on a monthly basis in accordance with the
agreed schedule. Coordinate dates of meeting with preparation of the payment request.
All matters bearing on the progress and performance of the Works since the preceding
last progress meeting shall be discussed and resolved including without limitation any
previously unresolved matters, deficiencies in the Works or the methods being employed
for the Works, and problems, difficulties or delays which may be encountered.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Meetings
Section 01200/4
December 2010

Specifications
Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Schedule is on time or

ahead or behind schedule.
Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that activities shall be
complete within Contract time.
Review the present and future needs of each entity present.
3.3.1
Schedule Updating: Revise the construction schedule after each progress meeting where
revisions to the schedule have been made. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with
the report of each meeting.
3.4
Special Meetings
Upon appropriate notice to the other parties, special meetings may be called by the
Employer, Engineer or Contractor. Special meetings will be held where and when
designated by the Employer for the following purposes unless the matters are resolved at
the preconstruction conference.
3.5
Separate Contracts
Within 15 days after award of a separate contract by the Employer, a meeting attended
by those specified hereinbefore in Clause 1.4 and the separate contractor shall be held to
discuss and resolve the portions of the project, time constraints and the procedures to
coordinate the operations of the Contractor and the separate contractor. If required by
the Employer, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit his construction schedule to
conform to the decisions agreed upon at this meeting.
3.5.1
Coordination Meeting: Conduct project coordination meeting at regular intervals.

Coordinate meetings are in addition to other purposes meetings such as progress
meetings.
Request representation of each party currently involved in coordination or planning the
construction activities involved.
3.6
Regulatory Agencies
When requested, the Contractor shall attend meetings held or required by the
governmental regulatory agencies or authorities having jurisdiction of the project.
Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others
affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Meetings
Section 01200/5
December 2010
3.7

Specifications
Post construction Conference

A post construction conference shall be held prior to final inspection of the Work to
discuss and resolve all unsettled matters. The Performance Security and insurance shall
remain in force and other documents required to be submitted by the Contractor will be
reviewed and deficiencies determined. Schedules and procedures for the final inspection
process and for the correction of defects and deficiencies shall be discussed and agreed.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Meetings
Section 01200/6
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Conditions
of Particular Application and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
section.
1.2
Description
1.2.1
This section covers general procedures and administrative requirements for handling
submittals specified, or required for the performance of the work.
Submittals comprise:
Submittals that require action by the Engineer as shop drawings etc.
Submittals that do not require action by the Engineer as: construction photograph,
operation and maintenance manuals, as installed drawings, etc.
Unless otherwise specified the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review
and approval the following: the Contractor's construction schedule, list of
subcontractors, all samples, materials lists, shop drawings, equipment data, test
procedures, installation instructions, test results and other submittals required by the
Contract Documents, or subsequently covered by modifications.
Submittals and their contents shall be properly prepared, identified and transmitted as
provided or as the Engineer may otherwise direct. Except for record documents,
installation instructions and manuals for operation and maintenance, submittals shall be
approved before the material or equipment covered by the submittal is delivered to the
Site.
1.2.2
Coordination Drawings: show the relationship and integration of different construction

elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the
space provided or function intended Preparation of coordination Drawing shall comply
with Section "Coordination".
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/1
December 2010
1.3

Specifications
Administrative
.1
Submit to the Engineer submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable
promptness and in orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in the Work. Failure
to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of
Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be
allowed.
.2
Work affected by the submittal shall not proceed until review is complete.
.3
Review submittals prior to submission to the Engineer. This review represents that
necessary requirements have been determined and verified and that each submittal
has been checked and coordinated with the requirements of the Work and the
Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to
the specific Project, and Specification Section where applicable, will be rejected
and returned without being examined.
.4
In making any submittal, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any changes
made from the Contract Documents. Contractor's responsibility for errors and
omissions in submission is not relieved by Engineer's review of submittals.
.5
Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of

Contract Documents is not relieved by Engineer's review.
1.4
Prior to Commencement of Work

.1
1.5
Submit the following documents to the Engineer within time stipulated within the
General Conditions, Special Conditions, or individual Specification Sections, or if
not stipulated, before issue of the first certificate of payment or as otherwise
arranged.
.1
Insurance policies.
.2
Shop drawing schedule and submittal schedule.
.3
Permits required for Work of Division 15 - Mechanical and Division 16 Electrical.
.4
Permits for temporary structures, hoists, access, etc.
.5
Estimate of monthly progress cash flow (Cash Flow Schedule).
.6
Construction Schedule.
.7
Procurement Schedule.
Submittal Schedule
.1
Within thirty (30) days after the start date specified in the Notice to Proceed or at
Award of Contract, submit a Schedule of Submittals required by the Contract
Documents. List items in chronological order, identifying proposed submission
date and proposed return date to Contractor.
.2
Allow at least thirty five (35) calendar days for review by the Engineer.
.3
Submit Schedule of Submittals in bar chart format, plotted with time scale in
calendar days. Show submittal dates, review time and second submission. Identify
latest fabrication date and delivery date of each key component.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/2
December 2010
1.6

Specifications
Deviations
At the time of the submission, the Contractor shall give notice in writing in the submittal
of any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
The deviations shall be clearly indicated or described including all other changes
required to correlate the work. If the Contractor fails to describe such deviations, he
shall not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the
Contract Documents, even though such Submittals may have been approved.
The Contractor shall give, before tendering, written notice of any materials or plant
believed inadequate or unsuitable, in violation of laws, ordinances, rules and any
necessary items or work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually
agreed that the Contractor has included the cost of all required items in his Tender and
that he shall be responsible for the approved satisfactory functioning of the entire system
without extra compensation.
1.7
Submittal Transmittal
Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Engineer using transmittal form. The
Engineer shall not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
Record on the form or separate sheet, the relevant information, the request for data and
the deviations from Contract Document requirements or contractor's certification that
information complies with Contract Document requirements.
Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the
construction activities. Transmit submittals sufficiently in advance to avoid construction
delay.
1.8
Mock-Ups
Are full size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing or operating.
(They are not samples).
1.9
Field Samples
Samples are full-sized physical examples to illustrate finish, materials, and coating.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/3
December 2010
PART 2
2.1

Specifications
PRODUCTS
Contractor's Construction Schedule
Within 30 days after the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for approval, a detailed fabrication and Contractors construction schedule
as per section 1310.
2.1
Schedule of Submittals
2.1.1
Within 10 days after the development and acceptance of the Contractor's construction
schedule, the Contractor shall in accordance with the above schedule Submit to the
Engineer for approval, in both media; hard copies and computer diskettes, a detailed
submittals schedule listing in chronological order all items that will be furnished for
review and approval. The schedule shall include, but shall not be limited to, shop drawings
and related data; standard specifications, layout drawings, materials, equipment and
fixture lists, certificates of compliance, spare parts data, samples, operation and
maintenance manuals, "As-Installed" drawings; test procedures and test results.
The schedule shall indicate the type of item, Contract requirement reference, the
Contractor's schedule dates for submitting the above items and projected needs for
approval answers and procurement dates. In preparing the schedule, adequate time (15
days exclusive of time in the mails) shall be allowed for the Engineer to review and
approve the submittals and re-submittals or if an intermediate submittal is necessary, the
schedule shall allow 15 days (exclusive time in the mail) for reprocessing each submittal
as specified in Part 3.
2.1.2
Schedule updating: The Contractor shall review and/or update the schedule after any
meeting or activity where revision has been made as required and submit such revised
schedules to the Engineer for monitoring. No extension of Contract time shall be
authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Engineer 'sufficiently in
advance of the work to permit processing.
2.2
Progress Reports
During the performance of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, in
both media; hard copies and computer diskettes, a weekly and monthly progress reports
on or before the fifth day of every month covering the activities of the previous month.
Such progress reports shall include the following:
A copy of the construction schedule outlining progress to date for the various
major items of the works.
List of subcontractors at the site.
Approximate count of personnel at the site.
Accidents, and unusual events.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Change orders received, implemented.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/4
December 2010
2.3

Specifications
A narrative summation indicating the status of the Work performed and other
pertinent activities including the actual percentage of work completed and an
estimate of the percentage of work completion in the succeeding week or month. If
the work has fallen behind the schedule the Contractor shall state how the time is
to be made up to remain on schedule.
Materials Lists of Plant and Equipment Specifications

Prior to ordering and fabrication of materials and equipment, the Contractor shall submit
for Engineer's approval, in both media; hard copies and computer diskettes, information
and data completely describing all materials and equipment to be supplied as part of the
works. Two sets of lists of materials, plant and equipment data shall be submitted as soon
as possible. One copy will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required
corrections or approval. When applicable, the approved data shall be incorporated into,
and submitted as a part of the materials, plant and equipment manuals. Approval of
materials lists and equipment data will be tentative subject to submittal, plant and approval
of shop drawings.
2.3.1
Materials Lists: Submittal copies shall be indexed and neatly bound with sturdy labelled
covers complying with the requirements for manuals. Loose submittals will be returned
un-reviewed. For each item listed, the Contractor shall include the manufacturer's name
and address, trade or brand name, local supplier's name and address, catalog numbers,
brochures, terms and conditions of manufacturer's guarantee and warranty, other
information to fully describe the item and to demonstrate conformance to the specific
requirements and supplementary information as may be required for approval. Brochures
and data shall be marked to indicate the items proposed and the intended use.
Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been required or
made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
2.3.2
Plant Equipment Data: Copies of submittal shall be bound, indexed and contain
information as required for submittal of equipment lists and shall further include specific
information on performance and operating curves and data, ratings, capacities,
characteristics, efficiencies and other data to fully illustrate and describe the items as may
be specified or required for approval.
Data shall be submitted in sets covering complete systems or functioning units.
2.4
Standard Specifications
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three copies of referenced or alternative
applicable standard publications, standard specifications, regulations and codes of practice
for review and/or approval of applicability and compliance with materials, plant and
equipment delivered. One approved copy shall be returned to the Contractor to keep
permanently on Site.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/5
December 2010

Specifications
2.5
Shop Drawings
2.5.1
General: After receiving tentative approval of lists of materials and equipment data, the
Contractor shall submit shop drawings drawn accurately to scale and related data covering
all materials, plant, equipment and accessories to be provided. Shop drawings include
fabrication and installation drawings. Information prepared without specific reference to
the project are not acceptable shop drawings. Each shop drawings submittal shall be
complete and shall be accompanied by technical and performance data as necessary to
fully Illustrate the information in the shop drawings or cross referenced to such data
contained in the materials lists, plant and equipment data submittals.
Highlight, encircle or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents
standard. Unless otherwise specified, six blue-print copies of each shop drawing shall be
submitted. Two copies will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required
corrections or approval.
Shop drawings not stamped, project identified, Specification Section identified (where
applicable), or signed and dated will be rejected and returned without being examined.
Submit shop drawings to the Engineer for his review with reasonable promptness and in
orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the Work of other contractors.
Contractor shall be responsible for delays and costs, and shall make up lost time due to not
making submittals.
At the time of submission the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any
deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Catalogue cuts showing all aspects, design, sizes, components and rough-in information
for equipment may be submitted as shop drawings. four(4) copies of each catalogue cut
are required.
Make changes in shop drawings as the Engineer may require, consistent with Contract
Documents. When resubmitting, notify the Engineer in writing of any revisions other than
those requested.
The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site,
for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of
construction and installation, for coordination of the work of subtrades, and for
coordination of the Work of this Contract with the work of Other Contractors.
Submit sleeving shop drawings for review.
Where shop drawings involve the structural, mechanical, electrical and vertical
transportation Engineers, submit per each submission, five (5) white prints. Provide
additional copies when required by the Engineer.
2.5.2
Title Block and Identification: On each submittal or, drawing, place a permanent label or
title block for identification and provide a 40 by 80 mm space for the Engineer's review
stamp and a title block showing:
a.
Name and address of the Employer, name and address of the Engineer.
b.
Name and address of the Contractor, name and address of the project.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/6
December 2010

Specifications
c.
Name and address of subcontractor, manufacturer or supplier as applicable.
d.
Date, scale, identification number of appropriate specification section or drawing

number and revision number.
e.
Contractor's review and approval stamp.
f.
Notation of coordination requirement.
g.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2.5.3
Preparation and Size: Details, fabrication and installation information setting, diagrams
templates and similar drawings shall be clearly drawn, to accurate scale, dimensioned,
noted and cross referenced. Unless otherwise approved, prepare shop drawings of the
same size as the Contract Drawings or on 210 mm. by 297 mm sheets as applicable.
2.5.4
Information Required: Shop drawings with cross-reference to applicable portions of the

Contract Document requirements and such other information as may be specified or
required for approval, shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
a. Plant, equipment and material drawings showing all major dimensions, fabrication
methods and materials.
b. Related work with cross-references to applicable portions of the Contract
Documents.
c. Physical configurations with critical dimensions for clearance, access and servicing.
d. Description of materials including thickness, weights, strengths, etc.
e. Structural construction and assemblies, welds shown by international standards,
symbols and each fastener and connector shown by type and class.
f. Grouting work, including grouting space and material.
g. Concrete foundations and bases for machinery and equipment including joints, joint
filler and reinforcing.
h. Anchor bolt details showing type and class, sizes, embedments, projections and
locations measured with respect to permanent structural features, anchor bolt
location templates of non-shrinking paper or plastic shall be provided.
i.
Protective coatings and factory finishes fully described as to materials, number of

coats, colours, plated and metallic coating finishes, treatments and similar
information all based on specified requirements. The term "as specified" is not
acceptable for this purpose.
j. Auxiliary parts of materials, plant and equipment including pet-cocks, gauges,

gaskets, drillings, etc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/7
December 2010

Specifications
k. Dimensional drawings of the parts and final assembly for equipment to be

erected.
site
l. Piping systems including layout, fittings, valves, hangers, sleeves, identifications and
other appurtenances.
m. Electrical conduit, cable tray and duct systems including layout, fittings, hanger,
sleeves and other appurtenances.
n. Fully detailed wiring drawings showing all wires and conduits and indicating the
fittings socket outlets, switches etc.. All general wiring drawings shall be drawn to
1/50 scale.
o. Name-plate titles for plant and equipment.
Fixtures and other components should be approved by the Engineer before
implementing their data in the coordination drawings.
Do not use shop-drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken.
2.6
Product Data
.1
.2
Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings:

.1
Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to the

project.
.2
Supplement standard information to provide additional information

applicable to the project.
Manufacturer's catalogue sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance

charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data.
.1
Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models.
.2
Show dimensions and clearances required.
.3
Show performance characteristics and capabilities.
.4
Show wiring diagrams and controls.
.5
Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.
.6
Cross-reference product data information to applicable portions of Contract

Documents.
.7
Submit four (4) copies of product data sheets or brochures for requirements
requested in specification Sections and as the Engineer may reasonably
request where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized
manufacture of product.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/8
December 2010
2.7

Specifications
Layout Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit layout drawings as required by the technical
provisions and additionally for areas where equipment proposed for use could present
interface or space difficulties. Submittal of layout drawings shall conform to the
requirements specified for shop drawings. Submittals describing the various equipment
items which are to be installed in the areas represented in the layout drawings shall be
assembled and submitted concurrently and accompanied by the layout drawings. Layout
drawings shall be consolidated for all trades, shall be to scale and shall show all pertinent
structural and fenestration features and other items required for installation and which
affect the available space. All equipment and accessories shall be shown to scale in plan
and also in elevation and/or section in their installed positions. Exposed conduits, trays,
piping, ducts and trenches shall be shown.
2.8
Certificates of Compliance
Certificates required for demonstrating proof and compliance of materials and plant and
equipment with referenced standard specifications and Contract requirements, including
mill certificates, shall be provided. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to review all
certificates before submissions are made to ensure compliance with the Contract
requirements. Each certificate shall be signed by an authorized official to certify on behalf
of the manufacturing company and shall contain the name and address of the Contractor,
the project name and location and the quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to
which the certificates apply. Copies of laboratory test reports submitted with certificates
shall contain the name and address of the testing laboratory and the date or dates of the
tests to which the report applies. Certification shall not be construed as relieving the
Contractor from furnishing satisfactory material, if the material, plant or equipment is later
found not meeting the specific requirements of the Contract.
2.9
Spare Parts Data and Product Data

Collect product data into a single submittal for each element of construction. Product
includes printed information, such as installation instruction, catalog, standard colour
chart, diagrams, templates, wiring diagram, and performance curves.
The Contractor shall furnish spare parts data for each different item of plant and
equipment furnished. The data shall include printed information such as manufacturer's
installation instructions, a complete list of part and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or specified hereinafter to
be furnished as part of the Contract; and a list of additional items recommended by the
manufacturer to assure efficient operation for a period of 3 years or as otherwise stated in
the individual specification sections, at the - particular installation. The foregoing shall not
relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities under the guarantee required by the Contract.
The Contractor, in collaboration with each of the manufacturers of equipment and systems
shall include in his Tender their recommended List of spare parts for the required Defects
Liability Period or Guarantee (1 years if not otherwise stated).
Lists shall be detailed and accompanied by catalogs and are arranged for different
functions i.e. for consumable parts, preventive maintenance, minor repair, major repair,
etc. Spare part lists shall be priced in details.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/9
December 2010
2.10

Specifications
Samples
a. After the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for approval, a full size,
fully fabricated, cured and finished samples required by the specifications and
physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial
sections of manufactured or fabricated components, colour range sets and swatches
showing colour, texture and pattern. Materials, plant or equipment for which samples
are required shall not be used in the Works until approved in writing.
b. Each sample shall have a label indicating:
Project title, Project No.

Name of Contractor and, if appropriate, name of Sub-Contractor
Identification of material, or equipment with specification requirements
Place of origin
Generic description of the sample
Name of producer and brand (if any)
Availability and delivery time.
Specification section
Samples of finish materials shall have additional markings that will identify them in
regard to installed location.
c. Submit for review samples in triplicate for all specified materials and products etc.., in
sufficient time to permit the review and approval process before the item is needed to
be installed or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Label samples as to origin and
intended use in the Work.
d. Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of submission of deviations in samples from
requirements of Contract Documents.
e. Samples shall represent proposed examples of materials, equipment, quality, finishes,
and workmanship.
f. Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.
g. Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material
against which installed work will be verified.
h. Adjustments made on samples by the Engineer are not intended to change the Contract
Price. If adjustments affect the value of Work, state such in writing to the Engineer
prior to the proceeding with the Work.
i. Make changes in samples which the Engineer may require, consistent with Contract
Documents.
j. Samples which are "rejected" or designated as "resubmit" shall be removed by the
Contractor and/or Subcontractor.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/10
December 2010

Specifications
k. Where samples are rejected by the Engineer, submit new samples as soon as possible
after notification of the rejection and mark "Second Submission" in addition to the
other information required on the label.
l. The review by the Engineer is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with
the general design concept. Such review does not mean that the Engineer approves the
detail design inherent in the samples, responsibility for which remains with the
Contractor submitting same and such review and approval does not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions or of his responsibility for
meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents.
m. The cost of all samples to be paid by the Contractor including all carrying charges,
which shall be prepaid.
.n. Provide a secured sample storage and display room and store duplicates of all
submitted samples at the site.
2.11
2.12
Access Panels and Access Doors

.1
Before commencing installation of Mechanical and Electrical Work, prepare,

together with the Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors and other
Subcontractors requiring access panels, on a set of Drawings provided for that
purpose, a complete lay-out of access panels and access doors which will be
required. Submit these lay-outs for review as specified for shop drawings, and
show the exact sizes and locations of access panels and doors. Revisions may be
required to the lay-out before final review.
.2
Finish access panels and doors to match adjacent wall and/or ceiling finish unless
otherwise specified or indicated.
Structural Alignment Reports

.1
Have a qualified surveyor survey (check) the alignment of the perimeter slab edge,
flatness and levelness of slab surface, and the alignment of tower concrete cores as
work progresses.
.2
Check alignment at each floor and submit a written report, under the signature of
the surveyor and the Contractor, stating conditions at that floor, prior to concrete
pour of next floor.
.3
State in the reports the variations from plumb, from horizontal alignment, slab
flatness and levelness, and from elevations (level) shown in the Contract
Documents. Report on variations affecting structural steel connections and curtain
wall connections.
.4
Include a listing of data submitted in previous reports.
.5
Make particular mention in each report to the alignment and dimensions of the
elevator hoistways, and to the exterior faces of core wall construction which will
provide the substrate for applied finishes in public and tenant areas.
.6
Correct deviations from allowable tolerances as directed by the Engineer.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/11
December 2010
.7
2.13

Specifications
Submit reports to the Engineer and to the Subcontractor's affected by the concrete
work, including but not limited to, Structural Steel Subcontractor, Curtain Wall
Subcontractor, Elevator Subcontractor, Stone Subcontractor, Plastering and/or
Gypsum Board Subcontractor.
Interference Drawings
.1
The Contractor will provide to all relevant subtrades a CADD Drawing of all plans
to be used in the preparation of Interference Drawings. Interference Drawings are
to be prepared and the Contractor will submit, to the Engineer, one reproducible
copy for review.
.2
Interference Drawings are intended as a means for the Contractor and trades to
coordinate the requirements of the project. The purpose of the drawings is to
demonstrate that all components can be properly accommodated within the spaces
provided.
.3
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating all trades, construction
sequences and schedules, and the location and interface of all work.
.4
The Contractor shall supervise the production of computer generated Interference

Drawings in order to show comprehensive and complete coordination and
integration of the work.
.5
The Contractor shall supply Base Drawings of all plans, and shall distribute to all
subtrades having input on equipment and project requirement coordination. These
subtrades shall include, but not be limited to, mechanical, electrical, formwork,
steel, plumbing, fire protection, vertical transportation and others.
.6
The subtrades shall neatly and accurately input on the CADD drawings, the actual
size and location of all applicable equipment and work for which he is responsible.
The Subcontractor shall identify potential conflicts and suggest alternate solutions,
and shall return the Drawings to the Contractor for his use, in sufficient time to
maintain the project schedule.
.7
Single line designations are acceptable only for piping less than 50 mm in
diameter.
.8
The Contractor shall carefully review and coordinate the subtrade drawing
information, and shall resolve all issues of conflict, incorporating the final and
resolved approach in the Interference Drawings. Ensure that clearances required
by local jurisdictional authorities and clearances for proper maintenance are
indicated on the drawings. These Interference Drawings are to be submitted to the
Engineer for review in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
.9
The final Interference Drawings shall be stamped and signed by the Contractor,
and shall be plotted at 1:50 scale, except in congested areas which shall be plotted
at a sufficient scale to demonstrate full coordination.
.10
The submittal of Interference Drawings shall occur prior to commencement of field

work, and shall be done in accordance with this Section.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/12
December 2010
2.14
2.15

Specifications
Slab Layout Shop Drawings

.1
In addition to the Interference Drawings, the Contractor shall prepare computer

generated slab layout shop drawings showing comprehensive coordination and
integration of all work which establishes slab edges, openings within the concrete,
and location of items to be cast into the slab.
.2
Slab layout shop drawings shall show size and location of sleeves to be cast into
the concrete, and cores to be made through the structure.
.3
The Contractor shall coordinate the input of all subtrades, the dimensional
requirements shown on the drawings, and the project requirements specified
herein, in order to produce these drawings.
.4
It is not intended that the Contractor simply reissue drawings with dimensions as
shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall fully coordinate project
requirements and shall prepare 1:50 plots which fully dimension each concrete slab
edge, opening and insert locations.
.5
These slab edge shop drawings shall be stamped and signed by the Contractor, and
submitted in accordance with the requirements of this Section. They shall be
submitted a minimum of five(5) weeks prior to the placement of concrete.
Commissioning Plan
.1
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer ten (10) months before the Project
completion, a Commissioning Plan, outlining the organization, scheduling,
resources and work plan for commissioning of the project.
.2
This plan shall identify for all building systems:

.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.16
Manufacturer's start up date;

Contractor's testing, adjusting and balancing activities;
Equipment and system demonstration schedule and schedule for training
Owner's staff;
Allowance for punch list;
Schedule for correction of deficiencies.
Progress Photographs
.1
On commencement of Work and at monthly intervals thereafter, supply the

Engineer with three (3) copies of ten (10) different view photographs to indicate
progress of the Work. Photographs are to be taken by a professional photographer,
accepted by Engineer. Take photographs from locations approved by the Engineer.
.2
Include for the total number of photographs stated herein, but the Engineer shall
have the right to request that fewer photographs be taken at certain intervals, so
that more photographs may be taken at other times, providing that the total number
of photographs taken remains the same.
.3
On completion of the work, or at time designated by the Engineer provide two (2)
copies of each twelve (12) colour photographs of various interior and exterior
views selected by the Engineer.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/13
December 2010
2.17

Specifications
.4
Photographs are to be 200 x 250 mm in size, coloured, matte finish, backed with
linen and provide with a margin on each side. Provide a white patch with the name
of the Project and the date and location of the exposure, at the lower right hand
corner of each photograph. Each photograph to be placed in a clear matte plastic
protection sleeve, three hole punched.
.5
Submit progress photographs with monthly progress report and application for
payment.
Materials, Plant and Equipment Manuals

The Contractor shall obtain data from the various manufacturers and submit manuals
covering all materials, plant and equipment approved for supplying.
2.17.1 Contents: Each manual shall have an index listing the contents. Information in the
manuals shall include not less than:
a. General, introduction and overall material, plant and equipment description, purpose,
functions and simplified theory of operation as applicable.
b. Specifications.
c. Installation instructions, procedures, sequences and precautions, including tolerances
for levelling and horizontal and vertical alignment.
d. List showing lubricants and other consumables for each item of plant or equipment,
approximate quantities needed per year, and recommended service intervals; where
possible, types of consumables shall be consolidated with plant or equipment
manufacturer's approval to minimize the number of different consumables required.
e. Operational procedures.
f. Maintenance, calibration, test and repair instructions.
g. Part lists and spare parts recommendations.
h. Lists of all special tools, instruments, accessories and special lifting and handling
devices required for periodic maintenance, repair, adjustment and calibration,
i. Other information as may be specified or required for approval.
2.17.2 Format and Organization
a. Use drawings and pictorials to illustrate the printed text as necessary to fully present
the information.
b. Where information covers a family of similar items of plant or equipment, identify
the applicable portions by heavy weighted arrows, boxes or circles, or strike-out the
inapplicable information. Manuals containing nonconforming data are not acceptable
and will be returned for rework and submittal.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/14
December 2010

Specifications
c. Contractor shall incorporate into books all manufacturer's plant and equipment
manuals including those specified in pertinence to sections of the Specifications.
d. Within each book of manuals, provide a "Table of Contents" for that book.
2.17.3 Manual Binding
a. All books shall be bound in sturdy hard covers fastened to provide full view of
contents on each page and ease of making content additions or replacements.
Manuals less than 25 mm thick shall be bound in substantial two-ring loose leaf
binders; others shall have covers secured by operable locking bars to permit full
view opening with contents bound by hinged interfacing pairs of two-ring binding
posts.
b. Each book shall be permanently labelled on its face of cover and spine edge as the
case may be, and shall name the specific materials, plant and/or equipment
contained.
2.17.4 Submission of Manuals: Submittals shall include two copies of each manual, one of which
shall be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required corrections or approval.
When approved, the Contractor shall deliver six copies to the Employer.
2.18
Post-Installation Test Procedures

Testing procedures to be performed at the Site after installations shall be submitted for
each item of material, plant and equipment or for any system as required by the Contract
Documents. The testing procedure shall describe the item or items involved and shall be
in sufficient detail to prove the reliability and functional operation of the item. In
addition to the information specified above, each acceptance testing procedure shall
include, but shall not be limited to, the following data:
a. Description of the testing facilities, set-ups and requirements, including drawings
and sketches as required to fully illustrate the facilities.
b. List of required test materials and their estimated quantities to be furnished by the
Contractor.
c. List of instruments, measuring and recording devices and other test equipment,
whether a part of the plant or to be furnished separately for testing by the Contractor.
d. Complete listing of all functional parameters and tests to be performed and recorded.
e. Recording intervals.
f. Samples of forms, charts and other materials to be used in recording the approved
acceptance testing results and which shall be furnished by the Contractor.
g. Dates, the Engineer should be present for field test witnessing.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/15
December 2010
2.19

Specifications
Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Record (As-Installed) Drawings

Other than material, plant and equipment manuals, systems operation and maintenance
manuals are required. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer, as a pre-requisite to
practical completion of the Works, comprehensive record documents finished in detail
and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor is advised that great importance shall be
placed upon the quality, accuracy, clarity and completeness of the record documents and
upon their being made available promptly.
The Contractor shall demonstrate from time to time, as required by the Engineer
throughout the execution of the Works, that adequate and accurate records are being
kept such as will ensure the ultimate completeness and accuracy of the record
documents and that the record documents are themselves being progressively compiled
as the work on Site proceeds.
Record documents shall comprise all as described in this specification, the following.
a.
b.
Record (As-Installed) drawings and schedules

Operation and maintenance manuals
All record documents shall be provided in four sets, three sets for the Employer and one
set for the Engineer's retention. In the case of drawings and diagrams (other than
manufacturer's drawings) the four sets shall be two blue prints and two on sepia
polyester. One of the sepia polyester sets shall be the Engineer's copy. Manufacturer's
drawings shall also be on sepia polyester.
The record documents shall be adequate for the following purposes:
a. To record clearly the arrangements of the various sections of the Works as actually
installed and to identify and locate all component parts thereof
b. To make it possible to comprehend the extent and purpose of the Works and the
method of operation thereof
c. To set out clearly the extent of which maintenance and servicing is required and
how, in detail, it should be executed.
d. To provide sufficient and readily accessible information properly to facilitate the
ordering of spares and replacements.
The record documents shall be correlated so that the terminology and the numerical
and/or other references used therein are consistent with and similar to those used in the
physical identification of component parts of the Works.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/16
December 2010

Specifications
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided by the Contractor and shall
comprise the following, as applicable (all contained in volumes strongly bound in
flexible covers and suitable for heavy usage over a long period) written to be read in
conjunction with the record drawings:
a. A general description of the scope, purpose and manner of working of each system,
plant or apparatus forming part of the Works.
b. A detailed description of the scope, purpose and manner of working of each system
of automatic controls and/or monitoring instruments, switchgear.
c. Data on general electrical installation design parameters and associated normal
operating sequences.
d. Clear and comprehensive instructions for the starting up, running and shut-down of
each system, plant or apparatus.
e. Clear and comprehensive instructions for dealing with emergency conditions for
each system, plant or apparatus.
f. Necessary instructions in respect of any precautionary measure from time to time.
g. Instructions in respect of the care of all plants and apparatus especially those
normally subject to seasonal disuse.
h. Instructions as to the nature, extent and frequency of servicing necessary to properly
maintain the Works in good condition and as to the materials to be used for the
purpose. This information may be supported in detail, but not replaced by the
suppliers of particular component apparatus.
i. Names and addresses of the suppliers of all major components of the Works as may
potentially be required to obtain spare parts or replacements.
j. Test results.
Copies of manufacturers' data as has been specified under Article 2.9, materials, and
equipment manuals, shall be cross-referenced to the operating and maintenance manuals.
Draft copies of all record drawings and manuals shall be made available in advance of
the Completion Date in order that the Engineer has the opportunity to comment and the
corrections/amendments recorded, thereby allowing sufficient time for the approval
documents to be available at the time of the signing of the Certificate of Completion.
The Completion Date shall be delayed accordingly otherwise.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/17
December 2010
2.20

Specifications
Staff Training
The Contractor, in collaboration with the sub-contactors and manufacturers of the
equipment shall for the future operation and maintenance of the plants and equipment
give to the Employees staff necessary and sufficient training in the operation and
maintenance of the equipment in the facilities at their main locations, necessary to insure
their smooth operation and maintenance after completion and during the Defect Liability
Period.
Training shall cover the necessary programs directly related to the specifics of the
project.
Training programs shall use learning aids and documents and shall be performed by
specialized personnel.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/18
December 2010
PART 3
3.1

Specifications
EXECUTION
General
Procedures relative to specific submittals are specified with the respective submittal in
Part 2 of this section.
3.2
Timeliness of Submittals
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the schedule required in Part 2 of this
section which shall not cause delay in the Works or the works of any other contractor
provided that the approval duration of the Engineer, exclusive of time in the mails, shall
be 14 days for each submittal or re-submittal, independently. Transmit each submittal
sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals and related activities that require sequential activities.
Early approval of submittals is essential especially for products that require purchase, or
specially designed equipment or products to secure timely delivery and installation. No
extension of the Contract time will be authorized for failure to transmit submittals to the
Engineer sufficiently in advance of the work to permit processing.
3.3
Method of Submittal
The Contractor shall deliver submittals by means of dated, signed and sequence
numbered transmittals on the Contractor's letterhead, identifying as to initial or resubmittal status, and fully describing the submittal contents. Submittals are not
acceptable directly from subcontractors, suppliers or manufacturers. In each transmittal
the Contractor shall state the Drawings numbers and Specification Sections, articles, and
paragraphs to which the submittal pertains, accompanying data sheets, catalogs and
brochures shall be identified in the same manner and where several types or models are
contained, the Contractor shall delete non-applicable portions or specifically indicate
which portions are intended and applicable.
3.4
Contractor's Review and Approval

Every submittal of shop drawings, samples, materials lists, plant or equipment data,
instruction manuals and other submittals, from manufacturers and suppliers, upon which
the proper execution of the Works is dependent, shall bear the Contractor's review and
approval stamp certifying that the Contractor:
a. has reviewed, checked and approved the submittal and has coordinated the contents
with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents, including related
work,
b. has determined and verified ill quantities, field measurements, field construction
criteria, materials. plant and equipment, catalog numbers, and similar data, or will do
so, and
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/19
December 2010

Specifications
c. states the work covered by the submittal is recommended by the Contractor and the
Contractor's guarantee will fully apply thereto, this guarantee applies only to
Contractor's Subcontractors and their work. The Contractor's stamp shall be dated
and signed by the Contractor in every case.
3.5
Corrections and Re-submittals

The Contractor shall make all required corrections and shall resubmit the required
number of corrected submittals until approved. The Contractor shall direct specific
attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for on previous
submittals. Identify each re-submittal with number of the original submittal followed by
consecutive letters starting with "A" for first -, "B" for second re-submittal, etc.
3.6
Check of Returned Submittals

The Contractor shall check submittals returned to him for correction and ascertain if the
corrections result in legitimate extra cost to him above that correctly included under the
Contract Documents, and shall give written notice to the Engineer within five days if, in
his opinion, such extra cost results from corrections. By failing to so notify the Engineer
or by starting any work covered by a submittal prior to receiving approval with
corrections, the Contractor waives all claims for extra costs resulting from required
corrections.
3.7
Review and Approval

Submittals shall be reviewed with reasonable promptness, but only for conformance
with the design concept of the project and with the information given in the Contract
Documents. The approval of a separate item as such shall not indicate approval or
prevent disapproval of the assembly in which the item functions. The approval of
submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents or for any revision in re-submittals unless the
Contractor has given notice in writing of the deviation or revision at the time of
submission or resubmission and written approval has been given to the specific
deviation or revision, nor shall any approval relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
errors or omissions in the submittals or for the accuracy of dimensions and quantities,
the adequacy of connections and the proper and acceptable fitting, execution and
completion of the Works,
3.8
Incomplete Submittals
Incomplete submittals including those not correctly transmitted, not correctly titled and
identified or not bearing the Contractor's review and approval stamp, will be returned to
the Contractor without review.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/20
December 2010
3.9

Specifications
Action Stamp
The Engineer shall stamp each submittal with a uniform appropriate action stamp to
indicate the action taken as follows:
3.10
"Approved" the work covered by the submittal may proceed.

"Approved as Noted" the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it
complies with the notations and corrections on the submittals.
"Approval in principal" the work covered by the submittal may proceed.
"Not Approved Revise and Resubmit" do not use or proceed with work at project
Site or elsewhere, revise and prepare a new submittal.
The Engineer will also return unsolicited submittals to the sender without action.
Conformance
No work represented by required submittal shall be purchased or commenced until the
applicable submittal has been approved. Work shall conform to the approved submittals
and all other requirements of the Contract Documents unless subsequently revised by an
appropriate modification, in which case the Contractor shall prepare and submit revised
submittals as may be required. The Contractor shall not proceed with any related work
which may be affected by the work covered under submittals until the applicable
submittals have been approved, particularly where piping, conduits, trays, ducting,
machinery, and equipment and the required arrangements and clearance are involved.
3.11
Interrelated Submittals
Except where the preparation of a submittal is dependent upon the approval of a prior
submittal, all submittals pertaining to the same class or portion of the Works shall be
submitted simultaneously.
3.12
Revision of Submittals
Whenever a modification causes a change to the information contained in previously
approved submittals, the Contractor shall submit information and data corresponding to
the changed requirements for approval. After completion of operational tests, the
Contractor shall submit revised or additional information and data for the instruction
manuals and equipment data as the Employer may require. Revision submittals shall be
submitted following the procedure required for previously approved submittals.
3.13
Contractor's Failure to Provide-Shop Drawings

Should the Contractor prove unable to produce satisfactory shop drawings or be unable
to produce drawings to conform to the progress of the work, the Engineer reserves the
right to take whatever steps are necessary to have drawings undertaken by others and
debit the Contractor's account.
Any decision taken by the Engineer to have drawings produced elsewhere will not
relieve the Contractor of his contractual obligations and the Contractor must provide to
the Engineer all necessary details, physical dimensions, descriptive literature, etc., of all
equipment to be incorporated on drawings within 10 days of a request from the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Submittals
Section 01300/21
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section Includes
.1
Schedule, form, content.
.2
Scheduled revisions.
.3
Critical path scheduling.
.4
contained therein are an assessment of the work should not be presumed to be complete.
Related Sections
.1
Section 01300 - Submittals.
.2
Section 01770 - Take-Over Procedures.
Schedules Required
.1
Submit the following schedules:

.1
Contract Summary Schedule (Master Construction Schedule).
.2
Detailed Contract Schedule.
.3
Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings and Product Data.
.4
Submittal Schedules for Samples.
.5
Submittal Schedule for timeliness of Engineer furnished Products.
.6
Product Delivery Schedule.
.7
Cash Allowance Schedule for purchasing Products.
.8
Anticipated cash flow schedule.
.9
Short term progress schedule showing one week preceding and three weeks ahead.
.10
Short term personnel forecast by trade/craft and actuals compared to plan.
.11
Daily reports on work force, plant and equipment progress.
Khatib and Alami
Section 01310/1
December 2010
1.4
1.5

Specifications
Format
.1
Prepare schedules using Prima Vera Version 3 software in the form of resource-loaded
horizontal bar charts.
.2
Provide a separate bar for each trade or operation.
.3
Provide horizontal time scale identifying the first work day of each week.
.4
Format for listings: The Table of Contents of this specification.
.5
Identification of listings: By trade of work and/or specification section detailed as

directed by the Engineer.
.6
All schedules shall be based on the same logic.
.7
Include progress curves (s-curves) for materials installation, commodities installation,

equipment and systems installations.
Submission
.1
Submit initial schedules within thirty (30) days after award of Contract.
.2
Submit computer diskettes and paper copy, plus two (2) paper copies to be retained by the
Engineer.
.3
Engineer and Client Representative will review schedule and return review copy within
twenty (20) days after receipt.
.4
Resubmit finalized schedule within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
.5
Submit revised progress schedule with each application for payment.
.6
Distribute copies of the revised schedule to:
.7
.1
Engineer.
.2
Employer.
.3
Job site office, Document Control Centre.
.4
Subcontractors.
.5
Other concerned parties.
Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor within ten (10) days, any problems
anticipated by the timetable shown in the schedule.
Khatib and Alami
Section 01310/2
December 2010
1.6

Specifications
Detailed Contract Schedule

.1
Include the complete sequence of construction activities.
.2
Include the dates for the commencement and completion of each major element of
construction including the following.
.1
Site utilities.
.2
Foundation Work.
.3
Structural framing.
.4
Special Subcontractor work.
.5
Equipment Installations.
.6
Finishes.
.3
Show projected percentage of completion of each item as of the first day of the month.
.4
Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission schedule.
.5
Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
.6
.7
.1
Major changes in scope approved and pending.
.2
Activities modified since previous submission.
.3
Revised projections of progress and completion.
.4
Other identifiable changes.
Provide a narrative report to define:

.1
Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
.2
Corrective action recommended and its effect.
.3
The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
Maintain progress schedule, as the Work progresses.

.1
Update the Master Construction Schedule once each month.
.2
Update the Short Term Progress Schedule once each week.
Khatib and Alami
Section 01310/3
December 2010
1.7

Specifications
Submittals Schedule
.1
Include schedule for submitting shop drawings, product data and samples.
.2
Indicate dates for submitting, review time, resubmission time, float time, last date for
meeting fabrication schedule.
.3
Includes dates when submittals and/or delivery will be required for Engineer-furnished
products.
.4
Include dates when review submittals will be required by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Section 01310/4
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
of Particular Application and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this
section.
1.2
Description
This Section covers Quality Control administrative and procedural requirements
supplementary to those of the Conditions of the Contract and other Sections of the
Technical Specifications.
1.3
Quality Control
The Contractor shall be responsible for the requirements of the quality control services
which include specifying, inspections, testing, reports, etc., performed by Contractor, by
independent agencies and by governing authorities to control construction quality. They
do not include activities performed by Engineer.
An adequate testing-office approved by the Engineer shall be responsible for the specific
quality control services and inspection, tests and reports to verify compliances with
requirements specified in the Contract Documents. The testing laboratory shall notify
the Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities observed in the work during
performance of its testing and inspection services.
Where the Employer has engaged a testing office for testing and inspection of a part of
the Work and the Contractor is also required to engage a testing office for the same
related element, the Contractor shall not employ the office engaged by the Employer.
Specified inspections tests and related actions do not limit contractors quality control
procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Documents requirements.
These services do not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for compliance with
Contract requirements.
1.3.1
Specifications of Testing Laboratory: The testing laboratory shall be capable of

performing sophisticated testing services and shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer. All testing shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of a
qualified professional engineer. The engineer of the testing laboratory shall cooperate
with the Engineer and Contractor in the performance of the laboratory duties.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/1
December 2010

Specifications
1.3.2
Source Quality Control: To the extent specified herein or in other Specification Sections,
the testing laboratory shall obtain samples of various materials at the source of supply
and test the materials for compliance with the Contract Documents and in accordance
with the appropriate current Standards. The testing laboratory shall tag seal, label or
otherwise suitably identify the bulk materials so sampled and no such materials shall be
used in the Work until the test reports are submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
The applicable tests shall be repeated at the specified intervals, whenever the source of
supply is changed or whenever the characteristics of the materials change or vary in the
opinion of the Engineer.
1.4
Contractor Responsibilities
Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity. The
Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing laboratory to perform
inspection tests and other quality control services specified in the Contract Documents
or required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs of these services shall be included in
the Contract Sum.
1.4.1
Retesting: The Contractor shall be responsible for retesting when results prove
unsatisfactory and indicate non compliance with Contract Document requirements
regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. Cost of
retesting construction, revised or replaced shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
1.4.2
Associated Services: Cooperate with laboratory performing required inspections, tests

and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested which shall
include, but are not limited to:
Provide access to the work
Furnish labour and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests
1.4.3
Test Witnessing: To the extent specified or directed by the Engineer, the Engineer's
Representative shall witness testing performed at the factory, supplier's test facility or
testing laboratory.
1.4.4
Cost and Transportation: All cost of tests and of handling materials and transportation of
personnel and materials on Site or to the testing laboratory shall be borne by the
Contractor, who shall also provide security and protection of samples and test equipment
at the project site.
1.5
Project Quality
The Contractor shall engage a full time Project Quality Engineer, with appropriate
qualifications and experience in similar projects, and he shall be responsible for
managing and following up the implementation of the Quality Management Plan. The
Contractor shall provide and maintain a Quality Management Plan in accordance with
ISO 10005 requirements. This plan shall include organization, communication,
inspection, testing and other quality assurance procedures, and inspections to be
followed for managing the specified quality related activities in this project.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/2
December 2010
1.6

Specifications
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division - 1
Specification Sections:
1.6.1
Test Reports: For each report of inspection, test or similar, submit a report signed and
certified by the supervising engineer of the testing laboratory and the Project Quality
Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, three (3) certified copies of each report shall be
submitted to the Engineer and shall include:
Date of issue
Project title and number
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections
Designation of the work and test method
Identification of product and specification section
Test results and interpretation of test results
Test records, i.e. radiographs, printouts, etc
Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested work complies with
Contract Document requirements
Name and signature of laboratory inspector
Recommendations on retesting
1.6.2
Test Sample: The Contractor, at his expense, shall furnish samples of materials to be
tested in sufficient time before use to allow the testing and to cause no delay in the
Work. The Contractor shall provide security and protection to samples and test
equipment.
1.6.3
Schedule of Services of Testing Laboratory: The Contractor shall submit a schedule

giving the dates and duration in which the testing laboratory shall perform testing
services. Thereafter the Contractor shall give the Engineer and testing laboratory not less
than ten working days written notice of any change in the schedule.
1.7
Tolerances for Installation of Work

.1
Unless specifically indicated otherwise, work shall be installed plumb, level,

square and straight.
.2
Except where other acceptable tolerances are specified in a Section or are

otherwise required for proper functioning of products or equipment as determined
by the manufacturer, or for functioning of site services, and mechanical and
electrical systems:
.1
"Plumb and level" shall mean plumb or level within 1 mm in 1 m.
.2
"Square" shall mean not in excess of 10 seconds lesser or greater than 90

degrees.
.3
.3
"Straight" shall mean within 1 mm under a 1 m long straight edge.
Allowable tolerances shall not be cumulative.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/3
December 2010
1.8
1.9
1.10

Specifications
Deflection Allowance
.1
Ensure that an allowance for deflection of the structure is provided so that dead
and live loads are not imposed on claddings, tops of exterior and interior walls and
partitions.
.2
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a space for deflection of not less than 1/350 of
the span of the structural system due to live load and as otherwise determined from
structural calculations acceptable to the Engineer.
.3
At fire rated separation walls and partitions employ methods to provide deflection
space which will ensure that integrity of the fire rating is maintained.
Rejected Work
.1
Remove defective Work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of defective
products or damage and whether incorporated in the Work or not, which has been
rejected by the Engineer or Engineer as failing to conform to the Contract
Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with the Contract Documents.
.2
Repair Other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacement

promptly.
.3
If in the opinion of the Engineer it is not expedient to correct defective Work or

Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, the Engineer may
deduct from the Contract Price the difference in value between the Work
performed and that called for by the Contract Documents, the amount of which
shall be determined by the Engineer.
Inspectors Responsibilities
.1
Co-operate with Engineer and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after due
notice.
.2
Perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and methods of

construction generally in accordance with the Contractor's schedule.
.3
Comply with specified standards of ASTM and other recognized local

jurisdictional authorities, and as specified.
.4
Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.
.5
Immediately notify Engineer, Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or

deficiencies of work and products.
.6
Submit within four (4) working days of inspection and testing, five (5) copies of
reports of such inspections and tests to:
.1
Employer: One copy.
.2
Engineer: One copy.
.3
Contractor: Three (3) copies.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/4
December 2010

Specifications
.7
Submit additional copies of the report as directed or as specified under other

Sections.
.8
Include in each report:

.1
Date issued.
.2
Project title and number.
.3
Testing and inspection agency name, address, and telephone number.
.4
Name and signature of individual responsible for test or inspection.
.5
Date and time of sampling or inspection.
.6
Record of temperature and weather conditions.
.7
Date of test.
.8
Identification of product and reference to Specification Section.
.9
Location of sample or test in the Project.
.10
Type of inspection or test.
.11
Results of tests and assessment of compliance with Contract Documents.
.12
Interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer.
.9
Perform additional services as required by Engineer and Engineer.
.10
Inspector is not authorized to:

.1
Revoke, alter, enlarge on, or release requirements of Contract Documents.
.2
Approve or accept any portion of Work.
.3
Perform any duties of Contractor.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/5
December 2010
1.11
1.12

Specifications
Contractors Responsibilities - General

.1
Maintain quality control to ensure that the requirements of the Contract Documents
are attained.
.2
The results or reports of inspection and testing performed for quality assurance are
not a part of the Contract Documents nor shall they relieve the Contractor of
responsibility to provide a quality control program adequate to ensure the
fulfillment of the requirements of the Contract.
.3
Co-operate with Inspector's personnel.

Provide access to work, and to
manufacturer's operations to facilitate execution of required services.
.4
Secure and deliver to Inspector adequate quantities of representative samples of

materials proposed to be used which require testing.
.5
Within 21 days of Award of Contract, furnish mix designs proposed to be used for
concrete, mortar, grout, and other material mixes with certification by an
independent inspection and testing company that such mix designs meet the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
.6
Submit copies of product tests, or mill test reports of steel products, as required.
.7
Provide labour and facilities to:

.1
Provide access to work to be inspected and tested.
.2
Facilitate inspections and tests, including obtaining and handling samples at

Project site or at source of product to be tested and deliver to testing
laboratory in quantities required.
.3
Repair work disturbed by inspection and test.
.4
Provide storage on site for Inspector's exclusive use to store equipment and
cure test samples.
.5
Notify Inspector, Engineer sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for

assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. When tests or inspections
cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Employer's, Engineer's
personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's failure to comply.
.6
Failure by the Contractor to give adequate notice resulting in Work being

performed without the full required inspection or testing will be considered
as grounds for rejection of that Work.
Quality Control of Off-Site Work.

.1
The Contractor shall impose quality control methods at the location of

manufacture, fabrication and assembly of items to be incorporated in the Work to
ensure that they conform to requirements of the Contract Documents. This quality
control shall not apply to proprietary catalog production products except as may be
deemed necessary by the Contractor or as directed by the Engineer.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/6
December 2010
1.13

Specifications
.2
The Contractor's quality control representative off-site shall be responsible for the
release of items for shipment to the Project site.
.3
The Contractor shall provide notice to the Engineer in writing at least three (3)
weeks in advance of packing of every batch of product components or assemblies
so that the Employer, Engineer and their designated representatives may have the
opportunity at his/their choice of inspecting any such product components or
assemblies prior to shipment.
.4
The products requiring factory, shop, supplier's or Subcontractor's inspection are

identified in relevant Sections of the Specifications.
.5
Acceptance of product components or assemblies prior to shipment shall not imply

final acceptance under the contract.
SCHEDULE OF QUALITY CONTROL OPERATIONS

.1
Provide the Engineer with a minimum of three (3) copies of a schedule of quality
control operations, both on-site and off-site, to outline the procedures, instructions
and reports which will be used as follows:
.1
Quality control organization.
.2
Qualifications of quality control personnel.
.3
Authority and responsibilities of each quality control person.
.4
1.14
Schedule of inspections and tests with personnel assigned to each task and
duration of each task.
.5
Schedule of required services to be provided by inspection and testing firms.
.6
Coordination required between Sections in order that quality control is

integrated.
.7
Test methods which will be utilized.
.8
Methods of performing and documenting quality control operations.
Mock-Ups
.1
Sample installations will be required and a design/quality check will be performed

for each part of the Work in accordance with a schedule established by the
Engineer.
.2
Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in the Specifications. Include

for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups.
.3
Construct in locations as specified in the specific trade Section.
.4
Prepare mock-ups for Engineer review with reasonable promptness and in an

orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in the Work.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/7
December 2010
1.15
1.16
.5
The Contractor will be held responsible for failure to prepare any mock-up in
ample time and no claim for extension of Contract Time by reason of such default
will be allowed.
.6
If requested, the Engineer will assist in preparing a schedule fixing the dates for
preparation.
.7
Specification Section identifies whether the mock-ups may remain as part of the
Work or must be removed.
.8
Specified sample installations and mock-ups are included in the Contract Price.
.9
The following on-site mock-ups will be required to be provided by the Contractor

for review by the Engineer:
2.1
Exterior wall assemblies.
apartment including masonry walls with plaster finish, (painted or with wall
covering); door frames (painted) with wood doors (finished); ironmongery,
gypsum board ceilings (painted); applied finish on concrete ceilings;
Mechanical/Electrical rough-in, complete toilet.
Tests and Mix Designs

.1
Furnish tests results and mix design as may be requested.
.2
The costs of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in the Contract
Documents or beyond those required by the jurisdictional authorities shall be
appraised by the Engineer and may be authorized as recoverable.
Equipment and Systems

.1
PART 2

Specifications
Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building
equipment systems.
PRODUCTS
Test Laboratories
The Contractor shall provide the Site with adequate laboratory facilities for all tests
needed as mentioned in the contract, or he can perform most of these tests in an
independent laboratory approved by the Engineer.
2.2
Tests
Tests required on Site shall be as specified herein or in the Technical Specification
Sections and include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/8
December 2010
2.2.1

Specifications
Aggregates
1. Sieve Analysis (Grading) of Aggregates
To check the grading of different sizes of aggregates.
2. Preliminary Field Decantation Test
To provide a guide to the quantity of silt, loam, clay in fine aggregate to be used in
mortar and concrete.
3. Volume Weight of Compacted Aggregate
To determine the compressive resistance of coarse aggregate.
4. Aggregate Crushing Test
To determine the compressive resistance of coarse aggregate.
5. Percentage of Voids in Aggregate
To determine approximately the percentage of voids in compacted fine and coarse
aggregates.
2.2.2
Cement
1.
Fineness of Cement
To determine the degree of fineness of each type of cement to be used in the Work.
2. Normal Consistency of Cement

To determine the normal consistency of each type of cement to be used in Work, i.e.
the amount of water to be used in subsequent tests on concrete work.
3. Setting Time of Cement
To determine the initial setting time of each type of cement to be used in the work.
4. Strength of Mortar
To determine the tensile and compressive strength of 1:3 by weight, cement and sand
mortar.
2.2.3
Backfilling
1.
Soil Compaction
To determine the maximum dry density and optimum moisture content of soil as
per AASHTO designation number T-180.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/9
December 2010
2.3

Specifications
Site Laboratory Equipment

The minimum configuration of the Site laboratory shall be as follows:
2.3.1
General
The Contractor shall provide the Site laboratory with apparatus as noted hereinbelow for
all tests mentioned in Item 2.2 and such other tests that may be required by the Engineer.
2.3.2
2.3.3
General Equipment
Test Sieves
Series of test sieves for aggregates, cement, gypsum, etc., tests in accordance with
the specifications laid in BS 410 and have either brass )r tinned steel frames with
woven wire mesh, wire cloth or perforated plate according to requirements.
Sieve Accessories
Shall be sieve brush double ended, with brass fibers one end and bristle at the other
end and sieve brush with soft hair.
Laboratory Hardware
Shall be dial gauges, thermometers, test forms and briquettes, measuring cylinders,
weighing bottles, beakers, storage bottles, containers, trays, miscellaneous glass,
plastic ware, scoops, shovels - miscellaneous tools and tongs, vernier callipers,
volumetric flasks, etc.
Balance, Scale
Sensitive balance or scale to at least 0. 1% of the weight of test sample.
Stop Watch
Oven
Shall be suitable drying oven required for different tests to be conducted on Site.
Materials
Shall be filter papers, wax pots and waxes to avoid specimens from damage and loss of
moisture content, sodium hydroxide pellets.
2.3.4
Apparatus
Aggregate Impact Value
Compression Machine
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/10
December 2010

Specifications
For tests of compressive strength of concrete and shall have pair of rectangular plates,
distance piece for block tests, complying BS 187, 1180, 1902, 3921 ASTM C-426
Void Measurement
To determine the void content of aggregate (coarse, fine) and fillers.
Dropping Ball
The apparatus shall include the brass mould, methyl mathacrylate ball, ball
penetration measuring and replacement dial indicator and to conform with BS 4551,
890.
Vicat Apparatus
Complete with consistency plunger 10 mm dia, initial and final needles at diameters
suitable for each material to be tested, vicat moulds and for performing test to the
requirements of BS specifications.
Slump Cone
It shall comply to BS 1881 and include steel tamping rod 600 mm long, 16 mm dia.
rounded at one end, steel rule divided in mm and base plate 450 mm square.
Testing Organic Impurities

Include glass bottle 350 ml capacity with graduation marks, sodium hydroxide
pellets, colour standard and with five organic colour glasses mounted in a plastic
holder.
Modified Compaction Mould

It shall meet the dimensional requirements of ASTM D 698 and D 1557, shall be of
152 mm inside diameter, comprising collar mould body and base plate, quick release
wing nuts are fitted on either side of the mould and collar to permit easy dismantling
for weighing the specimen during test of compaction of soil.
Compaction Rammer
It shall be 4.54 kg weight with a 457 mm drop. The rammer diameter is 50.8 mm and
the complete unit.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/11
December 2010
PART 3
3.1

Specifications
EXECUTION
Sampling
Adequate quantities of representative field samples shall be selected and obtained by,
the testing laboratory unless otherwise specified.
3.2
Laboratory Test Procedures

Testing shall conform to the requirements specified in the Contract Documents. If no
procedure or test method is specified, testing shall comply with the material
specification referenced unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
be responsible for scheduling times for inspection, tests, taking samples and similar
activities.
3.3
3.4
Post-Installation Test
Costs for performing, post-installation tests shall be included in the Contract Price
and no extra payment shall be made to the Contractor.
Post-installation tests shall be required for all work and equipment as specified in the
respective Sections of these Specifications.
Post-installation testing shall not commence until all related structures, thrust blocks,
piping and like work has been installed and connected in compliance with the
relevant requirements specified elsewhere in the Specifications.
Post-installation testing shall be performed under continuous inspection by the

Engineer.
Immediately correct all defects disclosed by the tests using approved methods and
new materials for repairs as required by the Engineer. Interruption time necessary for
corrective work shall be added to the specified test periods.
Satisfactory completion and approval of required post-installation testing is one of

the conditions precedent to the Engineer's acceptance of the Work.
Repair and Protection

Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and else, the Contractor shall
repair damages and, restore substrate and finishes to eliminate deficiencies. Protect
construction exposed by or for quality control services.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Quality Control
Section 01400/12
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01421
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Conditions of Particular Application and other Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply
to work of this Section.
1.2
Definitions
General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
1.2.1
Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on

the Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar
requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled",
and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited.
1.2.2
Directed: The terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected",

"approved", "required" and "permitted" means directed by the Engineer, requested by the
Engineer and similar phrases.
1.2.3
Approved: The terms "approved", when used in. conjunction with the Engineer's action
on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Engineer's
duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
1.2.4
Regulations: The terms "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful
orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and
agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
1.2.5
Furnish: The terms "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for
unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
1.2.6
Install: The terms "install" describes operations at the Project site including 1 the actual
unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring,
applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar
operations.
1.2.7
Provide: The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the
intended use.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01421/1
December 2010

Specifications
1.2.8
Installer: An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor,

either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, who performs a
particular construction activity including installation, erection, application, or similar
operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to
perform.
1.2.9
Specialists: Certain sections of the specifications require that specific construction

activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those
operations. The specialist must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are
requirements over which the Contractor has no option, However, the ultimate
responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the Contractor.
This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and
similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local
trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
1.2.10
Project Site: Is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction
activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing work as part of the
Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be
identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.
1.2.11
Testing, Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific

inspections to tests, either at the Project site, manufacturer premises or elsewhere, and to
report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.
1.2.12
Manufacturers: Manufacturer whose products meets the fill conditions of the contract
documents in quality, aesthetic, appearance, capacities, ratings, applicable codes, space
allocation and warranties to the specified as approved by the Engineer.
1.3
Specification Format and Content Explanation
1.3.1
Specification Format: These specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections
based on the Construction Specifications - Institute's 16-Division format and "Master
Format" numbering system.
1.3.2
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words
implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be
interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the
context of the Contract Documents indicates.
1.3.3
Imperative Mood and Streamlined Language: Are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mode are to be performed by the Contractor. At
certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe
responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or others when so noted.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01421/2
December 2010

Specifications
1.4
Industry Standards
1.4.1
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as
if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such
standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
1.4.2
Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
1.4.3
Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2. or more standards is specified and

the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or
quality levels, the most stringent requirements shall comply.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Level: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall
be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with
the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within
reasonable limits.
1.4.4
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar
with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable
standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the
Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them
available on request.
1.4.5
Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are
frequently abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association,
standards-generating organization, authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01421/3
December 2010

Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
REFERENCE FOR STANDARDS AND CODES
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ARI
American Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
AWS
American Welding Society
AWWA
American Water Work Society
AMCA
Air Moving and Control Association
B. S
British Standard
C.P.
Code of Practice
DIN
German Industrial Standard
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NEC
National Electric Codes
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01421/4
December 2010

Specifications
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS FOR

BILL OF QUANTITIES
a/d
as described (in Specifications and Preambles)
Amp - A
Ampere
bar
1.02 kg/cm2
cm
centimeter
Dia
Diameter
ea
each
gm
gram
km
kilometer
KVA
Kilovolt-Ampere
L. S.
Lump Sum
m - ml
linear meter
mm
millimeter
m3 - cu m
cubic meter
m2 - sq m
square meter
m.s.
measured separately
ND
Nominal Diameter
No.
Number
N/mm2
10.2 kg/ cm2
ton (1000 kg)

END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01421/5
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General Conditions,
work of this section.
1.2
Description
This section covers the requirements for temporary facilities, controls security and
protection for the Work, including but not limited to the following:
Supply of water and power

Water and power distribution
Temporary fire protection
Sanitary facilities
Construction aids
Temporary barriers and other safeguards.
Security provisions
Roads and access
Special controls
Traffic control
Telephone services
Transportation
Site office for use by the Engineer and the Employer
Contractor's office and storage facilities
Measuring and testing instruments
Project signs
Progress photographs and video tapes
Laboratories facility
Safety provision
Temporary facilities shall include facilities provided by the Contractor to make it

possible for the Engineer and Employer site representatives to have full time attendance
on the site and provide the necessary space, utilities, services, facilities measuring and
testing equipment.
The facilities also include whatever equipment and systems may be necessary to move,
communicate, perform the Work required for the Project.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/1
December 2010

Specifications
Temporary facilities shall be provided within the mobilization period and shall be in
accordance with the specifications and the Contract Documents
Location of temporary facilities shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
Housekeeping, maintenance and repair shall be kept in perfect condition during the
project period.
1.3
Costs of Temporary Facilities

Except as otherwise specified, all costs of furnishing, installing, maintaining and
removing the temporary facilities and controls are at the Contractor's expense and no
additional compensation shall be allowed.
Neither the Employer nor Engineer shall accept cost or use charges for temporary
facilities.
1.4
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1.4.1
Regulations: Comply with applicable laws and regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction including but not limited to:
Building Code Requirements

Health and Safety Regulations
Police, Fire Department Rules
Environmental Protections Regulation
Make all necessary arrangements, obtain and secure required permits, easements and
rights-of-way and pay all fees and charges required for all offsite areas where permanent
work, temporary facilities or controls are required.
1.4.2
Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect the Site for security and
testing of each temporary facility before use.
1.4.3
Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance,
acceptable to Engineer and Employer. Operate in a safe and efficient manner, do not
allow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions or public nuisance to develop and
persist on site.
1.5
Working Areas
All operations necessary for the execution of the temporary facilities shall be carried out
without interfering unnecessarily or improperly with the convenience of the public or use
of public roads.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/2
December 2010

Specifications
All these works shall be done by the Contractor according to the approved shop
drawings presented by the Contractor.
Any variation in the set locations shall be approved by the Engineer before any change.
The Contractor must follow the regulations and rules stated by the Employer or Engineer
for the Site and surrounding areas.
1.6
Submittals
Submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination-of each temporary utility
within 14 days of the date of the Letter of Acceptance and submit the following marked
on reproducible prints of Site plans or provide additional plans:
1.6.1
Shop Drawings and Data

a. Layout and arrangement of accommodation area if any, catering facilities, dining
room, sanitary facilities, its location, distance from construction Site and its location
with regard to wind.
b. Drawings, sketches and other data to illustrate the layout location, arrangement of
utility services for the Site office of the Employer, Engineer and Contractor's office.
Storage facilities, stockpiling and concrete mixing, etc., according to phase and
progress of work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Materials: Provide new materials, or if acceptable to Engineer the Contractor may
use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable conditions.
All temporary works such as buildings, sheds, scaffolding, fencing, guard rails,
timbering, borrow pits, trenches, etc., shall be made safe by the Contractor and all
designs for these temporary facilities shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval before the Works are commenced. All bolts, nails, timbers, etc., shall be
inspected at suitable intervals, to ensure that the condition of temporary structures is
sound.
The Contractor shall be solely and without reservation responsible for the safety and
security of all temporary facilities and plant thereon of any kind or nature whatsoever
which may be provided or erected for the execution of the Contract and approval by
the Engineer of any design drawing or verbal statement of intention prepared, or
made by the Contractor, shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of the liabilities
and responsibilities imposed upon him by the provisions of this Clause nor any of the
liabilities imposed upon him by the Contractor or pursuant to the Contract
Documents.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/3
December 2010
PART 3
3.1

Specifications
EXECUTION
Supply of Water and Power
The Contractor shall pay all water and electrical connections, consumption and other
charges thereof if he connects to the city mains. The Employer shall, if required, assist
the Contractor in getting the necessary permits.
3.1.1
Water Services: The Contractor shall make his own arrangements and be responsible, for
the supply of water to all sites, and offices. The contractor shall provide water services,
installation and distribution of piping of size and pressure adequate for the Site or, he
shall provide the necessary pumps to supply a minimum pressure at the highest point.
The pumps shall be equipped with surge and storage tanks to supply water uniformily.
He shall provide sufficient water for the execution activities, and shall also provide an
adequate supply of potable water.
Where necessary use flexible rubber hoses with pressure rating greater than the
minimum pressure of the water distribution system.
3.1.2
Electrical Services: The Contractor shall also make his own arrangements and be
responsible, for the supply of the electrical power to all sites, and the Contractor shall
provide temporary weatherproof grounded-electric service, the distribution system of the
electrical power which shall be of sufficient size, capacity and power, overload protected
and disconnected.
Use hard service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof
connectors to connect separate lengths of electric-cords if single length will not reach
areas where construction activities are in progress.
For lamps and light fixtures provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosure where
exposed to breakage.
Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction
operations and traffic conditions.
3.2
Aids
3.2.1
Construction Aids: Comply with applicable laws, ordinanace, rules, regulations, and
orders pertaining to construction machinery and equipment, hoists, cranes, scaffolding,
materials handling facilities, tools, appliances and other construction aids.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/4
December 2010

Specifications
3.2.2
First Aid Provisions: The Contractor shall provide materials required to comply with
health and hygiene measures, and to appoint a first-aid representative trained in the
performance of first-aid techniques and provide all necessary and important first-aid
items, he shall be fully responsible to provide and maintain at his own expense of
sufficient necessary and adequate first aid medical facilities, management and services to
his staff, Employer and Engineer personnel assigned for the performance of Works under
this Contract. He shall be responsible for removal by ambulance of injured or sick
persons to hospitals or to their houses.
3.3
Fence-Barriers and Other Safeguards
3.3.1
Barricades and Warning Sign: The Contractor shall erect temporary enclosures or
barricades around Works area, to protect labours, workmen and visitors. He shall
maintain barricades, guards, night lights illuminated from sunset to sunrise and all other
necessary appliances and safeguards to protect the Work, life, excavations, equipment
and materials. Barricades shall be of substantial construction and shall be painted such as
to increase their visibility at night. Suitable warning signs shall be placed and
illuminated at night so as to show in advance where works and barricades exist.
Barricades shall be not less than one meter in height.
3.3.2
Enclosure Fence
Before the Work begins the Contractor shall provide and install a temporary enclosures
fence of not less than 3.0 m height with security officers and a lockable entrance gate
located where indicated on the Contractor shop drawings. He shall enclose the entire
Site, in a manner that shall prevent people, dogs and others from easily entering the Site
except by the entrance gate, to protect the Site, labours, workmen, construction
operations and similar activities.
3.4
Security Provisions
3.4.1
Security Officer: The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his

organization on the Site who shall be responsible for all matters relating to security and
whose duty is to comply with regulation security.
3.4.2
Watchmen and Janitorial Services: In connection with the Work, furnish and maintain
guards, watchmen services, lights, fencing to safeguard and protect the Site and Work
during all hours that construction operations are not in progress.
The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent unauthorized access to the
Site, Works and adjoining areas for safety, convenience of the public or as required by
Engineer. The Contractor shall be liable for security until the issuance of' the Defects
Liability Certificate and provide janitorial services for temporary, offices, first-aid
station, toilets, wash-facilities, mess-room and similar areas.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/5
December 2010
3.4.3

Specifications
.Fire Protection: Develop and supervise overall fire prevention and protection facilities
of the types needed to protect personnel, materials and equipment etc., at the Site. Take
necessary fire prevention measures to protect against predictable and controllable fire
losses. Locate adequate number of fire extinguishers in each floor where convenient and
effective for their intended purposes. Provide hand carried portable fire extinguishers for
temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand carried, portable
dry chemical extinguishers. Conform to requirements of Fire Brigade for fire prevention
during construction, and with particular attention to the classification, extinguishing
agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
Prohibit smoking in working area.
3.4.4
Safety Hard Hats: The Contractor shall furnish and pay for safety shoes and safety hard
hats of different colours for all personnel working or found on the Site, including his
staff and workmen, Engineer's personnel, Employer's personnel, Subcontractor's
workmen and visitors.
White hat shall be for the Employer and Engineer staff.
Yellow hat shall be for the Contractor and Sub-contractor staff.
Green hat shall be for the visitors.
3.5
Safety
The Contractor shall assign a full-time Safety Officer who, with his assigned team, shall
be responsible for implementing and monitoring safety practices.
The Safety Officer shall cooperate with the Employer and the Engineer safety
representative and shall be responsible for all matters relating to the safety of all
employees and non-employees in the work area.
3.6
Roads and Site Access

Construct and maintain temporary facility special routing, roads and access as required
for the Work to accommodate delivery and storage of materials equipment and
supervision. Provide surfacing as required to prevent dust nuisance or impassable
conditions. Prevent oil staining and dirt accumulation on public streets used for access.
Provide board ramps and covers with warning signs or barriers, or equivalent, where
vehicles cross public curbs and walks and furnish flagman guards when such access is in
use.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/6
December 2010

Specifications
3.7
Special Controls
3.7.1
Water Control: The Contractor shall perform grading and other operations to maintain Site
drainage. Surface and subsurface water shall not be allowed to accumulate in excavations.
3.7.2
Pollution Control: The Contractor shall provide protection and conduct construction in a
way and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and minimize the
possibility that air, and subsoils might be contaminated or polluted or that undesirable
effects might result. Tools and equipment which produce harmful noise shall be avoided.
The Contractor shall assume all liability for and defend, indemnify and hold the
Employer harmless from any loss or damage arising from pollution or contamination
which originates from spillage, seepage, discharge, blow out or leakage of materials or
otherwise arising from operations under the Contractor's control or responsibility
including, but shall not be limited to, any liquid or nonliquid pollutant or waste
materials, motor oils, lubricants, motor fuel, garbage and/or sewage. The Contractor
shall take such steps as may be necessary to ensure that the disposal of all substances,
articles or liquids is not carried out in such a manner as to cause pollution or
contamination. In the event of any breach of this obligation, the Contractor shall protect,
indemnify and hold the Employer harmless from any loss, damage, costs or expenses
that may result therefrom.
3.8
Traffic Control
The Contractor shall furnish, maintain and relocate signs, barriers and other safety
devices to control traffic around and through the Site and to protect against damage or
injury. Provide a traffic-officer to control traffic within the construction area and to the
discharge area to safeguard the environment.
Prepare signs to provide directional information for construction personnel and visitors.
3.9
Site Office for Use by the Employer and the Engineer

Provide or erect a field office and car shed for the Employer and the Engineer. Locate
field office and shed for easy access.
Furnish, equip, air-condition, light, clean and maintain two separate Site offices for the
Employer and Engineer. Each Site office shall comprise 5 rooms 16 m2 area each, and
one 24 m2 for meetings, completed with a kitchen, toilet and shower, facilities. The
Contractor shall furnish and pay for utilities and services including maintenance and
watchman for the offices. Offices shall be when finished a weather tight insulated
construction with windows of glazed sashes and screen shutters. Lockable doors,
resilient tile flooring, concealed conduits for electrical wiring, fluorescent light fixtures
capable of maintaining an average illumination of 500 Lux, two electrical outlets and
two data outlets placed at approximately 300 mm above the floor and a suitable mini
split airconditioning unit of shall be provided for every room or as required for
comfortable temperature degree.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/7
December 2010

Specifications
All inner and outer space of the Site office shall be lighted and provided with lighting
protection and shall have a circuit breaker at the electrical feeder cable.
Provide a telephone set in each room.
Covered car parking areas shall be provided adjacent to the offices.
The office shall be kept clean and orderly for use and shall remain on Site until the
Engineer instructs that it shall be removed.
The Contractor shall employ for each office (Employers Representative & Engineer)
one qualified secretary, document controller, office boy and driver qualified to assist in
filing.
3.9.1
Office Room
The Contractor shall furnish and equip each office as follows:
Standard office desks with 4 drawers

Desk chairs
Office chairs
Closet with 6 adjustable shelves and lockable door with 2 keys
Legal size lockable metal file cabinets
Two metal book-cases, 3 shelves, each
Telephone handsets
IBM or IBM compatible computer with latest configurations as directed by the
Engineer.
Soft Ware as follows:Windows with Arabic support, MS Excel with Arabic support,
MS Project for Windows, MS Word with Arabic support, Excel Norton
Commander, Primavera and Autocad latest versions.
A laser printer 600 DPI, 4 PPM minimum HP6L or equivalent with A4 sheet feeder.
3.9.2
Secretary Room
-
Same furniture and computer in offices.
Photocopy machine with A3 & A4 copying facilities with sorting pins located in
secretary office.
Full time office Secretary with experience in MS word and Excel and excellent in
Speaking and writing English and Arabic.
Laser printer A2 sheet feeder.
Laser printer A4 sheet feeder.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/8
December 2010
3.9.3
Meeting Room
3.9.4
1 conference table type

12 desk chairs
1 tack board
Document Control Room
3.9.5

Specifications
One standard drawing table unit with parallel bar and tools
Drawing/plan cabinet hanging type with 6 plan holders
Drawing stool
Closet with adjustable shelves and lockable door with 2 keys (4 No.).
Legal size lockable metal file cabinets (2 No.).
Kitchen and Mess-Room
3.9.6
1 roof tank of adequate size used for water storage.

1 kitchen type cabinet with table top and storage
1 table 1.5 x 0.9 m with 6 chairs.
1 refrigerator 8 cu ft capacity
1 electric-coffee pot, 220 volts.
1 tea and coffee service for 6 persons
1 electric kettle, 220 volts.
1 water cooler.
Wash Rooms: Provide separate facilities for male and female (if required) personnel.
3.9.7
2 pedestals W.C.
2 wash-hand basins with hot and cold water
1 large shower with hot and cold water.
1 first aid cabinet with a mirror.
General
1 floor-type, free standing coat-rack.

1 large umbrella and 4 seats sea type.
Supply perforated papers, photo copier papers, ribbons , diskettes 3.5" and compact
diskettes.
Supply paper, soap and towels for toilet and shower facilities. Construct offices elevated
from ground and at the location approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide daily cleaning attendance and office boy exclusively for the
use of the Engineer's staff.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/9
December 2010

Specifications
Adequate fire fighting equipment to the approval of the Local Fire Authority and the
Engineer.
An approved sign board written in Arabic and English. The size of the Sign board and
lettering including the wordings shall be as directed by the Engineer.
3.9.8
Sanitary Facilities
Provide the following environmentally approved sanitary facilities:
Toilets: Provide adequate temporary sanitary conveniences, fresh water, and washing
facilities for the use of all workmen at the Site in accordance with the instructions of the
Engineer and locate toilets and drinking water fixtures in suitable places for the projects
needs. Provide lavatories, wash facilities urinals and water closets, of sufficient number,
provide enclosure with non-absorbent sanitary finish and adequate ventilation and light
and such accommodation shall be maintained as and where necessary for as long as may
be deemed necessary by the Engineer. The Contractor shall keep the same in a clean and
orderly condition at all times.
Supply paper, soap and towels.
Provide covered waste containers for used materials.
Drinking Water: Provide drinking water fountain where indicated including paper cups.
Where supply power is accessible provide electric coolers to maintain dispensed water
temperature at 7 to 13C.
Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available provide temporary connections to remove
effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available provide drainage
ditches, and dry wells. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean,
sanitary conditions. Restore normal conditions promptly.
3.10
Telephone and Fax Services

The Contractor shall furnish at the Site and pay installation, rental charges and call
charges for fax and telephone service covering all local and international calls.
Supply install telephone a separate line for the first aid station.
Supply install a dedicated telephone on a separate international line for the fax machine
in the secretary office (one for Employers Representative office and another system in
Engineer office).
Supply install PABX System with two local lines and one international line and 20
internal lines (Two system one for Employers Representative office and another system
in Engineer office).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/10
December 2010

Specifications
Supply install Internet facilities DSL line and wireless in all offices.
3.11
Temporary Lifts and Hoists

Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees, until permanent stairs are
available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.
3.12
Transportation
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary car or buses for transportation of laborers
for the duration of the Work.
3.13
Contractor's Office and Storage Facilities

Following the same conditions concerning early stages of construction, furnish and
maintain offices for use of the Contractor and Sub-Contractors as necessary for the
execution of the Work.
Furnish and maintain storage areas and fabrication sheds of acceptable appearance and
install in an orderly approved arrangement. Sheds shall be sized furnished and equipped
to accommodate materials and equipment involved. Sheds may be open shelters or fully
enclosed spaces.
The location chosen shall be agreed on Drawings with the Engineer for all temporary
works and all locations for aggregate stockpiling and for concrete mixing.
3.14
Survey, Measuring and Testing Instruments

The Contractor shall provide all survey, measuring and testing instruments or equipment,
labour and everything necessary for checking of setting out, measurements and anything
the Engineer deems necessary for proper control and for his own use during the
execution of the Works. The Contractor shall also provide and maintain for the sole use
of the Engineer's Representative the instruments listed hereunder, but not limited to:
1 distomat with all accessories as recommended by manufacturer

360 circle theodolite reading to 20 seconds together with tripod and case
1 quick setting levels together with tripod and cases
2 collapsible aluminium alloy level staffs 4.25 m long with center bulb, graduated in
meter and centimeters
Steel tapes 100 m and 50 m length
Repair kit
He shall carefully protect and preserve all bench marks, pegs or items used in setting out
the Works. Other instruments required for measurements in all disciplines related to the
project to be used by the Engineer shall be also provided by the Contractor (electrical,
mechanical, etc.).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/11
December 2010
3.15

Specifications
Project Signs
The Contractor shall supply, erect and maintain in a proper condition through the full
duration of the Contract a project sign at the location provided by the Engineer bearing,
in equal fonts and in the following sequence, the names of the Project, the Employer, the
Engineer, and the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide for the Engineer approval a shop drawings for the
construction, erection, the colour and the writing used in the sign.
Sign shall be constructed of a metal frame designed to withstand a minimum wind load
of 120 kg/m2, faced with a wire fabric on which the written information shall be fixed.
The sign shall be painted two coats with a durable reflective paint. All writings shall be
in Arabic and English, Project sign shall be erected in the Site at locations as directed.
No other signs shall be erected in the Project Site.
3.16
Progress Photographs and Digital CD

The Contractor at his own expense shall obtain photographic record of execution of the
Work by taking photographs and Digital CD at monthly intervals, or more frequently if
the Engineer shall so direct, from various points as the Engineer shall specify from time
to time and for different work places. The number of such photographs required shall not
exceed 36 per month. The Contractor shall supply four colour prints of each photograph
(view) and shall forward within 5 days of taking such photographs, these photographs
together with the negatives, to the Engineer for his approval. After approval, the prints
shall be signed and dated by the Engineer and the Contractor and shall be distributed as
follows:
1 print to the Contractor and shall be retained in the field office at the site and to be
available at all times for reference
1 print to the Employer for his permanent record
2 prints shall be retained by the Engineer for his files
Any photograph which is not clear and distinct, double exposed, over exposed, etc., shall
be retaken until approved by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. Photographs shall
comply with the following requirements:
Photographs shall be standard size 220 x 180 mm

Photographs shall have smooth surface, glossy colour prints on single weight
commercial-grade stock
Allow 25 mm wide margin punched for standard 3-ring binder
Label each photograph on the front in the bottom margin with project name and
date the photograph was taken
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/12
December 2010

Specifications
On the back of each print provide an applied label or rubber stamped impression
with the following information:
a. Name of the project
b. Date when photograph was taken
c. Description of photograph location
One CD shall be recorded prior to commencing of the Work and one at the end of each
month. Duration of CD shall not be less than 15 minutes. The Contractor shall submit
three CD of each recorded CD to the Engineer for his approval. These transcripts shall
be displayed in the presence of the Contractor and if approved by the Engineer, shall be
marked, signed by the Engineer and Contractor and secured. Disapproved CDs shall be
recorded again and resubmitted by the Contractor until approved by the Engineer. The
approved transcripts shall be distributed as follows:
1 transcript to the Contractor for his files

1 transcript to the Employer for his permanent record
1 transcript shall be retained by the Engineer for his files
Recorded CDs shall display the construction sequence of the project and shall focus on
and show details, to the maximum possible extent, of items of work executed.
3.17
Laboratories Facility
The Contractor shall provide the site with adequate laboratories facilities for all tests
needed as mentioned in the documents, or he can perform most of these tests in a
laboratory approved by the Engineer.
3.18
Collection and Disposal of Waste

Collect waste from site and construction area daily. Handle hazardous, dangerous or
unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly and
dispose of material lawfully.
3.19
Removal of Temporary Facilities

As soon as reasonably practical remove temporary facilities and controls from the Site
and where the Work is performed when no longer required in the Engineer's opinion.
Clean up, restore and reinstate areas occupied by temporary facilities to a condition
acceptable to the Engineer.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property.
At Completion temporary roads shall be removed and the affected areas shall be repaired
at the Contractor's expense to the Engineer's satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01500/13
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01600
GENERAL MATERIALS PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
General provision of the Contract, including General Conditions, Conditions of
Particular Application and other Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of
this section.
1.2
Description
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the
Contractor's selection of products for use in the project, supplementary to those of
General Conditions and Specification Sections.
1.3
Definitions
As the proper selection of product is critical to the success or failure of the project, this
sections establishes procedures to be used in the selection of products for the
construction by the contractor and to ensure compliance with the Contract.
Provisions of this section apply to the construction activities of each Contactor on the
site.
1.3.1
"Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the
Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms
"materials", "equipment, "system" and terms of similar intent.
1.3.2
"Foreign Products" are items substantially manufactured outside the country.
1.3.3
"Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished or otherwise
fabricated, processed or installed to form a part of the Work.
1.3.4
"Equipment" is product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated

that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
Product List: Provide a list of products required and prepare a schedule showing
products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Engineer; include generic names of
products required, the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item
listed. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor's Construction schedule
and the schedule of Submittals.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
General Material, Plant and Equipment
Section 01600/1
December 2010
1.4.2
1.4.3

Specifications
Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item tabulated
under the following column headings:
Related specification section number.
Generic name used in Contract Documents,
Proprietary name, model number and similar designations.
Manufacturers name and address.
Supplier's name and address. Installer's name and address.
Projected delivery date, or time span of deliver period.
Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of Commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of an initial product list and provide a written explanation for omissions of data,
and for variations from Contract requirements.
Initial product list may be limited to products that must be established early in the Work.
1.4.4
Completed Schedule: Within 45 days after date of Commencement of the Work, submit
3 copies of the completed product list schedule.
1.4.5
Engineer's Action: The Engineer shall respond in writing to the Contractor within 2
weeks of receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within this period
constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a
waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract. Documents. The
Engineer's response shall include a list of unacceptable manufacturers or products
selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action.
1.5
Quality Assurance
1.5.1
Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a
single source.
When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot produce a
quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the
Engineer to determine the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities
may include attributes relating to visual appearance, strength, durability, or
compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources
producing products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01600/2
December 2010
1.5.2

Specifications
Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between
two or more products for use on the project, the product selected shall be compatible
with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also
options.
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods that are
compatible with products and construction methods of other separate contractors.
If a dispute arises between the Contractor and contractors or subcontractors over
concurrently selectable, but incompatible products, the Engineer shall determine which
products shall be retained and which are incompatible and must be replaced.
1.5.3
Foreign Product Limitations: Except in the event that: No available domestic product
complies with the contract documents, the Contractor shall provide domestically
produced products.
1.5.4
Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint
manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trade-marks on exposed surfaces of products
which shall be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or where required for
observation after installation on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous.
Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service connected or power operated
equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied
spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential
operating data:
Name of product and manufacturer.
Model and serial number. Capacity.
Ratings.
Speed.
1.6
Quality
.1
Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Products throughout the

specifications) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective,
and of the best quality (compatible with specifications) for the purpose intended. If
requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.
.2
Materials shall conform to current applicable specifications of American Society

for Testing Materials, trade association specifications, and local jurisdictional
authorities at the site, unless otherwise required.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01600/3
December 2010
1.7

Specifications
.3
Wherever any product is specified or shown by describing propietary items, model

numbers, catalogue numbers, manufacturer, trade names or similar references, the
Contractor obligates himself and accepts award of Contract based upon the use of
such products. Use of such reference is intended to establish the measure of
quality which the Engineer has determined as requisite and necessary for the
project. Where two or more products are shown or specified, the Contractor has
the option of which to use.
.4
Defective Products, whenever identified prior to the completion of Work, will be

rejected, regardless of previous inspections.
Inspection does not relieve
responsibility, but is a precaution against oversight or error. The Contractor shall
be responsible for protecting stored and installed materials and equipment. Remove
and replace products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses
caused by rejection.
.5
Should any dispute arise as to the quality or fitness of Products, the decision rests
strictly with the Engineer based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.6
Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, maintain uniformity of

manufacture for any particular or like item throughout the building.
.7
Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on Products not acceptable in

prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when
located in mechanical or electrical rooms.
.8
Refer to Section 01630 for requirements reagrding proposals for product

substitutions.
Availability
.1
Immediately upon signing Contract, review Product delivery requirements and

anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of Products
are foreseeable, notify the Engineer of such, in order that substitutions or other
remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance
of Work.
.2
No claim by the Contractor of unsuitability or unavailability of any material, nor

his unwillingness to use, nor his inability to produce first class work with the same
will be considered unless the claim is submitted in writing with the Tender.
.3
In the event of failure to notify the Engineer at commencement of Work and should
it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, the Contractor
will be held responsible for any such delay and the Engineer reserves the right to
substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in
Contract Price.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01600/4
December 2010
1.8
1.9

Specifications
Contractors Products Option

.1
Products specified by reference standard; select any product meeting or exceeding

standard.
.2
Products specified by a Descriptive or Performance specification; select any

product meeting or exceeding specification.
.3
Products specified by naming product or manufacturer (Proprietary); select product

and manufacturer named. Substitutions are not permitted.
.4
Notwithstanding specified proprietary names of products and/or manufacturers,

products provided shall meet other applicable requirements of Contract
Documents. Modify named products if necessary to ensure compliance with all
requirements of Contract Documents.
.5
When materials are specified by standards; upon request of the Engineer, obtain
from the manufacturer and independent laboratory, a report stating the product
meets or exceeds the requirements of specified standards.
Storage, Handling and Protection

.1
Handle and store Products in a manner to prevent damage, adulteration,

deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when
applicable.
.2
Store concrete reinforcement clear of earth and contact with water, on solid
supports, adequately spaced. Prevent damage to waterproofing systems and other
work.
.3
Store packaged or bundle Products in original and undamaged condition with

manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling
until required in the Work.
.4
Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.
.5
Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.
.6
Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on
wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.
.7
Store sheet materials and lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground.
Slope to shed moisture.
.8
Store and mix paints in a heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other
combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent
spontaneous combustion.
.9
Remove and replace damaged Products at own expense and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01600/5
December 2010
1.10
1.11
1.12

Specifications
Transportation
.1
Pay costs of transportation of products required in the performance of Work.
.2
Transportation cost of products supplied by the Employer will be paid for by the
Employer.
Manufacturers Instructions
.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, install or erect Products in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures
provided with Products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.
.2
Notify the Engineer in writing, of conflicts between the specifications and

manufacturer's instructions, so that the Engineer may establish the course of action.
.3
Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure to complying with

these requirements, authorizes the Engineer to require removal and re-installation
at no increase in Contract Price.
Workmanship
.1
Workmanship shall be the best quality, executed by the workers experienced and
skilled in the respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify
the Engineer if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required
results.
.2
Do not employ any unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties. The
Engineer reserves the right to require the dismissal from the site, workers deemed
incompetent, careless, insubordinate or otherwise objectionable.
.3
Decisions as to the quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest solely

with the Engineer, whose decision is final.
.4
Fabricate and install the work of all Sections in accordance with the best practice
using workers skilled in the work of the respective Section.
.5
Unless otherwise specified, comply with the manufacturer's latest printed

instructions in the methods and materials to be used in the installation of the work.
Ensure a copy of manufacturer's instructions, printed in English, are available at the
job site.
.6
Notify the Engineer in writing if these Specifications and/or the Drawings conflict
in any way with manufacturer's instructions. The Engineer will then rule which
specifications shall be followed.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01600/6
December 2010
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17

Specifications
Coordination
.1
Insure cooperation of workers in laying out Work.

continuous supervision.
Maintain efficient and
.2
Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and

accessories.
.3
Coordinate the work of various trades to prevent obstructions, conflicts and/or

damage to the Work.
Concealment
.1
In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings,
except where indicated otherwise.
.2
Before installation, inform the Engineer if there is a contradictory situation. Install

as directed by Engineer.
Remedial Work
.1
Perform remedial work required to repair or replace the parts or portions of the
Work identified as defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work
as required.
.2
Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with the materials affected. Perform
in a manner to neither damage nor endanger any portion of Work.
Location of Fixtures
.1
Consider the location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical as

approximate.
.2
Inform the Engineer of a conflicting installation. Install as directed.
Fastenings
.1
Supply fastenings, anchors and accessories as required for the fabrication and
erection of this work.
.2
Use exposed metal fastenings and accessories of the same texture, colour and finish
as the base metal on which they occur.
.3
Use metal fastenings of the same material as the metal component they are
anchoring or of a metal which will not set up an electrolytic action which would
cause damage to the fastening or metal component under moist conditions. In
general, for exterior anchors for windows, roofing, sheet metal and anchors
occuring on or in an exterior wall or slab, use non-ferrous metal or hot dip
galvanized steel. Do not use prime paint as protection against corrosion.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01600/7
December 2010
1.18
1.19

Specifications
.4
Use fastenings of such type and size and install in such manner to provide positive
permanent anchorage of the unit to be anchored in position. Install anchors at
spacing required to provide load bearing capacity.
.5
Keep exposed fastenings, where approved, to a minimum, evenly spaced and neatly
laid out.
.6
Supply adequate instructions and/or templates and, if necessary, provide

supervision of installation where fastenings or accessories are required to be built
into the work of other Sections.
.7
Use fastenings of a permanent type. Wood plugs will not be permitted.
.8
Do not use fastenings which will cause spalling or cracking of material to which
anchorage is being made.
.9
Do not use power-activated fastenings on any portion of the work unless written
acceptance for a specific use is obtained from the Engineer. Only tools of low
velocity, double guidance type are acceptable.
.10
In general, do not penetrate air and vapour barriers. Where it is proposed to use
fastenings which will penetrate air and/or vapour barriers, submit details for review
in compliance with Section 01300, indicating how the integrity of the air and
vapour barrier will be maintained.
.11
Use noncorrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing
exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in the
affected specification Section.
.12
Space anchors within their load or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive
permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not
acceptable.
.13
Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.
.14
Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is

made are not acceptable.
Protection of Work in Progress

.1
Adequately protect Work completed or in progress. Work damaged due to failure

in providing such protection is to be removed and replaced, or repaired, as directed
by the Engineer, at no increase in Contract Price.
.2
Prevent overloading of any part of the building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load
bearing structural member, unless specifically indicated without written acceptance
of Engineer.
Existing Utilities
.1
When breaking into or connecting to existing services utilities, execute Work at

times directed by local jurisdictional authorities, with a minimum of disturbance to
Work.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01600/8
December 2010
.2
PART 2
2.1

Specifications
Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are

encountered, cap off in a manner approved by local jurisdictional authorities, stake
and record location of capped service.
PRODUCTS
General Product Requirements

Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents and that are:
2.2
Complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and
details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and erects
That are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused and new at the time
of installation.
Standard Product
Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
2.3
Product Selection Procedures

Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations, and
not by previous project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the
following:
2.3.1
Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where specifications name only a single product

or manufacturer and stipulate the desired product by indicating the brand name, model
number, provide the product indicated. No substitutions shall be permitted.
2.3.2
Semi Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where specifications name two or more

products or manufacturers, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions shall be
permitted.
Where products or manufacturers are specified by name in the specifications
accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal" comply with the Contract
Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product.
2.3.3
Non-Proprietary Specifications: When the specifications list products or manufacturers

that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor
to use these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies
with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning
"substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01600/9
December 2010

Specifications
2.3.4
Descriptive Specification Requirements:

Where specifications describe a product or
assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade
name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise
complies with Contract requirements.
2.3.5
Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with

performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are
recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
Manufacture's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by
the manufacturer's certification of performance.
2.3.6
Compliance with Standards Where the specifications only require compliance within
imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards,
codes or regulations specified.
2.3.7
Visual Matching: Where specification require matching an established Sample, the

Engineer's decision shall be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and also
complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract
Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another
product category.
2.3.8
Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase of "... as
selected from manufacturer's standard colours, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase,
select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The
Engineer will select the colour, pattern and texture from the product line selected.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
Installation of Products
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of
products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately
located and aligned with other work.
Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Section 01600/10
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01630
SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Substitutions - General
.1
There is no obligation on the part of the Engineer or Employer to accept proposed

substitutions.
.2
Where the Specifications include the "or accepted alternative" clause, or as otherwise
approved by the Employer, Engineer , substitutions proposed with bid submission or after
award of Contract will be considered only under the following conditions:
.1
if the materials and products specified are not available; or
.2
if substitute materials and products to those specified, which are brought to the
attention of and considered by the Engineer as equivalent to those specified, will
result in a credit to the Contract Price; or
.3
if substitute materials and products to those specified, which are brought to the
attention of and considered by the Engineer as superior to those specified, will not
change the Contract Price; or
.4
if a material or product is specified together with a requirement for performance

and, in the opinion of the Contractor, the specified material or product will not
produce the required results; or
.5
when a substitution is otherwise advantageous to the Employer or to the execution

of the Work.
.3
Any alternative product or material utilized without acceptance from the Engineer will be
removed from the site and replaced with that specified at no extra cost to the Employer.
.4
Requests for substitutions prior to date set for receipt of bids may not be accepted.
.5
In making a substitution Contractor represents that:

.1
He has investigated substitute product and/or manufacturer and has determined that
it meets or exceeds the product criteria specified;
.2
He will make any changes to the Work necessitated by the substitution as required
for the Work to be complete in all respects;
.3
He waives claims for additional costs and time caused by substitution which may
subsequently become apparent.
Khatib and Alami
Substitutions
Section 01630/1
December 2010
1.2

Specifications
Substitutions Request
.1
For approval of products other than those specified, submit a request in writing. Requests
shall clearly define and describe the product for which review is requested. Requests are
to be accompanied by two copies of manufacturer's literature, specifications, drawings,
cuts, performance data or other information necessary to completely describe the item.
Review and acceptance by the Engineer will be in the form of written acceptance of the
alternate.
.2
Substitutions proposed by the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
.1
When proposing substitutions, submit in duplicate the material and product names
and complete specifications substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution
with the requirements of the Contract Documents including:
-
product identification;
detailed, item by item comparison between the properties and characteristics
of the specified material or product and the proposed substitution;
manufacturer's name, address and telephone number;
manufacturer's literature;
performance and test data;
reference standards;
product limitations;
samples;
list of existing installations;
changes to the Contract Time;
changes to the Contract Price.
.2
Should the proposed substitution be accepted either in part or in whole, assume

full responsibility when the substitution affects any other part of the Work.
.3
When proposing substitutions, satisfy all design conditions and other specified
requirements. Properties including but not limited to the following, as applicable,
will be considered:
Physical dimension requirements to satisfy the space limitations, static and dynamic
weight limitations, structural properties, audible noise levels, vibration generation,
interchangeability of parts or components, accessibility for maintenance, possible
removal or replacement, colours, textures and compatibility with other materials,
products, assemblies and components.
.3
Submit request together with all necessary evidence of equality and compatibility to
support the request. The amount of credit, or the additional cost involved, is to be clearly
indicated, so that adjustment to the Contract can be made.
Khatib and Alami
Substitutions
Section 01630/2
December 2010
1.3
1.4

Specifications
.4
All requests must be submitted through the Contractor who shall advise the Engineer of
all adjustments and changes necessary in the Work to accommodate the substitution. The
decisions of the Engineer as to whether the substitution proposed is acceptable is final.
.5
If no substitutions is approved, and if no provisions to the contrary have been made in the
Contract for the item in question, provide the item named in these Specifications.
.6
Should the proposed substitution be accepted either in part or in whole, assume full
responsibility when substitution affects the work of any other Section of the
Specifications.
.7
Ensure that substitutions are accommodated by space allotted for the specified materials,
products, methods or processes.
.8
Be responsible for the cost of changes in the work of all Sections necessitated by the use
of proposed substitutions.
.9
Be responsible for substitutions to methods or processes concerning such work, and

ensure that the warranties covering all work for the project are not affected.
.10
Substitutions which require changes to the Contract Documents will not be considered
unless agreement exists between the Employer and the Engineer to compensate the
Engineer for costs required to execute such changes.
Substitutions Code Requirements

.1
Ensure that proposed substitutions for materials, products, methods and processes meet
the requirements of the local Building Code, and other requirements of local
jurisdictional authorities.
.2
Ensure that proposed substitute materials, products, methods and processes do not negate
the compliance of adjacent materials, products and constructions with the requirements of
the local Building Code and other requirements of local jurisdictional authorities, to
which the proposed substitutions may be applied or attached.
.3
Obtain written approval of proposed substitutions from the local jurisdictional authorities
and submit the approval with the proposed substitution for the Engineer's consideration.
Credits Arising From Substitutions

.1
Credits arising from accepted substitutions will be credited to the Contract in such sums
as may be agreed upon between the Employer and the Contractor after being assessed by
the Engineer, and the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly. No substitutions will
be permitted without the prior written acceptance of the Engineer.
Khatib and Alami
Substitutions
Section 01630/3
December 2010
1.5

Specifications
Mechanical-Electrical Specified and Acceptable Manufacturers

.1
If materials or apparatus manufactured and/or supplied by a manufacturer named as

acceptable are used in lieu of the manufacturer specified, ensure that the substituted
material or apparatus is equivalent in performance and operating characteristics to the
specified materials or apparatus and pay costs for larger starters, additional space, larger
power feeders, and changes to associated or adjacent work. In addition, in mechanical
and electrical rooms where apparatus named as acceptable is used in lieu of specified
apparatus and the dimensions differ from the specified apparatus, prepare and submit for
approval, accurately dimensioned layouts of rooms affected.
.2
Within thirty (30) days of notice to proceed, prepare and submit to the Engineer, a neatly
typewritten list of all mechanical and electrical apparatus to be supplied. List
manufacturers in their respective categories, "AS SPECIFIED", or "ACCEPTABLE", or
"ALTERNATIVE".

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Substitutions
Section 01630/4
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01700
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
of Particular Application and other Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2
Summary
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout,
including but not limited to:
Inspection procedures.
Project record document submittal.
Operating and maintenance manual submittal.
Submittal of warranties.
Final cleaning.
1.3
Substantial Completion
1.3.1
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial

Completion, complete the following:
In the Application for Payment that coincides with, the date Substantial Completion is
claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as
substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in
these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the
Contract Sum.
If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value
of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.
Advise Employer of pending insurance change-over requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship maintenance agreements, final

certifications and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases enabling the Employer unrestricted use of the Work
and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating
certificates and similar releases.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Closeout
Section 01700/1
December 2010

Specifications
Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs,

damage or settlement survey, property survey, and similar final record
information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock and similar items.
Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Employer's operating

and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from
the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements.
Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touchup and

otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.
1.3.2
Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Engineer shall either
proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Engineer
shall prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will
be issued.
The Engineer shall repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been
substantially completed.
Results of the completed inspection shall form the basis of requirements of final
acceptance.
1.4
Final Acceptance
1.4.1
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final

acceptance and final payment, complete the following:
Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and
completed operations where required.
Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract
Sum.
Submit a certified copy of the Engineer's final inspection list of items to be completed or
corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance,
and the list shall be endorsed and dated by the Engineer.
Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
Submit a final meter readings for utilities.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Closeout
Section 01700/2
December 2010
1.4.2

Specifications
Reinspection Procedure: The Engineer will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that
the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed,
except items whose completion has been delayed under circumstances acceptable to the
Engineer.
Upon completion of reinspection, the Engineer will prepare a certificate of final
acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have
not been fulfilled, but are required for final acceptance.
If necessary, reinspection shall be repeated.
1.5
Record Document Submittals

General
Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and
loss in a secure, fire-resistant location, provide access to record documents for the
Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
1.5.1
Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of
Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where
the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which
drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop
Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract
Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to
measure and record at a later date.
Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colours to distinguish between
variations in separate categories of the Work.
Mark new information that is important to the Employer, but was not shown on Contract
Drawings or Shop Drawings.
Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.
Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover
sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.
1.5.2
Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including
addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents modifications issued in
printed form during construction.
Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in
comparison with the text of the Specification and modifications. Give particular attention
to substitutions, selection of options, information on concealed elements that cannot
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Closeout
Section 01700/3
December 2010

Specifications
otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing
information and Product Data.
Upon completion of the Work, submit record specifications to the Engineer for the
Employer's records.
1.5.3
Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these
documents to show any variations in actual Work performed in comparison with
information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site, and from the
manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to
concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned
later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record drawings
and Specifications.
Upon completion of Work, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Engineer for
the Employer's records.
1.5.4
Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to the date of Substantial Completion, the
Contractor will meet at the site with the Engineer and the Employer's personnel to
determine which of the submitted Samples are to be transmitted to the Employer for record
purposes. Coordinate with the Employer for delivery to the Employer's Sample storage
area.
1.5.5
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements

of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of
the Work. Immediately prior to the date of Substantial Completion, complete
miscellaneous records and place in good order, identified properly and bind or file, ready
for continued use and reference. Submit item to the Engineer for the Employer's records.
1.5.6
Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of,
manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 50 mm, 3-ring
vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate
identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of
information:
Emergency instructions.
Spare parts list.
Copies of warranties.
Wiring diagrams. & Recommended "turn-around" cycles.
Inspection procedures.
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
Fixture lamping schedule.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Closeout
Section 01700/4
December 2010
PART 2

Specifications
PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
Closeout Procedures
Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that
requires regular maintenance to meet with the Employer's personnel to provide
instructions in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's
representative if installers are not experienced in operation procedures. Include a detailed
review of the following items:
Maintenance manuals.
Record documents.
Spare parts and materials.
Tools.
Lubricants.
Fuels.
Identification systems.
Control sequences.
Hazards.
Cleaning.
Warranties and bonds.
Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
As part of instructions for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:
3.2
Start-up.
Shut-down.
Emergency operations.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
Safety procedures.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Effective energy utilization.
Final Cleaning
General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included
in Section "Temporary Facilities".
3.2.1
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean
each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning
and maintenance program or otherwise required in the Contract Document.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Closeout
Section 01700/5
December 2010

Specifications
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

Certification of Substantial Completion.
Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free
of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their
original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted
surfaces.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and
other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures
and lamps.
Clean the Site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other
foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stain, spills and other
foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth
even-textured surface.
3.2.2
Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection
of the Work during construction.
3.2.3
Compliance: Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the
Employer's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into
drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of it in a lawful
manner.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Project Closeout
Section 01700/6
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01710
CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
Section Includes
.1
Progressive Project cleaning.
.2
Final cleaning.
.3
contained therein are an assessment of the work, which should not be presumed to be
complete.
Related Sections
.1
1.3
Progressive Project Cleaning

.1
Maintain the Work and access to the Work in a tidy condition and free from the
accumulation of waste products and debris.
.2
At reasonable intervals during progress of work, as directed by the Engineer, clean up

site, building and access, and dispose of waste materials, rubbish and debris.
.3
Provide containers and locate on site for collection of waste materials, rubbish and debris.
.4
Provide containers for waste and remove waste resulting from Employer's and building
finishings, fixtures and equipment.
.5
Sort according to environmental and hazardous waste local by-laws, remove from site
daily in approved containers to approved disposal sites. Do not allow waste materials,
rubbish and debris to accumulate and become unsightly or hazardous.
.6
Lower waste materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not
drop or throw materials from heights. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other
contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces
or adjacent properties. Sprinkle dusty debris with water frequently.
.7
Conduct clean-up and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and
anti-pollution laws. Burning or burying of rubbish and waste materials on the site is not
permitted. Do not dispose of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint
thinner) in storm or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways. Remove waste
materials, rubbish and debris from the site and legally dispose of at public or private
dumping areas off the Employer's property.
Khatib and Alami
Cleaning
Section 01710/1
December 2010
1.4

Specifications
.8
Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue
vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until the building is ready for acceptance by the
Employer.
.9
Maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.
10.
Clean curtain wall and windows, and frames, at reasonable intervals to inhibit glass
etching and damage to metal finishes.
Final Cleaning
.1
Upon the Completion of the Contract, remove surplus products, tools, construction
machinery and equipment not required for the performance of the remaining work.
Remove waste products and debris and leave the work clean and suitable for occupancy
by the Employer unless otherwise specified.
.2
Make arrangements with and obtain and pay for permits from local jurisdictional
authorities for disposal of waste and debris.
.3
Carry out final cleaning specified herein and leave the building in condition to meet the
acceptance of the Engineer, and Employer. Do not commence final cleaning until
authorized by the Engineer. This work includes, without being limited to, the cleaning of
floors, walls, windows, glass, doors, ceilings, fixtures and equipment, the removal of
debris and all work required on the interior and exterior to complete the building and site
cleaning.
.4
Clean floors in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
.5
Remove stains, paint, grease, oil, temporary protection and covers, mortar droppings,
labels, caulking and sealant compounds, and dirt. Touch-up damaged painted areas.
Dust and polish surfaces and items, including without being limited to, walls, ceilings,
doors, windows, glass, partitions, fixtures, hardware, Mechanical and Electrical
equipment, in manner acceptable to Engineer.
.6
Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain
enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace
broken, scratched or disfigured glass.
.7
Replace broken and scratched glass.
.8
Clean roofs of debris. Sweep and wash clean paved areas outside the building. Rake
clean landscaped areas.
.9
Replace heating, ventilating and air conditioning filters if units were operated during
construction. Vacuum clean ducts, fans, blowers and coils.
Khatib and Alami
Cleaning
Section 01710/2
December 2010

Specifications
.10
Ensure that the inside of air handling systems are clean and free from dust, and debris
when building is turned over to Employer.
.11
Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by the manufacturer.
.12
Vacuum out and wipe clean electrical and signal panels, switchboards, transformers and
other electrical equipment and elevator and escalator equipment.
.13
Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and
operation.
.14
Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces.
.15
Remove dirt, droppings and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces.
.16
Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, areaways, sunken wells.
.17
Sweep and wash clean paved areas.
.18
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or replace filters of

mechanical equipment.
.19
Clean roofs, downspouts, and drainage systems.
.20
Use experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Use only cleaning
materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. Use cleaning materials
only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
.21
Completion of the Contract shall not be attained until the Contractor has removed surplus
products, tools, construction machinery and equipment. He shall also have removed
waste products and debris.

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Cleaning
Section 01710/3
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section Includes
.1
Record documents, samples, specifications.
.2
Equipment and systems.
.3
Product Data, materials and finishes, and related information.
.4
Operation and maintenance data manuals.
.5
Warranties submittal requirements.
Related Sections
.1
Section 01050 - Field Engineering: Site survey after construction.
.2
Section 01300 - Submittals: Shop drawings, samples, manufacturers' instructions,

photographs.
.3
Section 01310 - Construction Schedule: Total project schedule.
.4
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing and inspection reports.
.5
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
.6
Section 01740 - Warranties.
.7
Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance

data.
Submission
.1
Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of

described products.
.2
Submit one copy of complete volumes in final form fifteen (15) days prior to Substantial
Completion.
.3
Copy will be returned with Engineer's comments.
.4
Revise content of documents as required prior to final submission.
.5
Two (2) weeks prior to Substantial Completion, submit to the Engineer three (3) final
copies of operating and maintenance manuals.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01720/1
December 2010
1.4
1.5

Specifications
Format
.1
Organize data in the form of an instructional manual.
.2
Binders: Commercial quality, hard cover, as specified in this Section.
.3
When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.
.4
Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title as specified in this Section.
.5
Arrange content by Specifications Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents.
.6
Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.
.7
Test: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on heavy weight paper.
.8
Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger
drawings to size of text pages.
Contents Each Volume

.1
Table of Contents: Provide title of project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Employer, Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of
products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
.2
For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of
subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts,
with notation as to which portions of the Contract have been provided by them.
.3
Product Data: Complete listing of materials, products and equipment including serial
numbers, manufacturer's names, and sources of supply. Mark each sheet to clearly
identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete
inapplicable information.
.4
Description of each system, with the description of each major component of the systems.
.5
Operation and installation instructions for each assembly, component and system.
Submit maintenance and operation instructions which are the manufacturer's latest
published editions at the date of submission.
.6
Lists of spare parts for each assembly, component and system complete with names,
addresses and telephone numbers of suppliers.
.7
Operating curves of mechanical and electrical equipment.
.8
Complete cleaning and maintenance instructions for all material, products and surfaces.
Include warnings of harmful cleaning and maintenance and practices.
.9
A lubrication schedule of all equipment.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01720/2
December 2010
1.6

Specifications
.10
Page-size Valve Tag Schedule and Flow Diagrams.
.11
Water treatment procedures and tests.
.12
Final balancing reports for the mechanical systems.
.13
Final reviewed shop drawings.
.14
Copies of all warranties, properly executed.
.15
Ensure that binders contain the name of the Contractor and the date of Substantial
Completion of the Contract.
.16
Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of

equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.
.17
Typewritten Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of

instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. Use consistent
terminology.
Record Documents and Samples

.1
Maintain at the site for Employer, one record copy of:

.1
Contract Drawings.
.2
Specifications.
.3
Addenda.
.4
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
.5
Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
.6
Field test records.
.7
Inspection certificates.
.8
Manufacturers' certificates.
.2
Store Record Documents and Samples in Field Office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage.
.3
Label and file in accordance with Section number listings in Table of Contents of this
Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed
letters.
.4
Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record
Documents for construction purposes.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01720/3
December 2010
.5
1.7

Specifications
Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by Engineer.
Recording Actual Site Conditions

.1
Record information on a set of black line white print opaque drawings, and in a copy of
the Project Manual, provided by Engineer.
.2
Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for
recording information.
.3
Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal work until
required information is recorded.
.4
Contract Drawings and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction, including:
.5
.6
.1
Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
.2
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
.3
Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and

accessible features of construction.
.4
Field changes of dimension and detail.
.5
Changes made by change orders.
.6
Details not on original Contract Drawings.
.7
References to related shop drawings and modifications.
Specifications: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:

.1
Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed,
particularly optional items and substitute items.
.2
Changes made by Addenda and change orders.
Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field

test records, required by individual Specifications Sections.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01720/4
December 2010
1.8

Specifications
As-Built Record Documents

.1
Obtain from the Engineer and pay cost for one copy of Specifications and one set of white
prints of the Contract Drawings at the commencement of Work, and, prior to the date of
Substantial Completion, one set of reproducible transparencies of Contract Drawings, for
record purposes.
.2
As Work progresses, clearly mark in a neat and legible form with red pen on
Specifications and drawing white prints all significant changes and deviations from the
Contract Drawings and Specifications caused by site conditions, Job Instructions and
Change Orders. Changes and deviations marked on record drawings and specifications
by reference to Job Instructions, Change Orders and other documents are not acceptable.
Where more than one product is named in the Specifications, or approved later, indicate
the product which was installed.
.3
Print lettering and numbers in size to match original. Lines may be drawn free hand
provided they are neat and accurate. Add "AS-BUILT RECORD" at each drawing title
block and on the title page of the Specifications.
.4
Record the following changes and deviations on drawing white prints:
.5
.1
Depths of various elements of foundation in relationship to the first floor level.
.2
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
.3
Field changes of dimensions and detail.
.4
Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and

accessible features of construction.
.5
Other significant deviations and changes which are concealed in construction and
cannot be identified by visual inspection.
.6
Changes made by Change Orders.
.7
Details not on original Contract Drawings.
.8
References to related shop drawings and Specifications.
Show actual locations of the following on drawing white prints:

.1
Access doors and panels.
.2
Inverts of services at key points within the building, at points where entering and
leaving the building, and at the property lines. Dimension services in relation to the
structure and building grid lines.
.3
Ductwork, piping, conduit, mechanical and electrical equipment and associated

work.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01720/5
December 2010

Specifications
.4
.6
1.9
Concealed piping, conduit and equipment, including such items provided for future
use.
Record the following information on the specifications:

.1
Products, materials and other items selected from those specified.
.2
Approved substitutions and accepted alternatives.
.3
Other approved changes and deviations to items specified.
.7
Have record white prints and record specifications available for inspection at all times.
.8
Prior to the date of Substantial Completion, allowing sufficient time for review, clearly,
neatly and accurately transfer information from the marked-up drawing white prints to the
reproducible transparencies. Print lettering and numbers in size to match original. Lines
may be drawn free hand, provided they are neat and accurate. Add "AS-BUILT
RECORD" at each drawing title block. Should extensive changes and deviations to a
drawing make the information illegible, re-draft the changed areas as required.
.9
Submit drawing white prints made from reproducible transparencies containing record
information for review, as specified for shop drawings with soft copy on CD.
.10
Submit finalized record drawing transparencies and record specifications to the Engineer
two (2) weeks prior to the date of Substantial Completion with soft copy on CD.
Operating and Maintenance Instructions and Data Book Manuals

.1
Provide operating and maintenance instructions data manuals in both Arabic and English
identified on the binding edges as "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS AND DATA BOOK MANUALS, for SAUDI RAILWAY (SAR)
PROJECT RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA
.2
Prepare manuals specifically for the Project. Standard manuals may be incorporated only
if edited to delete inappropriate and irrelevant text and to provide required information.
.3
Arrange manuals in volumes in the order and organization of the Specification. provide
tables of contents and indexes for each volume, and cover and bind them as approved by
Engineer and Employer.
.4
Protect typewritten, drafted and photographic pages with clear plastic sleeves.
.5
Package manuals in suitable transfer cases indexed and marked for each division of the
Work.
.6
Submit manuals with signed certificate attached which states that the manuals are
complete and accurate.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01720/6
December 2010
.7

Specifications
Include in Manuals:
.1
Full information and instructions for operating and maintaining each item of
operating equipment under:
.1
.2
.3
.8
normal
standby
emergency operating conditions.
2.
Maintenance requirements for all mechanical systems and other products.
.3
Original copies of warranties which extend beyond maintenance period.
.4
Schematic diagrams of control systems.
.5
Circuit directories for each electric and communications panel board.
.6
Valve tags and schedule correlated to system diagrams.
.7
Complete keying schedules correlated to architectural Drawings and Schedules.
.8
Paint colour schedules and samples.
.9
Product names and sources of supply of all proprietary products incorporated in

the Works.
.10
Master equipment list.
.11
Recommended spare parts list.
.12
Directory of all suppliers and Subcontractors including name of firm, address,

telex or fax and telephone numbers, and a description of the work for which the
firm has been responsible.
.13
Additional data required by various Sections of the Specification.
System Level Procedures:

.1
Khatib and Alami
Include system level information in the manuals concerning procedures for the
operation and maintenance of equipment which is to be performed by operators or
technicians. This information shall consist of the following as may be applicable.
.1
Theory of operation: A description of the system theory of operation,

including operating parameters, interfaces with other systems, major
equipment. and their physical and operating characteristics.
.2
Pre-operation Commissioning: A description of the steps or tasks necessary to

completely check out the system and prepare it for operation following
installation and a shutdown coordination.

Section 01720/7
December 2010
.9

Specifications
.3
Preventive Maintenance: A description of all maintenance to be performed on

a periodic basis: e.g., inspection, lubrication, calibration and parts
replacement.
.4
Fault Isolation: A description of the procedures to be followed in determining

the cause of a failure or malfunction. Fault identification shall be based on
both monitoring devices and visual observations. Fault isolation shall be
arranged in progressive order with the most likely fault listed first.
.5
Maintenance: This information shall include all maintenance that can be

performed on the installed equipment (including removal and replacement)
and repairs that can be performed with the equipment installed.
Vendor Data:
.1
Khatib and Alami
Contractor shall obtain information from vendors of equipment for inclusion in the
manuals as follows:
.1
Manufacturers' brochures, catalogues, charts and performance curves.
.2
Installation, operation and service instructions and drawings.
.3
Service bulletins.
.4
Special drawings such as wiring diagrams, systems schematic, and pneumatic

and liquid flow diagrams.
.5
Illustrated parts breakdown.
.6
Performance data; e.g., maximum, minimum and recommended speeds,

capacities, voltage, amperage, wattage, pressure, flow rate, pump curves,
pressure drop, temperatures, and other related operating information.
.7
Operating procedures including emergency operating procedures.
.8
Preventive maintenance and inspection requirements and procedures.
.9
Removal and installation procedures.
.10
Disassembly and assembly procedures.
.11
Calibration instructions, including points of application, frequency, method of

calibration, and special tools required.
.12
Troubleshooting procedures.
.13
Repair and overhaul instructions.
.14
Scale and corrosion control.
.15
Lubrication instructions, including points of application, frequency, types of

lubricants and methods of lubrication.

Section 01720/8
December 2010
.10
.11

Specifications
Cleaning instructions.
.17
Recommended spare parts, special tools and test equipment.
Maintenance Criteria:
.1
The basic maintenance criteria for facility and system design is to ensure that all
critical preventive maintenance activities may be accomplished without interference
to operations. The design shall emphasize accessibility, ease of equipment or
component removal and replacement, visual indications of components
deterioration, and localization of failures. Where practical, subsystems shall be
configured so that failed components may be removed and operable replacements
installed. Requirements for repair-in-place activities shall be minimized.
.2
All like assemblies having identical characteristics shall be interchangeable without

altering the unit or adjacent equipment, except for adjustment. Assemblies shall be
interchangeable without selection for fit or performance, and without modification.
Master Equipment List:

.1
.12
.16
Include a master equipment list in the manuals which shall detail all items of
equipment which are installed in the permanent Work. Provide the list in a format
approved by the Engineer and Employer. The information required for each item
on the list shall be as follows:
.1
Tag Number.
.2
Description Nomenclature: Description data such as dimensions and

operating parameters shall be included where appropriate.
.3
Installed Location.
.4
Applicable Specification Section/paragraph reference.
.5
Name and address of manufacturer (supplier).
.6
Model, serial number and other identification: Contractor shall enter

information required to positively identify the equipment.
.7
Remarks: Contractor shall enter the manner in which any standard catalogue
or normal delivery item has been modified or is unique.
Design Criteria Sheets:

.1
A single design criteria sheet shall be prepared for each separate equipment item.
Identical items can be on the same sheet with separate tag or identifying numbers
listed. The criteria sheet shall present in summary from the operating
environments, functional requirements, design requirements, and reference
Khatib and Alami

Section 01720/9
December 2010

Specifications
Drawings and Specifications for each specific piece of equipment. The format of
the sheets shall be as approved by The Engineer.
.13
Guarantees and Warranties:

.1
1.10
1.11
Equipment Identification Tags

1.
Provide for each item of equipment a plastic, or anodized aluminum, or stainless steel
identification tag securely attached in a conspicuous location on or near the item of
equipment.
.2
Indicate on each Tag:

.1
Tag number.
.2
Name of manufacturer of the equipment.
.3
Serial number and model number of the equipment.
.4
Date of manufacture of the equipment.
.5
Other information that the manufacturer may deem necessary to completely identify
the equipment.
.3
Permanently mark tags with stamped, embossed or engraved text shall be dual language
in Arabic and English.
.4
Secure tags by wire, self-tapping screws or rivets as suitable. Epoxy adhesive shall be
used only if approved by Engineer.
Distribution System Diagrams

.1
1.12
Include original copies of specified guarantees and warranties and standard

guarantees and warranties provided by manufacturers of products properly certified
by the issuing authority and addressed to the Employer. Provide Guaranty Bonds in
favour of the Employer, where specified.
Prior to the date of Substantial Completion, submit framed single line diagrams of the
electrical distribution systems.
Manual for Building Fabric Maintenance Purposes

.1
Prepare manuals for maintenance of the building fabric generally in addition to manuals
prepared for equipment.
.2
Prepare manuals specifically for the Project. Standard manuals may be incorporated only
if edited to delete inappropriate and irrelevant text.
.3
Include in manual for each material and surface type:

.1
Khatib and Alami
Basic cleaning methods and materials.

Section 01720/10
December 2010
1.13

Specifications
.2
Cleaning frequency required.
.3
Methods for repairing minor damage.
Materials and Finishes

.1
Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalogue
number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for
re-ordering custom manufactured products.
.2
Provide instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental
agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
.3
Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products:

Include manufacturer's
recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental
agents and methods, and recommend schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
4.
Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications Sections.

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami

Section 01720/11
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Conditions of Particular Application and other Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2
Summary
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties by the
Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and
special warranties.
"Warranty" is an assurance by the Contractor or manufacturer that the materials or goods
are as represented or will be as promised for the duration of satisfactory performance.
1.3
Related Sections
Division-1 Section 01300 Submittals" specifies procedures for submitting warranties.
Division - 1 Section 01700 "Contract Closeout" specifies contract closeout procedures.
Division-2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.4
Disclaimers and Limitations

Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on products warranties do not relieve the
Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products.
1.5
1.5.1
Definitions
Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual
manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to
the Employer.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Warranties
Section 01740/1
December 2010

Specifications
1.5.2
Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide
greater rights for the Employer.
1.5.3
Commencement Date The commencement of warranties shall be the date of substantial

completion.
1.6
Warranty Requirements
1.6.1
Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction,
remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must
be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.
1.6.2
Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been
corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The
reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for
depreciation.
1.6.3
Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed,
replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the
Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding
defective work regardless of whether the Employer has benefited from use of the work
through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
1.6.4
Employers Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Employer are in addition to

implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies
otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty period shall not be interpreted as
limitations on the time in which the Employer can enforce such other duties, obligations,
rights, or remedies.
The Employer reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with
warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the
work or part of the work, the Employer reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work,
until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such
commitments are willing to do so.
1.7
Submittals:
1.7.1
Submit written warranties to the Engineer prior to the date certified for Substantial
Completion. If the Engineer Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a
commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the
work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the
Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Warranties
Section 01740/2
December 2010

Specifications
When a designated portion of the Works is completed and occupied or used by the
Employer, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period,
submit properly executed warranties to the Engineer within 15 days of completion of that
designated portion of the work.
1.7.2
When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, a subcontractor, supplier or

manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains
appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a
draft to the Employer, through the Engineer, for approval prior to final execution.
1.7.3
Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile 2 copies of each required warranty

properly executed by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize
the warranty documents into an orderly sequence bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty,
commercial-quality, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to
accommodate contents, and sized to receive paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone
number of the installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES", project title or name, and name of the Contractor.
When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide
additional copies of each warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
List of Warranties
Schedule: Provide warranties on products and installations as specified in the
specification sections.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Warranties
Section 01740/3
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01750
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section Includes
.1
Spare parts.
.2
Maintenance materials.
.3
Special tools.
Related Sections
.1
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
.2
Section 01720 - Project Record Documents.
.3
.4
Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance

data.
Quality
.1
Spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided shall be new, not damaged
or defective, and of the same quality and manufacture as Products provided in the Work.
.2
If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.
.3
Defective Products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products

at own expense.
Transportation
.1
1.5
Pay all costs of customs and transportation.
Storage, and Handling and Protection

.1
Store spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools in a manner to prevent damage,
or deterioration.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01750/1
December 2010
1.6

Specifications
.2
Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact.
.3
Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.
.4
Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room.
.5
Remove and replace damaged Products at own expense and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Spare Parts
.1
Provide spare parts in quantities specified in individual Specification Sections.
.2
Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in the Work.
.3
Deliver to site, place and store as directed.
.4
Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to the Engineer. Include
listings in Operating and Maintenance Instructions and Data Book Manual specified in
Section 01720.
.5
Provide all spare parts required for installation, testing and commissioning of equipment
to ensure its complete and proper functioning.
.6
Six months prior to completion, provide a list of recommended spare parts in a format
approved by Engineer. The list shall include spare parts as recommended by the
equipment vendor, which will support the maintaining of equipment for a one year and a
two year period, and shall include the following information for each item of equipment.
.1
Equipment tag number and description/nomenclature.
.2
Component/part, description/nomenclature:
1.
.3
Service Life:
.1
.4
The anticipated operation of the component or part until it wears out or is

replaced. Service life shall be entered in cycles of operation (CY), operating
hours (OP HRS), or installed hours (INST HRS).
Spare/Quantity/Unit:
.1
Khatib and Alami
The descriptions/nomenclatures of all recommended spare parts.
The quantity of spares recommended by the manufacturer for a 12 month

operating period.

Section 01750/2
December 2010

Specifications
.5
Manufacturer (Supplier):
.1
.6
Unit Price:
.1
.7
1.7
1.8
Manufacturer's identification number for the recommended spare part. This

may be a part number, catalogue number, or drawing number.
Remarks:
.1
.10
Estimates of time between manufacturer's or supplier's receipt of purchase

order, and delivery of spare part to the Engineer.
Part Number:
.1
.9
The catalogue price per item.
Procurement Lead Time:

.1
.8
The spare part manufacturer's or supplier's name and address.
Explanatory comments as required.
Engineer will select items from a list of spare parts and issue instructions
accordingly through the Engineer. Contractor will be compensated in accordance
with a variation order.
Maintenance Materials (Extra Stock)

.1
Provide maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual

Specification Sections.
.2
Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in the Work.
.3
Securely package and deliver to site, place and store as directed by the Engineer.
.4
Section 01720.
.5
Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
Special Tools and Test Equipment Required for Equipment

.1
Provide for each equipment item tool and test equipment which is designed specifically
for the equipment, and tools and equipment not normally available to maintenance
personnel but which are required for operation, maintaining and repair of the equipment.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01750/3
December 2010
.2

Specifications
Provide with special tools and test equipment a list of the tools and equipment supplied
including the following information for each item:
.1
Facility or system: name: major system: sub system.
.2
Facility or system equipment item: nomenclature: reference designator.
.3
Special tools/test equipment: nomenclature: purpose: manufacturer's part number or

drawing number: manufacturer's name and address: quantity recommended by
manufacturer: unit price: recommended source of supply: estimate lead time.
.4
Other pertinent data (e.g., calibration tolerance or storage requirements).
.3
Provide special tools in quantities specified in individual Specification Sections.
.4
Provide items with tags identifying their function and equipment to which they are
associated.
.5
Deliver to site, place and store as directed by Engineer.
.6
Section 01720.

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami

Section 01750/4
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 01770
TAKE-OVER PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Section Includes
.1
1.2
1.3
Administrative procedures preceding preliminary and final inspections of the Work, for
"takeover, or "turnover" to Employer, of the completed work.
Turnover (Takeover)
1
In order to provide for an orderly transition period, Contractor shall complete areas and
systems on or prior to the milestone dates indicated in the schedules included with this
Section. Contractor shall include in his Contract price all costs involved to ensure such
practical completion dates are achieved. No additional compensation shall be paid by
Employer to achieve such dates.
.2
The late finish dates for partial completion of areas and systems are established in
calendar weeks prior to Time for Completion established in the Contract.
.3
System completion shall mean practically complete, tested, commissioned and

operational in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, ready to start specialized
training of Employer's designated personnel.
.4
Area completion shall mean practical completion with all non-conformance listed items
satisfactorily repaired, touched-up or replaced as necessary.
Inspection and Declaration Procedures

.1
Engineer Inspection: The Engineer, Inspectors, Contractor and all Subcontractors shall
conduct an inspection of the Work, identify deficiencies and defects; repair as required to
conform to Contract Documents. Notify the Engineer in writing of satisfactory
completion of the Engineer's Inspection and that corrections have been made. Request a
Engineer's Inspection.
.2
Engineer Inspection: Engineer will perform an inspection of the Work to identify obvious
defects or deficiencies. The Contractor shall correct Work accordingly.
.3
Completion: Submit a written certificate that the following have been performed:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Khatib and Alami
Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with the Contract
Documents,
Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed,
Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully
operational,
Certificates required by appropriate local jurisdictional authorities have been
submitted.
Operation of systems have been demonstrated to Employer's personnel, and
Take Over Procedures

Section 01770/1
December 2010

Specifications
.6
1.4
Work is complete and ready for Final Inspection.
.4
Final Inspection: When the items noted above are complete, request a final inspection of
the Work by the Employer, Engineer. If Work is deemed incomplete by the Employer,
Engineer, complete the outstanding items and request a reinspection.
.5
Declaration of Substantial Completion: When the Employer, Engineer consider

deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of the Contract
have been substantially completed, make application for certificate of Substantial
Completion.
.6
Commencement of Lien and Warranty Periods: The date of the Employer's acceptance of
the submitted declaration of Substantial Completion shall be the date for commencement
for the warranty period and commencement of the lien period unless required otherwise
by the lien legislation of the local jurisdictional authorities.
.7
Declaration of Total Completion: When the Employer, Engineer consider final

deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of the Contract
have been totally performed, make application for Completion of Contract. If Work is
deemed incomplete by the Employer, Engineer, complete the outstanding items and
request a reinspection.
FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS

.1
Submit final statement of accounting to the Engineer.
.2
Statement shall reflect all adjustments.

.1
.2
Original Contract Sum.

Additions and deductions resulting from:
-
.3
.4
.5
previous change orders,

cash allowances,
unit prices,
other adjustments,
deductions for uncorrected work,
penalties and bonuses, if applicable,
deductions for liquidated damages, if applicable,
deductions for reinspection payments.
Total Contract Sum as adjusted.

Previous payments.
Sum remaining due.
.3
The Engineer will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to the
Contract Sum not previously made by the previous Change Orders.
.4
Final Payment: Following completion of the lien period, submit claim for final payment
in accordance with the Contract documents.
Khatib and Alami

Section 01770/2
December 2010
1.5
Reinspection
.1
1.6

Specifications
Should status of the Work require reinspection by the Engineer due to failure of Work to
comply with the Contractor's claims for readiness to receive inspection, the Employer
will deduct the amount of the Engineer compensation for reinspection services from
payment to the Contractor.
Lock Cylinders
.1
When the Work is completed to the Engineer satisfaction and is ready for Employer's
occupancy, replace all lock cylinders to exterior locations with final cylinders and deliver
to the Engineer personally or by registered mail, all keys to such cylinders together with
all other keys for the entire Work. Tag keys and list as to location.

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami

Section 01770/3
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
1.2
Description of Work
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required
for earthwork as indicated on drawings and specified herein
A.
The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Backfilling.
Excavation and backfilling of trenches for utilities.
Reference Standards
Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the American
Society for Testing and Materials Specification (ASTM), the Specifications of the
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) or
other equivalent standards and sound practice.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
Test Reports: Submit 2 copies of the following reports directly to the Engineer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4.2.
1.4.3.
Test reports on borrow material.

Field density test reports.
One optimum moisture content maximum density curve for each type of soil
encountered.
Other tests and materials certificates as required.
Schedule
1.
Submit detailed excavation procedures for Engineer's approval. Indicate the

schedule for approximate timing of excavation sequence.
2.
Approval shall be obtained prior to any excavation.
Sheeting and Shoring: If sheeting and shoring is used, submit drawings indicating details
of installation for approval. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/1
December 2010

Specifications
1.5
Quality Control
1.5.1
Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
1.5.2
Conflicting Requirements: In the event of conflict between pertinent codes and

regulations and the requirements of the referenced standards of these specifications,
the provisions of the more stringent shall govern.
1.5.3
Testing and Inspection Service

1.
The Contractor shall engage the services of a testing laboratory to include testing
soil materials proposed for use in the work and field facilities for quality control
testing during earthwork and site grading operations. Survey showing locations of
soil samples to be taken and the samples of soil materials shall be furnished to the
testing service by the Contractor.
2.
Retain and pay for the services of a testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer to
perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control during site grading
operations. Furnish survey showing locations of soil samples to be taken and the
samples of soil materials.
3.
Test reports must be signed by a licensed engineer.
4.
Tests for Proposed Soil Materials

a.
Test soil materials proposed for use in the work and promptly submit test
result reports.
b.
Provide one optimum moisture content maximum density curve for each type
of soil encountered in sub-grade and fills. Determine maximum densities in
accordance with ASTM D1557.
c.
The testing service will determine the suitability of materials to be used as

fill.
d.
For borrow materials, perform a mechanical analysis (AASHTO-T88) and

plasticity index (AASHTO-T9 1). Moisture-density curve (AASHTO T180
or ASTM D 1557-78).
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/2
December 2010

Specifications
1.6
Project Conditions
1.6.1
Subsurface Exploration Data
1.6.2
1.
The data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations

or warranties of the accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly
understood that the Employer will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn there from by the Contractor. The data are made available for
the convenience of the Contractor.
2.
Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made at no cost
to the Employer.
Existing Utilities
1.
Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work before starting

earthwork operations. Where utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate
means of protection during earthwork operations.
2.
Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered

during excavation, consult the utility Employer and Engineer immediately for
directions. Cooperate with the Employer and public and private utility companies
in keeping their respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged
utilities to the satisfaction of the utility Employer.
3.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the
Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by the Engineer and then only
after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. Demolish and
remove from the site underground utilities indicated to be removed.
1.6.3
Explosive: The use of explosives is not permitted.
1.6.4
Protection
1.
Barricade open excavations made as a part of earthwork operations and post with
warning lights.
2.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from damages
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earthwork operations.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/3
December 2010
PART 2

Specifications
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Soil Definitions
1.
Satisfactory Soil Materials: Fill, embankment, backfill and sub-grade.

a. Building Lines of Structures: The requirements for fill, structural fill,
embankment, and backfill within the building lines of structures, beneath
appurtenant structures, and beneath abutting paved areas are specified in
Section 02225 "Excavation, Filling and Backfilling for Buildings."
b. Paved Areas: Fill, embankment, and backfill beneath paved areas and within
a distance of 10 feet outside these paved areas shall be those complying with
the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) Designation M145, Soil Classification Groups A-1 (GC, SQ,
A-2, (GF, SF) and A-3 (GW, GP, SW, SP) or combinations thereof, properly
worked to obtain optimum moisture and compaction.
c. Other Areas: Fill, embankment, and backfill in other areas shall be those
materials complying with the American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Designation M145, Soil Classification
Groups A-1 (GC, SQ, A-2 (GF, SF) and A-3 (GW, GP, SW, SP), and may
also include A-4 (ML, CL, OL) or combinations thereof, properly worked to
obtain optimum moisture and compaction.
2.
Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: Fill, Embankment and Backfill

a.
Unsatisfactory materials for fill, embankment, and backfill within the

building lines of structures, beneath appurtenant structures, and beneath
paved areas, and in other areas shall be those materials not meeting the
requirements of the Satisfactory Materials as defined herein within these
areas, respectively.
b.
Building Lines of Structures: The requirements for the sub-grade within the
building lines of structures, beneath appurtenant structures, and beneath
abutting paved areas are specified in Section 02220 "Building Excavation
and Fill."
c.
Paved Areas: Unsatisfactory materials for the sub-grade beneath paved areas
and within a distance of 3 m outside these paved areas shall be those
complying with the American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Designation M145, Soil Classification
Groups A-4 (ML, CL). A-5 (ME), A-6 (CL, CH), A-7 (CL, CH, OH) and A-8
(PT) or combinations thereof
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/4
December 2010
2.1.2.

Specifications
d.
Other Areas: Unsatisfactory materials for the sub-grade in other areas shall
consist of soils specified in Paragraph "Unsatisfactory Materials, Paved
Areas."
e.
Unsatisfactory materials also including manmade refuse or backfills for

previous construction.
3.
Cohesion less Soil Materials: Cohesion less soil materials includes gravels, sandgravel mixtures, sands and gravelly-sands.
4.
Cohesive Soil Materials: Cohesive soil materials include clayey and silty gravels,
sand-clay mixtures, gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, and sand-silt
mixtures, clays, silts, and very fine sands.
Soil Materials
1.
Backfill and Fill Materials

a. Satisfactory soil materials for backfill and fill shall be free of rock or gravel
larger than 50 mm in any dimension, debris, waste, vegetable, and other
deleterious matter.
b. Use excavated or borrow material that has been sampled, tested and certified
as satisfactory soil material.
2.
Borrow Material
a. Borrow material shall be certified satisfactory and selected to meet the
requirements and conditions of the particular fill or embankment for which it
is to be used.
b. Approved borrow materials shall be obtained from borrow areas located
outside the limits of Employer-controlled land at the Contractor's expense
and responsibility.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/5
December 2010

Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure
proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site
conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
3.2.1
Examine the Contract Drawings and Specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this section.
3.2.2
Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.
3.3
SCHEDULE
3.3.1
In no case shall excavated sub-grade be exposed to inclement weather. Sub-grade, once

excavated, shall receive work as soon as practicable.
3.3.2
Sub-grade that has become softened and disturbed and is defined as unsatisfactory shall
be removed as herein specified and replaced to required elevations with porous fill. Subgrade that has become unsatisfactory due to the Contractor's negligence shall be replaced
at no additional cost to the Employer.
3.4
EXCAVATION
3.4.1
Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of materials encountered when

establishing the required grade elevations.
3.4.2.
1.
Excavated and filling operations shall be performed in a manner and sequence that
will provide positive drainage.
2.
No excavation material shall be disposed of in such a manner as to endanger a

partly finished structure, impair the appearance of efficiency of any structure, or be
detrimental to the completed work in any way.
Excavation for Trenches

a.
Excavate trenches for pipes to a depth approximately 75 mm below invert

elevations in earth and 200 mm below invert elevations in rock and add broken
stone or gravel fill to bring bottom of trench to required elevation. Trench width
shall be 600 mm wider than outside diameter of pipe or conduit. Where two or
more pipes are to be laid in same trench, carry machine excavation only to depth
required for highest pipe and hand excavate for lower pipes so not to disturb
bearing for higher pipes. For conduit, excavate to underside of concrete duct bank.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/6
December 2010
3.4.3
3.4.4

Specifications
b.
Bottom trimming of trenches shall be done by the Installer of piping and conduits
and is described in other Specification Sections.
c.
Coordinate trenching, pipe and conduit laying, and backfilling operations to keep
open trenching to minimum.
Ditches. Gutters and Channels

a.
Excavation of ditches, gutters and channel changes shall be accomplished by

cutting accurately to the cross sections grades, and elevations.
b.
Care shall be taken not to excavate ditches and gutters below grades shown.
Excessive open ditch or gutter excavation shall be backfilled with satisfactory
thoroughly compacted material or with suitable stone or cobble to grades shown at
no additional cost to the Owner.
c.
Maintain excavations free of leaves, brush, sticks, trash and other debris until final
acceptance of the work.
Drainage Structures
a.
Excavations shall be made accurately to the lines, grades, and elevations shown or
as directed.
Trenches and foundation pits shall be of sufficient size to permit the placement and
removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and
foundations as shown.
b.
Excavation to the final grade level shall not be made until just before the concrete
or masonry is to be placed.
c.
Rock or other hard foundation material shall be cleaned of loose debris and cut to a
firm surface either level, stepped, or serrated, as shown or as directed. Loose
disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed.
3.5
FILLING AND BACKFILLING
3.5.1
Filling and backfilling shall consist of depositing, spreading and compacting approved
materials to required elevations indicated. Approved materials for filling and backfilling,
shall consist of satisfactory materials free from debris, organic substances, stumps,
stones over 75 mm in diameter or other undesirable material.
3.5.2
Ground Surface Preparation

a
Remove vegetation, debris unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and

deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or
break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material
will bond with existing surface.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/7
December 2010
3.5.3.
When the existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under
"Compaction" for the particular area classification, break up the ground surface,
pulverize, moisture-condition to the optimum moisture content, and compact to the
required depth and percentage of maximum density.
Proof Rolling: The existing ground surface shall be proof rolled by a minimum of
3 passes of a heavy vibratory compactor.
Porous Fill
a
3.5.4.

Specifications
Porous Fill shall consist of sand or sandy gravel with not more than 10 percent
passing standard 200 mesh screen, and shall be secured from an offsite source if
necessary. Porous Fill shall be tamped or compacted to 95 percent density as
herein specified with approved vibratory compaction equipment.
Placement and Compaction

1.
Place backfill and fill materials in successive horizontal layers not more than 200
mm in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and
not more than 100 mm loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated
compaction equipment.
2.
Before compaction moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the

optimum moisture content of the soil material. Compact each layer to the required
percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area
classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy.
3.
Backfill excavations as promptly as the work permits, but not until completion of
inspection, testing, approval, and recording location of underground utilities, as
required.
4.
Compact fill and backfill to required density by approved mechanical means.
5.
Keep area drained.
6.
No "borrow" shall be permitted unless authorized by Engineer in writing.
7.
Fill Under Roads and Paved Areas: Place required fill to bottom of base course
with approved material, in 200 mm layers, compacted as specified.
8.
Place fill and backfill materials around buildings or other structures in layers not
exceeding 8 inches thickness. Machine tamp each layer in place to form a solid
mass. Backfill materials may be moistened to secure maximum compacted
densities specified herein.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/8
December 2010
3.5.5

Specifications
9.
Do not place backfill against full height of building walls below grade unless they
are laterally supported at top and bottom by floor construction or are temporarily
braced by shores and walls. Such floors shall have seven (7) day strength when
used to transmit pressures to which they will be subjected.
10.
Backfill between walls and sides of excavation to 150 mm below indicated finished
grade.
Backfilling Trenches
a.
After the installation of piping and other underground service lines by others and
the partial backfilling of the trenches by the installers, as specified in other
Specification Sections, backfill the trenches to elevation 150 mm below the
finished grades indicated on drawings.
b.
Compact backfill to required density by approved mechanical means or by hand

operated equipment.
3.6
ROUGH GRADING
3.6.1
Rough grading is defined as establishment of sub-grade at a specified depth below

finished grade. For lawn and grass areas rough grade shall be 150 mm below finished
grade unless otherwise indicated on drawings. For paved areas rough grade elevations
shall be finished grade elevations less thickness of pavement, and thickness of sub-base
if required.
3.6.2
Perform rough grading at site within limits of grading as shown on drawings.

Relationship of existing grade to finished grade is shown on drawings by existing and
finished contours. Indicated existing grades have been established from survey made by
licensed surveyor. No additional compensation will be allowed for additional grading
required because of variations between actual and indicated contours.
3.6.3
Fill shall consist of earth free from debris, organic substances, stumps, large boulders or
other deleterious materials. Place fill in layers not exceeding 300 mm deep and compact
to a uniform mass before placing additional fill. Fill for roads.. walks, or pavement subgrade shall be compacted in layers not more than 200 mm deep. Perform compacting
with mechanical equipment to required densities.
3.6.4
Take precautions to prevent fill on slopes from rolling or slipping downhill. Before fill is
placed on slopes greater than 4:1, toe of slope shall be benched out to provide a firm
base for fill and slope shall be benched as fill progresses.
3.7
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
3.7.1
Sub-grade shall be shaped to line, grade, and cross section, and compacted as specified
herein under 3.8 Compaction.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/9
December 2010

Specifications
3.7.2
Soft or otherwise unsatisfactory material shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory
excavated material or other approved material as directed.
3.7.3
Low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory material or excavation of rock shall
be brought up to required grade with concrete of the same mix as specified for
foundation bases, and sub-grade shall be shaped to line, grade, and cross section and
compacted as specified.
3.7.4
After rolling, the surface of the sub-grade for roadways shall not show deviation greater
the 15 mm when tested with a 3 m straightedge applied both parallel and at right angles
to the centerline of the area.
3.7.5
The elevation of the finished sub-grade shall not vary more than 15 mm from the
established grade and cross section.
3.7.6
When precipitation is anticipated the fill surfaces shall be graded to permit drainage and
rolled with a smooth steel drum roller to seal the surface and minimize water infiltration.
3.8 COMPACTION
3.8.1
Control soil compaction during construction in accordance with the percentage of

maximum density specified for each area classification.
1.
Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
following percentages of maximum dry density. For soils which exhibit a welldefined moisture density relationship. the maximum dry density shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM D1557-78; for soils which will not exhibit a
well-defined moisture-density, relationship, the maximum dry density shall be
determined by ASTM D4253-83.
a.
Unpaved Areas: Compact top 150 mm of sub-grade and each layer of backfill
or fill material to a dry density equal to or greater than 90 percent of the
maximum dry density determined in accordance with the above section (1).
b.
Walkways: Compact top 150 mm of sub-grade and each layer of backfill or

fill material to a dry density equal to or greater than 92 percent of maximum
dry density determined in accordance with the above section (1).
c.
Pavements and Shoulders: Compact top 300 mm of sub-grade and each layer
of backfill or fill material to a dry density equal to or greater than 95 percent
of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with the above section
(1).
d.
Porous Fill shall be tamped or compacted to 95 percent density as herein

specified with approved vibratory compaction equipment.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/10
December 2010
2.

Specifications
Moisture Control
a.
Where sub-grade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned

before compaction, uniformly apply water to the surface of sub-grade, or
layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on the surface during or
subsequent to compaction operations.
b.
Remove and replace or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to
permit compaction to specified density.
c.
Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit
compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by
discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until the moisture content is reduced to a
satisfactory value.
d.
Remove and replace sub-grade soils rendered unsuitable by inadequate site

and/or excavation drainage or negligence. Alternatively, work soil until
rendered suitable at no additional cost to the Employer.
3.8.2.
Compaction shall be accomplished by sheeps foot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers,

steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment well suited to
the type of material being compacted.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.9.1
Quality Control Testing During Construction

1.
Testing laboratory must inspect and approve sub-grades and fill layers before
further construction work is performed thereon.
2.
Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method)
or ASTM D2922 (nuclear method).
3.
Make at least one field density test of the sub-grade for every 200 m2. of paved
area, but in no case less than 3 tests.
4.
In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 200 m2 of subgrade below proposed paving but in no case less than 3 tests.
3.9.2.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, based on reports of the testing laboratory, the subgrade or fills which have been placed are below the specified density, additional
compaction and testing will be required until satisfactory results are obtained.
3.9.3.
The results of density tests of soil-in-place will be considered satisfactory if the average
of any 4 consecutive density tests which may be selected are in each instance equal to or
greater than the specified density, and if not more than I density test out of 5 has a value
more than 2 percent below the required density.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/11
December 2010

Specifications
3.10
MAINTENANCE
3.10.1
Protection of Graded Areas

1.
Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
Embankments and excavations shall be kept shaped and drained. Maintain ditches
and drains in effective condition. The finished sub-grade shall not be disturbed by
traffic or other operation and shall be protected and maintained in a satisfactory
condition until topsoil, sub-base, base or pavement is placed. The storage or
stockpiling of materials on the finished sub-grade will not be permitted. No subbase, base course, topsoil or pavement shall be laid until the sub-grade has been
checked and approved, and in no case shall sub-base, base surfacing, pavement, or
topsoil be placed on a muddy or spongy sub-grade.
2.
Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified
tolerances.
3.10.2
Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent

construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape. and compact to
the required density prior to further construction.
3.10.3
Disposal of Excess and Waste Materials

1.
Removal to Designated Areas on Owner's Prove: Transport excess excavated

material classified as satisfactory soil material to designated soil storage areas on
the Owner's property. Stockpile soil or spread across the ground, as directed.
2.
Removal from Owner's Property: Remove excess excavated material, trash, debris
and waste materials. and dispose of it off the Employer's properly.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Earthwork
Section 02200/12
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 02500
ROAD WORKS
The following references shall be considered for the Specifications of Road and
Drainage Works:
-
General Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction: First Edition, issued by MOT
/ KSA, on Rajab 1419 H corresponding to November 1998, abbreviated to General
Specifications (Parts 1~6 and 9).
The Addendum to the General Specifications issued on Rajab 1419 H corresponding to

November 1998 in accordance to Circular No. 107 dated 04/01/1421 H.
The Roads Material Guideline, issued by MOT / KSA on 1405 H.
The Road Construction Guideline, issued by MOT / KSA on 1405 H.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Road Works
Section 02500/1
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 02600
ENVIRONMENTAL WORKS
A)
GENERAL
These works shall consist of furnishing all materials and the construction installation and
completion in all respects of Environmental Works as described in this specification and as
shown on drawings.
B)
PIPES FOR SEWER ,WATER& FIRE
1.1
SCOPE
A. This item shall consist of pipe for direct burial of the types, classes, sizes, gauges, and
dimensions required on the drawings, furnished and installed at such places as are designated on
the drawings and profiles, in accordance with this specification and in accordance with the lines
and grades given.
B. The item shall include common excavation, pipe laying, bedding backfill and disposing of
surplus excavation, furnishing and installing all trench bracing, shoring and sheeting, grading,
pumping and temporary diversion required for the installation of the pipe and all treatment and
fittings required to complete the works as shown on the drawings, and the material and for the
making of all joints, all connections to existing pipes and structures and cleaning and restoration of
site.
1.2
PIPES MATERIAL
The pipe shall be of the type shown on the drawings or bills of quantities. Pipe and other
materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the following standards:
Sewer pipes and fittings made of Un-Plasticized Polyvinyl - Chloride (UPVC) shall conform to
Saudi Standard SAS-14 & DIN8062 class (3) PN6 or approved equal. Pipes shall be jointed
with rubber ring joints .UPVC fittings where required for use in conjunction with Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) pipes shall be compatible exactly with UPVC pipes of the Saudi Standard
(SAS)14 & shall be in accordance with the international Standards ISO 161/1 .
Water pipes and fittings made of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) PN10 shall conform to
international standards specifications like SASO 1401, ISO 4427, DIN 8074 and DIN 8075 or
approved equal.All joints in pipes shall be compression fittings, materials used shall be
designated for Water works & accordingly shall be blue.
Fire pipes & fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to ISO 2531-K9 ,flanged joints shall be
drilled to withstand pressure of 16 bars (PN16) .Joints for buried pipelines shall be either push on
with rubber ring or mechanical type, whereas joints for exposed pipelines shall be flanged.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/1
December 2010

Specifications
External pipe surfaces shall be coated with asphalt 200 micron thick and internal surfaces shall
be 3 mm cement lined all in accordance with AWWA C151.
Where pipes are constructed under water table, the pipes shall be protected externally.
With Polyethylene sheets as per ISO 8180,minimum thickness of Polyethylene sheets shall be
0.2mm.
Irrigation mains, distribution & lateral pipes shall be HDPE, PE-80 conforming with DIN
8074/8075-EN 12201 PN10, & shall be suitable for working pressure up to 10 bars. All joints in
pipes shall be compression fittings. Irrigation fittings shall be HDPE, Brass or other approved
material all conforming to ASTM standards. All equipments, fittings and accessories shall be
suitably rated to comply with the system design and operating parameters, materials used shall be
designated for Irrigation works & accordingly shall be black.
Pipes shall be supplied in coils, each coil of pipe shall bear markings of identity type and
grade.
1.3
1.4
EQUIPMENT
A.
All equipment necessary and required for the proper construction of pipes shall be on the
project in first class working condition and shall have been approved by the Engineer
before construction is permitted to start.
B.
The Contractor shall provide hand tampers and pneumatic tampers to obtain the required
compaction of the pipe bed and the backfill as specified.
C.
The Contractor shall provide appropriate hoisting equipment to handle the pipe while
unloading and placing it in its final position without damage to the pipe or disturbance to
the trench.
EXCAVATION
A. The width of the pit or trench for the structure shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory
jointing of the pipe and/or pouring of concrete and thorough tamping of the bedding material
under and around the structure, but it shall not be less than the external diameter of the pipe
or structure plus 0.15m on each side. Trench or pit walls shall be approximately vertical.
B. Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the design grade, due to unsuitable material,
this soil shall be removed and replaced with approved fill material for the full trench width.
The Engineer shall determine the depth of removal. The fill material shall be compacted to
provide adequate support for the pipe.
C. The excavation for pipe lines that are placed in embankment fill shall not be made until the
embankment has been completed to a height of 0.3m above the top of the pipe or culvert.
D. The Contractor shall do such trench or pit bracing, sheathing, or shoring necessary to perform
and protect the excavation and structure as required for safety and conforming governing
laws, and perform and protect the excavation and the structure as required for safety and
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/2
December 2010

Specifications
conforming governing laws, and perform all grading and pumping, if necessary, to prevent
water running into the trench and to keep the trench dry. The bracing, sheeting, or shoring
shall be removed by the Contractor after placing at the structure. Removal shall be done in
such a way that it will not disturb the structure.
E. In order to work under dry conditions, it may be necessary to divert streams temporarily.
Contractor shall carry out all such excavation and backfill operations as may be necessary in
accordance with the section earthwork of these specifications.
1.5
PLACING PIPE
A. General
Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering the pipe when it is to be placed in a trench.
The pipe shall be laid carefully and true to lines and grades on a bed which is uniformly firm
throughout its entire length. Any pipe which is not in true alignment, or which shows any
undue settlement after being laid, or is damaged, shall be taken up and relaid or replaced
without extra compensation. The laying of the pipe in the finished trench shall be started at
the lowest point and laid upgrade. The bed of the pipe shall be such, that at least the lower
quarter of the pipe shall be in continuous contact with the bed.
B. PIPE LAYING
The Engineer shall inspect all pipes before they are laid, and reject any section that is
damaged by handling or is defective to a degree which will materially affect the function and
service of the pipe.
When bell and spigot pipe is used, the bell shall be laid upgrade.
If tongue and groove pipe is used, the grooved end shall be laid upgrade.
The pipe shall be firmly and accurately set to line and grade so that the invert will be smooth
and uniform. The pipe shall be protected from water during placing and until the mortar in
the joints has thoroughly set.
1.6
MORTAR
Mortar shall be mixed in a ratio of 1 part by volume of Portland cement and 2 parts by volume of
sand. The mortar shall be of the desired consistency for caulking and filling
between the pipe and the drainage structures. Mortar which is not used within 45 minutes after
water has been added shall be discarded.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/3
December 2010
1.7

Specifications
PIPE JOINTS
A.
B.
Before any joint is made, the previously installed unit shall be checked to assure that a
close joint with the adjoining unit has been maintained and that the inverts are matched and
conform to the required grade. The pipe shall not be driven down to the required grade by
striking it with a shovel handle, timber or other unyielding object.
All joint surfaces shall be cleaned.
C.
Immediately before jointing the pipe, the bell, groove or machined end shall be lubricated
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Each pipe unit shall then be
carefully pushed into place without damage to pipe or gasket. Suitable devices shall be
used to force the pipe units together so that they will fit with a minimum open recess inside
and outside, and have tightly sealed joints. Care shall be taken not to use such force as to
wedge apart and split the bell or grooves ends or the coupling and machined end. Joints
shall not be "pulled" or "cramped" without approval of the Engineer.
D.
Immediately after the pipe joint is completed, the position of the gasket joint shall be
inspected using an approved feeler gage furnished by the Contractor, to be sure it is
properly put together and is tight. Ensure that the groove where the gasket must be
positioned is carefully cleaned. Joints in which the gasket is damaged or not properly
positioned shall be pulled apart and remade using new gasket.
E.
Where any two pipe units do not fit each other closely enough to enable them to be
properly jointed, they shall be removed and replaced with suitable units and new gaskets.
F.
After fitting the gasket properly, the annular joint spaces of reinforced concrete pipe shall
be filled with cement mortar in an approved manner.
G.
Details of gasket installation and joint assembly shall follow the directions of the
manufacturers of the joint material and of the pipe, all subject to approval of the Engineer.
The resulting joints shall be watertight and flexible.
H.
All premolded gasket joint pipe of a particular manufacturer may be rejected if there are
more than five unsatisfactory joint assembly operations or "bell breaks" in 100 consecutive
joints. If the pipe is unsatisfactory as determined above, the Contractor shall, if required,
remove all pipe of that manufacturer of the same shipment from the work and shall furnish
pipe from another manufacturer which will conform to all of the requirements of these
specifications.
I.
Open ends of pipe and branches shall be closed with stoppers and secured in place in an
acceptable manner.
J.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent flotation of the pipe in the
trench.
K.
All times when pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed
with temporary watertight plugs or by other approved means. If water is in the trench when
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/4
December 2010

Specifications
work is to be resumed, the plug shall not be removed until suitable provisions have been
made to prevent water, earth, or other substances from entering the pipe.
1.8
L.
Pipelines shall not be used as conductors for trench drainage during construction.
M.
Care shall be taken to prevent earth, water, and other materials from entering the pipeline.
As soon as possible after the pipe and manholes are completed, the Contractor shall clean
out the pipe and manholes, being careful to prevent soil, water, and debris from entering
any existing pipe.
BEDDING OF PIPELINES
A.
Granular bedding to pipelines are detailed on drawings and the minimum thickness of
bedding material beneath the pipe shall be150mm (minimum 100mm under sockets)
B.
The time interval between placing bedding material on the trench formation and
commencing pipelaying shall be as short as is practicable.
C.
The bedding material shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 200mm with one pass of
a plate vibrator for gravels and two passes for sands or other approved equivalent
mechanical method. Hand tamping or punning will only be permitted where insufficient
space is available to allow the use of mechanical plant.
D.
Recesses shall be formed in the bedding to accommodate pipe joints while ensuring
continuous even support along the pipe length. Bedding material shall be prevented from
entering pipe joints. After the joint has been made bedding material shall be carefully
placed and hand compacted beneath the joint barrel to close any void left by the recess.
Where the formation of the trench is of silt or soft clay and is below the natural water table
a 75mm blinding layer of sand shall be substituted for the specified bedding material
directly above formation and carefully compacted if directed on site.
E.
Granular material for pipe bedding shall be free-draining, hard, clean, chemically stable
gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag, graded in accordance with the following table:
Percentage by Weight Passing Sieve
F.
Test Sieve
mm
Diameter
63
37.5
20
14
10
5
2.36
---100
85 - 100
0 - 25
0-5
The material shall have a Compaction Fraction value not exceeding 0.2 when determined
in accordance with the following test:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/5
December 2010
1.9

Specifications
G.
A representative sample of about 40kg shall be heaped onto a clean surface and quartered
to obtain approximately 10kg. The moisture content of the sample should not differ
materially from that of the main body of material, at the time of use in the trench.
H.
A 150mm internal diameter open ended cylinder 250mm high, shall be placed on a firm
flat surface and loosely filled, without tamping, from the 10kg sample. Any surplus
material shall be struck off level with the top of the cylinder. The area around the filled
cylinder shall be cleared of all surplus material and the cylinder then lifted clear of its
contents and placed alongside the material.
I.
Approximately one quarter of the material shall then be replaced into the cylinder and
compacted by tamping vigorously with a 40mm diameter metal rammer weighing about 1
kg until no further compaction can be obtained. This operation shall then be repeated for
each of the remaining quarters, tamping the final surface as level as possible.
J.
The distance from the top of the cylinder to the surface of final layer shall then be
measured and this value, divided by the height of the cylinder, shall be taken as the
Compaction Fraction.
STANKS TO PIPELINES IN GRANULAR BEDDING

A.
Where pipes are laid on a granular bed or with a granular backfill, a stank, i.e. an
impermeable barrier shall be provided across the full width of the trench and for the
complete depth of the bedding and fill at intervals not exceeding 50m, and generally midway between manholes.
B.
The stank shall consist of:
B1. either a 300mm long plug of fine grained clayey soil or a 300mm long plug of a mixture of
sand and bitumen consolidated in an approved manner.
B2. or a mixture of sand and clay compacted to form an impermeable barrier at least one metre
in length.
B3. or a layer of thick polyethylene cut to fit around the pipe across the full width of the trench
and laid on the granular bedding material at its natural repose angle.
C.
All methods must form an impermeable barrier.
1.10 PIPELINES IN CONCRETE CRADLES AND SURROUNDS

A.
Where pipes are to be laid with a concrete cradle or surround they shall be supported
initially above the trench bottom on concrete setting blocks. The blocks shall either be laid
accurately to level and covered with damp-proof sheeting beneath the pipe barrel or shall
be provided with two hardwood wedges each to an approved pattern to enable the pipe
level to be adjusted.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/6
December 2010

Specifications
B.
The blocks and wedges shall be of sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of the
pipes during laying and at least two concrete blocks shall be provided for each pipe.
C.
The concrete shall be poured on one side of the pipe until it can be worked under the pipe
along its full length to ensure that no voids develop. The concrete shall then be brought up
equally on both sides of the pipe until the required level is reached.
D.
Approved measures appropriate to the pipe material shall be provided to prevent flotation
or other movement during placement or curing of the concrete.
E.
Concrete cradles to pipes of all diameters and surrounds to pipes of one meter diameter or
less shall be poured in a single lift. Concrete surrounds to pipes over one metre diameter
shall normally be poured in two lifts, with a horizontal joint not more than 100mm below
the crown of the pipe. Concrete shall be prevented from entering pipe joints.
F.
Concrete cradles and surrounds shall be interrupted over their full cross sectional area at
each pipe joint, by shaped expansion joint filler. The thickness of filler shall be 18mm for
pipe diameter less than 450, 36mm for pipe diameter 450 to 1200 and 54mm for pipe
diameters greater than 1200.
G.
In spigot and socket pipelines the joints in the bed shall be at the face of each socket, and in
all flexible joints the concrete shall be prevented from entering the pipe joint.
1.11 LEAKAGE TESTS FOR GRAVITY PIPES

A.
The pipelines shall be as nearly watertight as practical and leakage tests and measurements
shall be made. Tests shall be carried out between each two manholes in the presence and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representatives.
B.
Before commencing with the tests, all pipelines and concrete works shall be clean.
C.
The Contractor shall furnish suitable test plugs, water pumps and appurtenances, and all
labour required to properly conduct the leakage tests on the pipelines.
D.
Upon completion of a section of the sewer bulkheads shall be installed, as required, to

permit the test of the sewer pipe.
E.
The sewer pipe shall be subjected to an internal pressure by plugging the pipe at the lower
end and then filling the pipelines and manholes with clean water to a height of 60 cms.
above the top of the pipe at its upper end. Where conditions between manholes may result
in test pressures which would cause leakage at the stoppers in branches, provisions shall be
made by suitable ties, braces, and wedges to secure the stoppers against leakage resulting
from the pressure. The rate of leakage from the sewer shall be determined by measuring
the amount of water required to maintain the level 60cm above the top of the pipe.
F.
Leakage from the sewer pipe under test shall not exceed the requirements 1890 liters per
100mm diameter per km of the pipe per 24 hrs.
G.
The Contractor shall construct weirs or other means of measurement as may be required,
furnish water and do all necessary pumping to enable the tests to be properly made.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/7
December 2010

Specifications
H.
Should the sections under test fail to meet the requirements, the Contractor shall do all
work of locating, repairing leaks, and retesting as the Engineer may require without
additional compensation.
I.
If the Engineer or his Representative is in doubt that any damage had occurred in the
pipelines in the process of pouring the concrete or backfilling, he shall have the right to
order retesting of the doubted part. If the second test proves that the pipeline is not
serviceable then the Contractor shall have to locate the damage, make it good, and carry out
retesting until he secures satisfactory results. The cost of all such works shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
J.
All manholes shall be constructed so as to prevent leakage of water therefrom. Normally

no testing for leakage of water from manholes is conducted unless it is in the opinion of the
Engineer or his Representative that the method of construction carried out by the
Contractor does not fulfill the requirements.
K.
In such a case, the Engineer or his Representative shall have the right to ask the Contractor
to carry out the testing to the manholes (in connection with water leakage) prior to
backfilling and any damage revealed as a result of such testing shall be made good. All
these works shall be carried out at the Contractor's expense and in accordance with the
direction of the Engineer or his Representative.
L.
The Contractor shall prepare on site, and at his own expense, all work requirements, i.e.
plugs for all diameters of pipes, pumps, etc., which should be acceptable to the Engineer or
his Representative.
M.
The Contractor shall only use acceptable water for the purpose of testing. The Contractor
shall bear all the costs regarding serviceable water used in testing, flushing and satisfactory
disposal thereof.
N.
The Contractor shall have to fix the plugs in ends of pipes to be tested and shall have to
take necessary precautions to prevent plugs or fixings tools from getting inside the pipes as
a result of water flushing.
O.
Should the selections under test fail to meet the requirements, the Contractor shall do all
work of locating and repairing the leaks and retesting as the Engineer or his Representative
may require without additional compensation.
1.12 BACKFILLING OF PIPELINES

A.
After completion of placement and Compaction of the surrounds to the pipelines and
leakage test backfilling shall proceed using selected excavated materials in accordance with
the specifications for earthworks.
B.
The use of power rammers will not be permitted over any pipe until the depth of fill above
the crown of the pipe is at least 300 mm.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/8
December 2010
C.
1.13

Specifications
Movement of construction machinery over a pipe drain shall be at the Contractor's risk.
Any pipe damaged thereby shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
CONNECTIONS
Where the drawings call for connections to existing or proposed structures, these
connections shall be watertight and so made that a smooth uniform flow line will
be obtained throughout the system.
1.14
CLEANING AND RESTORATION OF SITE
After the backfill is completed the Contractor shall remove all tools, surplus material,
dirt, and rubbish from the site. For paved areas the Contractor shall restore all disturbed
areas to their original condition.
1.15
A.
FIELD TESTING AND DISINFECTION FOR PRESSURE PIPES

TESTING
After pipes are laid and connected, trench shall be filled partially, then concrete thrust
blocks shall be cast and left for drying.
Pipes ends shall be closed up with suitable adapters. A temporary concrete thrust block
shall be constructed to support the pipes end. Soil under this concrete block shall be solid
ensuring an adequate surface there as to prevent water percolation. Pipe shall then be filled
with water so that contained air is discharged. Water filling shall be carried out at least 24
hours before proceeding with the test. Pressure and water leakage tests shall be conducted
at the same time unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
If the Engineer decided, as per work conditions, that trenches should be directly filled after
pipe laying, pressure test shall be carried out after backfilling and before applying the final
asphalt coat. Pressure test shall be 4 kg/cm2 for sewer pipes, 8 kg/cm2 for irrigation
pipes,10 kg/cm2 for water pipes &15 kg/cm2 for fire pipes.
No layings shall be accepted unless leaked water amount is less than the acceptable
according to AWWA C 600-93 for ductile iron pipes and AWWA C 605-94 for PVC
pipes.
Water to be used for the tests shall be obtained from an approved source. An approved
pump to be connected with pipes shall be used. Approval of the Engineer on the test
method should be obtained. The Contractor shall provide all the necessary equipment.
Precision of the pressure gauge should be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Period of test shall not be less than two hours unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Pressure drop shall not exceed 0.2 kg/cm2 within one hour from the test start.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/9
December 2010

Specifications
During the same period, all exposed pipes, installations, connections, valves and adaptors
shall be inspected. All connections with water leakage exceeding the limits stated in the
standard specification shall be rejected. The Contractor shall replace all broken or defected
units with new ones at his own expense.
The test shall be re-conducted till the Engineer is satisfied with the obtained results.
If leaked water under test conditions exceeds the permissible amounts, the Contractor
should find the defected part and repair its connections at his own expense till satisfactory
results are obtained.
B.
DISINFECTION
All water mains shall be flushed and disinfected with a chlorine solution before being put
into regular service. Before introducing the disinfectant the mains shall be flushed with
clean water at a velocity of at least 75 cm/sec. Flushing water shall be discharge only on
sites or into conduits as approved by the Engineer.
All material, equipment (i.e. pumps, water gages, etc.) shall be supplied by the Contractor
at his own expense.
a)
Forms of Chlorine for disinfection

Liquid Chlorine, calcium hypochlorite or sodium hyphochlorite may be used for disinfecting.
If liquid chlorine is to be used it shall be used only in conjunction with proper equipment
and under the supervision of qualified personnel who are familiar with physiological,
chemical and physical properties of this element and who are properly trained and equipped
to handle any emergency that may arise, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
b)
Disinfecting New Water Mains

New water mains shall be disinfected by the continuous feed method. Water from a source
approved by the Engineer's Representative shall be injected into the mains and made to
flow at a constant and measured rate to produce minimum velocity as specified above. The
water shall receive a dose of chlorine, fed at a constant rate and measured so that the
chlorine concentration in the water in the pipe is maintained at a minimum of 50 mg/l
available chlorine. The chlorine residual should be measured at regular intervals in
accordance with Standard Methods and AWWA M12 Simplified Procedures for Water
Examination to assure that the required chlorine concentration is maintained.
During the application of chlorine, valves shall be manipulated to prevent the treatment
dosage from flowing back into the line supplying the water. Chlorine application shall not
cease until the entire main is filled with chlorine solution. The chlorinated water shall
remain in the pipe for at least 24 hours during which time all valves and hydrants in the
treated main shall be operated in order to disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of the 24
hours the treated disinfecting water shall contain no less than 25 mg/l chlorine throughout
the length of the main.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/10
December 2010

Specifications
Pipes having a diameter of 400mm or more may be treated by the slug method. Under this
method water from an approved source is made to flow in the main at a constant and
measured rate. The water shall receive a dose of chlorine, also fed at a constant rate. The
two rates shall be proportioned so that the concentration in the water entering the main is
maintained at no less than 300 mg/l. The chlorine shall be applied continuously and for a
sufficient period of time to develop a solid column of chlorinated water that will expose all
interior surfaces to a concentration of at least 300 mg/l for at least 3 hours. The application
shall be checked at a tap near the upstream end of the line by chlorine residual
measurements made according to the procedures named above.
c)
Disinfecting Cut and Re-Joined Existing Mains

When an existing main is cut to allow the installation of a fitting or to connect it to a new
main it shall be disinfected properly before it is put back into service. The interior of all pipe
and fitting used in making the connection shall be swabbed with a 5% hypochlorite solution
before they are installed. Thorough flushing of the main shall be started as soon as the
connection is completed and shall be continued until all discolored water is eliminated.
Where in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative it is necessary, in addition to the
above, the section of the main to which the connection has been made shall be isolated, all
service connections shut off and the section shall be flushed and chlorinated in accordance
with the slug method described above. The does of chlorine should, however, be increased
500 mg/l and shall be resumed and continued until discolored water is eliminated.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, trench treatment is necessary due to
the pressure of polluted water in the trench the Contractor shall apply chlorine tablets in the
trench, as required by the Engineer before opening the main.
d)
Final Flushing
After the required retention period the heavily, chlorinated water shall be flushed from the
main until the chlorine concentration in the water leaving the main is no higher than that
generally prevailing in the system which should be in accordance with the instructions of
the Authorities provided that the concentration shall not exceed 0.5 mg/l. Chlorine residual
determinations shall be made to ascertain that the heavily chlorinated water has been
removed from the main.
e)
Bacteriologic Tests
After final flushing and before the water main is put into service, a sample, or samples, as
directed by the Engineer's Representative, shall be collected from the end of the main and
tested for bacteriologic quality and shall show the absence of coliform organisms. Samples
shall be collected in sterile bottles treated with sodium thiosulphate. No hose or fire
hydrant shall be used in the collection of the samples. The Contractor shall install in the
main, at his own expense, a corporation cock with a copper tube gooseneck assembly for
the purpose of obtaining samples. The gooseneck assembly may be removed after the
samples have been taken but the corporation cock should remain in place.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/11
December 2010

Specifications
If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory samples, disinfection shall be repeated
until satisfactory samples have been obtained.
1.16 VALVES
A
For Fire, Gate valves shall be made of Ductile cast iron conforming to AWWA C509 or BS
5150/5163 protected externally by enamel glass or by epoxy coating 300 micron, Gate
valves shall be flanged to withstand pressure of 16 bars (PN 16). Body & Bonnet shall be
made of ductile cast iron. The stem & the seat ring & body shall be made of stainless steel.
Connecting bolt shall be made of steel.
For Water, Gate valves shall be made of Ductile cast iron conforming to AWWA C509 or
BS 5150/5163 protected externally by enamel glass or by epoxy coating 300 micron, Gate
valves shall be flanged to withstand pressure of 6 bars (PN 6). Body & Bonnet shall be
made of ductile cast iron. The stem & the seat ring & body shall be made of stainless steel.
Connecting bolt shall be made of steel.
For irrigation , Gate valves larger than or equal to 50 mm shall be made of ductile cast iron
conforming to AWWA C509 or BS 5150/5163 protected externally by enamel glass or by
epoxy coating 300 micron, Gate valves shall be flanged to withstand pressure of 10 bars
(PN10). Bonnet shall be made of ductile cast iron. The stem & the seat ring & body shall
be made of stainless steel. Connecting bolt shall be made of steel.
Valves smaller than 50 mm shall have non rising stem & be manufactured from brass or
bronze according to BS 5154. Inlet & outlet to be screwed rating to be PN10.
Gate valves for sewage works shall be made of Ductile cast iron of the wedge type
conforming to AWWA C509 or BS 5150/5163 protected internally & externally by enamel
glass or by epoxy coating 300 micron. Gate valves shall be flanged to withstand pressure of
6 bars (PN6). Body & Bonnet shall be made of ductile cast iron. The stem & the wedge
shall be made of stainless steel. Connecting bolt shall be made of steel.
E.
Check valves for sewage works shall be to BS 5153 and shall be of the single door swing
check type. They shall have a pressure rating of 6 bars.
Valves shall be copper alloy faced and resilient seated. All valves shall be clearway, and
lugs provided on screwed seats etc. for assembly shall be removed. Valves shall, unless
otherwise specified, be capable of passing solids not exceeding 90 millimeters.
Valves shall be provided with a removable cover on top of the body casing, to enable the
hinge and door to be inspected or removed.
The door opening shall be restricted to a maximum of 70 degrees at the hinge, measured
from a plane passing through the hinge at rights angles to the axis of flow. Valves shall be
provided with extended spindles to the doors fitted with lever arms suitable for balance
weights.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/12
December 2010

Specifications
1.17 FIRE HYDRANTS

Fire hydrants of the pillar type 150 mm minimum inside barrel diameter shall be provided and
installed at locations shown on the Drawings and as sized and detailed. Materials of construction
shall conform to AWWA Standards Designation C502 for cast or ductile iron bodies.
A pillar type hydrants shall be of dry barrel with break-away design, and valve closes with water
pressure, and provided with duck-foot bend and two side outlets 60 mm each with adaptors to fit
local hose connections, caps and chains of ductile cast iron conforming to ASTM A395.
A gate valve shall be installed between main pipeline and every fire hydrant for purposes of
maintenance.
Fire hydrants shall be made of local product if available and meet the specifications.
All iron parts of the hydrants, inside and outside, shall be thoroughly cleaned and all surfaces
inside and outside (except the exterior portion above the ground line) shall be coated with asphalt
varnish. The face above ground level shall be thoroughly cleaned and thereafter painted in the shop
with two coats of paint as specified in AWWA C502 section 6 and the color shall be red as
approved by the Engineer.
The location of the fire hydrants as shown on the Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer.
As shown on the Drawings, protective guard railing shall be erected in front of the hydrant.
1.18 EMITTERS
Emitters shall be constructed from durable, black heat-resistant plastic. The emitter shall be
pressure compensating through a flapping diaphragm. The flapping diaphragm shall allow
automatic purging of the emitter. The orifice of the diaphragm shall remain in the purging mode
until the pressure reaches approximately 0.7kg/cm2. The purging action shall repeat itself when
the system is turned off. The pressure compensating range shall be between 0.7-3kg/cm2. Emitter
flow rates shall be as follows:
1.89 l/emitter/hr for Baby Sun Rose and Oleander trees
3.79 l/emitter/hr for Yellow Oleander and Ceniza trees
7.57 l/emitter/hr for Christmas tree
Coefficient of manufacturing variability shall be 0.05 or better.
1.19 PIPE ROUTE MARKERS
Pipe route markers shall be made from pvc material lined with metallic material & coated from
back with a metal layer or any other method capable of detection for buried metals to depth of
one meter , the tape width shall be minimum 10cm & be orange color written on it the type of
the pipe each one meter. The tape shall be made special for identifying burried pipes location ,the
internal metallic tape shall be coated with pvc to protect from corrosion
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/13
December 2010

Specifications
C)
MISCELLANEOUS ENVIRONMENTAL STRUCTURES
2.1
SCOPE
2.2
A.
This item shall consist of manholes, chambers, and other related structures in accordance
with this specification, at the specified location and in accordance with the lines, grades,
and dimensions shown on the drawings or required by the Engineer.
B.
This item shall include common excavation, backfill and disposing of surplus excavation,
furnishing and installing all trench bracing, shoring and sheathing, grading, pumping and
temporary stream diversion required for the installation of the pipe and all treatment and
fittings required to complete the works as shown on the drawings, and the material for and
the making of all joints, all connections to existing lines, water lines and structures and
cleaning and restoration of site.
MATERIALS
A.
Mortar
A1. The mortar grout and similar work shall be composed of 1 part of Portland cement and 3
parts of mortar sand, by volume.
A2. The Portland cement shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 150, type I.
A3. The sand shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 144.
B.
Concrete and Reinforcement
Plain and reinforced concrete used in structures, connection of pipes with structures, and support
of structures or frames shall be in accordance with the requirements and specification of concrete
work.
C.
Steps
The steps or ladder bars for water chambers shall be galvanized steel and shall meet the
requirements of AASHO M 111. The steps shall be of the size, length, and shape as shown on
the drawings.
Steps for sewer manholes shall be of aluminum of the size, length and shape as shown on the
drawings.
D.
Bituminous treatment
Bituminous material shall be RC 250, MC 250 or equivalent.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/14
December 2010
2.3
2.5

Specifications
EQUIPMENT
A.
All equipment necessary and required for the proper construction of the structures shall be
on the project in first class working condition and shall have been approved by the
Engineer before construction is permitted to start.
B.
The Contractor shall provide hand tampers and pneumatic tampers to obtain the required
compaction of the pipe bed and the backfill as specified.
2.4
EXCAVATION
A.
The width of the pit or trench for the structure shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory
jointing of the pipe and/or pouring of concrete and thorough tamping of the bedding
material under and around the structure, but it shall not be less than the external diameter
of the pipe or structure plus 0.15m on each side. Trench or pit walls shall be
approximately vertical.
B.
Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, the Contractor shall
remove it from below the foundation grade for a depth of at least 0.15 m. The excavation
below grade shall be backfilled with selected fine compressive material.
C.
Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the design grade, due to unsuitable
material, this soil shall be removed and replaced with approved fill material for the full
trench width. The Engineer shall determine the depth of removal. The fill material shall
be compacted to provide adequate support for the pipe.
D.
The Contractor shall do such trench or pit bracing, sheeting, or shoring necessary to
perform and protect the excavation and structure as required for safety and conforming
governing laws, and perform and protect the excavation and the structure as required for
safety and conforming governing laws, and perform all grading and pumping, if
necessary, to prevent water running into the trench and to keep the trench dry. The
bracing, sheeting, or shoring shall be removed by the Contractor after placing at the
structure. Removal shall be done in such a way that it will not disturb the structure.
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
A.
Concrete structures shall be built on prepared foundations, in accordance with the

dimensions indicated on the drawings. The construction shall be in accordance with the
requirements specified in Section 4.01 of the Specifications.
B.
Any reinforcement required shall be placed as indicated on the drawings and shall be
approved by the Engineer before the concrete is poured.
C.
All invert benching shall be constructed and shaped accurately so as to be smooth, uniform,
and cause minimum resistance to flowing water. The interior bottom shall be sloped
downward towards the outlet.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/15
December 2010
2.6

Specifications
INLET AND OUTLET PIPES

Inlet and outlet pipes shall extend through the walls of the structures for a sufficient distance
beyond the outside surface to allow for connections but shall be cut off flush with the wall on the
inside surface, unless otherwise directed. For concrete structures, the mortar shall be placed
around these pipes so as to form a tight, neat connection.
2.7
2.8
FRAMES AND COVERS

A.
The Contractor shall furnish all cast iron frames, and covers conforming to the details
shown on the drawings or as hereinbefore specified. The Contractor shall submit for
approval detailed shop and working drawings of all casting before fabrication.
B.
The castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, evengrained cast iron, smooth, free
from scale, lumps, blisters sandholes, and defects of every nature which would render
them unfit for the service for which they are intended.
C.
The cast iron cover and frame at sidewalks shall be medium duty and shall have a
combined weight of not less than 150 kgs and capable of withstanding a test load of 15
tonnes. They shall have a rubber ring installed at the inner surface of the cover and frame
seating, and the closed covers shall be vented by four 25mm holes. Heavy duty frame and
covers (closed/grated) having a combined weight of not less than 250 kgs. and capable of
withstanding a test load of 35 Tonnes shall be used as indicated on drawings or directed.
The closed covers shall be clearly stamped in English & Arabic in block letters at least 5
cm in size.
D.
All covers and frames shall be set with the tops conforming accurately to the grade of the
pavement of finished ground surface or as indicated on the drawings or directed by the
Engineer.
E.
All castings shall be thoroughly cleaned and subject to a careful hammer inspection.
F.
Before being shipped from the foundry, castings shall be given one coat of coat-tar-pitch
varnish, applied in a satisfactory manner so as to make a smooth coating, tough, tenacious,
and not too brittle or with any tendency to scale off.
G.
Covers shall be left in place in the frames on completion of other work at the manholes.
INSTALLATION OF STEPS
The steps shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. The steps shall be set in concrete and
shall be fixed and secured in position before the concrete is poured. The steps shall not be
disturbed or used until the concrete has hardened for at least 7 days. After this period has
elapsed, the steps shall be cleaned.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/16
December 2010
2.9

Specifications
BITUMINOUS TREATMENT
The surface of the structures which will come in permanent contact with soil shall be given two
coatings with an approved bituminous material, depending on the ambient temperature. The first
coating shall not be applied before a 7 days curing period of the concrete has elapsed and the
second coat at least 24 hours after the first coat.
2.10 BACKFILLING
A.
After a structure has been completed, the area around it shall be filled with approved
material in horizontal layers not to exceed 200mm in loose depth, and compacted to the
density as required for embankments in unpaved areas and paved areas in the section
Earthworks, whichever is applicable.
B.
Backfill shall not be placed against any structure until permission is given by the Engineer.
C.
The backfill shall be placed on both sides of the concrete encased pipes at the same time
and to approximately the same elevation.
2.11 CONNECTIONS
Where the drawings call for connections to existing or proposed structures, these connections
shall be watertight and so made that a smooth uniform flow line will be obtained throughout the
system.
2.12 CLEANING AND RESTORATION OF SITE
After the backfill is completed the Contractor shall remove all tools, surplus material, dirt, and
rubbish from the site. The Contractor shall restore all disturbed areas to their original condition.
2.13 INSPECTION
Prior to final approval of the sewer system, the Engineer accompanied by the Contractor's
Representative, shall make a thorough inspection. Any indication of defects in material or
workmanship, or obstruction to flow, or poorly constructed joints in the system, shall be further
investigated and corrected. Defects due to the Contractor's negligence shall be corrected by the
Contractor without additional compensation and as directed by the Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/17
December 2010

Specifications
II - Waste Water Treatment Units

Scope Of work for
57.5m3/day domestic wastewater treatment plant
And 183m3/day Industrial Wastewater Treatment Unit
I.
General
Domestic Wastewater Treatment Unit

The following is a description of the equipments for a 57.5 m3/day wastewater treatment plant by
which organic pollutants are digested by microorganisms and reduced to harmless, odorless, and
stable solids.
In design of the plant, the target was to minimize operating and maintenance costs, while ensuring
that the plant will reliably achieve the required reduction in levels of pollutants.
Domestic Wastewater treatment system shall be designed on the basis of Extended Aeration
Treatment Process, Prefabricated Rectangular steel Package plant with diffused air system.
Part of the wastewater will be received from workshops, containing some grease and some sludge,
it will be primary treated and then discharged into the package unit.
Industrial Wastewater treatment Unit
The site shall include a special treatment unit designated for industrial wastewater reject from
depot facilities including: wash water machine reject, neutralization pits reject, wastewater
containing grease & oil,
Civil Works
The Contractor is responsible for all civil works required, including, but not limited to:
Concrete slabs and foundations,

Lifting station,
Filtration, chemical, blowers, office and laboratory rooms,
Roads,
Chain link fence,
Gates,
Any other civil or concrete works shall be considered as part of this scope of work.
Equipment Design
The supplier shall stick to below mentioned wastewater effluent guidelines, but he has the choice
to select or resize any equipment according to his own manufacturing standards. All suggest
equipments shall be submitted to engineer for approval.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/18
December 2010
I.1

Specifications
Design Considerations
Capacity: 57.5 m3/day average daily flow

BOD
TSS
TKN
Phosphorus
Wastewater temperature
Max. and Min. ambient temperature
I.2
Treated Secondary Effluent
5 Day B.O.D.
Suspended Solids
I.3
200 mg/l
240 mg/l
50 mg/l
10 mg/l
27C to 32 C
20C / 45 C
( mg/L)
(mg/L)
:30
: 30
Treated Tertiary Effluent
Tertiary effluent water quality shall be as per Ministry of Water design guidelines, section III,
according but limited to the following:
Parameter
Tertiary Treatment Effluent
BOD
TSS
Tubidity
NH3-N
NO3-N
PH
Grease &oil
Phenol
Total coliform
Helmith eggs
Chemical products, metals & heavy metals
<10 ppm
<10 ppm
<5 NTU
<5 ppm
<10 ppm
6-8.4
Nil
<0.002ppm
<2.2 unit/100ml
<1 unit/1000ml
As mentioned within section III of
guidelines.
The Wastewater Treatment Plant shall consist of all necessary equipments, as mentioned on the
block diagram.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/19
December 2010
II.

Specifications
Equalization Zone & Equipments
II.1
Equalization Zone
Type
Quantity
Construction
Tank Volume
: Underground tank
: One (1)
: protected concrete
: 25 m 3
This zone will be utilized to equalize the flow entering the secondary treatment units and shall be
equipped with:
II.2
Air Blower System
Skid mounted complete with motor, inlet/outlet silencer with relief valve, check valves, outlet
nipples, discharge header, filter element, blower and motor pulleys, belts and belt guard;
Air Flow : 90 CFM
Air shall be supplied by means of two(2) positive displacement blower(s) of sufficient size to
provide the air required for the aeration chamber and for the air lift pumps.
The air shall be introduced into the tank through coarse bubbles, Snap Cap diffusers. The
diffusers spacing and air velocity shall insure that adequate mixing velocities are maintained.
The air diffuser assembly shall be easily removable from the tank and will be equipped with
an air regulating valve to permit either adjustment of the air flow or complete shutoff.
Blowers assemblies will be supplied complete with base, motor, coupling, inlet and outlet
silencers, and control valves
Air Diffusers drop to provide Preliminary aeration to the raw sewage influent.
Number of Air Drops, diffusers and amount of air will be proportional to the feed
flow.
II.3
Sewage Lift Pumps

Two pumps (One duty, one standby) to uniformly feed the Two Rectangular steel package
tank with a steady average flow of 10m3/ hr during 6 working hours.
Submersible Pump
Head
Quantity
Operation
Capacity of each Pump
: 15 m
: Two(2)
: One Duty, One Standby
: 10 m3/hr
There shall be furnished installed non-clog centrifugal submersible pumps. These pumps are suitable
for handling untreated sewage and they are single stage coupled to an electric motor of adequate
power, designed to work entirely submerged. Each pump shall be designed to deliver at optimum
maximum efficiency point.
Impeller is practically unchockable and dynamically balanced to suit pump characteristic. Passage
ways through the pump and impeller shall be large enough to pass up to 10 mm. Diameter spheres.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/20
December 2010

Specifications
List of equipment supplied in Equalization zone:

(2) Pump complete with duck foot bend lifting chain slide guide and guide upper
support.
(2) Slide guide railing
(1) Set of discharge piping
(1) Discharge header
(2) Gate valves
(2) Check valves
(4) Level control floats with cables
III.
III.1
Secondary Treatment
Rectangular Steel Prefabricated plant (2 sets):
The Secondary treatment Plant shall consist of 2 Rectangular Steel Prefabricated Tanks complete
with prefabricated piping.
The specifications of Each Rectangular Steel Prefabricated Tank are as follows:
Type of System
: Rectangular Steel Tank
Average Flow
: 57.5
m3/d
B.O.D. Load
: 12 kg/d
Quantity
: 1 set
The principal items of each unit will include:
- A welded steel Aeration zone & accessories
- A welded steel secondary clarifier zone & accessories
- A welded steel Sludge holding zone & accessories
- Diffused air system/Air Blowers System
Overall Dimension of each of the Rectangular Package unit
III.2
= 10
W
H
= 3
= 3
Meters (including anoxic and chlorination

zones)
Meters
Meters
Aeration Zone
Basic Data
Tank Volume
: 60
m
Free Board
: 0.3
m
Detention Time
: 24
hr.
Dimensions
: 8m X 3m X 3m (L X W X H)
The aeration zone provides an environment for growth of microorganisms.
Aeration will be accomplished by a Diffused Air System.
The aeration basin will be constructed of 6mm carbon steel panels, and finished
base coat and two coats corrosion resistant coating.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/21
December 2010
III.3
Secondary Clarifier Zone
Basic Data
Type
Free Board
Detention Time
Dimensions
III.4

Specifications
: Hopper With Lamella

: 0.3 m
:4
hrs
: 2m X 3m X 3m (L X W X H)
Aerobic Digester Zone & Equipments & Sludge Dewatering Unit

A sludge holding tank will be part of Sewage Treatment Plants with a capacity as indicated
below. The tank shall be constructed of the same materials as the plant and conform the
same specifications. There shall be furnished all necessary equipment to achieve a
diversion of sludge discharged from the Secondary clarifier to the sludge holding tank by
means of the blowers serving the plant. A supernatant waste pipe shall be supplied to
return the supernatant liquor to the aeration chamber.
a.
Aerobic Digester Zone Design Data

Volume
: 12m 3
Dimensions
: 1.4mX3mX3m(LxWxH).
b.
List of equipments supplied for the Sludge Holding Zone

Drainage Valve - Decant Line - Excess Sludge Return Line - Air Diffuser Drops - Air
Diffuser Header - Air Diffuser - Air Diffuser Header Support.
III.5
a
Air Blower System

Diffused Air System
- Air Diffusers
: Fine bubbles
b. Air blower
Skid mounted complete with motor, inlet/outlet silencer with
relief valve, check valves, outlet nipples, discharge header, filter element,
blower and motor pulleys, belts and belt guard;
- Blowers quantity
: Two(2)
- Motor Power (HP)
:10
- Head (PSI)
:6
- Flow (CFM)
:90
Air shall be supplied by means of two(2) positive displacement blower(s) of sufficient size to
provide the air required for the aeration chamber and for the air lift pumps.
The air shall be introduced into the tank through Snap Cap diffusers. The diffusers spacing
and air velocity shall insure that adequate mixing velocities are maintained. The air diffuser
assembly shall be easily removable from the tank and will be equipped with an air regulating
valve to permit either adjustment of the air flow or complete shutoff.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/22
December 2010

Specifications
Blowers assemblies will be supplied complete with base, motor, coupling, inlet and outlet
silencers, and control valves
c. Air supply network consisting of :
- Air Distribution Header;
- Air Regulating Valves;
- Air Piping and Accessories
- Air Diffuser Drops;
- Air Diffuser Header;
- Air Diffuser;
- Air Diffuser Header Supports.
III.6
Electric Control Panel

An Indoor electric panel to house the electrical controls of the Secondary and tertiary
treatment equipments and to consist of all selector switches, starters, indicating lights and
main circuit breaker, all prewired and tested for immediate connection at site.
IV.
IV.1
Tertiary Treatment
Chlorine Contact /Balance Tank
Two Chlorine Contact/ balance tanks will be part of Sewage Treatment Plants with a
capacity as indicated below. The tank shall be constructed of the same materials as the
plant and conform the same specifications. This tank will receive the chlorinated Effluent
and shall serve as feed water tank for the tertiary filtration system
Volume of one tank
: 25 m 3
Dimensions
: as per manufacturer.
List of equipments supplied for the Chlorine Contact Zone
The Disinfection Feed System includes metering pump, polyethylene tank,
mixer and level control switch and injection tubing:
Chemical Pumps
Quantity
: Two (One Duty/ One Standby)
Max. Output capacity
: 10 liter /hr
Max. Injection pressure
: 3 bars
Electricity
: 240V /1PH / 50Hz.
Solution Mixer
Quantity
: One
Speed
: 1500 RPM
Polyethylene Tank w/cover
Quantity
: One (1)
Capacity
: 500 liters
IV.2
Multi Media Filters

Quantity
Type
: one in duty
: Vertical Multimedia
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/23
December 2010

Specifications
Diam x straight height

Service flow rate
Service Flow per filter
Backwash flow rate
Operation
Face piping
Material of construction
Filter consists of the following
IV.3
Feed/Backwash Pumps
Quantity
Head
Electricity
Speed
Capacity
IV.4
: 1.2 x 1.5 m
: 10 m3/hr.m2
: 7.5
m3/hr
: 35 m3/hr.m2
: Automatic
: PVC
: carbon steel with high quality epoxy coating
: - Air relief valve
- Backwash sight glass
- Manholes
- Structural legs
- Internal piping
- Filter face piping and valves
- Pressure gauges
- Lifting eye
: Two(2) [one duty, one standby]

: 30 m
: 380V/3PH/50 Hz.
: 2900 RPM
: 7.5 m3/hr
Reservoirs
One shall be provided for filters feed and backwash. Volume of each reservoir shall not be
less than 12.5 m3.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/24
December 2010
V.
V.1

Specifications
WASHWATER REJECT and INDUSTRIAL WASTEWATER TREATMENT

UNIT
General
There shall be one Industrial Water treatment unit to treat reject water pumped from Train
Washing Machine. The unit shall be tested and ready for operation. The Contractor shall
furnish all labor, materials, equipment, instruments, and incidentals required for
installation of the treatment unit as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
V.2
Function
The treatment unit shall treat 185m3/day wash water reject from the Train Washing
Machine, influent wastewater contains weak alkaline detergents, sand, grease and other
pollutants that contactor shall determine from his own experience in similar projects.
Effluent sludge from this unit shall be directed to the sludge treatment system installed to
treat domestic sludge.
This Plant shall accomplish at least the following tasks:
Neutralization.
Sand and grit removal.
Oil and grease removal.
Chemical injection.
Paints and detergents treatment.
Coagulation and decanting.
Air floatation.
Filtration and disinfection (Tertiary Treatment).
Effluent water quality before tertiary treatment shall be as follow:
COD: 50ppm
BOD: 20ppm
TSS: 30ppm
PH: 7
Oil & grease: nil
Color: nil
This effluent will be tertiary treated and disinfected. Water quality shall fit with MEPA
standards for free discharge into natural courses, BOD=10ppm, TSS=10ppm at least.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Environmental Works
Section 02600/25
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 02780
UNIT PAVERS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Conditions of Particular Application and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the following unit pavers works as required by the contract:
Precast Concrete Curbs

Cast-in Place Curb and Gutter
Interlocking Block Paving
Concrete Tiles
Pavement Marking Paints
Extent of unit pavers and sidewalk is shown on Drawings.

1.3
Reference Standards
Works shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the British
Standard Specifications (BS) or other approved International Standards.
BRITISH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
BS NO.
340
1014
3262
6044
6088
6717
Precast Concrete Curbs

Pigments for Portland and Portland Cement Products
Hot Applied Thermoplastic Road Marking
Specification for pavement marking paints
Specification for Solid Glass Beads for Use with Road Marking
Compounds
Precast Concrete Paving Blocks
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND

TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
AASHTO NO
247
248
Glass Beads Use in Traffic Paint

Ready Mixed White and Yellow Traffic Paint
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Unit Pavers
Section 02780/1
December 2010
1.4

Specifications
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:
1.5
Materials specifications and manufacturer's data
Representative samples of all materials to be used in the work in full size units
of each. type of unit pavers; showing the full range of colour, texture and
pattern available.
Shop drawings showing patterns, colours and full range of variations expected
Related Sections
The following sections include requirements which relate to this section:
03300
Cast in Place Concrete
1.6
Quality Control
1.6.1
Tests: Use standard test with manufacturer to determine if mortar and grout
materials will obtain optimum adhesion with, and shall be non-staining to installed
paver and other materials constituting the paver installation. Schedule for sufficient
time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delaying the work.
1.6.2
Mock-Up: Prior to installing unit pavers, construct mock-up for each form and
pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-up of
size as required using material indicated for final unit of work including, same base
construction, surface finish, texture, colour, special features for expansion joints as
indicated.
1.7
Delivery, Storage and Handling

Deliver pavement marking materials to project site in original package with seals
unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name, type of
materials and date of manufacture.
Store pavement marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within
temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct
sunlight,
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Unit Pavers
Section 02780/2
December 2010
PART 2
2.1

Specifications
PRODUCTS
Materials, General
Materials for concrete shall be in accordance with Division 3, Section "Concrete and
Reinforced Concrete". Materials for mortar shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS
12 and ASTM A150.
2.1.1
Concrete Tiles: Concrete tiles shall be as shown on drawings, of well compacted

mixture at a ratio of 1:2:4 (by weight) cement: sand: gravel, respectively.
Characteristic strength of concrete tiles shall be 180 kg/cm2 as a minimum.
All tiles shall be square, their edges and surfaces shall be at right-angles to one
another.
The surface of all tiles shall be plane, free from projections, depressions, crazing,
and from damage to edges and comers. All arises shall be sharp and true. When a
cut surface is examined, tile shall show a reasonably uniform texture.
2.1.2
Concrete Curbs: Curbs shall be precast concrete units complying with B S No. 340
and to the requirements of Section 03005 "Concrete and Reinforced Concrete",
made from normal weight aggregate in shapes and sizes indicated.
Curbs shall be to the required cross section or 125 x 150 x 400 mm for roads and
125 x 150 x 300 mm. for secondary roads and parking area, and 500 x 300 x 80 min
for green areas and shall be of the barrier type. The average dimensions shall be
within + 4 mm of the specified dimensions.
The units. shall be to the lines, grades, finish and jointing specified and shall not
present defects such as cracks, distortion or stripping.
All angles of the products with the exception, of angles resulting from the splayed
faces in the section shall be right angles. The arises shall be clean and with the
exception of the rounded arises, sharp and regular over the whole length.
Ratio of concrete mix shall be 1:2:4 by weight, (300 kg) cement: sand: gravel,
respectively. Compressive strength of concrete after 28 days shall not be less than
180 kg/cm2.
Mortar and grout mixture shall be 400 kg cement to 1.0 m3 sand.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Unit Pavers
Section 02780/3
December 2010
2.1.3

Specifications
Paving Blocks: Shall be precast 80 mm thick for roads and 60 mm for sidewalks solid
interlocking paving blocks made from normal weight aggregates in sizes and shapes
to be selected from manufacturer full range. Concrete shall be a well compacted
mixture at a ratio of 1.2:4 by weight cement, sand: gravel respectively.
Characteristic strength of concrete at 28 days shall not be less than 250 kg/cm2.
Edges and surfaces of all blocks shall be at right angles to one another.
The surface of all paving-blocks shall be plane, free from projections, frog, cores,
depressions, crazing, in surfaces exposed to view and from damages to edges and
corners. All arises shall be sharp and true. When a cut is examined, paving block shall
show a reasonable uniform texture.
For good performance the blocks shall be manufactured to close tolerance, the block
thickness shall be within 8 mm. of the nominal dimensions to satisfactory ensure
interlock.
Pattern and colours of blocks shall be selected by the Engineer.
2.1.4
Mortar and Grout Mixtures: Provide natural colour portland cement in combination
with sand and filler materials to produce joints. Mortar mixtures shall be composed of
300 kg cement to 1 m3 sand.
Grouting shall be 400 kg cement to 1 m3 sand.
Grading of aggregates shall be as follows:
For pointing mortar use aggregate graded with 100%passing the No. 16 sieve.
2.2
Stamped Concrete
Comply with requirements of Section 03005 "Concrete and Reinforced Concrete" for
concrete mix design, testing and quality control. Mix shall consist of ordinary
Portland cement, aggregates, water reducing and water to produce the workability,
plasticity and compressive strength of not less than 300 kg/cm2 at 28 days.
Base course shall comply with requirements of "Crushed Aggregate for Base Course".
Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing all parts of the
works shall be approved by the Engineer.
2.3
Sand for Levelling Course

Sound sharp, washed natural sand complying with gradation requirements of BS for
fine aggregates.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Unit Pavers
Section 02780/4
December 2010

Specifications
2.4
Mortar Bed and Pointing
2.4.1
Mortar: Combine and thoroughly mix the cementitious materials, water and
aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer; to produce setting bed and joint materials of
uniform quality, comply with referenced ASTM standard, as applicable, for mixing
time and water content, unless otherwise indicated.
Discard mortar and grout when they have reached initial set.
2.4.2
Pointing Mortar: Provide pointing mortar mixed to match the sample approved by the
Engineer. Sand for joints shall be fine, sharp washed, natural sand with 100% passing
No. 16 sieve and no more than 10% passing No. 200 sieve.
Cement shall be portland cement of natural colour or white as required to produce
colour indication.
The thickness of the joint between 2 units of curbs shall be fixed to 15 mm in no case
it shall exceed 20 mm. The joint shall be flat and smoothed with the trowel.
2.5
Cast-in Place Concrete Curbs
2.5.1
Forms: Forms shall be made to the required shape according to drawings, of metal
framed plywood or metal having a thickness of not less than 4 mm and shall be
furnished in sections of not less than 3.0 m in length, and to provide a full depth,
continuous, straight smooth exposed surfaces.
2.5.2
Concrete: Shall be plain concrete complying with section 03005 "Concrete and
Reinforced Concrete".
2.5.3
Form Release Agent: A release agent with a maximum of 350 g/1 volatile organic
compounds, that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces.
2.5.4
Non-slip Aggregates Finish: Fused aluminium oxide granules or crushed emery as the
abrasive aggregate for a non-slip finish, with emery aggregate of not less than 50%
aluminium oxide of not less than 25% ferric-oxide. Use material factory-graded,
packaged, rustproof, non-glazing, non affected by moisture.
2.6
Waterproofing treatment above lower ground (under stamped concrete &

interlocking tiles where required)
- Screed as specified in section 3532.
- Waterproofing membrane 4 mm SBS as specified in section 7100
- Protection board as specified in section 7100
- Light weight concrete filling
- Finish layer
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Unit Pavers
Section 02780/5
December 2010
PART 3

Specifications
EXECUTION
Examine surfaces indicated to receive paving, do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Check subgrade for unstable areas requiring additional compaction.
3.1
Sidewalks
3.1.1
Laying Precast: Curbs: Curbs bed shall be haunched half way up back. Set curbs
with a minimum joint width of 15 mm. Joint with mortar as specified hereinbefore
in Item 2.5.2 as the work proceeds neatly flush pointed. Lay curbs to lines shown on
Drawings with top surface flush and level. Form curves with straight pieces with
angling the joints.
3.1.2
Laying Forms for Cast-In Place Curbs: Forms shall be supported on thoroughly
compacted material over their entire length, Provision shall be made to keep and
secure forms firmly in place to the required lines, grades and elevations. Forms shall
be provided with adequate devices and tightly locked, fixed in place with not less
than 3 pins for each 3.0 m length, and shall not deviate from true line more than 3
mm. at any joint.
Forms shall be sufficiently in advance of the concrete placement to ensure
continuous concreting operation, and so that forms can remain in place at least 24
hours after concrete placement.
Forms shall be cleaned and oiled prior to the placing of concrete, and shall not be
removed until 12 hours after the concrete has been placed. The surface of concrete
shall be smooth and well finished.
3.1.3
Preparation of Ground Surface: Soil subgrade shall be mechanically compacted

uniformly to the sufficient density (95% relative density). Following, an appropriate
sand base in thickness indicated as levelling course shall be spread and compacted
to 95% relative density by tamping with plate vibrator and screed to depth required
to allow setting of pavers units.
3.2
Setting of Tiles
Tiles shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour prior to setting
and shall be applied to setting beds while damp but without free water on the back
of tile.
Tiles shall be accurately set with neat cement grout, firmly pressed and tamped into
full mortar beds with well fitted joints in true planes graded or leveled and neatly
cut and fitted closely against abutting work.
Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered by tiles before
initial set, cut, remove and discard setting bed that has reached initial set.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Unit Pavers
Section 02780/6
December 2010

Specifications
Do not use units with chips, cracks, voids, discoloration and other defects that might
be visible or cause staining in finished work.
Mix tiles form several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend
of colour and texture.
For joint pattern match field constructed mock-up.
3.2.1
Grouting: Thoroughly wash out tile joints and saturate with clean water before
grouting. Grout joints after setting bed is dry with grey grouting cement mixed with
water to a creamy consistency and thoroughly forced into joints to fill entire depth,
Clean excess grout from face of paving units as work progresses.
Cure joints to comply with recommendations by maintaining in a damp condition
for 7 days.
3.3
Laying of Concrete Blocks

Mix blocks from several pallets as they are placed to produce a uniform blend of
colours and texture.
Concrete blocks shall be laid on a sand bed over a subgrade layer compacted to 95%
relative density. Patterns can be formed in the paving by using different coloured
blocks as indicated by the Engineer
Place leveling course to a thickness of 50 mm taking care that moisture content
remains constant until pavers are set.
Cut units with. a mortar-driven masonry saw to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut to provide pattern indicated, hammer cutting is not acceptable,
Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1. 6 mm and a maximum of 3 mm.
Vibrate pavers into levelling course with a low amplitude plate vibrator. Perform at
least 3 passes across paving with vibrator.
Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating units into levelling
course. Vibrate units and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove
excess sand.
3.4
Stamped Concrete
Pour concrete as specified in Section 03300 "Cast in Place Concrete" Concrete
surface shall be at the levels indicated on Drawings and the upper surface of the
curbs.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Unit Pavers
Section 02780/7
December 2010

Specifications
Smooth surface of concrete screeding and floating, use hand methods only where
mechanical floating is not possible, Apply the colour hardener evently to the plastic
surface of concrete by the dry shake method, it shall be applied in two or more
shakes, floats after each and trowel only after the final floating.
Apply the release evenly to the surface and while the concrete is still in the plastic
stage of set, apply and tamp the imprinting tool pattern to make the desire texture or
impression to the surface.
Remove the imprinting tool and after curing remove excess release and apply a
minmum one coat of acrylic sealer. After drying wash with water.
3.4.1
Curing: Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with applicable
requirements of Division 3 Sections 03300. Use approved curing and sealing
compound or moist-curing methods.
3.5
Cleaning
3.5.1
Curbs: After grouting has sufficiently set or hardened, remove excess grout from
exposed surface, curb and tile surface shall be cleaned and traces of cement or dust
accumulations and foreign matter shall be completely removed. Wash and scrub
clean.
Repair or remove and replace curbs or tiles damaged during paving.
3.5.2
Marking Paint: All marking paint shall be protected from damage until the paint is
dry. Paint shall be protected from all traffic, vehicle and pedestrian. All paints shall
be maintained to the Engineer's satisfaction.
3.5.3
Concrete Paving: Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt or

foreign material. Clean and broom concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to
date of substantial completion.
Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged or defective.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Unit Pavers
Section 02780/8
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Trees.
Shrubs.
Ground covers.
Plants.
Topsoil and soil amendments.
Fertilizers and mulches.
Stakes and guys.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply with
specified requirements.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.

Analysis for other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to
methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where
applicable.
Label data substantiating that plants, trees, shrubs, and planting materials comply
with specified requirements.
Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture stating the
botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and
percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and
date of packaging.
1.
Certification of each seed mixture for sod, identifying sod source, including name
and telephone number of supplier.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -1
December 2010
D.

Specifications
Samples of each of the following:

1.
2.
2 kg of mineral mulch for each color and texture of stone required for Project, in
labeled plastic bags.
Edging materials and accessories to verify color selected.
E.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and address of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
F.
Material test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following materials with
requirements indicated.
1.
2.
Analysis of existing surface soil.

Analysis of imported topsoil.
G.
Planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting.
H.
Maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for

maintenance of landscaping during an entire year. Submit before expiration of required
maintenance periods.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
Engage an experienced Installer who has completed
landscaping work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful landscape establishment.
1.
Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on the Project site during times that landscaping is in progress.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing

agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agencysubmitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability
to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.
C.
Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated,
complying with applicable requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for
Nursery Stock."
1.
Selection of trees and shrubs purchased under allowances will be made by
Architect, who will tag stock at their place of growth before they are prepared for
transplanting.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -2
December 2010
D.

Specifications
Topsoil Analysis: Furnish a soil analysis made by a qualified independent soil-testing

agency stating percentages of organic matter, inorganic matter (silt, clay, and sand),
deleterious material, pH, and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.
1.
Report suitability of topsoil for growth of applicable planting material. State

recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and any
limestone, aluminum sulfate, or other soil amendments to be added to produce a
satisfactory topsoil.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight,

analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during
delivery and while stored at site.
B.
Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.
C.
Trees and Shrubs: Deliver freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune before delivery,
except as approved by Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun
scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend
or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. Provide
protective covering during delivery. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery.
1.
Immediately after digging bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or
other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
D.
Handle balled and burlapped stock by the root ball.
E.
Deliver trees, shrubs, ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have
been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after
delivery, set planting materials in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage,
and keep roots moist.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for 2 hours if dried out.
Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with a fine-mist spray.
Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -3
December 2010

Specifications
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform
work in a manner which will avoid damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain
grade stakes until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.
B.
Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as

rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before
planting.
1.7
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each
type of plant material required.
1.8
A.
WARRANTY
General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranty: Warrant the following living planting materials for a period of one
year after date of Substantial Completion, against defects including death and
unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance,
neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions unusual for warranty period,
or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Trees.
Shrubs.
Ground covers.
Plants.
C.
Remove and replace dead planting materials immediately unless required to plant in the
succeeding planting season.
D.
Replace planting materials that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition at end of warranty period.
E.
A limit of one replacement of each plant material will be required, except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -4
December 2010

Specifications
1.9
TREE AND SHRUB MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain trees and shrubs by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing,

restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and
resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable
plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.
Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings. Maintain trees and shrubs for the
following period:
1.
Maintenance Period: 12 months following Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
A.
General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs as per international standards, with
healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped,
fully-branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects
such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B.
Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades required. Trees and shrubs of a
larger size may be used if acceptable to Engineer, with a proportionate increase in size
of roots or balls.
C.
Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible
designation of botanical and common name.
D.
Label at least 1 tree and 1 shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached,
waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
2.2
A.
GRASS MATERIALS
Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with the Association of
Official Seed Analysis' "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
1.
Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight,
and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of
weed seed as indicated on Schedules at the end of this Section.
B.
Sod: Certified turfgrass sod complying with ASPA specifications for machine-cut
thickness, size, strength, moisture content, and mowed height, and free of weeds and
undesirable native grasses. Provide viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture of
the following turfgrass species, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and
development when planted.
1.
Species: Provide sod of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and
minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed
seed as indicated on Schedules at the end of this Section.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -5
December 2010

Specifications
C.
Sod Plugs: Certified turfgrass sod complying with ASPA specifications for machine-cut
thickness, size, strength, moisture content, and mowed height, and free of weeds and
undesirable native grasses. Provide sod plugs from viable sod of the following turfgrass
species cut into square or round plugs of size indicated, strongly rooted, and capable of
vigorous growth and development when planted.
D.
Sod Sprigs: Healthy living stems, rhizomes, or stolons with a minimum of 2 nodes and
any attached roots free of soil.
2.3
TOPSOIL
A.
Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum,

free of stones 20 mm or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
1.
Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of
surface soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary.
Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil
of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful
to plant growth.
2.
Topsoil Source: Import topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil from
naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 100 mm deep; do not
obtain from bogs or marshes.
Topsoil Source: Amend existing surface soil to produce topsoil. Supplement
with imported topsoil when required.
3.
2.4
FERTILIZER
A.
Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20

percent phosphoric acid.
B.
Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent

available phosphoric acid.
C.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,

consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic
sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1.
Composition: 0.5 kg per 100 sq. m of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and
2 percent potassium, by weight.
2.
Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in

soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -6
December 2010
D.

Specifications
Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1.
2.
3.
Composition: 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent

potassium, by weight.
Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent
potassium, by weight.
Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in
soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
2.5
A.
STAKES AND GUYS

Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressurepreservative-treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 50 by
50 mm by length indicated, pointed at one end.
B.
Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted,
2.7 mm in diameter.
C.
Guy Cable: 5-strand, 4.8-mm diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turn
buckles, 75-mm-long minimum, with two 10-mm-galvanized eyebolts.
D.
Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 13 mm in diameter,

black, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.
E.
Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 150 mm long.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming,

for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix
according to manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous
material, 102 mm wide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent.
C.
Tree Grates and Frames: ASTM A 48, Class 35 or better, gray iron castings of shape,
pattern, and size indicated.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -7
December 2010

Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with requirements and for
conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake
locations, outline areas, and secure Architect's acceptance before the start of planting
work. Make minor adjustments as may be required.
3.3
PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION
A.
Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other
extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
B.
Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing
fertilizer if planting does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days.
1.
A "Planting Soil Amendments Schedule" is included at the end of this Section.
C.
For tree pit or trench backfill, mix planting soil before backfilling and stockpile at site.
D.
For planting beds and lawns, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on
surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting.
1.
2.
Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing fertilizer. Prevent lime from contacting
roots of acid-tolerant plants.
Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer, other than that constituting a portion of complete
fertilizers, directly to subgrade before applying planting soil and tilling.
3.4
EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A.
Pits and Trenches: Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly
raised at center to assist drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation.
B.
Dispose of subsoil removed from landscape excavations. Do not mix with planting soil
or use as backfill.
C.
Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out, before placing setting layer and
positioning trees and shrubs.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -8
December 2010
3.5
A.
B.
PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS

Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball
raised above adjacent finish grades as indicated.
1.
Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
2.
Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of balls and partially from sides, but
do not remove from under balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not
use planting stock if ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
3.
Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids
and air pockets. When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly
before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed.
Water again after placing and tamping final layer of backfill.
Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised
above adjacent finish grades as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
C.

Specifications
Carefully remove containers so as not to damage root balls.

Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids
and air pockets. When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly
before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed.
Water again after placing and tamping final layer of backfill.
Set bare-root stock on cushion of planting soil. Spread roots without tangling or turning
toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water
until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain
plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. Remove
injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.
1.
Set collar 25 mm below adjacent finish grades, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 75-mm-high mound around the rim of the pit.
Do not cover top of root ball with backfill.
E.
Wrap trees of 50-mm caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and
spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width,
and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper
pruning, and insect infestation and take corrective measures required before wrapping.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -9
December 2010

Specifications
3.6
SEEDING NEW LAWNS
A.
Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when
wind velocity exceeds 8 km/h. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2
directions at right angles to each other.
1.
Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or
storage.
C.
D.
Rake seed lightly into top 3 mm of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
Protect seeded slopes exceeding 1:4 against erosion with erosion-control blankets
installed and stapled according to manufacturer's recommendations.
E.
Protect seeded slopes exceeding 1:6 against erosion with jute or coir-fiber erosioncontrol mesh installed and stapled according to manufacturer's recommendations.
F.
Protect seeded areas with slopes less than 1:6 against erosion by spreading straw mulch
after completion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 45 kg
per 100 sq. m to form a continuous blanket 38 mm loose depth over seeded areas.
Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.
1.
2.
Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil by suitable mechanical equipment.

Anchor straw mulch by spraying with asphalt-emulsion tackifier at the rate of 41
to 53 L per 100 sq. m. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of
structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean
damaged or stained areas.
G.
Protect seeded areas against hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch
within 24 hours after completion of seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a
depth of 4.8 mm thick and roll to a smooth surface.
3.7
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A.
During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.
B.
Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other

contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and
maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
3.8
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable
soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Landscaping
Section 02900 -10
December 2010

Specifications
DIVISION 3
CONCRETE WORK
CONCRETE FORMWORK (03100)
A.
Scope
1.
This section specifies formwork for all Concrete Work indicated as in-situ
Concrete on the drawings.
2.
Items included are design and construction of formwork, stability, surface finish
achieved, cleaning, cast-in fixings and striking times.
B.
Performance and Standards
1.
Formwork shall be constructed to maintain the correct positions, shape, profile and
surface finish of the Concrete in accordance with the following standards and this
Specifications.
2.
Formwork shall satisfy the requirements and comply with the recommendations of
BS 8110 : Part 1, ISO 3443 and BS 5606 for tolerances in buildings.
C.
Related Items
03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
D.
Submittals
1.
Submit shop drawing for all formwork showing locations of tie bolts and cones,
openings, chamfers, water stops, inserts, fittings and accessories for the approval of
the Engineer.
2.
All formwork to be erected using cones and tie bolts for securing the formwork.
3.
Electrical, Mechanical and plumbing reservation, coordination drawings before

concreting.
E.
Product Handling
The formwork shall be so handled and erected that the concrete shall not suffer due to
defects or damage to the formwork.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete
Division 03/1
December 2010

Specifications
CONCRETE FORMWORK (03100) (CONT'D)

F.
1.
2.
Materials
Smooth surface finish Formwork

a.
Concrete work where shown on drawings and schedules not receive plaster
shall be smooth finish.
b.
This shall be obtained by the use of properly designed formwork or moulds

of closely jointed plywood boards. The surface shall be free from voids,
honeycombing or other large blemishes.
Fairface Formwork
3.
a.
This finish shall be obtained by the use of properly designed forms of

closely jointed type plywood boards, metal framed, or other acceptable
panel type materials, where indicated on the drawings. The surface shall be
free from voids, honeycombing or blemishes. The surface shall then be
continuous, straight, smooth, improved by carefully removing all fins and
other projections.
b.
Forms shall be furnished in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of

joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.
Chamfers and grooves

The chamfers and grooves shall be obtained by wrought plastic fillet of size and
location indicated on the drawings.
All slabs, drop beams, walls and columns shall have chamfers and grooves where
shown on the drawings or as specified by the Engineer .
4.
Form ties
The ties for securing forms for ordinary formwork and for fairface plywood works
shall be tie screws with removable plastic cones and removable bolts. They are
designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spelling of concrete upon
removal.
When forms are removed, no metal shall be closer than 40mm from the concrete
surface. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not greater than 25mm
in diameter in the concrete surface.
5.
Form coating
Form coating shall be of a type which does not import any stain to concrete nor
interface with the adhesive of any finish, sealant, waterproofing material applied to
any concrete surface and which has been approved by the Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/2
December 2010

Specifications

G.
1.
Workmanship
Design and Construction

The design and construction of formwork shall be carried out by competent
persons employed by the Contractor, taking due account of the surface finish
required.
The formwork shall be sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar
from the concrete at all stages and for the appropriate method of placing and
compacting.
Formwork (including supports) shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain the forms in
their correct position, shape and profile within the limits of the dimensional
tolerances specified in Table 293 of BS 5606 The supports shall be designed to
withstand the worst combination of self-weight, formwork weight, formwork
forces, reinforcement weight, wet concrete weight, construction and wind loads,
together with all incidental dynamic effects caused by placing, vibrating and
compacting the concrete.
The Contractor shall make allowance for any settlement or deflection of formwork
that is likely to arise during construction, so that the hardened concrete conforms
accurately to the specified line and level.
The formwork shall be so arranged as to be readily dismantled and removable from
the cast concrete without shock, disturbance or damage. Where necessary, the
formwork shall be so arranged that the soffit form, properly supported on props
only, can be retained in position for such period as may be required by maturing
Conditions or Specification.
Approval of the formwork by the Engineer before concreting shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to produce concrete with the Tolerances specified
in 03310.
2.
Form Lining
The type and treatment of any lining (plywood, metal, plastics etc.) to the forms
shall be appropriate to the concrete finish required.
3.
Cleaning and Treatment of Forms

All rubbish shall be removed from the interior of the forms in contact with the
concrete. Forms shall be clean and treated with a suitable release agent, where
applicable.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/3
December 2010

Specifications

G.
4.
Workmanship (Cont'd)
Projecting Reinforcement, Fixing Devices

Where holes are needed in forms to accommodate projecting reinforcement or
fixing devices, care shall be taken to prevent loss of grout when concreting or
damage when demoulding.
5.
Cast-In Fixings
Allowance shall be made to accommodate cast-in fixings as shown on the
drawings or where directed by the Engineer.
6.
Control of Colour
Where the finished concrete is exposed the Contractor shall obtain each constituent
material from a single consistent source. The aggregates shall be durable and free
of any impurities that may cause staining. The mix proportions and the grading,
particularly of the fine aggregate, shall be maintained constant. In formwork the
same type of plywood or timber shall be used throughout similar exposed areas,
and individual plywood sheets or sections of timber in large panels shall not be
replaced.
7.
Release Agents
Release agents for formwork shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Where a
concrete surface is to be permanently exposed, only one agent shall be used
throughout the entire area. Release agents contact with reinforcement shall be
avoided.
8.
Striking of Formwork
a.
General
The removal shall be done in such a manner as not to damage the concrete,
and shall take place at times to suit the requirements for its curing and to
prevent restraint that may arise from elastic shortening, shrinkage or creep.
After striking of formwork no deviation in the true line between the
concealed beams and slabs shall be noticeable nor the quality of plywood
finish shall not be less than the specified for the fairface finish
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/4
December 2010

Specifications

G.
8.
Striking of Formwork (Contd)

b.
Striking Period
Where the concrete compressive strength is confirmed by tests on concrete
cylinder stored under conditions that simulate the field conditions,
formwork supporting concrete in bending may be struck when the cylinder
strength is 12N/mm2 or twice the stress to which it will be subjected,
whichever is the greater, provided that such early striking will not result in
unacceptable deformations due to shrinkage, creep etc..
In the absence of control cylinder, the minimum periods before striking
shall be as follows:
Ordinary Portland
Cement Concrete
Sides of columns, walls and beams
2 days
Soffits and slabs
6 days
Soffits of beams
14 days
Props to beams
21 days
Props to slabs
15 days
9.
Trial Panels for Formwork
When required by the Engineer the Contractor shall prepare, prior to concreting, a
sample panel of size and surface texture to be agreed by the Engineer. The panel
shall contain reinforcement fixed to represent the most congested part of the work.
The panel shall be filled with the proposed concrete mix compacted by the method
to be used in the work. As soon as practicable after compaction, the side forms
shall be removed to enable the Engineer to check the surface finish and compaction
achieved.
10.
Spraying
All surfaces of formwork which will be in contact with concrete, and all
reinforcement, shall be damped with a fine spray of water immediately prior to
concreting.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/5
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Related Documents
1.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Summary
1.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,

concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Foundations.
Suspended slabs.
Building frame members.
Building shear walls and columns.
Related Sections include the following:

a. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
C.
Definitions
1.
D.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more

of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground
granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with
requirements.
Submittals
1.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
2.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures
when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
a. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project
site.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/6
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (CONTD)

PART 1 GENERAL (CONTD)
D.
Submittals (Contd)
3.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication,

bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical
connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
4.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified

professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
5.
Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping

formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.
6.
Samples: For waterstops and vapor retarder.
7.
Welding certificates.
8.
Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.
9.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency,
indicating compliance with requirements:
a. Aggregates.
b. Cement.
c. Steel reinforcement.
10.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Form materials and form-release agents.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
Waterstops.
Curing compounds.
Floor and slab treatments.
Bonding agents.
Adhesives.
Vapor retarders.
Semirigid joint filler.
Joint-filler strips.
Repair materials.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/7
December 2010

Specifications

D.
E.
Submittals (Contd)
11.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with

specified tolerances.
12.
Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
13.
Minutes of preinstallation conference.
Quality Assurance
1.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel

qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who
is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.
2.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed

concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
a. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities."
3.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
a. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field
Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent
certification program.
b. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength
Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I.
Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete
Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.
4.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same
brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and
obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.
5.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural

Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/8
December 2010

Specifications

E.
Quality Assurance (Contd)

6.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in

the Contract Documents:
a. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5
b. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials."
7.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
8.
Mockups: Cast concrete panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,

texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
a. Build panel approximately in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
b. Approved panels may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
9.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
a. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and
examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require
representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to
attend, including the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Contractor's superintendent.
Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
Concrete subcontractor.
b. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for
field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather
concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and
isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form
removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder
installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel
reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement,
concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/9
December 2010

Specifications

F.
G.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling

1.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent

bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
2.
Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt,
oil, and other contaminants.
Testing and Material Requirements

1.
All materials to be used in concrete, mortar or plaster works shall conform to test
requirements of the following Standards, and the Contractor shall perform any of
these tests as required by the Engineer in an approved independent Laboratory.
Test results bearing the signature of the Laboratory shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
2.
The Contractor shall follow the guidelines contained in the latest editions of the
codes, specifications and standards listed below, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
ASTM C 29
ASTM C 31
ASTM C 33
ASTM C 39
ASTM C 40
ASTM C 42
ASTM C 78
ASTM C 87
ASTM C 88
ASTM C 94
ASTM C 109
ASTM C 131
ASTM C 117
ASTM C 123
Bulk density of aggregates

Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete.
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete.
Flexural Strength of Concrete.
Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength
of Mortar.
Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium or Magnesium
Sulfate
Ready-Mixed Concrete
Standard Method of Test for compressive strength of
Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. (50mm) Cube
Specimens)
Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by
use of the Los Angeles Machine.
Materials fine than 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve
Lightweight Pieces in aggregates
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/10
December 2010

Specifications

G.
Testing and Material Requirements (Contd)

ASTM C 125
ASTM C 127
ASTM C 128
ASTM C 136
ASTM C 138
ASTM C 142
ASTM C 143
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 171
ASTM C 172
ASTM C 174
ASTM C 192
ASTM C 231
ASTM C 232
ASTM C 260
ASTM C 309
ASTM C 330
ASTM C 403
ASTM C 494
ASTM C 566
ASTM C 595
ASTM C 617
ASTM C 685
ASTM C1017
ASTM D 98
ASTM D 1751
Terminology relating to concrete and concrete aggregates

Specific Gravity and Water Absorption of Coarse
Aggregate.
Specific Gravity and Water Absorption of Fine Aggregate.
Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate.
Unit Weight, Yield, and air content (Gravimetric) of
Concrete.
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles
Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
Portland Cement.
Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
Sampling Fresh Concrete.
Measuring Length of Drilled Concrete Cores.
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory.
Air Content of freshly mixed concrete using pressure meter
Bleeding of concrete
Air-entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete.
Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for
Structural Concrete.
Determination of concrete setting time
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
Total water content in aggregates
Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
Capping cylindrical concrete specimen
Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric
Batching and Continuous Mixing.
Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
Concrete
Calcium Chloride
Performed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/11
December 2010

Specifications

G.
Testing and Material Requirements (Contd)

ASTM D 2419
Sand Equivalent of Fine Aggregates
ASTM A 185
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A 615
Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
reinforcement.
ASTM A 616
Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
ASTM A 617
Axle-Steel
Deformed
and Plain Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
ACI
ACI 201.2R
ACI 211
ACI 214
ACI 221
ACI 222
ACI 304.2
ACI 301
ACI 304
ACI 305
ACI 308
ACI 309
ACI 318
ACI 347
(American concrete Institute)

Guide to Durable Concrete
Recommended Practice for Selection proportions for
Normal and Heavy-Weight Concrete.
Quality Control Charts
Guide for use of Normal weight and Heavyweight
Aggregates in Concrete
Protection of Metals in Concrete against Corrosion
Placing Concrete by Pumping
Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete.
Hot Weather Concreting.
Guide to Curing of Concrete.
Recommended Practice for consolidation of Concrete.
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
BS EN
BS 1881: Part 122
BS 1881: Part 208
BS EN 12390-8
BS EN 1744
H.
(British and European Standards)

Water absorption of concrete
Initial Surface Water Absorption
Water Permeability of Concrete
Chemical properties of aggregates
Method Statement
1.
During the mobilization period the Contractor shall submit a method statement
detailing his proposal for the organization of all concreting activities at the site as
well as off site for the approval of the Engineer.
2.
The Contractor shall submit a method statement for any particular activity when
called for by the Engineer and demonstrate its feasibility through mockups or
placement samples of appropriate size as approved and directed by the Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/12
December 2010

Specifications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
Cement
1.
General
a. Cement shall be Portland or Blended Type, originating from approved
manufacturers, obtained in sealed and labeled bags, each 50 kgs net capacity,
name and brand of the manufacturer shall plainly be identified thereon and
delivered to Site in good condition.
b. Cement delivered in bulk shall be accepted only if a central mixing plant is
used. The quality of cement shall conform to the Standard Specification of
ASTM C 150 Type I for use in general concrete construction or ASTM C595
Blended Cement.
c. The use one brand of cement will be permitted throughout the project unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
d. Manufacturer testing certificate (Mill Certificate) shall be provided with each
bulk shipment and made available to the Site. The Engineer shall have the right
to call for additional testing, the cost of which is to be born by the Contractor.
2.
Storage of Cement
a. All cement shall be stored in suitable weatherproof and approved storage sheds
which will protect the cement from dampness. These storage sheds shall be
erected in locations approved by the Engineer.
b. Provisions for storage shall be ample, and the consignment of cement as
received shall be separately stored in such a manner as to provide easy access
for the identification and inspection of each consignment.
c. Cement shall be used in the order of its delivery to the site; new deliveries shall
not be used unless the cement from earlier deliveries has been completely used.
d. Stored cement shall meet the test requirements at any time after storage when a
retest is ordered by the Engineer, all at the expense of the Contractor.
e. Storage of bulk cement shall be tight and weatherproof and shall bear a clear
indication of the types of the bulked cement. Where storage is provided for
different types of cement, isolation to prevent intermingling or contamination is
necessary.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/13
December 2010

Specifications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (CONTD)
A.
Cement (Contd)
2.
Storage of Cement (Contd)

f. Cement in bags shall be stored in stacks not more than six bags high. The floor
shall be raised above the surrounding ground level (450mm) and constructed to
avoid moisture rise. All cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps and
presence of moisture. Cement in bags shall be used in the order of delivery.
Cement from broken bags shall not be used.
g. The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the deliveries of cement and of
its use in the work. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Engineer in
such form as may be required.
3.
Expansion Due to Sulfate Exposure

a. The expansion in (14) days shall be less than 0.040 percent when tested in
accordance with "Standard Method of Test for Potential Expansion of Portland
Cement Mortars Exposed to Sulfate" ASTM C 452.
4.
Autoclave Expansion
The autoclave expansion shall not exceed 0.80 percent when tested in accordance
with "Standard Method of Test for Autoclave Expansion of Portland Cement"
ASTM C 151.
5.
Routine Testing
Samples of cement shall be obtained from deliveries for routine testing, in
accordance with ASTM relevant standards, at the frequencies stated below or
whenever requested by the Engineer:
Test Description
Period of Testing
Fineness of Cement by Blaine

Setting Time and Consistency of Cement
Chemical Analysis
Compressive Strength of Cement
Weekly
Monthly
Once every 3 Months
Once every 3 Months
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/14
December 2010

Specifications

A.
Cement (Contd)
6.
Rejection
a. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of dates of delivery so that there will
be sufficient time for sampling the cement, either at the mill or upon delivery.
b. The provisional acceptance of the cement at the mill shall not deprive the
Engineer of the right to reject it on the basis of a retest of any of the specified
properties at the time of delivery of the cement to the Site.
c. Packages of cement varying by 2% or more from the specified weight shall be
rejected and if the average weight of packages in any consignment, as shown
by weighing 50 packages taken at random, is less than that specified, the entire
consignment shall be rejected and the Contractor shall remove it forthwith from
the Site at his own expense and replace it with cement of satisfactory quality.
d. Stale cement or cement reclaimed from cleaning bags shall not be used.
Cement which for any reason has become partially set, or contains lumps or
caked cement, shall be rejected.
e. Cement not complying with the requirements of ASTM C150 specifications
shall be rejected. Blended cement must comply with ASTM C 595
specifications.
f. Cement stored for more than 3 months from the production date shall not be
used.
B.
Mineral Admixtures (Cementitious Materials and Pozzolans)

1.
General
a. Cementitious materials, such as ground granulated blast-furnace slag, or
Pozzolans, such as silica fume may be used as partial replacement for cement
for the purpose of enhancing the durability of concrete.
b. The properties of the cementitious material shall comply with the pertinent
ASTM Standard Specifications.
c. The water cementitious ratio shall be maintained with respect to the total
cementitious material.
d. For storage requirements of the cementitious material, refer to section A.2
"Storage of Cement".
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/15
December 2010

Specifications

B.
Mineral Admixtures (Cementitious Materials and Pozzolans) (Contd)

2.
Silica Fume
a. Silica fume shall be used in concrete as a replacement of cement (maximum 8
% by weight of cementitious material) when approved by the Engineer and
shall conform to the chemical and physical requirements of ASTM C 1240
"Standard Specifications for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures".
b. Acceptance testing shall be conducted at an independent testing Laboratory to
verify compliance with the required specification at the commencement of the
project.
c. Silica fume shall be sampled in accordance with practice ASTM C 183Modified and shall be routinely tested to verify compliance with the standard
specifications. The following tests shall be conducted by an independent testing
Laboratory at the stated frequencies or whenever requested by the Engineer :
Test Description
Frequency of Testing
Oversize (% retained on 45 m sieve)

Accelerated Pozzolanic Strength
Activity Index
Specific Surface
Chemical Analysis
Once every 3 Months

Once every 3 Months
Once every 3 Months
Once every 6 Months
d. All silica fumes shall be supplied from a single source. Should the Contractor
wish to change the source of supply, he shall provide to the Engineer for his
approval a full test certification of the new source.
e. As the addition of silica fume to concrete significantly increases the cohesion
of fresh concrete and reduces bleeding, adequate precautions in handling,
placing and curing of silica fume concrete shall be taken to prevent plastic
shrinkage of poured concrete surfaces.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/16
December 2010

Specifications

B.
Mineral Admixtures (Cementitious Materials and Pozzolans) (Contd)

3.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag

a. GGBS shall be used as a replacement of cement and shall conform to the
chemical and physical requirements of ASTM C 989 "Standard Specification
for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars".
b. Acceptance testing shall be conducted to verify compliance with the required
specification at the commencement of the project.
c. Sampling of GGBS shall be conducted according to section 9 in ASTM C 989
for routine testing to verify compliance with this specification or whenever
requested by the Engineer.
C.
Aggregates
1.
General Requirements
All aggregates shall consist of tough, hard, durable uncoated particles. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the processing of this material to meet the
requirements of the specifications. Approval of aggregate quality and/or gradation
shall not waive the responsibility of the Contractor to provide concrete of having
the minimum strength specified.
2.
Storage
a. Coarse and fine aggregates shall be delivered and stored separately on site in
such a manner as to prevent segregation and contamination or the intrusion of
foreign materials.
b. Aggregate which has become segregated or contaminated with foreign matter
during storage or handling will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced
with material of acceptable quality at the Contractor's expense. Aggregates of
the quality and color selected shall be stored in sufficient quantity to avoid
interruption of concreting work at any time.
c. Delivered aggregates shall be kept separate from previous batches, and shall be
stored for at least three working days before use to allow for inspection and
relevant tests to be carried out. Sampling of aggregate shall be conducted
randomly from stockpiles/bins.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/17
December 2010

Specifications

D.
Fine Aggregate
1.
a. All fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to Standard Specification for
Concrete Aggregates of ASTM C 33.
b. It shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, shale,
alkali, coated grains, or similar laminated materials such as soft and flaky
particles, or any material which may attack the reinforcement, in such a form
and in sufficient quantity to affect adversely the strength and durability of the
concrete. Fine Aggregate passing sieve No. 4 (size 4.75 mm) shall not contain
any voided shells.
c. Fine aggregates shall be washed thoroughly with demineralized water to ensure
compliance with the appropriate requirements and limitations of the
specifications.
d. Fine aggregate from different sources of supply shall not be mixed or stored in
one pile nor used alternately in the same class of construction or mix.
e. The Fineness Modulus of fine aggregate shall be between 2.50 and 3.10.
f. The Material Finer than No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve shall not be in excess of 3
% by weight for concrete subject to abrasion and 5% by weight for all other
concrete. In the case of manufactured sand, if the material finer than the 75-m
(No. 200) sieve consists of the dust of fracture, essentially free of clay or shale,
these limits are permitted to be increased to 5% and 7 %, respectively
g. In testing for Organic Impurities in fine aggregate, the color shall be lighter
than standard color and shall have an intensity not darker than two-thirds that
of the standard color solution. (Not darker than Plate 2 as determined by the
Standard Method of Test for Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete) of
ASTM C-40.
h. Chlorides soluble in dilute Nitric Acid shall not be more than 0.10 percent by
weight when expressed as sodium chloride (NaCl).
i. Total Acid Soluble Sulfates shall not exceed 0.50 percent by weight when
expressed as sulfur trioxide (SO3).
j. Mortar Strength using the fine aggregate shall have a Compression Ratio not
less than 95%.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/18
December 2010

Specifications

D.
Fine Aggregate (Contd)

1.
General Requirements (Contd)

k. In testing for Soundness, the weighted average loss when subjected to 5 cycles
of the soundness test using sodium sulfate shall be less than 10%.
l. Sand equivalent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2419 shall not be
less than 50%.
E.
Coarse Aggregates
1.
a. All coarse aggregate for concrete shall conform to Standard Specifications for
Concrete Aggregates of ASTM Designation: C 33.
b. Coarse aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel, or crushed stone,
having hard, strong durable pieces, free from undesirable material and obtained
from an approved source.
c. Coarse aggregate shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, coal,
mica, alkali, laminated materials, or any material which may attack the
reinforcement, in such a form or in sufficient quantity to affect adversely the
strength and durability of the Concrete.
d. Coarse aggregates shall be washed thoroughly with demineralized water to
ensure compliance with the appropriate requirements and limitations of the
specifications.
e. Deleterious Substances
The amount of deleterious substances shall not exceed the following limits:
Max. Permissible Limit
Soft fragments
Coal and lignite
Clay lumps
Materials passing the No. 200 sieve
(% by Weight)
2.0
0.5
0.25
1.0
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/19
December 2010

Specifications

E.
Coarse Aggregates (Contd)

1.
General Requirements (Contd)

This percentage can be increased to 1.5% if the material is essentially free of clay
or shale; or if the source of the fine aggregate to be used in the concrete is known
to contain less than the specified maximum amount passing the 75-m (No. 200)
sieve
Thin or elongated pieces (length

greater than 5 times average thickness)
Other local deleterious substances,
chlorides soluble in dilute Nitric
acid when expressed as sodium
Chloride (NaCl)
Total acid soluble sulfates when
expressed as sulfur trioxide (SO3)
4.0
0.05
0.5
Physical Property Requirements for Coarse Aggregate:

Maximum Limit (% by Weight)
2.
Abrasion
Soundness (Sodium Sulfate)
30
10
Grading
Coarse aggregates shall be supplied in the nominal sizes specified and shall be
graded in accordance with ASTM C 33.
F.
Combined Aggregate
1.
Approved fine and coarse aggregate in each batch of concrete shall be combined in
proportions according to test results and as approved by the Engineer, giving the
required compressive concrete strength as specified per type of Concrete.
2.
Changes from one combined gradation to another shall not be made during the
progress of the work unless approved by the Engineer. Such changes shall be
approved only after being validated by test trials.
3.
If the grading of any of the aggregate alters to such an extent that the fraction of
combined aggregate retained on any sieve cannot be maintained within two percent
of the original combined aggregate grading, then further trial mixes of concrete
shall be made, tested and approved for use.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/20
December 2010

Specifications

F.
Combined Aggregate (Contd)

4.
No part of the aggregates shall contain any mineral known to have a potential to
cause alkali silica, alkali carbonate or any other damaging chemical reactions
between alkalis and aggregates.
5.
In no case shall materials passing the 0.075 mm sieve exceed 3.5 % by weight of
the combined aggregate.
6.
When two consecutive averages of five tests fall outside the specified limits, the
contractor shall take immediate steps, including a halt to production, until remedy.
7.
Aggregates shall be frequently tested and shall comply with the requirements stated
in Table 1
Table1. Minimum testing requirements for aggregates to be used in concrete
Test
Frequenc
y
Test description
Grading
Twice
per week
Material
finer
0.075 mm
than Twice
per week
Clay lumps and friable
Once per
particles
3 months
Lightweight pieces
Once per
3 months
method
ASTM
Fine
Coarse
C136
Standard
Standard
C117
Max. 3% a
Max. 1%
C142
Max.2
C123
Max. 0.5
Organic impurities
Twice per
week
Permissible limit
Lighter
than
C87
standard
N.A
color
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/21
December 2010

Specifications

F.
Combined Aggregate (Contd)

Acid Soluble chlorides:
a. Prestressed concrete Once per
and
steam
cured
month
structural concrete
Max. 0.01%
Max. 0.01%
Max. 0.05%
Max. 0.03%
BS 1744
Max. 0.3%
Max. 0.3%
C88
Max. 10
Max. 10
C131
N.A
Max. 30
2%
2%
Not reactive
Not reactive
BS 1744
b. Other
Acid soluble sulfate
Once per
month
Soundness
Once per
3 months
Los Angeles Abrasion
Once per
3 months
Specific gravity and water Every two

absorption
weeks
Potential reactivity
C127
128
At the start
of the
C289
project
C227
once/year
Sand equivalent
Twice per
week
a.
b.
D2419
&
6 month expansion 0.1%

Max.
Not less
than 50
N.A
b
Refer to clause 1.5.D.6

Not Applicable
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/22
December 2010

Specifications

G.
Water
1.
Requirements and Testing

a. Water for mixing concrete shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts
of oil, acid, or any other deleterious mineral and/or organic matter.
b. The water to be used in concrete, including wash water, shall be clean and free
from harmful matter in suspension or solution and shall satisfy the
recommendations given in ASTM C 1602 "Standard Specification for Mixing
Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete".
c. Potable water can be used as mixing water in concrete without testing it for
conformance with the required specification.
d. Non-potable sources of water shall be qualified for use in accordance with the
following:
i.
Water shall be tested for compliance with Table 2 before first use and
thereafter every three months or more often when there is reason to
believe that a change has occurred in the characteristics of source.
Testing is permitted to be at a lower frequency, but not less than
annually when results from four consecutive tests indicate compliance
with table 2.
ii.
The manufacturer shall maintain documented evidence that the

characteristics of the combined mixing water are in compliance with
Table 3. These tests shall be conducted before first use and thereafter
every 6 months or more often when there is reason to believe that a
change has occurred in the characteristics of the source. These records
shall be provided to the Engineer upon his request.
iii.
The frequency of testing shall be as mentioned above or whenever

specified by the Engineer. The cost of such testing shall be born by
the Contractor.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/23
December 2010

Specifications

G.
Water (Contd)
TABLE 2 Concrete Performance Requirements for Mixing Water
Compressive strength, min % control at 7 days

Time of set, deviation from control, h: min a
ab
Limits
90
From 1:00 early To 1:30
later
a. Comparisons shall be based on fixed proportions for a concrete mix design

representative of questionable water supply and a control mix using 100 %
potable water or distilled water
b. Compressive strength results shall be based on at least two standard test
specimens made from a composite sample.
TABLE 3 Chemical Limits for Combined Mixing Water
Limits
Maximum concentration in combined mixing water, ppm a
a. Chloride as Cl-, ppm
i.
In prestressed concrete, bridge decks, or otherwise designated
500b
Other reinforced concrete in moist environments or containing aluminum

embedment or dissimilar metals or with stay-in-place
1000b
ii.
galvanized metal forms
b. Sulfate as SO4, ppm

3000
c. Alkalies as (Na2O + 0.658 K2O), ppm
600
d. Total Solids by mass, ppm
50 000
i- ppm is the abbreviation for parts per million
ii- The requirements for concrete in ACI 318 shall govern when the
manufacturer can demonstrate that these limits for mixing water can be
exceeded. For conditions allowing the use of calcium chloride (CaCl2)
accelerator as an admixture, the chloride limitation can be waived by the
Engineer.
e. The pH of the water for mixing and curing of concrete shall not be less than pH
4.5 or more than pH 8.5.
f. In sampling water for testing, care shall be taken to ensure that the containers
are clean and that samples are representative.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/24
December 2010

Specifications

H.
Admixtures
1.
Admixtures and additives shall be used only with the prior approval of the
Engineer. Additives shall be subjected to tests before approval and during progress
of work on site at the discretion of the Engineer. All costs incurred towards all
such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.
The proposed dosage and method of use shall be submitted to the Engineer
together with the following data:
a. Compliance of the admixture with ASTM C 494 as a job mix. The typical
dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and over-dosage
b. The chemical name(s) of the main active ingredient(s) in the admixture
3.
Admixtures shall conform to one of the following standards:

a. ASTM C 494
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
b. ASTM C 1017 Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete.

4.
Admixtures/Additive shall:
a. Have no adverse effect on the shrinkage and water tightness properties of
finished concrete.
b. Not have any added chloride (0%, calculated as calcium chloride by weight of
cement in the concrete).
5.
The Contractor shall submit results of concrete trial mix-(es) clearly specifying the
intended dosage of admixture with necessary documentation. Trial mixes shall be
carried out or verified by an approved independent laboratory.
6.
The contractor shall substantiate the performance of admixture every 3 months

period to verify the type of admixture being used and its consistency. Samples shall
be selected in the presence of the Engineer and tests shall be conducted at an
independent testing agency.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/25
December 2010

Specifications

H.
Admixtures (Contd)
7.
I.
Moreover, routine testing of the following properties shall be conducted frequently

as per the referred testing methods in ASTM C494:
Test Description
Period of Testing
pH value
Specific Gravity
Solid Content
Setting Time of concrete
Once per Week

Once per Week
Once per Month
Once per 3 Months
Concrete for Structures

1.
Classes of concrete to be used in the Works shall in general be as shown in Table

4. Where different classes of concrete are required, the design of the mix shall
follow the requirements of this specification.
2.
Where adequate workability is difficult to obtain at the maximum watercementitious ratio allowed, the use of plasticizers or water reducing admixtures
shall be considered. Alternatively an increase in cementitious content may be
considered at the discretion of the Engineer. Cementitious contents in excess of
500 kg/m3 shall not be used unless approved by the Engineer
3.
The Contractor shall comply with the recommendations of ACI 318 unless
specifically excluded or modified thereafter.
4.
Each mix design shall be such that:

i. The aggregate shall comprise fine aggregate and coarse aggregate no greater
than the maximum size specified in ACI 318 section 3.3
ii. The combined aggregate grading shall be smooth and continuous
iii. The aggregate batch quantity shall be calculated by weight
iv. The mixes shall be proportioned to produce consistent concrete cylinder
compressive strength at twenty-eight days after manufacture as stated in ACI
318 sec. 5.6.3.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/26
December 2010

Specifications

I.
Concrete for Structures (Contd)

Notes:
The above concrete mix types and minimum cement content are suggested by the
Engineer.
Silica fume shall not be used at more than 8% by weight of cementitious materials
Cementitious contents in excess of 500 kg/m3 shall not be used unless special
consideration has been given to reduce thermal stress in the concrete, and approval has
been obtained from the Engineer.
The slump test shall not be, at any case, more than 230 mm Abbreviations:
OPC: Ordinary Portland Cement (ASTM C 150 Type I or equivalent)
MSRC: Moderate Sulfate Resistance Cement (ASTM C 150 Type II or equivalent blended
cement complying with ASTM C 595)
N.R. : Not Required
5.
At the start of the construction period, the Contractor shall design a mix for each
class of concrete listed in Table 4 as required in the works.
6.
The concrete mix design proposed by the Contractor shall satisfy the required
target strength as per ACI 318 sec. 5.3.2
7.
The thickness of the blinding concrete shall be as shown on the Drawings, but shall
be not less than 75 mm.
8.
Chloride level in concrete mix shall comply with the requirements of Table 5.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/27
December 2010

Specifications

I.
Concrete for Structures (Contd)

Table 4A
CONCRETE SPECIFICATIONS TABLE
Class of
Concrete
Compressive
Minimum Coarse
Max.
Consistency
Strength At
Cement
Aggregate Water
Range in
28 days
Content
Size
Content
Slump
(in kg/cm2)
Kgs
Liters
Vibrated-Non
Cylinder
Per Ba
Vibrated
_________________________________________________________________
mm
mm
A
320
350
3/4 in. or 1 27
50-100
75-125
in. - No. 4
as required
by
the
Engineer
B
140
250
2 in. No. 4 30
25- 50
50- 75
_________________________________________________________________
Table 4B
Class
Concrete
Compressive
Strength at
28
Days
Kg/cm2
Cylinder
Approximate Weight (Saturated Surface-Dry) of Fins

and Coarse Aggregate Per Sack (50 kgs) of Cement
_______________________________________
Rounded Coarse
Angular Coarse
Aggregate
Aggregate
Fine
Coarse
Fine
Coarse
Kgs.
Kgs.
Kgs.
Kgs.
_________________________________________________________________
A
350
95
180
100
160
B
140
140
370
160
340
_________________________________________________________________
Table 4 is given for indicative purposes and is not binding. The total sodium chloride
content of any materials used for making concrete shall be less than:
For mass concrete
For reinforced concrete
1.5 %
0.7 %
expressed as percentage, by weight of the cement. In calculations made under the

provisions of this Clause, any chloride, other than sodium chloride in the materials shall
be converted to the equivalent of sodium chloride and be added to the amount of sodium
chloride. The sulphate content shall not exceed 0.03% by weight of the cement.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/28
December 2010

Specifications
Table 5 Chloride limits

Type of concrete
% By weight of cement
Chlorides as Cl- a
For reinforced concrete

if made with OPC/MSRPC
max. 0.30
if made with SRPC
max. 0.15
Prestressed concrete and heat-cured
max. 0.10
reinforced concrete
For mass concrete
if made with OPC/MSRPC
max. 0.60
if made with SRPC
max. 0.15
a.
Any chloride content present in the cement has to be taken into account while
computing total chloride ion in the mix.
J.
Proportions
1.
After the materials provided by the Contractor have been accepted for the works,
the proportions and equivalent batch weights shall be determined.
2.
The contractor shall prepare and submit comprehensive concrete mix design
reports along with test results for the different types and classes of concrete to the
Engineer for review. Laboratory trials shall be conducted at an independent testing
Laboratory as per ASTM C192 at least 35 days before commencement of
concreting.
3.
As soon as the Engineer has approved the concrete mix design for each class of
concrete, the Contractor shall also conduct a field trial mix for each class in the
presence of the Engineer to record and verify that the test results on fresh concrete
are equivalent to those obtained in the Laboratory trials. Field trial mixes shall be
mixed for the same mixing time and handled by means of the same batching plant
which the Contractor proposes to use in the Works. Each field trial mix shall
comprise not less than 0.5 m3 of concrete. Slump test measurements shall be taken
immediately after mixing and evaluated in accordance with the tolerances of
ASTM C 94.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/29
December 2010

Specifications

J.
Proportions (Contd)
4.
The Contractor shall make three separate batches for each trial mix; and six
150mm by 300mm compression test cylinders shall be sampled from each batch in
the presence of the Engineer. Three cylinders shall be tested at 7 days and three at
28 days, after manufacture in accordance with the method described in ASTM. The
average of each set of three cylinders from each batch is considered one set. The
ratio of the 7 to 28 days tests will be used as an indicative reference during the
progress of the works when early assessment of the concrete strength is needed. If
either or both the average value of the three tests at 28 days is less than the design
strength given in Table 4, or the difference between the greatest and the least tests
is more than 20 % of the average strength of the three tests at 28 days, the
Contractor shall:
a. Remove from site the materials from which the trial mix was prepared
b. Provide new materials and prepare and test further trial mixes until specified
requirements are achieved.
5.
Additionally, the Contractor shall measure the temperature, workability and density
of concrete in each batch and he shall conduct the bleeding test on the fresh
concrete sample in accordance with ASTM C 232. The rate of bleeding determined
will be used as a reference when assessing the probability of plastic cracks during
hot or windy weathers.
6.
A full scale trial mix for each class of concrete shall also be conducted by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engineer to check for the workability retention of
the concrete. Each trial mix shall be batched, mixed and then transported a
representative distance simulating the condition that the Contractor proposes to use
in batching, mixing and transporting the concrete to be placed in the Works.
7.
If requested by the Engineer, the concrete shall be placed and compacted in

mockup of sufficient size not less than three cubic meters. The sides of the moulds
used in the mockup shall be capable of being stripped without undue disturbance of
the concrete placed therein. The sides of the moulds shall be stripped after the
concrete has set and the workability judged based on the visual inspection of the
compaction and surface finish obtained. If the mockup shows that the workability
required is not attained in any of the trial mixes for a certain class of concrete, the
mix shall be redesigned by the Contractor and a further full scale workability test
shall be undertaken for that particular class of concrete.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/30
December 2010

Specifications

J.
Proportions (Contd)
8.
K.
Redesign, making and preliminary testing of concrete mixes shall be repeated for
each class of concrete until they meet the requirements of Table 4.
Quality and Testing

1.
In order to ensure that the quality of materials and mix proportions is maintained
throughout concreting operations, sampling and testing shall be carried out using
the relevant procedures set out in the relevant ASTM standards and applicable
codes referenced in this specification and in accordance with a routine testing
program that shall be agreed upon with the Engineer before the start of concrete
work.
2.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the routine testing program shall
include at least the tests specified below.
a. Strength Tests
i. The compression test shall be performed based on standard specification for
compressive strength of cylindrical concrete specimens of ASTM C 39. Test
cylinders made in the field shall have a diameter of 6" (150mm) and a length of
12" (300mm) in accordance with ASTM C 31.
ii.
Samples shall be obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172. One test set must
consist of at least two test specimens, to be tested at each age.
iii.
The test age for concrete cylinders shall be 7 and 28 days or the age designated
for determination of the specified value of f c or when specified at the earliest
age at which the concrete will receive its full load or maximum stress.
Acceptance strength tests are those made on cylinders tested at 28 days.
iv.
The Engineer may request for additional cylinders to be made for testing at
three days or any other age, as and whenever he deems this necessary.
v.
The compressive strength of cylinders at twenty-eight days after manufacture

shall comply with the requirements of ACI 318 sec. 5.6.3
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/31
December 2010

Specifications

K.
Quality and Testing (Contd)

vi.
The specimens cured under laboratory conditions shall be considered for

acceptance of the concrete in the structure so represented. The field cured
cylinders shall be used for the control of curing and to determine when the
structure may be put in service. Those cylinder specimens used to control
transfer of prestressing force and early handling conditions shall be field-cured
under the same conditions as the concrete placed in the field.
vii. Protecting and curing concrete shall be improved when strength of field-cured
cylinders at test age designated for determination of f c is less than 85 percent
of that of companion laboratory-cured cylinders. The 85 percent limitation shall
not apply if field-cured strength exceeds f c by more than 3.5 MPa.
viii. Compressive strength tests shall be performed on concrete samples obtained at
the time of placement. The specimens shall be sampled at the following
average rates:
a.
For Blinding:
At least one set of test specimens shall be obtained for each 50 m3 of
concrete placed, with at least one set for each days production.
b.
For Foundation:
concrete placed, with at least one set for each days production.
c.
For other elements of the structure:

concrete placed or fraction thereof, with at least one set for each days
production for each class of concrete.
ix.
All strength tests shall be carried out on laboratory cured specimens at an

independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer at the Contractor's
own expense.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/32
December 2010

Specifications

K.

x.
3.
Where the results of strength tests specimens indicate that the concrete does
not meet the requirements of ACI 318 sec 5.6.3.3 or if tests of field-cured
cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing; concrete core tests,
conforming to ASTM C 42 shall be performed, as directed by the Engineer,
at the Contractor's expense. Cores shall be evaluated in accordance with ACI
318 sec 5.6.5
Durability Tests
a. The durability tests listed in Table 4 shall be carried out on a trial mix of the
proposed mix design using all the envisaged constituent materials and
aggregates. All durability testing shall be carried out by an approved
independent testing laboratory. In all cases, more than one specimen shall be
prepared and tested to provide an indication of the precision of the test method.
The testing laboratory shall prepare a comprehensive summary report for
durability tests.
b. One sample for durability tests shall be taken for each 1000 m3 from each class
of concrete but not less than one test per month or as requested by the
Engineer, all at the Contractors expense.
4.
Tests on fresh concrete

a. The contractor shall provide the Engineer all reasonable access and assistance,
without charge, for the procurement of samples of fresh concrete at the time of
placement to determine conformance to this specification.
b. Tests of concrete required to determine compliance with this specification shall
be conducted by a certified ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I or
equivalent.
c. Routine tests for fresh concrete include slump, air content, temperature and
density. The routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM
standards.
d. The slump of a concrete mixture proportion shall be limited to the minimum
slump that is consistent with the placement requirements and methods.
e. Routine tests shall be performed at the time of placement when strength
samples are obtained or whenever the possibility of an inappropriate slump
exists.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/33
December 2010

Specifications

K.

f. For each trial mix, a plant production trial shall be carried out and the slump of
the concrete shall be measured immediately after discharge from the mixer and
thereafter at 15 minutes interval up to the maximum time period envisaged for
delivery and standing on site. Based on this trial, the mix design shall identify
any adjustments to the range of the plasticizer used to achieve the desirable
workability for different time intervals after batching.
g. The slump, temperature, density and air content of the concrete shall be
checked from the first concrete trucks produced. If concrete shows consistent
results, tests for slump, density and air content will be checked at least once
every 50 m3 of concrete poured. The initial slump at the batching plant shall be
recorded on the delivery ticket along with the time of the test.
h. If the measured slump is greater than the specified upper limit, a check test
shall be made immediately on a new test sample. In the event the check test
fails, the concrete shall be considered to have failed the requirements of the
specification.
i. If the measured slump is less than the lower limit, adjustment is permitted by
the use of an approved high range water reducer. If the sample of the adjusted
concrete fails, a check test shall be made immediately on a new sample of the
adjusted concrete. In the event the check test fails, the concrete shall be
considered to have failed the requirements of the specification.
j. In the event of high variability of slump values or density, the Engineer may
instruct that each truck of concrete is checked at the plant. The Contractor shall
carry out an investigation to establish the cause of the high variation in slump
and shall take necessary corrective actions.
5.
Records
a. Records on testing of materials shall be kept by the Contractor and a copy of
each of the test results shall be supplied to the Engineer.
b. The 'record form' shall include, but not be limited to, the following information
as appropriate: Source of material, aggregate physical and chemical analysis
tests, compatibility tests, date and time of mix, batch number, ambient
temperature, concrete mix temperature, concrete class, structural member
where the concrete is placed, compressive strength results, allowable concrete
strength, and method of curing used.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/34
December 2010

Specifications

L.
M.
N.
Measurement of Materials
1.
Cement and Mineral Admixtures
2.
Except as otherwise specifically permitted, cement shall be measured by mass.

When mineral admixtures (including GGBS, silica fume, or other pozzolans) are
used, the cumulative mass can be measured along with cement but in a batch
hopper and on a scale which is separate and distinct from those used for other
materials.
3.
The mass of the cement shall be measured before mineral admixtures. The quantity
of the cement shall be within 1 % of the required mass, and the cumulative
quantity of cement plus mineral admixtures shall also be within 1 % of the
required mass.
4.
Under special circumstances approved by the Engineer, cement can be measured in

bags of standard mass. No fraction of a bag of cement shall be used unless its mass
has been determined.
Aggregates
1.
Aggregate shall be measured by mass. The quantity of aggregate used in any batch
of concrete as indicated by the scale shall be within 2 % of the required mass
when the mass is measured in individual aggregate weigh batchers.
2.
In a cumulative aggregate weigh batcher, the cumulative weight after each

successive weighing shall be within 1 % of the required cumulative amount.
Water
1.
Mixing water shall consist of water added to the batch, ice added to the batch,
water occurring as surface moisture on the aggregates, and water introduced in the
form of admixtures.
2.
The added water shall be measured by weight or volume to an accuracy of 1 % of

the required total mixing water. Added ice shall be measured by weight.
3.
In the case of truck mixers, the wash water shall be discharged prior to loading the
next batch of concrete.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/35
December 2010

Specifications

O.
P.
Admixtures
1.
Liquid admixtures shall be batched by mass or volume with an accuracy of 3 % of

the total amount required or plus or minus the amount or dosage required for 50 kg
of cement, whichever is greater.
2.
All measuring devices shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
3.
Should any variation from the above mentioned specification occur, reference
should be made to ASTM C 94 "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete" section 8.
Batching of Concrete
1.
Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, concrete shall be mixed in an

automated stationary mixer.
2.
The concrete temperature shall be kept as low as practical to improve placement

and structural qualities, but at no time should the temperature of the concrete
delivered to the site be below 5 C.
3.
During measurement operations, aggregates shall be handled in a consistent

manner to maintain their desired grading, and keep them well separated, with no
contamination. All materials shall be weighed to the tolerances required for the
desired reproducibility of the selected concrete mix.
4.
Sequencing and blending of the ingredients during charging of the mixers shall be
carried out in such a way as to obtain uniformity and homogeneity in the concrete
produced. The homogeneity is indicated by concrete physical properties such as
density, slump, air content, and strength of concrete from successive batches of the
same mix proportions in accordance with ASTM C94
5.
Plant Type
i. Semi-automatic control batching plants are acceptable. In this system,
aggregate bin gates for charging batchers are opened by manually operated
push buttons or switches. Gates are closed automatically when the designated
weight of material has been delivered
ii. Automatic control batching plants are recommended. Automatic batching of all
materials is electrically activated by a single starter switch. However, interlocks
shall interrupt the batching cycle when the scale has not returned to 0.3 % of
zero balance or when weighing tolerances detailed in Clause 1.10 of this Part
are exceeded.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/36
December 2010

Specifications

Q.
Bins and Weight Batchers

1.
Batch plant bins shall be of sufficient size to effectively accommodate the

production capacity of the plant. Compartments in bins separate the various
concrete materials, and the shape and arrangement of aggregate bins shall prevent
aggregate segregation and leakage.
2.
Gates used to charge semi-automatic and fully automatic batchers shall be power
operated and equipped with a suitable in flight correction to obtain the desired
weighing accuracy. They shall be calibrated by the plant supplier or an independent
laboratory for the types of aggregate used at the standard range of moisture
contents.
3.
Weigh batchers shall be accessible for obtaining representative samples, and they
shall be arranged to obtain the proper sequencing and blending of aggregates
during charging of the mixer.
4.
The amount of concrete mixed in any one batch shall not exceed the rated capacity
of the mixer.
5.
On cessation of work, including all stoppages exceeding 20 min, the mixers and all
handling plant shall be washed with clean water.
6.
All mixing and batching plants shall be maintained free of set concrete or cement
and shall be clean before commencing mixing.
7.
For each different type of cement at use at the plant, a separate silo shall be
provided.
8.
The time allowed for mixing (after all the materials have been placed in the mixer)
shall be sufficient for thorough mixing to take place. No hand mixing of concrete
shall be allowed.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/37
December 2010

Specifications

R.
Mixing of Concrete
1.
Water shall enter the mixer first with continuous flow while other ingredients are
entering the mixer. Water charging pipes must be of the proper design and of
sufficient size so that water enters at a point well inside the mixer and charging is
completed within the first 25 % of the mixing time.
2.
Controls shall be provided to prevent batched ingredients from entering the mixer
before the previous batch has been completely discharged.
3.
Admixtures shall be charged to the mixer in accordance with the instructions of the
manufacturer. Automatic dispensers shall be used.
4.
The mixing time required shall be based upon the ability of the mixer to produce
uniform, homogeneous, consistent mixture throughout the batch and from batch to
batch.
5.
Final mixing times shall be based on the results of mixer performance tests made at
the start of the project and the time fixed unless a change is authorized by the
Engineer. The mixing time, however, shall not be less than 45 seconds. Mixing
time shall comply with ASTM C 94 sec 11.3.1
6.
The mixing time shall be measured from the time all ingredients are in the mixer.
7.
The mixer shall be designed for starting and stopping under full load.
8.
All structural concrete to be placed in situ shall be manufactured in a computer

controlled batching plant
9.
Concrete shall be mixed in batches in plant capable of combining the aggregates,

cement and water (including admixtures, if any) into a mixture of uniform color
and consistency and of discharging the mixture without segregation.
10.
Contractor shall make due allowance for the water contained in the aggregates
when determining the quantity of water to be added to each mix. The amount of
water added to each mix shall be adjusted to maintain the constant approved watercementitious ratio of the mixed concrete.
11.
No concrete shall exceed the water-cementitious ratio as given in Table 4. Excess

water over the maximum allowed by the mix design shall not be permitted, and any
batch containing such excess will be rejected.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/38
December 2010

Specifications

S.
Ready-mixed Concrete
1.
Concrete from approved suppliers of ready mixed concrete with proven record,
shall be used in the Works after satisfying all the requirements of these
specifications and ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete".
2.
The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer on the following:

a. Materials used in ready-mixed concrete comply with the specification in all
aspects.
b. Manufacturing and delivery resources of the proposed supplier are adequate to
ensure proper and timely completion of pouring schedules.
3.
The specified requirements as to the sampling, trial mixing, testing and quality of
concrete, of various classes as described in Parts 1.9 to 1.012 of this Specification,
shall apply equally to ready-mixed concrete.
4.
Every additional facility, including but not limited to testing equipment, labor,
laboratory facilities and transport, which the Engineer or persons authorized by
him may require for the supervision and inspection of the batching, mixing, testing
and transporting to Site of ready mixed concrete shall be provided by the
Contractor at no extra cost.
5.
Prior to commencement of the works the Contractor shall furnish the following
details to the Engineer in addition to ensuring that the concrete from the selected
source will be satisfying all the requirements stated in the relevant clauses.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Name and qualification of supplier(s).

Location of the supplier(s) plant and travel time to the site.
Certificate of quality assurance.
Quality control facilities.
Historical certificates and test reports on concrete production.
Source(s) of aggregates, cement, water, and mineral and chemical admixtures
Test certificates for all concrete ingredients
Production capacities.
Results of trial mixes
C.V. of personnel year-marked for the projects. Approved personnel shall not
be changed without prior approval of the Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/39
December 2010

Specifications

S.
Ready-mixed Concrete (Contd)

6.
Ready mixed concrete, mixed off site shall be transported in approved truck mixers
or agitators and shall be accompanied by a computer printout. Copies of all
delivery notes shall be submitted to the Engineer in duplicate, on computer
generated forms and shall include at least the following information.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
7.
Name of supplier, serial number of ticket and date

Truck number
Name of Contractor
Name and location of project
Class of concrete
Specified slump
Type and source of cement
Source of aggregates
Nominal maximum size of aggregate
Quantity of each concrete ingredient (SSD and Batch weights)
Type of admixture and quantity
Water content
Times of loading and departure from ready-mix plant
Notations to indicate equipment was checked and found to be free of
contaminants prior to batching.
A copy of the delivery note shall be given to the Engineer's site representative for
each load.
8.
Unless approved otherwise in advance of batching, all concrete of single design

mix for any one day's pour shall be from a single batch plant of a single supplier.
9.
Central-mixed concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a stationary mixer and shall

be then delivered using a truck agitator. ASTM C 94 limits the volume of concrete
charged into the truck to 80% of the drum or truck volume. When partially mixed
concrete, with final mixing and transporting being done in a revolving-drum truck
mixer, the volume of concrete charged into the truck is limited to 63% of the drum
volume as stated in ASTM C 94.
10.
The maximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not exceed the maximum rated
capacity of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer and stamped in metal on the
mixer.
11.
Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, shall be of the

revolving drum type, watertight, and so constructed that the concrete can be
conveyed and discharged into the pumps at site maintaining the uniform
distribution of materials throughout the mass.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/40
December 2010

Specifications

S.

12.
Before discharge of concrete transported in truck mixers, the drum shall again be
rotated at mixing speed for about 30 revolutions to re-blend possible stagnant spots
near the discharge end into the batch.
13.
Mixers shall be properly maintained to prevent mortar and dry material leakage.
Inner mixer surfaces shall be kept clean and worn blades shall be replaced. Mixers
not meeting the performance tests referenced in ASTM C 94 shall be taken out of
service until necessary maintenance and repair corrects their deficient performance.
14.
Concrete, after being discharged from the mixer, shall be transported as rapidly as
possible to its final position in the works by means that shall be approved by the
Engineer, and which shall prevent adulteration, segregation, loss or contamination
of the ingredients.
15.
The concrete shall be placed and compacted in its final position within 90 minutes
of the water being added to the mix. However, this time of 90 minutes may be
increased with the use of approved retarding admixtures at the discretion and
approval of the Engineer, depending on the necessity and circumstances. On no
account shall additional water be added nor is further mixing permitted.
16.
The containers that convey the concrete shall at all times be kept clean and free
from hardened or partially hardened concrete.
17.
The use of chutes, spouts, or piped pumping shall be permitted only with the
written approval of the Engineer.
18.
If the Contractor proposes the use of piped pumping for the transporting and
placing of concrete, he shall submit a method statement indicating full details of
the equipment and operating system for the approval of the Engineer. On approval,
the Contractor shall ensure that shocks shall not be transferred from the pipeline to
the formwork, previously laid concrete, or the structure.
19.
The initial discharge of any pumped concrete shall be discarded and not be
incorporated in the permanent works.
20.
When concrete is conveyed by chutes or pipes, the size and design of the chutes
and pipes shall be so selected to ensure continuous flow. The slope of the chute or
the pressure of the pump shall allow the concrete to flow without the use of any
water additional to that approved by the Engineer to produce the required
consistency and without causing segregation of the ingredients. The delivery end
of the chute or pipe shall be as close as possible to the final point of deposit.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/41
December 2010

Specifications

S.
T.

21.
The chute or pipe shall be thoroughly flushed with water before and after each
working period and shall be kept clean. The water used for this purpose shall be
discharged outside and away from any permanent works.
22.
Mixing at a central plant shall conform to the applicable requirements of the

Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete of ASTM: C 94 and this
Specification.
23.
The mixing machines (scales/meters, etc) shall be tested and calibrated for their
accuracy by a specialist at regular intervals of at least six months or such periods as
approved by the Engineer. Relevant certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer
before the commencement of works and after each test or calibration.
24.
The weights of fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for any free
water contained in them. Accordingly the amount of water to be added shall be
reduced by this amount of free water contained in the aggregates. The Engineer
shall be provided access to verify that the method of determining the free water
content was followed immediately before mixing begins each day and further
during the day as the Engineer desires.
25.
The Concrete shall be mixed only in such quantities as are required for immediate
use and any concrete which has developed initial setting shall not be used.
Concrete, which has partially hardened, shall not acceptable for placing..
Handling and Placing Concrete

1. General
a. Prior to pouring concrete in any structure, the Contractor shall secure a written
order to commence from the Engineer.
b. Concrete shall only be placed after the Engineer has inspected and approved
the foundation, construction joints, cleanliness, alignment and suitability of
forms, water stops, reinforcement, and any other embedments in the placement.
c. All of these features shall be carefully examined to make sure they are in
accordance with the drawings, specifications, and good practice.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/42
December 2010

Specifications

T.
Handling and Placing Concrete (Contd)

2. Planning and Preparation before Placing
a. Advance planning shall ensure an adequate and consistent supply of concrete.
b. Sufficient placement capacity shall be provided so that the concrete can be kept
plastic and free of cold joints while it is being placed.
c. All placement equipment shall be clean and in good working condition.
Standby equipment shall be available if an interruption in the concreting
process occurs.
d. The placement equipment shall be arranged to deliver the concrete to its final
position without significant segregation and they shall be adequately and
properly arranged so that placing can proceed without undue delays.
e. Manpower shall be sufficient to ensure the proper placing, consolidating, and
finishing of the concrete. The concrete shall be delivered to the site at a
uniform rate compatible with the manpower and equipment being used in the
placing and finishing processes.
f. If the concrete is to be placed at night, the lighting system shall be sufficient to
illuminate the inside of the forms and to provide a safe work area.
g. Forms shall be accurately set, clean, tight, adequately braced, and constructed
of or lined with materials that will impart the desired off-the-form finish to the
hardened concrete. Wood forms, shall be oiled or treated with a form-release
agent, before placing concrete. Forms shall be made for removal with
minimum damage to the concrete.
h. Reinforcing steel shall be clean and free of loose rust or mill scale when
concrete is placed. Mortar splattered on reinforcing bars from previous
placements need not be removed from steel and other embedded items if the
next lift is to be completed within a few hours; loose, dried mortar, however,
must be removed from items that will be encased by later lifts of concrete. Care
shall be taken to ensure that all reinforcing steel is of the proper size and length
and that it is placed in the correct position and spliced in accordance with the
plans. Adequate concrete cover of the reinforcing steel has to be maintained.
Bars and embedded items shall be held securely in the proper position by
suitable supports and ties to prevent displacement during concreting.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/43
December 2010

Specifications

T.

3. Placing of Concrete
a. Arrange equipment so that the concrete has an unrestricted vertical drop to the
point of placement or into the container receiving it. Concrete shall not be
allowed to drop freely from a height of more than 1.5 m.
b. To avoid segregation, concrete shall be deposited continuously as near as
possible to its final position and shall not be moved horizontally over a too
long distance as it is being placed in forms or slabs.
c. In slab construction, placing shall be started along the perimeter at one end of
the work with each batch discharged against previously placed concrete. The
concrete shall not be dumped in separate piles and then leveled and worked
together; nor shall the concrete be deposited in large piles and moved
horizontally into final position.
d. In walls and columns, concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers of uniform
thickness; each layer shall be thoroughly consolidated before the next layer is
placed. The rate of placement shall be rapid enough so that previously placed
concrete has not yet set when the next layer of concrete is placed upon it in
order to prevent flow lines, seams, and planes of weakness (cold joints). Layers
shall be about 150 to 500 mm thick for the reinforced concrete members unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
e. In foundation, the step method of placement shall be used where large areas are
involved to avoid the occurrence of cold joints. In this method, the lift is built
up in a series of horizontal, stepped layers 300 to 450 mm thick. Concrete
placement on each layer shall extend for the full width of the foundation, and
the placement shall progress from one end of the lift toward the other, exposing
only small areas of concrete at a time. As the placement progresses, part of the
lift will be completed while concreting continues on the remainder.
f. In monolithic placement of deep beams, walls, or columns, to avoid cracks
between structural elements, concrete placement shall stop for a short period to
allow settlement of the deep element before concreting is continued in any
slabs, beams, or girders framing into them. The delay shall be short enough to
allow the next layer of concrete to knit with the previous layer by vibration,
thus preventing cold joints and honeycombing.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/44
December 2010

Specifications

T.

3. Placing of Concrete (Contd)
g. In case of occurrence of cold joints, the contractor shall submit a method
statement for the remedy of the situation to the Engineer for his approval.
h. Slab on Grade
a.
Reinforced concrete must not be placed directly upon the ground; it shall be
placed on a layer of blinding concrete not less than 75 mm as indicated in
the drawings.
b.
The subgrade on which a slab on ground is to be placed shall be well drained,

of uniform bearing capacity, level or properly sloped, compacted to
maximum density, and free of sod, organic matter, and frost.
c.
The subgrade and subbase layers shall be moistened with water in advance of
placing concrete.
d.
A vapor retarder (polyethylene film) shall cover the subbase below the slab
on ground. It shall be 0.15 to 0.25 mm polyethylene film and shall be
overlapped at 150 mm at the edges.
e.
The concrete used for the slab on ground shall be of controlled bleeding rate
to avoid cracking of the concrete surface.
4. Equipment
a.
Types of equipment such as buckets and pumps may be used in placing of

concrete. This equipment shall be able to place the concrete in the correct
location without compromising its quality.
5. Placing on Hardened Concrete

a.
When freshly mixed concrete is placed in contact with existing hardened

concrete, a high quality bond and watertight joint are required.
b.
The surface of old concrete upon which fresh concrete is to be placed must be
thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all dust, surface films, deposits, loose
particles, grease, oil, and other foreign material. Recently hardened concrete
may only require stiff-wire brushing.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/45
December 2010

Specifications

T.

6. Great care shall be taken to prevent sand or other foreign matter from being
introduced into the concrete from the workmen's boots or any other source.
Structural concreting against open excavations as a back shutter will not be
permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
Consolidation
1.
Fresh concrete shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration to mold concrete

within the forms and around embedded items and reinforcement; and to eliminate
stone pockets, honeycomb, and entrapped air.
2.
Vibration shall not remove significant amounts of intentionally entrained air in airentrained concrete.
3.
Unless otherwise directed by the engineer, internal vibrators shall be used to

consolidate concrete in footings, walls, columns, beams, and slabs.
4.
Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete horizontally.
5.
Whenever possible, the vibrator shall be lowered vertically into the concrete at
regularly spaced intervals and allowed to descend by gravity. It shall penetrate to
the bottom of the layer being placed and at least 150 mm into any previously
placed layer. The height of each layer or lift shall be about the length of the
vibrator head or generally a maximum of 500 mm in regular formwork.
6.
In thin slabs, the vibrator shall be inserted at an angle or horizontally in order to

keep the vibrator head completely immersed. However, the vibrator shall not be
dragged around randomly in the slab.
7.
The distance between insertions shall be about one and a half times the radius of
action so that the area visibly affected by the vibrator overlaps the adjacent
previously vibrated area by a few centimeters.
8.
The vibrator shall be held stationary until adequate consolidation is attained and
then slowly withdrawn. The length of time that a vibrator shall be left in the
concrete will depend on the workability of the concrete, the power of the vibrator,
and the nature of the section being consolidated, but shall not, under any
circumstance, exceed 15 seconds in the same location. Specifications and
applications of internal vibrators shall follow in the guidelines of ACI 309 "Guide
for Consolidation of Concrete" Table 5.1.5.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/46
December 2010

Specifications

T.
U.

9.
Vibrators shall not be used in such a way as to damage formwork, other parts of the
works, or displace the reinforcement. For slabs on grade, the vibrator shall not
make contact with the sub-grade.
10.
In heavily-reinforced sections where an internal vibrator cannot be inserted, rebar

shakers could be used to vibrate the reinforcing bars at their exposed portions,
unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
11.
External vibrators shall not be used except with the approval of the Engineer.
12.
Under-vibration and/or over-vibration shall be avoided to prevent the occurrence of

defects such as honeycombs, excessive amount of entrapped air voids, sand
streaks, cold joints, loss of entrained air in air-entrained concrete, and excessive
form deflections.
13.
Standby vibrators shall be on hand at all times in the event of a mechanical

breakdown.
Hot Weather Concreting

In hot weather, the fresh concrete temperature at placing shall not exceed 35 C (for thin
slabs, walls, columns, and beams) and the differential temperature between any two
points in hardened concrete shall not exceed 30 C for concrete made with Limestone,
and 20 C for concrete made with other types of aggregates.
In addition, the following measures shall be taken to counter the effects of high concrete
temperature in hot weather:
1.
Forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade shall be fogged or sprinkled with cool water
just before the concrete is placed.
2.
Concrete shall be placed as close as possible to its final position.
3.
The concrete consistency shall allow rapid placement and consolidation.
4.
Slump loss of freshly mixed concrete shall be controlled as much as possible to

minimize the need for retempering of concrete on site.
5.
Time of transport, placing and finishing shall be reduced to a minimum.
6.
Sufficient labor and equipment must be available at the jobsite to handle and place
concrete immediately upon delivery.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/47
December 2010

Specifications

U.
Hot Weather Concreting (Contd)

7.
Initial setting time of the fresh concrete shall be controlled and the concrete shall
remain plastic long enough so that each layer can be placed without development
of cold joints or discontinuities in the concrete. The concrete layers shall be
shallow enough to assure vibration well into the layer below and that the elapsed
time between layers is minimized. The use of the appropriate retarding admixtures
will be beneficial in offsetting the accelerating effects of high concrete
temperature.
8.
Methods to limit moisture loss during placing and finishing shall be considered in
order to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks especially in flatwork. Such methods
include erecting windbreaks and sunshades, fogging or spraying. The contractor
may schedule concrete placements in the evening, in the early morning or at night
after the consent of the Engineer.
9.
Finishing operations and their timing shall be guided only by the readiness of the
concrete for them.
10.
Curing shall be conducted so that at no time during the prescribed period will the
concrete lack ample moisture and temperature control to permit full development
of its potential strength and durability.
11.
Thermal cracking shall be avoided by limiting the maximum hardened concrete

temperature to 80 C at any time.
12.
In case of air entrained concrete, an increase in the amount of air-entraining

admixture is required to maintain the desired air content.
13.
Ice can be used as a part of the mixing water to cool the concrete, but it shall be
crushed, shaved, or chipped when placed directly into the mixer. It must melt
completely prior to the completion of mixing of the concrete. Its quantity shall not
exceed 75% of the batch water requirement.
14.
A preconstruction meeting shall be organized to discuss the precautions required

for pouring in hot weather.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/48
December 2010

Specifications

V.
W.
Retempering
1.
Water addition to the fresh concrete on site to compensate for the loss of
workability is prohibited under all circumstances.
2.
Retempering by the use of high range water reducers is allowed only once and after
the contractor submits to the Engineer, the necessary documents indicating the
type, compatibility and the maximum allowed dose of the admixture.
Damaged Work
1.
X.
Should any concrete be damaged through negligence in taking the foregoing

precautions, or for any other negligence on the part of the Contractor; the Engineer
may, at his discretion, require the damaged work to be removed and reinstated by
the Contractor at his own expense.
Reinforcement
1.
Submittal
a. Product data including the manufacturers specification and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and reinforcement accessories shall be
provided.
b. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturers records of chemical and
physical properties of each batch of billet steel bars and a certificate that the
respective material furnished meets the requirements for the steel
reinforcement specified. The manufacturers records shall include certificates
of mill as well as analysis, tensile and bend tests of the reinforcement.
c. Three copies of the steel test report shall be furnished with each consignment
of steel reinforcement. The steel shall be tagged and cross-referenced with mill
certificates.
2.
The Contractor shall prepare for his own use bar bending Schedules from the
information given on the Drawings and in these Specifications. These schedules
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, which shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility for the correctness of these schedules.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/49
December 2010

Specifications

X.
Reinforcement (Contd)
3.
All reinforcement shall be placed strictly in accordance with the Drawings and as
instructed in writing by the Engineer. Nothing shall be allowed to interfere with the
required disposition of the reinforcement, and the Contractor shall ensure that all
parts of the reinforcement are placed correctly in position and are temporarily fixed
where necessary to prevent displacement before or during the process of tamping
and ramming the concrete in place.
4.
The ties, links or stirrups connecting the bars shall be taut so that the bars are
properly braced. The inside of their curved part shall be in actual contact with the
bars, around which they are intended to fit.
5.
Delivery storage and handling

a. On delivery, bars in each lot shall be legibly tagged by the manufacturer. The
tag shall show the manufacturers test number and lot number and other
applicable data that will identify the material with the certificate issued for that
lot of steel. The fabricator shall furnish three copies of a certification which
shows the batch number or numbers from which each size of bar in the
shipment was fabricated.
b. Storage of reinforcement shall be on suitable structures a minimum of 450 mm
above the ground surface to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt, rust and
other deleterious matter. Storage facilities shall be such as to permit easy access
for inspection and identification. Reinforcement bundles shall be clearly tagged
with bar schedule and bar mark reference.
c. The reinforcement shall not be roughly handled, dropped from a height, or
subjected to shock loading or mechanical damage. Steel reinforcing bars shall
be kept clean and shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, oil, grease,
earth, paint, or any other material which may impair the bond between the
concrete and the reinforcement. The reinforcement shall be covered to ensure
protection from wind blown dust, condensation, rain and other deleterious
materials
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/50
December 2010

Specifications

X.
6.
Reinforcing Materials
a. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615.
b. Reinforcement shall meet the following requirements for minimum yield stress
Bars
Grade
Yield Stress
Symbol
Plain round mild steel
40
280 MPa
60
420 MPa
Deformed High Yield bars
Deformed steel rods and bars shall conform to the requirements of the Standard
Specification for Deformed Billet-Steel Bars of Grade 60 with minimum yield
strength 4200 kg/cm2 (60000 psi) for Concrete Reinforcement of ASTM
Designation (A-615) or BS 4449, or equivalent.
c. If in the opinion of the Engineer the steel has excessive surface rust, dust or
other deleterious material then the steel shall be sand blasted. Sand for blasting
shall not contain materials deleterious to the durability of the reinforcement or
concrete.
d. All reinforcement shall be pressure washed with fresh water after erection and
immediately before placing concrete.
e. Tie wire: wire for binding reinforcement bars shall be soft black annealed mild
steel wire. The diameter of the wire shall not be less than l6 S.W.G. (1.6mm)
and the binding shall be twisted tight with proper pliers. The free ends of the
binding wire shall be bent inwards.
7.
Inspection sampling and testing

a. Inspection of reinforcing steel and the installation thereof will be conducted by
the Engineer.
b. The Contractor shall give 24 hour notice to the Engineer before closing forms
or placing concrete.
c. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to break out and remove completely
all sections of the work already constructed under any of the following
circumstances:
i. Reinforcing steel sample under test fails to meet the specification
requirements at any time
ii. The Engineer considers that samples which were presented to him for test
were not truly representative
iii. It becomes apparent that reinforcing steel which has not been approved has
been used on the Works.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/51
December 2010

Specifications

X.
d. Representative samples of all reinforcing steel that the Contractor proposes to
use in the works must be submitted, before work is commenced, to the
Engineer for his written approval.
e. Manufacturer's certificates stating clearly for each sample:
i. Place of manufacture
ii. Expected date and size of deliveries to site
iii. All relevant details of composition, manufacture, strengths and other
qualities of the steel.
f. The Engineer reserves the right to sample and inspect all reinforcement steel
upon its arrival at the work site. Contractor shall provide a certificate
confirming that samples taken from the bars delivered to the works pass the rebend test.
g. Frequency of sampling and the method of quality control shall be performed
from each lot and delivery for each type and bar size. At least two tension tests
and one bend test shall be made from each selected bar.
h. Allow 14 days for Engineers review of samples.
i. Testing
i. Tests shall be carried out when directed by the Engineer.
ii. Tests shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM A 615
iii. Tensile tests providing information on following will be required from each
delivery of reinforcement:
a. Ultimate strength
b. Cross-sectional area
c. Deformation/bend characteristics of deformed bars.
j. The Contractor is to provide tensile, bend, rebend and chemical tests at his own
expense, for each size of bar to be used in the concrete construction.
k. Test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer three weeks
before concrete work commences on Site.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/52
December 2010

Specifications

X.
l. Full testing shall be required if the source of supply of reinforcement changes,
in which case the cost of such extra testing will be borne by the Contractor.
m. When any test results do not conform to the relevant standard the reinforcement
steel shall be removed from the Site and all costs resulting there from shall be
borne by the Contractor.
n. Cutting and bending of reinforcement shall be in accordance with ACI 318 and
shall be done without the application of heat. Bends shall have a substantially
constant curvature.
o. Reinforcement shall not be straightened or re-bent without the approval of the
Engineer. If permission is given to bend projecting reinforcement care shall be
taken not to damage the concrete and to ensure that the radius is not less than
the minimum specified in ACI 318.
p. All reinforcement shall be securely and accurately fixed in positions shown on
the Drawings to ensure that the reinforcement steel framework as a whole shall
retain its shape. The framework shall be so temporarily supported as to retain
its correct position in the forms during the process of placing and consolidating
the concrete.
q. No part of the reinforcement shall be used to support access ways, working
platform or for the conducting of an electric current
r. The Contractors specific attention is drawn to the following general
requirements:
i. Lapped joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings and/or in accordance
with the requirements of ACI codes
ii. Hooks shall be semicircular with a straight length as shown in design
s. Welding shall not be used unless authorized by the Engineer and recommended
by the reinforcement manufacturer.
t. Where welding is approved it shall be executed under controlled conditions in
a factory or workshop.
u. Welding shall not take place on site without the approval of the Engineer and
unless suitable safeguards and techniques are employed and the types of steel
employed have the required welding properties.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/53
December 2010

Specifications

X.
v. Mechanical splices shall comply with ACI 318, and shall be used as and where
indicated on the Drawings. Details of mechanical splices shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
w. Bundling and splicing of bundled bars shall be in accordance with ACI 318.
Splicing, except where indicated on the Drawings or approved shop drawings,
will not be permitted without the approval of the Engineer.
x. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours before commencing
the fixing of reinforcement in order to facilitate the inspection of formwork.
The Contractor shall ensure that areas to receive reinforcement are cleaned
before fixing.
y. Reinforcement shall not be fixed or placed in contact with non-ferrous metals
z. Concrete cover
i. Correct concrete cover to reinforcement shall be maintained with the aid of
approved spacer pieces
ii. The cover shall not be less than as given in the drawing.
aa. Spacers, chairs and other supports shall be provided as necessary to maintain
the reinforcement in its correct position. In a member where the nominal cover
is dimensioned to the links, spacers between the links and formwork shall be
the same dimension as the nominal cover.
bb. Spacer bars shall be of the same diameter as longitudinal bars, but not less than
25 mm in diameter, and shall be fixed between two layers at 1.5 m centers
except where bundled bars are detailed.
cc. Spacers, chairs and other supports shall be made of concrete, plastic or other
material to the approval of the Engineer. Where supports are made of concrete
they shall have at least the same strength as the concrete in the host member.
dd. Placing of all reinforcement steel bars will be checked by the Engineer and in
no case is concrete to be placed around any reinforcement steel that has not
been approved by the Engineer. Insertion of bars into or the removal of bars
from concrete already placed shall not be permitted.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/54
December 2010

Specifications

X.
ee. Reinforcement steel temporarily left projecting from the concrete at the joints
shall not be bent without the prior approval of the Engineer.
ff. The position of reinforcement before and during placing concrete shall be
checked
gg. Particular attention shall be paid to the position of top reinforcement in
cantilever sections
hh. Reinforcement shall be clean and free from corrosive pitting, loose rust, loose
mill scale, oil and other substances which may adversely affect reinforcement,
concrete, or the bond between the two.
ii. Projecting reinforcement from the weather where rust staining of exposed
concrete surfaces may occur shall be protected at all times.
jj. At the time of concreting, all reinforcement steel shall have been thoroughly
cleaned and freed from all mud, oil or any other coatings that might destroy or
reduce the bond and the following measures applied:
i. Cleaning all set or partially set concrete which may have been deposited
thereon during the placing of a previous lift of concrete
ii. All uncoated rust bars shall be again sand blasted and pressure washed..
Immediately before concrete placing the reinforcing steel shall be washed
thoroughly with high pressure potable water jets to remove any deposited
salts.
Y.
Curing and Protection

1. The method, procedure, materials, and equipment for curing shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
2. Chemical curing compounds when used shall be stored in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
3. The Contractor shall ensure that curing is provided for 24 hours per day including
holidays and that all related necessary plant and labor resources are also available.
4. Special attention shall be given to the curing of vertical and overhanging surfaces
to ensure satisfactory curing.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/55
December 2010

Specifications

Y.
Curing and Protection (Contd)

5. The Contractor shall adopt curing measures that preclude the possibility of thermal
shock to the concrete during curing. This may be achieved by ensuring that the
temperature of the water used for curing does not differ from that of the concrete
by more than 15 C.
6. Water used for any curing purposes shall conform to the requirements of water
used in concrete
7. All concrete shall be cured for a period of time required to obtain the full specified
strength, but not less than seven consecutive days. The method of curing shall be
by water for the first seven days and by water or membrane until the concrete has
reached the full specified strength.
8. Exposed surfaces shall be protected from air blown contamination until 28 days
after the concrete is placed.
9. The method of curing shall ensure that sufficient moisture is present to complete
the hydration of the cement, and shall be to subject the approval of the Engineer.
The method of curing shall not :
a. Disfigure permanently exposed surfaces
b. Affect bonding of subsequent coatings
c. Increase the temperature of the concrete.
10. Curing of formed surface
a. Formed surfaces, including the underside of beams, supported slabs and the
like, by moist curing with the forms in place for the full curing period, or until
the forms are removed.
b. When the forms are stripped, curing shall continue by any approved method.
c. Air barriers shall be constructed at each slab to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks
d. Curing of Foundation
e. The contractor shall submit curing methodology and measures to be taken on
site to cope with the generation of heat from hydration of cement and attendant
volume change to minimize cracking. The method shall address but not be
limited to the following points:
i. Maximum placing temperatures
ii. Maximum temperature achieved within the section
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/56
December 2010

Specifications

Y.

iii. Maximum differential temperature between centre and surface of the
section
iv. Maximum temperature difference between the centre of the pour and
ambient temperature
v. Maximum differential temperature between successive pours or lifts
vi. In case of casting against existing concrete, the difference between the
mean temperatures in the existing and the newly cast sections shall be taken
into consideration
vii. The rate of evaporation shall not approach 1 Kg/m2/hr and precautions
against plastic shrinkage cracking shall be listed
f. The curing methodology shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
g. The concrete temperature shall be monitored over a 7 days period to check the
specified temperatures in the concrete structure and monitor the effectiveness
of the application of the direct curing and insulating treatment
h. The Contractor shall organize a pre-pouring meeting and discuss site
preparations. Site preparations shall be approved by the Engineer.
i. Differential temperature shall not exceed 30oC for concrete made with
limestone and 20oC for concrete made with other sources of aggregates.
j. The Contractor shall submit a summary report of concrete temperature
recorded within the 7 days period detailing all steps and measures taken to the
Engineer.
11. Curing of unformed surface
Unformed surfaces shall be protected as soon as possible after the concrete has
been placed by polythene sheeting. When sufficiently hard, hessian or other
absorbent material shall be placed on the concrete surface and shall be kept wet for
the required period. The Hessian shall be overlaid with polythene sheet to assist in
the retention of water. Alternatively a curing method approved by the Engineer
may be used.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/57
December 2010

Specifications

Y.

12. Moisture curing shall be performed by :
a. Covering the surface of the concrete with water and keeping it continuously
wet
b. Continuous use of fine fog water sprays
c. Covering the surface with a saturated absorptive cover and keeping it
continuously wet.
Where the method referenced in section1.15.L.1 is used; the bunds shall not be
made of fill from excavations or any other areas where there is a possibility of
chloride contamination.
13. The moisture retaining curing cover shall be in the widest practical widths and
shall have 200 mm side and end laps. The laps shall be sealed with adhesive tape.
Any penetrations or tear in the covering shall be repaired with the same material
and waterproof tape
14. Unhardened concrete shall be protected from heavy rains or flowing mechanical
injury and the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval his construction
procedure which is designed to avoid such an event. No fire, excessive heat or
carbon oxide gases shall be permitted near or in direct contact with concrete at any
time.
15. Liquid membrane curing
a. Curing media shall meet all requirements of the "Specifications for Liquid
Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete" of ASTM C 309 and
"Test for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials" of ASTM C 156.
b. Membrane forming curing compounds shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations immediately after any water sheen which may
develop after finishing has disappeared from the surface and within 2 hours of
stripping formwork on formed surfaces
c. Membrane forming curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces against
which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded unless:
i. It is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, or
ii. Positive measures are taken to remove it completely from those areas which
are to receive bonded applications
iii. It is used on fair faced concrete surfaces.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/58
December 2010

Specifications

Z.
AA.
Construction Joints
1.
All construction joints either shown on the drawings or proposed by the Contractor
shall be clearly detailed on shop drawings and submitted to the Engineer for prior
approval before commencing work. However approval accorded by the Engineer
shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the contract.
2.
When construction joints necessitate the provision of water bars the same shall be
indicated by the Engineer on the drawings submitted by the Contractor who shall
provide and install the same at no extra cost to the project in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.
Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels and capitals shall be placed monolithically
as part of the slab system, unless otherwise shown in design drawings or
specification. No construction joints shall be permitted in respect of the above.
4.
Vertical joints shall be formed by means of rigid stopends, and all horizontal joints
shall be level.
5.
The surfaces of all joints shall be thoroughly roughened, cleaned of all loose and
foreign matter and laitance, and washed with water. Just before concreting is
resumed, the joint shall be treated with either a thin layer of neat cement grout or a
sand and cement grout mixed in the same proportions as the sand and cement in the
concrete. This grout shall be worked well into the surface of the concrete. When
indicated on drawings the surfaces of joints shall be treated with an approved
epoxy bonding agent to the extents shown therein. The bonding agent shall be
applied as recommended by the manufacturer.
6.
All slabs on grade shall have control joints as directed by the Engineer.
Execution
1.
Formwork
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that
might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape,
alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/59
December 2010

Specifications

AA.
Execution (Contd)
Formwork (Contd)
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual,
as follows:
Class A, (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
Class B, (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5
horizontal to 1 vertical.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure
units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area
of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and
securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in
forms at inconspicuous locations.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades
providing such items.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood,
sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/60
December 2010

Specifications

Embedded Items
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
Removing and Reusing Forms
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that
does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form-release agent.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close
joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed
concrete surfaces unless approved by Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/61
December 2010

Specifications

Shores and Reshores
Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of
shoring and reshoring.
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories
to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or
will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
Vapor Retarders
Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
Lap joints (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with
mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus (0 mm) or minus (19 mm).
Place and compact a (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over granular
fill.
Steel Reinforcement
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
Deformed high tensile bars shall comply with ASTM A615 M yield strength Fy minimum
425 N/mm.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not
tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/62
December 2010

Specifications

FF.
Steel Reinforcement (Contd)

Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing.
Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace
overlaps with wire.
Joints
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least (38 mm) into concrete.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints
in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least
one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/63
December 2010

Specifications

GG.
Joints (Contd)
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete
develops random contraction cracks.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at
slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than (13 mm) or more than (25 mm) below
finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants," are indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side
of joint.
Waterstops
Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints between water tank slab and walls
and in vertical construction joints between walls, or elsewhere indicated by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide clean and dust-free surface of application for the bentonitebased waterstop.
Bentonite-based waterstops shall be fixed to the hardened concrete, through the use of
steel bolts, as directed by the manufacturer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/64
December 2010

Specifications

HH.
Waterstops (Contd)
Waterstops shall be bentonite based, type Bentorub+ or similar, and possess the technical
properties hereunder:- Swelling capacity in contact with water
- Density
- Weight
- Expansion pressure under complete enclosure
- Resistance against hydrostatic pressure
- Elongation at rupture
400% of original dry volume

~ 1.45kg/dm3
~ 0.72 kg/m
0.70 N/mm2
= 8 bars
7500%
Other expandable waterstops may be submitted for use, to the Engineers approval.
In case of use of a bonding agent at the construction joints, with the use of a bentonitebased waterstop, the bonding agent shall be of cement-base type.
Concrete Placement
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Engineer.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no
new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or
planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints
as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/65
December 2010

Specifications

II.
Concrete Placement (Contd)

Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least (150
mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have
begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items
without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab
surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
Maintain concrete temperature below (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice
is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/66
December 2010

Specifications

Finishing Formed Surfaces
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie
holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed
specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed-surface irregularities.
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be
covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.
Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and onehalf parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens,
rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/67
December 2010

Specifications

Finishing Floors and Slabs
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and
bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude
of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 1 direction.
Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings and to receive mortar
setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill
low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and to be covered with
fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete
by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface
is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface
defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated exposed to view or to be covered with resilient
flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another
thin-film-finish coating system.
Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according
(ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
to
ASTM E 1155
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with
local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.
local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24.
minimum
minimum
minimum
minimum
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/68
December 2010

Specifications

KK.
Finishing Floors and Slabs (Contd)

Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,
freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed (6 mm), (4.8 mm), (3.2 mm)
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Engineer before application.
Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to
surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
Uniformly apply dry-shake floor hardener at a rate recommended by manufacturer.
Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake floor hardener over surface by
hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating
with a second dry-shake floor hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of
material, and embed by power floating.
After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound
recommended by dry-shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after final
finishing.
Miscellaneous Concrete Items
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated,
after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend
with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or
required to complete the Work.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is
still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations
as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and
equipment.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/69
December 2010

Specifications

Concrete Protecting and Curing
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather protection during curing.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot,
dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h)
before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before
float finishing.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces
and edges with (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least
(300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and
waterproof tape.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor
coverings.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or
a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor
covering used on Project..
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/70
December 2010

Specifications

MM.
Concrete Protecting and Curing (Contd)

Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete
surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer
certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on
Project.
Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
Joint Filling
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave
contact faces of joint clean and dry.
Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
Expansion joints filler in structural concrete shall be fire resistant and filled with:
1.
Compressible filler board consisting of wood fibres impregnated with bitumen
emulsion.
2.
Compressible closed cell expanded polyethylene or polyurethane sheet.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/71
December 2010

Specifications

Field Quality Control
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
Inspections:
Steel reinforcement placement.
Steel reinforcement welding.
Headed bolts and studs.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness
(ASTM E 1155M) within 48 hours of finishing.
according
to
ASTM E 1155
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/72
December 2010

Specifications
BEDS AND SCREEDS (03500)

A.
B.
Scope
1.
Screeds are to be the depths, thickness and location shown on the drawings.
2.
Finish of the screeds shall be as indicated on drawings.
Performance and standards

1.
The proportion of the mixes used and the hardness of the finished beds and screeds
should be determined during the course of the work by methods referred to in
clause 72 B of BS CP 204. Specimens shall be provided from samples of the mixes
being made and in accordance with the stipulations contained in CP 204. All
screeds and beds shall be free of curling, and shall not crack unduly.
Hollow sounding areas shall be cut out and shall be made good.
2.
The tolerance of screeds and beds shall be in accordance with BS CP 204.
3.
Standards
BS CP 203, Tile Flooring and Slab Flooring.
BS CP 204, In-Situ Floor Finishes.
C.
Related Items
03300 Cast in Place Concrete
D.
Submittals
1.
Aggregate Samples
Supply samples for the Engineer's approval of all aggregates, sources of supply are
to be indicated.
2.
Aggregate Testing
Carry out preliminary tests on natural aggregates to determine drying shrinkage as
set out in BRE Digest 35, and submit results for approval. Carry out tests on
aggregates to BS 812 for the following and submit for approval.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/73
December 2010

Specifications
BEDS AND SCREEDS (03500) (CONT'D)

D.
Submittals (Cont'd)
2.
Aggregate Testing (Cont'd)

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Sieve Analysis
Clay and Fine Silt
Specific Gravity
Water Absorption
10% Fines Value
Additives
Additives such as workability aids shall not be used without permission of the
Engineer. If such permission is sought full particulars of the material shall be
submitted.
Submit samples of colouring additives for by the Engineer before ordering of
materials.
4.
Sample of Screed
Prepare specimens of the mixes and finishes being used for the approval of the
Engineer.
5.
Other Materials
Submit manufacturer's data for all ancillary materials used in conjunction with the
laying of beds and screeds.
E.
Product Handling
1.
General
The specifications regarding the delivery, storage, handling and transport of cement
and aggregates in Section 03300, Cast In Place Concrete, shall apply.
2.
Mixing
Except where hand-mixing of small batches is approved by the Engineer,
mechanical mixers of an approved type shall be used. Mixers shall be thoroughly
cleaned after each batch and kept free of deposit from previous batches.
3.
Transport and Placing

Care shall be taken to avoid contamination or segregation of ingredients in the
manner in which mixed materials are transported and placed.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/74
December 2010

Specifications

F.
Materials
1.
Cement
Cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement to BS 12 or ASTM C150 Type I.
2.
Fine Aggregates
Clean washed sharp pit sand to ASTM 33 or BS 882, Part 2 Table 2, Zone 2, well
graded from 5mm down.
3.
Coarse Aggregate
Clean washed crushed shingle to ASTM 33 or BS 882, Part 2, Table 1, well graded
from 10mm down. Maximum drying shrinkage of concrete : 0.045%.
4.
Aggregate Quality
All aggregates shall be free from deleterious algae or minerals.
5.
Colouring Agents
Pigments shall conform to the requirements of BS 1014 and shall be premixed with
the cement or sand, so as not to exceed 10% by weight of the cement in the mortar,
care being taken to ensure that the strength of the mortar remains adequate. Carbon
black shall be limited to 3% by weight of the cement.
6.
Additives
Waterproofing additive materials for screed in planters, pond, and landscaped area
shall be an integral waterproof polymer manufactured for use as admixture and
shall be approved by the Engineer.
Additives for other screed shall not be used without the permission of the
Engineer. If permitted, such use must be maintained throughout the Contract and
trowelling off must be carried out at the correct period. Calcium chloride shall not
be used.
7.
Water
Water shall be clean and uncontaminated to the approval of the Engineer, and shall
be tested if so instructed by the Engineer to BS 3148.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/75
December 2010

Specifications

F.
Materials (Cont'd)
8.
Bonder
The bonder shall be a SBR based adhesive. The bonding agent shall also be
incorporated in the screed mix as recommended by the manufacturer.
9.
10.
Screed Mixes
a)
For screed thicknesses up to and including 40mm 1:3 cement: fine

aggregate by volume, bonded.
b)
For screed thicknesses in excess of 40mm 1:1:3 cement: fine aggregate:

coarse aggregate by volume, unbonded.
Reinforcement
Screed greater than 50mm thick shall be reinforced to the approval of the Engineer.
G.
Workmanship
1.
General
Comply with the recommendations of BS CP 202 and BS CP 204.
2.
Preparation
Protect all existing work and approaches with sheets, duck boards or other suitable
means.
Clean all bases thoroughly to remove all dirt, dust, rust and oil.
3.
Screed Preparation
Before laying screed cut neat holes through slab where required at low points to
effectively drain surplus water. When screed has drained completely, fill and seal
holes to approval.
4.
Pipes, Conduits Etc.

Where any pipe, conduit, bolt head or other article is to remain buried in the
screed, it shall have a strip of wire netting overlaid of sufficient width to extend
225mm each side beyond the pipe etc.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/76
December 2010

Specifications

G.
5.
Unbonded Screeds
Lay polythene sheet on the base and lap all joints not less than 50mm.
6.
Batching and Mixing

Mixes incorporation dense aggregate shall be batched by weight.
The water content of mixes shall be the minimum necessary to achieve full
compaction, and low enough to prevent excessive mortar being brought to the
surface during compaction. In any case it shall not exceed 40% of cement weight.
7.
Laying
The screed shall be laid and trowelled so that the surface is even, smooth and free
of ridges, and shall be fully compacted by approved means. Cement shall not be
sprinkled on the surface.
Maintain precise levels or falls as required.
8.
Joints
Screeds and beds shall be laid in alternate bays not exceeding 10 square meters,
limiting the length of each bay to 1 1/2 times the width. The forms used shall be
true and square, with steel top surface, securely fixed, and at the edges to ensure
that joints are level and close butted. Wherever practicable form a joint to coincide
with construction joints concrete base.
9.
Tolerances
Sudden irregularities shall not be permitted. The maximum permissible deviation
from the designed level or fall shall be plus/minus 3mm in any distance of 2m,
non-accumulative.
The roof screed low spots will not be acceptable between drainage outlets.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/77
December 2010

Specifications

G.
10.
Curing and Drying Out

Immediately after laying protect the surface from wind, draughts and strong
sunlight.
As soon as the screed has set cover it closely with wet hethien and keep it so
covered and constantly wet for not less than 7 days.
Do not heat screeds or the building artificially during the first 4 weeks after laying,
then raise the temperature slowly.
Prevent damage by following trades.
11.
Screeds to receive waterproofing membrane

The Programme shall be arranged to ensure that screeds are as dry as practicable
when waterproof coverings are laid.
Screeds laid to falls shall be bonded over the full areas of the screed in all cases
where the minimum screed thickness is less than 25mm.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami
Division 03/78
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 4l00
MORTAR
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
Related Documents
of Particular Applications and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this
section.
1.2
Summary
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of mortar and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified
herein.
Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to. the following:
Mortar for unit masonry.
1.3
Related Section
The following section includes requirements which relate to this section:
Unit Masonry - Section 04200.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials
specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are delivered to the
site.
1.4.2
Certificates: Submit certificates attesting to compliance with these specifications for

approval. Obtain approval prior to shipment of materials.
1.5
Quali1y Assurance
Materials shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein
and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities handing jurisdiction.
British Standards (BS).
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
Khatib and Alami
Mortar
Section 04100/1
December 2010

Specifications
Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry,
from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and
producer for each aggregate.
1.5.1
Tests
Test each mortar type in accordance with ASTM CT80.
Provide mortar materials for prism tests specified in Section 04200.
1.6
Delivery. Storage, and Handling

Deliver materials specified herein in manufacturer's unopened containers, with
manufacturer's name and point of origin on each container.
Deliver materials and handle as to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and the
damage of materials by water.
Store materials and equipment where designated and assume responsibility and security
for materials and equipment. Store materials off the ground, under cover and in a dry
location. Take precautions for protection from detrimental conditions.
Stale cement or cement with cakes or lumps shall not be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Portland Cement shall comply with the following:

ASTM C150, Type I or B.S. 12. Provide natural color, non-staining, without airentertainment.
Nonstaining Cement: Not more than .03 percent soluble alkali - Fed. Spec. SS-C-181e.
2.1.2. Mortar plasticizer.

2.1.3. Aggregates: fine aggregate, clean, washed, hard sand particles of mineral origin
conforming to the following:
Aggregates for Mortar: ASTM C 144 or B.S. 1200.
Aggregates for Grout: ASTM C104.
Use white sand (natural or ground white stone) when non-staining is used and required.
2.1.4
Water: Potable and free of salts and deleterious substances.
2.1.5
Masonry Cements: The use of masonry cements is prohibited.
Khatib and Alami
Mortar
Section 04100/2
December 2010
2.2

Specifications
MIXES AND MIXING
Thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer, comply with
referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content.
Provide equipment and accessories required for mixing mortar.
Changing source or bands of materials during course of work is prohibited unless approved by
the Engineer.
The volume of mixed material per batch shall not exceed the manufacturer's rated capacity of the
mixer drum in cubic feet of mixed material.
Empty the drum before the succeeding batch is placed therein.
Keep mixers. wheel barrows, etc. clean. Mortar shall not be deposited upon or come in contact
with the ground.
Proportions shall be by volume. Mix mortar by machine only, for not less than five minutes. Add
a minimum quantity of water for workability.
Mixes
Mortar: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar specified.
Grout: Comply with ASTM C476 for grout for use in construction of reinforced and
nonreinforced masonry. Use grout of consistence; indicated or if not otherwise indicated, of
consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will fill spaces intended to receive grout.
Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 50.8mm (2 inches) in horizontal direction, unless
otherwise indicated.
Use coarse grout in grout spaces 50.8mm (2 inches) or more in least horizontal dimension, unless
Minimum compressive strength 12.40 Mpa (1800 psi) at 28 days.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Refer to Section 04200 "Unit Masonry".

END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Mortar
Section 04100/3
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
of Particular Applications and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this
section.
1.2
Summary
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of Unit Masonry and related work as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein.
Work Included: Work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Interior concrete masonry unit walls and partitions.

Concrete masonry unit exterior wall.
Concrete masonry unit lintels (Bond Beam Units).
Grouting of metal items into masonry work.
Furnishing anchor slots for installation in concrete for anchoring masonry.
Furnishing and installation of anchors, joint reinforcement, wall ties, joint filler
strips, expansion joints and other items as specified herein.
Related Section
Concrete.
Mortar.
Doors and Frames.
Plaster .
Other applicable related work in applicable specification sections.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials
specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are delivered to the
site. Product data shall be submitted on the following:
a.
b.
c.
Concrete block.
Joint reinforcing.
Anchors, ties, control and expansion joints, and accessories.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/1
December 2010
1.4.2

Specifications
Certificates attesting to compliance with these specifications shall be submitted to the

Engineer for approval. Obtain approval prior to shipment of materials. Certificates shall
include the following:
a.
Concrete Block: Certification that block meets reference standard and fire ratings
specified herein.
1.4.3. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for work specified herein for approval and obtain
approval before materials are delivered to the job site. Shop drawings shall show the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Anchoring details.
Control joint locations and details.
Reinforced masonry lintels.
Coordinate shop drawings with work of Exterior Stonework.
1.4.4. Samples
a. Submit samples of materials specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before
materials are delivered to the site.
b. Deliver to the job site two samples of concrete masonry units for approval of color
and texture.
1.5
Quali1y Assurance
1.5.1
Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein, required fire ratings and to applicable codes and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
a. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
b. British Standards (BS)
c. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and
construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has
been determined by testing in compliance with ASTM El 19 by a recognized testing
and inspecting.
1.5.2. Mockup
a. After approval of samples and prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample
mockup using materials, bond and joint tooling required for final work. Locate
mockup where directed.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/2
December 2010

Specifications
b. Build sample mock-up indicating finish, texture, jointing, anchors, reinforcement

and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. Mock-tip size as indicated
on the drawings.
c.
Reconstruct mockup until it meets with the Engineer's approval.
d. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance of visual qualities of the mockup before start of
masonry work.
e. Retain mockup during construction as standard for judging completed masonry
work. Do not alter, move or destroy mockup until work is completed and accepted
by the Engineer.
1.6
Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Deliver materials specified herein, with manufacturer's name and point of origin, labeled
or tagged on Materials with each delivery.
Deliver, store, handle and protect materials fi6rn damage, moisture, dirt and intrusion of
foreign matter. Store masonry units and mortar materials on raised platforms and under
ventilated and waterproof cover. Immediately resea1 containers after partial use, Remove
and replace damaged materials.
Pack, deliver and store masonry units to prevent breakage, cracking, chipping, spalling or
other damage.Carefully unload and stack materials. Dumping is prohibited. Store, protect
and ventilate units at project site.
Store and protect reinforcement and anchors so that when placed, materials will be free of
soil, dirt, ice, loose rust or scale which would destroy or reduce bond with mortar.
Arrange storage of material or equipment on floors of the structure so as not to overstress
the supporting structure orany of its components.
1.7.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Protect work in progress from weather, dehydration and damage. Cover in completed
work until progress is resumed. Securely install covers in place. Ensure that there is free
air flow sufficient to prevent heat build
Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be lcft exposed or
painted. Immediately remove grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by spreading covers on
ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/3
December 2010
1.8

Specifications
PRE-INSTALLATION COORDINATION
Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to the start of masonry work, meet at the site and
review the installation procedures and coordination with other work. Meeting shall
include Contractor, Engineer and major material manufacturers as well as others whose
work must be coordinated with the masonry work.
Coordination With Inserts: Ensure coordination between masonry work and concrete
work such that all inserts and flashing reglets required for the proper installation of
masonry work are correctly pre-installed.
Pre-Installation Inspection: Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the
conditions under which the masonry work is to be installed, and notify the Engineer in
writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do
not proceed with the installation of masonry work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Concrete Masonry Units (Concrete Block) shall be manufactured in Lebanon

conforming to the following:
a. Concrete masonry units shall be of nominal size 200mm by 400mm (8 inches by 16
inches) in thickness indicated on drawings having two or three vertical cells, and not
more than 3mm (1/8 inch) variation in actual dimension, rectangularity or surface
wind.
b. Non-Load-Bearing Hollow Concrete Blocks to Receive Plaster: ASTM C129 or B.S.
6073 Part 1, using concrete aggregates complying,.with ASTM C33 or B.S. 882,
with dry net concrete weight of not less than 2000 kg/cu. m. (125 lbs. per cu. ft.),
Type 1 or the equivalent grade of B. S. 6073, Parts 1 and 2.
c. Fairfaced Non-Load-Bearing Hollow Concrete Blocks: ASTM C129 or B.S. 6073
Part 1, using concrete aggregates complying with ASTM C3 3 or B.S. 882, with dry
net concrete weight of not less than 2000 kg/cu.m. (125 lbs. per cu.ft.), Type 1 or the
equivalent grade of B.S. 6073, Parts 1 and 2.
d. Fire Rating: Concrete masonry units used for fire-rated walls or partitions shall be
capable of providing ratings as defined by the applicable Building Code. The
producer of the concrete masonry units shall furnish certification from an
independent testing laboratory confirming that 200mm (8 inch) or larger masonry
units meet all of the U.L. 618 requirements. For two (2) hours or better, as required,
referencing full scale fire test reports in accordance with ASTM E 119.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/4
December 2010

Specifications
e. Provide special shapes for bonding, rebated blocks to receive control joints, bullnose
units for corners except where corner guards installed by others are indicated.
Provide stretcher units, jamb units, header units, sash units, lintel units, square
comer units for painted work and other shapes as indicated.
2.1.2
Concrete Masonry Unit Lintels and Precast Concrete Lintels shall be manufactured in
Lebanon conforming to the following:
a. Concrete Masonry Unit Lintels (Bond Beam Units) for fairfaced CMU shall consist
of "U" shaped concrete masonry units, conforming to requirements for solid loadbearing units ASTM C145, Grade N-1, of matching texture and appearance to
adjacent units, reinforced with steel reinforcing bars, and fill with 20 682 kPa (3000
psi) concrete conforming to requirements specified under the "Concrete" section of
the specifications. Lintels shall be 400mm (16 inches) longer than opening. See
schedule on drawings.
b. Precast Concrete Lintels for concrete masonry unit partitions and interior walls shall
be manufactured from concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of the
"Concrete" section of these specifications. Exposed faces shall have texture to
match faces of concrete masonry units. Lintels shall be reinforced with 12.7mm (1/2
inch) diameter steel reinforcing bars, full length, one at top and bottom for each
100mm (4 inches) of wall thickness. Lintels shall be modular size and 200mm (8
inches) longer than masonry opening, at each side. See schedule on drawings.
2.1.3. Joint Reinforcement

a. Joint Reinforcement for concrete block work shall consist of parallel No. 9 gauge
diameter side rods and No. 9 gauge butt welded truss or ladder bars, conforming to
ASTM A82 or B.S. 4482 for cold drawn steel wire. Width 38mm to 50.8mm (1-1/2
inches to 2 inches) less than wall thickness.
b. Joint Reinforcement for composite walls shall consist of parallel 4.8mm (3/16 inch)
diameter side rods and No. 9 gauge butt welded truss or ladder bars, conforming to
ASTM A82 or B.S. 4482 for cold drawn steel wire.
1) Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box-type cross ties
spaced not more thin 400mm (16 inches) o.c.; side rods spaced for
embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and ties extended to
within 25.4mm (I inch) of exterior face of facing wythe.
2) Where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of backup,
use units with adjustable 2 piece rectangular ties.
c. Joint reinforcement shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication with minimum
0.45 kg/m2 (1.50 ounce per square foot) of surface zinc coming conforming to
ASTM A 153 Class B2 or B.S. 729, Table 1.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/5
December 2010

Specifications
d. Joint reinforcement, including prefabricated "T" and "L" shaped units, shall be DurO-Wal Truss by Dur-O-Wall Products, Inc. or "Truss-Mesh-Lock" by Hohmann &
Barnard, Inc., "Blok-Truss" by AA Wire Products Co., "Ty-Wal" regular Truss by
Jim Taylor, Inc., Truss Type Series 300 by Wire Bond, Masonry Reinforcing
Corporation of America or Architect approved equal.
2.1.4. Anchors and Ties
a. Dovetail Slot: Minimum 16 gauge hot-dip galvanized steel with holes for nailing and
supplied with polystyrene filler by Heckman Building Products, Hohmann & Barnard,
Inc., Ty-Wal Jim Taylor, Inc., Dur-O-Wal Products, Inc. or approved equal.
b. Dovetail Anchors: Minimum 14 gauge 25.4mm (I inch) wide by length required to suit
condition, corrugated hot-dip galvanized after fabrication steel by Heckman Building
Products, Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Ty-Wal Jim Taylor, Inc., Dur-O-Wal Products, Inc.
or approved equal.
c. Adjustable Wall Ties: Composed of 14 gauge by 25.4mm by 177.8mm (1 inch wide by 7
inches) with7.1 mm (9/32 inch) hole corrugated hot-dip galvanized anchor and 4.8mm
(3/16 inch) diameter mill galvanized ASTM 82 or B.S. 4482 cold drawn steel wire of
proper length required for embedment in wythe of masonry. Tics shall be by Heckman
Building Products, Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Ty-Wal Jim Taylor, Inc., AA Wire
Products Co. or Dur-O-Wal Products, Inc.
d. Wire Mesh: Galvanized after fabrication 16 gauge steel wire, 6.4 mm (1/4 inch) square
mesh, width 12.7mm (1/2 inch) less than wall thickness, by length to suit condition by
Heckman Building Products, Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. or Ty-Wal Jim Taylor, Inc., AA
Wire Products Co. or Dur-O-Wal Products, Inc.
2.1.5. Expansion and Control Joint Fillers
a. Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strip : ASTM D1056, Grade RE41E1, premolded,
flexible cellular neoprene rubber filler strips capable of compression up to 35 percent,
of width and thickness indicated.
b. Premolded Control Joint Strips: ASTM D2287, General Purpose Grade, Designation
PVC-63506; Polyvinyl chloride designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry wall. Size and configuration as indicated.
c. Bond Breaker Strips: ASTM D226, Type I, No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic roofing
felt.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/6
December 2010

Specifications
2.1.6. Hardware Cloth: Galvanized wire mesh with waterproof paper of length and widths
required to suit condition for laying across concrete masonry unit cells below masonry
units required to be filled solid with grout.
2.1.7. Masonry Restraints: Steel angles and anchorage will be furnished by Section 05500 for
installation by this trade.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
Refer to Section 4 100 "Mortar" for mortar to be used.
Verify that masonry can be completed in accordance with pertinent codes and
regulations, the referenced standards and the original design.
Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination,
scheduling and interfacing of the work of this section with the work of related trades
(with particular attention given to the installation of items embedded in masonry) so as
not to delay job progress.
Furnish items required to be cast into concrete work to respective trades for anchoring
the work of this Section.
3.3
INSTALLATION/ERECTION
3.3.1
Construction Tolerances
a. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises
do not exceed 6.4mm in 3m (1/4 inch in 10 feet), or 9.5mm (3/8 inch) in a story
height not to exceed 6m (20 feet), nor 12.7nun in 12m (1/2 inch in 40 feet) or more.
For external comers, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do
not exceed 6.4mm (1/4 inch) in any story or 6m (20 feet) maximum, nor 12.7mm in
12m (1/2 inch in 40 feet) or more.
b. Variation From Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 6.4mm (V4 inch) in any bay or
6m (20 feet) maximum nor 19mm in 12m (3/4 inch in 40 feet) or more.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/7
December 2010

Specifications
c. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of
columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 12.7mm (1/2 inch) in any bay or 6m
(20 feet) maximum, nor l9mm in 12m (3/4 inch in 40 feet) or more.
d. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from
dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 6.4mm (1/4 inch) nor plus 12.7mm (1/2
inch).
Set masonry to a line, with surfaces plumb and true; keep horizontal joints continuously
level and vertical joints in alignment.
Set masonry from scaffolding erected for that purpose. Do not set or point masonry
exposed to view, overhand.
Build composite walls, floors and other masonry construction to the full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units,
using units of nominal thickness indicated.
Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades. Provide not
less than 200mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and
between adjacent chases and recesses. No chase shall be cut into hollow wall units after
they arc built in place without the Engineer's specific approval.
Leave openings for equipment to be instilled before completion of masonry work. After
installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent
to the opening.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets.
Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at comers, jambs and wherever possible.
Use half size units for Fairfaced masonry units at corners, jambs and intersection.
Where masonry walls abut soffits of slabs or beams, provide closed-cell compressible
filler and firesafing at fire-rated walls and a supporting steel angle at both sides of wall.
Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately
spaced and coordinated with other work.
Where possible, build masonry unit walls and partitions after overhead ducts, pipes and
conduits are in place and tested. Masonry shall be neatly built around such items.
In rooms and spaces scheduled to have concrete finish, make surfaces suitable for paint
application. In spaces without suspended ceilings, make upper wall surfaces up to
termination of structural ceiling suitable for painting.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/8
December 2010

Specifications
Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Where
possible, use full-size units.
Electrical conduits and mechanical pipes in hollow concrete blocks shall run vertically
within the cavity of the blocks. Cutouts for all electrical boxes shall be cut with a motor
driven carborundum saw to ensure straight and even cut edges.
All masonry partitions shall extend from top of structural slab to underside of concrete
slab above and into concrete pans.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 4 unit length in each course; do not tooth.
Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose
masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
3.3.2
Intersecting and Abutting Walls, Including Wall Corners

Provide intersecting masonry unit bond in each course at comers.
Unless vertical control joints are shown at structure, provide interlocking masonry bond
900mm (3 feet) o.c. vertically.
In addition to masonry bonding, provide horizontal reinforcement using pre-fabricated
"T" and "L" units.
Wetting: Do not wet concrete masonry units.
3.3.3
Mortar, Bedding and Jointing

Lay concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face
shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or filled with concrete or grout.
Lay concrete masonry walls with 9.5mm (3/8 inch) join
Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Strike concealed joints flush.
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying, clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not
pound comers at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If
adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.
Fairfaced Masonry Units : Fairfaced units that form the finished wall surfaces shall be
carefully laid so that all courses line up throughout and shall have a uniform appearance.
All cutting of exposed units shall be done with a motor driven carborundum saw. All
joints shall be tooled concave.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/9
December 2010
3.3.4

Specifications
Built-In Work
As the work progresses, build in items specified under this and other sections of these
specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
Grout in door frames, access doors, louvers and other metal items embedded or built into
masonry work solidly with grout.
Grout under lintels, bearing plates and steel bearing on masonry with solid bed of mortar.
Grout around sleeves, pipes, ducts and other items which pass through masonry walls to
provide airtight conditions.
Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar which have anchoring, supporting or
hanging devices embedded in the cell.
Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar on each side of door frames to
400mm, (16 inches) beyond.
Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar which ire below steel bearing plates,
steel beams, and ends of lintels, to 200mm (8 inches) beyond bearing and from floor to
bearing.
Fill vertical cells of masonry units around mechanical equipment rooms and where
indicated on the drawings solidly with mortar.
Fill with grout the first two courses of masonry units.
Place hardware cloth in horizontal joint below masonry unit cells to be filled with mortar,
to prevent mortar from dropping into unfilled cells below.
Where masonry walls indicated to have voids filled solid with grout, fill vertical cells of
masonry units solid with grout (as each course is laid), or use 100 percent solid (no voids)
concrete masonry units.
Coordinate installation of expansion joints.
3.3.5
Solid Wall Construction (Composite Walls)

Fill the vertical longitudinal joint between wythe solidly with mortar by parging the inplace wythe and shoving units into the parging.
Tie wythes with continuous header course of stone blocks at 800mm o.c. vertically.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/10
December 2010

Specifications
In composite walls, instill masonry backing and face material at same time and carefully
bond together. 'Re spacing of the tics shall meet the requirements of the local code. There
shall be at least one metal tic for each 0. 18m2 of wall area.
3.3.6
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement

Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side
rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 15.9mm (5/8 inch) on
exterior side of walls 9.5m (3/8 inch) elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 150mm.
(6 inches).
Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise
indicated.
Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T"
sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at
returns, offsets, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as follows unless otherwise
indicated.
a. For multi-wythe walls which are structurally bonded by masonry headers, provide
continuous stone course at 800mm o.c. vertically.
b. For multi-wythe walls where continuous horizontal reinforcement acts as structural
bond or tie between wythcs, space reinforcement as required by code but not more
than 400mm o.c. vertically.
c. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 400mm o.c. vertically, unless
Reinforce masonry openings greater than 300mm (1 foot) wide, with horizontal joint
reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 200mm apart, immediately
above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of
600mm (2 feet) beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints.
3.3.7
Anchors, Ties and Restraints

Anchor masonry to structure complying with the following:
Provide an open space not less than 12.7mm in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.
Anchor masonry to structural members with metal anchors embedded in masonry joints
and attached to dovetail slot embedded in structure.
Restraints at heads of masonry.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/11
December 2010

Specifications
Provide continuous steel angle restraints on both sides of masonry. Gap between steel and
masonry shall be at least 10mm and shall not exceed 15mm on each side.
3.3.8
Anchorage: 9.5mm diameter high strength steel bolts, cadmium plated. 65mm long
stainless steel expansion type anchor shields, drilled and set into concrete slab above.
Control and Expansion Joints
Provide vertical and horizontal expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where
shown and as specified. Build in related items as the masonry work progresses.
If location of control and expansion joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not
to exceed 9m (30 feet) o.c. In addition, locate joints at points of natural weakness in the
masonry work, including the following:
a. At structural column or joint between bays.
b. Above expansion or control joints in the supporting structure.
c. Above major openings at end of lintels upward and below at ends of sills downward.
Place at one side ofjamb for openings less than 2100mm wide and at both sides for
openings over 1800mm wide.
d. At reduction column of wall thickness.
e. Where masonry abuts supporting structure.
Build in horizontal pressure relieving joints, construct joints by inserting non-metallic
compressible joint filler of v,6dth required to permit installation of scalant. and backer
rod.
Locate horizontal pressure relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry
veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.
Provide non-metallic expansion joint strips vertically at full height between end of
masonry partitions and concrete walls and columns. Thickness of Her shall be 12 mm
and of width required to fill the joint to a point to permit installation of backer rod and
sealant.
3.3.9 Lintels
Provide masonry lintels at fairfaced masonry units and wherever openings of more than
600mm for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
Provide minimum bearing of 200mm at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/12
December 2010
3.4

Specifications
REPAIR AND POINTING

Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or
otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new
units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate
evidence of replacement.
During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and fill with
mortar. Point-up joints including corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat
uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants.
3.5
PROTECTION
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer,
which ensures unit masonry work is without damage and deterioration at time of
substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami
Unit Masonry
Section 04200/13
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART I
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conditions of Particular Application and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This section covers the work of metal fabrications as required by the Contract,
Metal fabrications include items made from iron, steel, aluminium and brass shapes,
plates, bars, strips, tubes, angles, channels and rods which are not a part of structural
steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere. It also includes grey iron castings for
utility manholes.
Types of work in this section include, but shall not be limited to, the following.
Steel Ladders
Chequered Plates
Steel Balustrades and Handrails
Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on Drawings and in Finishing Tables.

1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
Unit Masonry
Painting
1.4
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Metal fabrications work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of
the Specifications of the American Society, for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the
British Standard Specifications (BS), as mentioned herein below, or other approved
international standards.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/1
December 2010

Specifications
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS

ASTM NO
A 27
A 123
A 153
A 167
A 307
A 312
A 480
A 554
A 743
A 780
A 1107
B 209
B 221
Specification of Mild to Medium Strength Carbon Steel for General

Application
Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products
Specification of Zinc Coating
Stainless Steel and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and
Strip
Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 6 000 psi Tensile
Seamless and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe
General Requirements for Flat Rolled Stainless Steel and He Resisting
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing
Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, and Nickel Base
Corrosion-Resistant for General Application
Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Castings
Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)
Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Sheet and Plate
Specification for Aluminium Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods. Wire, Shapes and
Tubes

BS NO.
497
1247
4652
1.5
Manhole Covers, Road Gully Gratings and Frame

Manhole Step Iron
Specifications for Zinc-Rich Priming Paint
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division I
Specification Section for the approval of the Engineer:
1.5.1
Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for
products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications including paint products, non-slip
aggregates, non-slip aggregate surface finishes and grout.
1.5.2
Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of metal fabrications. Include plans,
elevations and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory
items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation by others.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/2
December 2010

Specifications
Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirements for
design loadings, include structural computations, material properties and other
information needed for structural analysis.
Submit fabrication drawings for the Engineer's approval prior to the manufacturer of
any of the required items.
1.5.3
Samples
Submit 2 sets of representative samples of material and finished products, tread
wearing surfaces, railing components and as may be requested by the Engineer.
1.5.4
Qualifications:
Submit quality certificates for firms, persons and welders to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience, include list of completed projects with project name and
addresses, name of engineers and employers and other information.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
Fabricator Qualifications
Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated
for this project with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without
delaying the work.
1.6.2
Shop Assembly
Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for transporting and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
1.6.3
Installer Qualifications:
Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this section by same firm that
fabricated them.
1.6.4
Welders Qualifications:
Qualify welding operators in accordance with requirements of the ASTM and BS
specifications.
Welds shall be sound, smooth, free from apparent porosity, cracks or incomplete
fusion and the surface parts to be welded shall be free of oxide, scale grease, paint or
other extraneous matter.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/3
December 2010

Specifications
Perform all welding of steel assemblies under continuous inspection of the Engineer.
Such work must be left unprimed until the Engineer gives his approval in writing.
1.7
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

Protect formed metal fabrications from corrosion, deformation and other damage
during delivery, storage and handling.
Store metal fabrications protected with a waterproof covering and ventilation to avoid
condensation.
PART2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Metal Surfaces, General

All steel work shall be constructed in mild steel and shall be heavily galvanized after
manufacture except where otherwise specified.
For fabrication of metal fabrications work which shall be exposed to view, use only
materials which are flat, smooth and free from surface blemishes including pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.
2.1.2
Ferrous Metals
Cold Rolled
-
Cold rolled steel sheets of thickness from 0.2 to 3 mm and larger than 600
nun shall comply with ASTM A794.
Steel Strips shall comply to ASTM A109.
Steel Sections shall comply to ASTM A308.
Hot Rolled
-
Steel strips and sheets of thickness from 0.8 mm to 8 mm and width from
10 mm to 2000 mm shall comply to ASTM A414.
Steel sections comply to ASTM A794.
Galvanized Steel Sheets: hot-dip galvanized, sheets thickness to 2 mm and not

larger than 1000 mm comply to ASTM E376.
Steel Pipe: Electrically welded longitudinally, type and grade (if applicable) as
selected by fabricator and as required for design loading, black finish unless
galvanizing is indicated; light weight, unless otherwise indicated shall comply to
ASTM A691.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/4
December 2010

Specifications
Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type, material
and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated
Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either

malleable iron, or cast steel. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hotdip galvanized, after fabrication comply to ASTM A 123
Checkered Plates: Thickness shall not be less than 6 mm. Raised lugs shall be
diamond shaped and shall have an angled and opposed pattern. Steel shall be
mild steel.
Wall Framing
Standard C-shaped steel studs of web depths indicated with lipped flanges and
complying with:
Steel thickness:
Flange width:
Web Unpunched
1.0 mm
35 mm
(to be punched as required)
Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry provide with
welded steel anchors 32mm wide by 6 mm thick and 200 mm long at 600mm
intervals.
Furnish inserts if units shall be installed after concrete or masonry is executed.
Stainless Steel
-
2.1.3
Tubing:
Pipes:
Castings:
Plates:
ASTM A 554
ASTM A 312
ASTM A 743
ASTM A 167
Non-Ferrous Metals
Brass Sheets, Bands and Strips
Aluminium.
2.1.4
Welding Electrodes
2.1.5
Fasteners
Use fasteners made of corrosion-resistant materials and of same basic metal as
fastened metal. Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for the type. grade and class required.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A Lap Bolts:
Square head type
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/5
December 2010
2.1.6
2.1.7

Specifications
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel

Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel
Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields or metal straps capable to
sustain a load equal to 5 times the design load
Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, class and style as required.
Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel
Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Internally threaded tubular expansion anchors
and machine bolts, carbon steel components zinc plated
Grout- Shall be as follows:
Metallic Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, ferrous aggregate

grout for heavy duty loading applications
Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining,

non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Comply with ASTM A 1107.
Ordinary Grout: Ordinary Portland cement according to BS12 and natural sand
to ASTM150 mixed at a ratio of 1 part cement to 21/2 parts sand by volume,
with minimum water required for mixing, placement and hydration. Shall be
used for; interior and exterior applications.
Concrete Fill:
Concrete materials and properties comply with requirements of Section 03005
"Concrete and Reinforced Concrete" for normal weight, air entrained, ready mix
concrete.
2.1.8
Paint
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metals: According to BS No. 4652 fast-curing, leadfree, abrasion-resistant, rust-inhibitive primer selected for compatibility with
substrates and with types of alkyd-type finish paint systems indicated, and for
capability to resist normal atmospheric corrosion and to provide a sound
foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds
in galvanized steel complying to ASTM E 376.
Bituminous Paint: Cold applied emulsion paint.
Epoxy Paint
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/6
December 2010
2.2
FABRICATION GENERAL
2.2.1
Workmanship

Specifications
Fabricate metal fabrications for locations shown with dimensions, spacing, details and
anchorages as indicated on Drawings or approved shop drawings. Use new materials of
size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce strength and
durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions shown or accepted
on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of
materials indicated or specified for various components of work.
Allow for thermal movement resulting from a maximum change in ambient
temperature of 40 C in the design, fabrication and installation of installed metal
assemblies to prevent buckling, opening of joints and overstressing of welds and
fasteners, Base design calculations on actual temperature of metals due to both solar
heat gain and night time sky heat loss.
Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately and remove burrs.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1.0 mm unless
otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal comers to smallest radius pible without causing,
grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
Remove sharp and rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
Weld corners and seams continuously. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds
smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not indicated,
Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts.
Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate
and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish
hardware and similar items.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or
provide Weep holes where water may accumulate.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/7
December 2010
2.2.2

Specifications
Galvanizing:
Provide zinc coating for those items indicated or specified to be galvanized, in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM E376, Fabricate joints which will be
exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water
may accumulate.
2.2.3
Shop Painting:
Clean surfaces of grease, rust, mill scale and other matter before applying shop prime
coat. Apply shop primer to surfaces of ferrous metal fabrications except those which
are galvanized or as indicated to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless
2.2.4
Finishing of Metal Fabrications
Ferrous Metal Fabrications

-
Cast Iron: Cast iron metal fabrications employed under immersion

condition shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to BS No. 4360.
Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to BS No. 4360 or comply with

requirements of Division-9, "Painting", as specified hereinafter
Stainless Steel: High luster finish, No. 7 finish to ASTM A 480.
Non-Ferrous Metal Fabrications

-
Brass
Polished brass finish, metal buffed to a high gloss and synthetic coatings
applied
Aluminium
Anodic Coating
Mechanical Finish:
Chemical Finish:
Anodic Coating:
Colour:
Nonspecular as fabricated
Etched, medium matte
Clear coating, 0,026 mm thick
As selected by the Engineer
Plastic Powder Coating

Chemical Finish:
Pretreatment:
Cleaning with compatible inhibiting chemicals

Thermosetting of chrome layer
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/8
December 2010

Specifications
Plastic Powder:
Application:
Colour and Texture:
2.3
Epoxy polyester powder, with no additives,

60 microns minimum dry film thickness
Electrostatic, 10 minutes drying time at 200'C
As selected by the Engineer
ROUGH HARDWARE
Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and
other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting
woodwork and for anchoring or securing, woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron
washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections elsewhere,
furnish steel washers.
2.4
METAL FABRICATIONS
2.4.1
Ladders
Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and
anchorage as indicated.
Steel Ladders: Unless otherwise indicated, provide two continuous structural

steel flat bar 13 mm x 60 mm as side rails (stringers) with eased edges, spaces
450 mm.
Stringers shall be parallel and straight throughout the rung portion.
All burrs, sharp edges and other imperfections likely to cause injury to the hands
of persons using the ladder shall be removed and made smooth before finishing
treatment. Ladder shall be given a suitable protective finish and it shall be an
epoxy paint for outdoor ladders.
Provide 22 nun diameter solid structural steel bar as rings, uniformly spaced 250
mm on centers.
Fit rings at center line of side stringers, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail
faces. The top rung shall be at same level as the platform, which shall be at a
distance not exceeding 80 mm from wall.
The ladder shall be vertical or inclined towards the surface to which it is fixed at
an angle not exceeding 15 from the vertical.
Securely fasten ladder stingers at their extremities at top and bottom and at
intermediate points spaced not more than 1500 mm. Use welded or bolted steel
brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage and to hold the ladder
stringers rigid throughout the length and clear of the wall surface with a
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/9
December 2010

Specifications
minimum of 180 mm clearance from wall to center line of rings. if the adjacent
structures does not extend above the top ring, unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings, extend stringers at 600 mm apart to 1050 mm above top ring and
goose neck the extended rail and return back to wall or structure unless other
secure handholds are provided to provide secure ladder access.
Provide non-slip surface on the top of each ring, either by coating the ring with
aluminium oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive or by using a manufactured
ring of a type filled with aluminium oxide grout.
Ladders exceeding 3 meters in height shall be provided with safety cage
constructed of 3 vertical plates supported by flat steel hoops with a diameter of
750 mm hoops shall be at 700 mm center conforming to details shown on
Drawings.
Stainless Steel Ship Steps: Steps shall be stainless-steel round bars 20 mm

diameter, 400 mm wide, projecting 200 mm from wall and fixed at a nominal
vertical intervals of 250 mm o.c. with a permissible deviation of 5%.
The top step shall not be more than 350 mm from the underside of the cover.
Length of tail in the concrete shall not be less than 120 mm. Steel steps shall be
free from harmful defects, likely to reduce significantly the strength of the step.
Steps shall be bent without sharp edges.
Provide stainless steel pipe handrail if required.
2.4.2
Steel Balustrades and Handrails

Balustrades shall be constructed of steel sections of dimensions and configurations
indicated on Drawings. Base and anchor plates shall be provided as shown on
Drawings of 10 mm thick and not less than that required to support structural loads.
Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required.
Handrails shall be steel pipes. Interconnect railing and handrail members by buttwelding or welding with internal connectors unless otherwise indicated.
Grind and polish welds flush and smooth. Curves where indicated or necessary shall be
bent on a radius of not less than 150 mm.
2.4.3
Miscellaneous Steel
Trim: Shall be of shapes and sizes as shown on Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated,
fabricate units from steel shapes, plates and bars with continuously smooth exposed
edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and
anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/10
December 2010

Specifications
Provide anchors, spaced not more than 600 mm o.c. welded to trim for embedding in
concrete or masonry.
2.4.4
Steel Hinged Hatch door

Shall be fabricated of galvanized non-slip checker-plate of not less than 6 mm. thick
excluding, the raised pattern or steel sheets with abrasive materials metallically bonded
to steel by an appropriate process and shall be welded to perimeter steel frame and
reinforced with steel angle stiffeners as indicated on Drawings. Shall be fixed or
removable sections resting on a separate steel frame fixed to concrete or floor as
detailed. Steel sections for frame and reinforcement shall be hot rolled.
Cutting shall be by shear or by using saws, no cutting by torch shall be permitted.
Covers shall be continuously sealed to underside frame to prevent ingress of water and
provided with suitable galvanized steel hardware and special locking device which can
be operated from both sides and shall be provided with hinges and hasp for padlock.
Cover shall be provided with flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable
sections, one at each end of each section. Cover shall be designed for foot traffic only
of 500 kg/m2 and the deflection shall not exceed 0.2% of the span.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.1.1
Field Measurements
Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where
possible. Do not delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting where taking field
measurements before fabrication may delay work.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions
and directions for installation of anchorages such as concrete inserts, sleeves. anchor
bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the Site.
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.2.1
General
Fastening to In-Place Construction:

Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing
miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction, including threaded
fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts,
wood screws and other connectors as required.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/11
December 2010

Specifications
Cutting, Fitting and Placement

Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous
metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation,
plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be
built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld
connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded
because of transporting size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touchup shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units
which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted
or screwed field connections.
Field Welding
Comply with ASTM and BS standards for procedures of manual metal-arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds made and methods used in correcting
welding work.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.3.1
Touch-Up Painting
Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used f6r shop painting.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 50 microns.
Coat concealed surfaces of aluminium that will come into contact with grout, concrete,
masonry, wood or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Metal Fabrication
Section 05500/12
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
1.2
Description of Work
This section includes the carpentry, wood frame construction both as structure and as
support of other construction such as:
Wood furring, grounds, nailers, etc.

Carpentry work not exposed to view
Extent of rough carpentry work is shown on Drawings or according to standard

practice.
1.3
Reference Standards
Works shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the American
Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), British Standards (BS) as referenced to
throughout this section, or other equivalent international standards.
1.4
Related Sections
Concrete Masonry
Finishing Carpentry
Flushing Wood Doors
Panel Wood Doors
Plastering
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
Samples: Submit representative samples for each species and cut or pattern of rough
carpentry.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100/1
December 2010

Specifications
1.5.2
Shop Drawing: Showing full extent of rough carpentry work, including plan, elevation,
sections, assemblies, large scale details indicating profiles, installation, splice joints
between sections, special end conditions, anchorage, fasteners, and relation to adjoining
work and finishes.
1.6
Single source Responsibility

Obtain each type of wood products from one source from a single manufacturer.
1.7

Deliver rough carpentry material to the site ready for use with each piece of lumber
clearly marked as to grade, type and mill.
Protect rough carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to
prevent damage, soil and deterioration.
Do not deliver rough carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar
operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in
installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, rough carpentry materials must
be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements
specified for installation areas.
Pile lumber in stacks to ensure drainage and with a minimum clearance of 150 mm
above soil.
Keep Materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact
with damp and wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide
for air circulation within and around stacks.
Store under temporary coverings, and place spaces between each bundle to provide air
circulation.
1.8
Coordination
Fit rough carpentry work to other work, scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
Correlate location of furring, nails, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow
proper attachment of other works.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
All wood shall be sound, flat, straight, well seasoned, thoroughly dry and free from all
defects. Warped or twisted wood shall not be used.
2.1
Douglas Fir or Yellow Fir Lumber

Shall be grade-marked as indicated and of thoroughly seasoned stock and with 15 to
19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
Provide dressed lumber unless otherwise indicated.
For lumber furnish pieces with grade stamp applied to ends or back of each piece.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100/2
December 2010
2.2

Specifications
MDF
Is a uniform prime wood fiber broad throughout its whole thickness, dry bonded with
synthetic resins, pressed under dielectric frequency and containing fire retardant
additives
MDF density range is 660-860 kg/m3, the resin binder added to MDF shall give it a
major strength allowing the user to perform operations proper to wood.
Wooden ships shall have a typical dimension of 20 mm, wood ships shall be screened
to remove the undersize materials less than 5 mm and oversized materials in excess of
40 mm.
Each MDF panel shall be factory marked.
Provide thickness indicated, thickness of board shall vary between 6 mm to 50, mm.
MDF shall be used for furniture and building applications as indicated on Drawings.
Care must be taken in shaping the edges as the presence of sharp comers and narrow
sections affect the uniformity and reduce the resistance of the profiled edges to impact
damage.
In general screws shall not be at less than 25 mm from the comers. It is advisable to use
the parallel thread screw, threaded to the head.
As MDF is manufactured from wood fibers, all adhesives that perform satisfactorily on
wood substrate shall perform equally well on MDF. In all cases contractor shall consult
suppliers for specific instructions and recommendations for the use of each adhesive.
The MDF shall be finished as specified in Drawings or required by Engineer:
2.3
a.
In case of veneer application in either one or both surfaces the MDF must be free
from defects or dust deposits, A sanding treatment shall ensure good adhesion.
b.
Stained with a clear lacquer or a paint containing a pigmented lacquer paint.
c.
The use of high gloss finishes using polyester resin.
Blockboards
Blockboards shall be of natural grain surface. Dimensions shall be as indicated on
Drawings.
2.4
Whitewood
Intensity shall not be less than 350 kg/m3 at 12% moisture content
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100/3
December 2010
2.5

Specifications
Wood Preservative
Treat indicated items and the followings with a wood or waterborne preservative:
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, concealed members in contact with

masonry or concrete.
Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly.
cut surfaces of treated items cut after treatment, complete fabrication of items
before treatment.
Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic

Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment. If cut after treatment apply field
treatment to cut surfaces.
2.6
Fasteners
Shall be 80 mm. Fisher bolts or approved equal unless otherwise indicated, or size and
type as indicate on Drawings. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather or in
ground contact provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating.
2.7
Metal Anchors
Provide galvanized steel anchors of structural capacity type and size as indicated.
Straps shall be 1.6 mm thick of width and length as required bent or flat strap tie for
fastening with holes for fasteners.
Nails shall be common steel wire, untreated for interior work.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
General
Provide lumber of grade and dimension that comply with the requirements. Discard
units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and
that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum desired sizes for dry lumber.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line,
cut and fitted.
Apply field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative - treated lumber.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes,
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100/4
December 2010

Specifications
Use common hard round nails for furring work, unless otherwise indicated. Select
fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side "ill be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.
3.2
Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking and Sleepers

Install wood grounds, nailers blocking and sleepers where shown on Drawings and
where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes. as shown
and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location
with other work involved.
Locate and secure these pieces to suit conditions, provide adequate fastening.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink nails flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
Install permanent grounds of dressed, key-bevelled lumber of thickness indicated on
Drawings to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved.
Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3
Wood Framing
Install Douglas fir or Yellow fir lumber furring at the place indicated on Drawings,
Adjust vertical and horizontal intervals to suit the dimensions of the fin.
Cross sections of lumber shall be as indicated on Drawings.
Wood furring shall be installed by nail bits and hard round steel nails. Select furring
with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
Countersink nails flush with surfaces to allow for proper mounting of wood siding.
Where wall-panels . are to be mounted to wood furring, fix steel anchors of cross
sections and at the intervals indicated on Drawings. Install framing members of size
and at spacing indicated.
Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings (if any).
Frame openings with studs and leaders, headers members shall be nailed to studs.
Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100/5
December 2010
3.4

Specifications
Exposed Framing
Provide material hand-selected from lumber of species and grade indicated for
uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics that would impair finish
appearance.
Framing members shall be of size indicated, do not splice members.
3.5
Furring to receive paneling

Install 19 by 47 mm actual size furring at 600 mm o.c. horizontally and vertically.
Select furring with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to
panelling.
Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings, shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100/6
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Conditions of Particular Application and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of finish carpentry as required by the Contract.
Finish carpentry includes non-structural carpentry work which is exposed to view,
and is not specified as part of other sections and Include the following:
Plywood paneling
Board Panelling
Extent of finish carpentry is shown on Drawings and in finishing tables.

1.3
Reference Standards
BRITISH STANDARD SPECIF11CATIONS
BS NO.
1186
1.4
Quality of Timber and Workmanship in Joinery
Related Sections
Rough Carpentry
Damp-Proofing and Waterproofing
Finish Hardware
Painting
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Finish Carpentry
Section 06200/1
December 2010
1.5

Specifications
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:
1.5.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, specifications detail of

construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profile,
texture and installation instructions for each item of factory-fabricated and process.
For treated wood provide certification by treating plant stating type of solution,
process used and net amount of preservative retained.
For fire retardant treated wood include certification by treating plant that treated
materials comply with specified standards.
1.5.2
Samples: Submit representative samples in 300 mm long for lumber and 200 x 200
mm, for panels for each species, profiles, textures type of panelling and cut or
pattern with non factory-applied finish and with factory-applied finish.
1.5.3
Shop Drawings: including plans, elevations, sections, assemblies, large scale details
indicating profiles, installation, splice joints between sections, anchorage, fasteners,
and relation to adjoining work and finishes.
1.5.4
Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for

handling, storage, application and finishing treated materials.
1.6

Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to
prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and
similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been
completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry
materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting
requirements specified for installation areas.Keep materials under cover and dry.
Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp and wet surfaces. Stack
lumber and panels, provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under
temporary coverings.
1.7
Extended Warranty
Laminated plastic work shall not warp or delaminate for a period of not less than 2
years from date of defects Liability Certificate.
Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreing to repair or replace
panelling that fails in materials or workmanship within 10 years. Failure include but
are not limited to deformation, or deterioration of panelling
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Finish Carpentry
Section 06200/2
December 2010
PART 2
2.1

Specifications
PRODUCTS
General Millwork Requirements
Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp applied to ends or
back of each piece.
Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discoloured or otherwise damaged or defective
material.
All wood specified or indicated to receive stained finish shall be of the same species
of hardwood and shall be Oak or other approved equal species.
Grades of lumber used shall be the highest grade of the species for stain finish and
the second grade for paint finish. Wood for stain finish shall be selected for
compatible grain and uniform colour.
Nominal sizes are indicated on Drawings, except as shown by detailed dimensions,
provide worked and dressed lumber as applicable to actual sizes and patterns as
shown.
Lumber shall be machine sanded at the mill and sandpapered smooth at the project
when installed. Except where special profiles are shown, trim shall be standardstock moldings and members conforming to the requirements of this section and
approved design and type.
Joints shall be made in an approved manner to conceal shrinkage and shall be tight.
Trim shall be secured with fine steel finishing nails and with screws and glue where
required. Nails shall be set for putty stopping.
Wood finish shall be set straight, plumb and level, in perfect alignment and shall be.
closely fitted.
Skirting shall be in as long lengths as possible.
2.2
Materials
2.2.1
Woods, General: Employed woods shall be first grade stocks which shall be
properly treated, adequately seasoned and free from warping (cuping or bowing),
twisting, chipping, loose knots and warning. All woods shall conform to BS No.
1186 Plywoods.
Provide lumber or plywood with each piece factory marked with grade stamps.
Stamp shall be applied to ends or back of each piece.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Finish Carpentry
Section 06200/3
December 2010
2.2.2
Softwoods
2.2.3
2.2.4

Specifications
Yellow Fir : Yellow wood of average intensity not less than 450 kg/m3 at 12%
moisture content.
Douglas Fir: Reddish wood of straight compacted fibers. Average intensity
shall not be less than 530 k9/m3 at 12% moisture content.
Pitch Pine: Reddish dark yellow wood of clear wide rings. Average intensity shall not be less t
Hardwoods
Oak Wood (White): Shall be fine grained wood of strong, compact,

homogeneous fibers and uniform texture. Average intensity shall not be less
than 720 kg/m3 at 12% moisture content.
Maple Wood: Shall be fine grained wood of strong, compact, homogeneous

fibers, and uniform texture. Average intensity shall be 750 kg/m3 at 12%
moisture content.
Beech Wood: Shall be fine grained wood of strong, compact, homogeneous

fibers, of light colour (white) and uniform texture. Average intensity shall be
720-950 kg/m3 at 12% moisture content.
Plywoods
General: Shall be best quality conforming to ES No.' 949. Employed plywoods

shall be of grade indicated below. Moisture content shall not exceed 12%.
Thickness shall be as indicated on Drawings.
Beech Plywood: All layers shall be of Beech wood.
Oak Plywood Natural Oak grain veneer face.
2.2.5
Plastic Laminate Faces: Shall be high pressure decorative laminates. Colours and
patterns shall be selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's standard products.
Nominal thickness shall be 1.25 mm unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.2.6
Blockboards: Shall be composite boards consisting of a core made up of strips laid

separately or glued or otherwise jointed together to form a slab. Outer veneer shall
be excellent grade for transparent finish and Grade 1 for painted finish and shall be
glued to sides with the direction of the grain of the core strips running at rightangles to that of the veneers. The veneer shall be free from knots, worm and beetle
holes and splits..
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Finish Carpentry
Section 06200/4
December 2010
2.3

Specifications
Hardwood or Softwood Panelling (Board-Type)

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide tongued and grooved, end
matched wood panelling of standard widths and lengths as required and fabricated
for attachment by concealed metal clip system.
2.4
Miscellaneous Materials
2.4.1.
Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws, bucks and other anchoring devices
of the type, size, material and finish required to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible, firmly secured in precise position to receive, support and
engage the several parts of the work. Bucks and nailing blocks embedded in
concrete or masonry shall be formed of lumber coated with cold applied bitumen
emulsion as specified in Division - 7 and Waterproofing and shall be securely
anchored with bolts, spikes or approved other anchorages.
Provide nails of sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 38 mm into substrate.
Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity,
provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dipped zinc coating.
2.4.2
Waterproof Glue: Shall be first quality casein or phenolic resin glue, for general
carpentry use capable of withstanding extreme climatic conditions of dampness,
heat, cold and dryness.
2.5
Wood Preservative Treated Materials
Mark each treated item with the quality mark requirements, kiln-dry material before
and after treatment.
2.5.1
Preservative Chemicals
Impregnate woodwork with preservative chemicals acceptable to authorities. Use
chemical formulation that do not bleed through or adversely affect finishes. Do not
use colorant in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated one.
Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
2.5.2
Fire Retardant
Use chemical formulation indicated by a pressure process to produce materials with
fire-test response characteristic specified.
2.6
Cupboards
Cupboards shall be installed where indicated on Drawings and shall comprise
Yellow Fir frames, blockboard sliding or side-hinged sashes complete with handles,
drawers, locks and shelves.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Finish Carpentry
Section 06200/5
December 2010

Specifications
Where sashes are sliding, handles shall be recessed type and flames shall be rebated
or otherwise equipped with double channel metal tracks to suit the performance of
sliding sashes.
Sashes and uprights shall be constructed of woodboards free from warp and twist.
Dimensions and thicknesses shall be as indicated on Drawings. External and
internal surfaces of cupboards shall be finished as specified in shown on ID
drawings.
2.6.1
Shelves: Shelves shall be constructed of boards with filled front edge. Shelves shall
be built up in sections of the lengths and widths indicated on Drawings. Provide
uprights with suitable means for supporting shelves as indicated on Drawings.
2.6.2
Clothes Rods: as shown on ID drawings.
2.7
Running Trim
Provide finished lumber molded to pattern indicated clear, kiln - dried selected for
compatible grain and color.
2.8
Panelling
Factory finished panelling, tongue and groove fabricated for attachment by
concealed metal clips.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
General
Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, moldings and details indicated.
3.2
Preparation
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas prior to installing.
Backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior or, where indicated.
Comply with requirements of Section 09900 "Painting" for primers and their
application.
3.2.1
Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at project Site prior to delivery of finish carpentry

materials and review coordination and environmental controls required for proper
installation and ambient conditioning in areas to receive work.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Finish Carpentry
Section 06200/6
December 2010

Specifications
3.3
Installation
3.3.1
General: Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted,
improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work
with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements or which are of defective
manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns.
Install the work plumb, level, true, straight with no distortions and aligned with
adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. Install to a
tolerance of 3 mm in 2.4 m for plumb and level countertops; and with 2 mm
maximum offset in flush adjoining 3 mm. maximum offsets in revealed adjoining
surfaces.
Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair
damaged finish at cuts.
Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly
attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk
nails, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
Except where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing
steel nails for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface
and matching final finish.
Attach siding to framing to comply with siding manufacturer's instructions
including requirements for type, size, materials, location and spacing of fasteners.
3.3.2.
Standing and Running Trim: Install, with minimum number of joints possible,using
full-length pieces from maximum length of lumber available to the greatest extent
possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at
corners, to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of
joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting.
Countersink fasteners heads in exposed works and fill holes.
3.3.3.
Prefinished Hardwood Panelling, Board-Type: Install in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions for concealed nailing, Arrange in random width pattern
suggested by manufacturer, unless boards are of uniform width. Stagger end joints in
random pattern for best visual effect (uniformly distributed on each wall). Install
with uniform tight joints, with only tongued and grooved or end-matched joints
within each field of panelling.
Where grain character and colour of boards vary noticeably, select and arrange
boards for best visual effect as directed by the Engineer.
3.3.4
Softwood Panelling System, Board Type: Install in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions by method indicated below, or if not indicated, as recommended by
manufacturer for substrate provided.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Finish Carpentry
Section 06200/7
December 2010

Specifications
Fasten panelling to wood substrates using manufacturer's concealed-clip system.

Fasten panelling to gypsum wallboard substrates using adhesives.
3.3.5.
Hardwood Plywood Panelling: Install with uniform tight joints between panels.
Attach panels to support with adhesive or fasteners. Space fasteners as
recommended by panel manufacturer. Concealed fasteners to greatest practical
extent. Arrange panels with joints over supports. Arrange panels with V-grooves and
joints over supports and nail with type and spacing of fasteners recommended by
panel manufacture, with pre-finished heads on fasteners selected to match V-groove
colour.
3.4
Adjustment, Cleaning, Finishing and Protection
3.4.1
Adjustment: Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible
to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly,
replace wood-work. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.4.2
Cleaning: Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.

Touch-up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4.3
Finishing: Refer to Division 9, Section 09900 "Painting" for final finishing of

installed finish carpentry work.
3.4.4
Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise the Contractor of final
protection and maintenance conditions necessary to ensure that finish carpentry shall
be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance or
time of handing
over to the Employer.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Finish Carpentry
Section 06200/8
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 07100
WATERPROOFING AND ROOFING
1.01
GENERAL
A)
Description
Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required for the membrane
waterproofing of the entire structure below grade and roofing system as well as indicated
and as hereinafter specified. shall include all related material and accessories as required
to achieve a completely watertight installation in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
B)
Submittals
Submit shop drawings for approval prior to proceeding with work.
Shop drawings shall include: Outline of waterproofing area and size, location and type
of all penetrations, perimeter and penetration details, and special details.
C)
Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

Deliver materials in original, unopened containers.
Containers to be labeled with manufacturer's name, brand name, installation instructions
and identification of various items.
Store materials, except membrane, between 60 oF. and 80 oF. If exposed to lower
temperature, restore to 60 oF, minimum temperature before using.
Store materials, except membrane, in dry area and protect from water and direct
sunlight. Damaged materials shall be replaced at Contractor's expense.
D)
Job Conditions (Cautions and Warnings)

Do not use bitumen base cement.
Do not install waterproofing membrane directly onto low melting point asphalt (ASTMD312, Type 1 & 2).
Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil,
animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in contact with Waterproofing Membrane.
Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180 oF.
Cements and bonding adhesives contain petroleum distillates and are extremely
flammable.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/1
December 2010

Specifications
Do not breathe vapors or use near fire.

Splicing and bonding surfaces shall be dry and clean.
Cold temperature will not restrict installation of Waterproofing System. Follow
specified precautions for storage of materials and expose only enough cement and
adhesive to be used within a 4 hour period.
Substrate surface shall be free of bonded water, ice, or snow to eliminate future
condensation problems.
E)
QUALIFICATION
The water proofing systems including protection and
works shall be executed by a specialist firm(s) having
installation of materials described herewith in Saudi
provide evidence of successful completion of similar
Engineer before commencing any work.
all associated accessories and

at least 10 years experience in
Arabia. The specialist(s) shall
works for the approval of the
The manufacturer's qualified representative shall visit the job site immediately prior to
commencement of works and as and when required and directed by the Engineer to
satisfy the Engineer and to instruct the specialist(s) in the correct methods of execution
of the Works.
F)
GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a guarantee stating that all Works have been
carried out in accordance with the drawings and specifications and shall be guaranteed
free from defects in material and workmanship and shall be leakproof for a period of ten
(10) years from the date of issuance of the completion certificate. The Contractor shall
agree to repair (including any replacement of materials) any leaks resulting from
defective materials or workmanship during the guarantee period at no additional cost to
the Client.
The Contractor shall also pass on to the owner any and all guarantees provided by the
sub-contractor and manufacturers of individual members of the system.
G)
MANFACTURERS
EPDM membrane : From Sure-Seal EPDM, Carlisle Syntec Systems, FireStone or any
approved equal
APP & SBS membrane, Liquid applied waterproofing : From Imper, Awazil, Uniroof
international limited or any approved equal.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/2
December 2010

Specifications
1.02
PROTECTION OF CONCRETE SUBSTRUCTURE
A)
General
All reinforced concrete substructures shall be protected from aggressive actions of soil,
ground water and all detrimental influences due to soil quality at the site.
Substructures, i.e. foundations shall be protected by two coats of asphalt with primer
while basements walls, etc., which are in contact with soil shall be protected with one
layer of EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) membrane as detailed herein.
The concrete surfaces to which the membrane is to be applied shall be cleaned of all
grease, oil, dust, loose material, etc. and shall present a sound surface, free of all sharp
protrusions. All imperfections like honeycombing, depressions, hollows, etc. shall be
made good prior to application of the primer and membrane.
Before applying the membrane the blinding surface shall be suitably prepared/primed as
recommended by the manufacturer of the membrane.
All angles and corners, internal and external, shall be reinforced with an extra strip of
300 mm wide membrane as detailed under lap joint. External angles shall be suitably
splayed to prevent sharp corner and internal angles shall be provided with cement sand
fillet 50 x 50 mm to provide smooth transition.
The Contractor's rate shall allow for all the requirements specified herein.
i) Horizontal Surfaces: Blinding concrete shall be laid over the compacted and
prepared excavated surface shall be protected by two coats of asphalt with primer.
One layer of slip sheet of minimum 140 gm/m2 or protection board shall be laid
over the waterproofing.
ii)
Vertical Surfaces
a) Exposed Walls:
Exposed walls of basement, water tank, lift wells, etc. shall be provided with
one layer of EPDM membrane 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) thick fully adhered with
approved neoprene bonding adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the
membrane in widths of not less than 6000 mm.
The membrane shall be lap jointed with minimum laps of 150 mm and shall be
treated as detailed under lap joints. Also all joints shall be treated as described
under lap joints.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/3
December 2010

Specifications
The extra portion of 400 mm of the horizontal membranes left over shall be
turned up after removal of formwork and adhered on to the vertical surfaces.
The membrane layers on the exposed external vertical surfaces shall be carried
up to a minimum of 150 mm above the finished ground level (i.e. side walk,
road surface, paving, etc.) and tucked into a continuous, purpose made groove
in the substructure and secured firmly with approved sealant/mastic
recommended by the manufacturer of the membrane.
The membrane applied to the vertical surfaces of the substructure shall be
protected against abrasive backfill by a heavy duty protection board , spot
bonded to the membrane. All areas of the membrane exposed above ground
shall be protected from exposure deterioration with appropriate aluminium
sheet flashing 0.9 thick plugged and screwed to walls.
B)
EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) rubber sheeting

EPDM (Elhylene Propylene Diene Monomer) elastomeric membrane for tanking to
substructure shall comply with the requirement indicated in the table below:Property
C)
Test Method
Unit
N/mm2
Value
Tensile Strength min.
ASRM D 412
9.6
Specific Gravity
ASTM D 297
Elongation ultimate min.
ASTM D 412
300
Tear Resistance min
ASTM D 624
kN/m
21.9
Hardness, duormeter A
ASTM D 2240
1.18 .03
60 10
Water vapour permeability ASTM E 96

max.
Proc. B or BW
perm-mils
2.0
Thickness
mm (inch)
1.5 (0.06)
Protection Boards
Protection boards for protection to all water proofing/tanking membranes shall be from
a reputed manufacturer compatible for application to bitumen or rubber tanking
membrane. Protection boards shall be polypropylene 4 mm thick with minimum
puncture resistance 1500 Newton.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/4
December 2010
1.03

Specifications
VAPOUR BARRIER MEMBRANE (POLYETHENE SHEET)

Vapour barrier membrane laid under ground slab shall be 1000 gauge polyethene sheet
laid loose on plain concrete bed under ground slab.
1.04
PRIMER
Materials used as a primer shall conform to ASTM D41, primer shall be used before
application of waterproofing membrane below grade or on roof and before application of
bitumineous coats.
1.05
BITUMEN
Bitumen for damproofing and waterproofing shall be a soft, adhesive "self-healing"
asphalt which flows easily under mob and which suitable for use below ground level on
horizontal and vertical surfaces under uniformaly moderate temperature conditions both
during the process of application and during service.
The bitumineous materials shall be homogeneous and free from water and shall conform
to the requirement of ASTM D449 type A.
1.06
ROOFING SYSTEM
A)
Cement Screed
The cement screed shall, unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, consist of one part of
ordinary Portland cement to three parts of sand by volume. The ingredients shall be
proportioned and mixed as specified for concrete work under "CONCRETE WORK".
The screed shall be trowelled smooth with steel trowel and shall be cured for at least 5
days and shall be left perfectly flat with clean and smooth surface finish, free of trowel
marks and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The screed shall be at least 5 cm thick and
its slope laid to falls.
B)
APP Modified Bituminous Membrane for roofing

i)
Material
The roof waterproofing membrane shall be a 4 mm thick, APP modified, heavy laminate
bituminous felt of a type suitable for hot climates, reinforced with 170 gm/m2 of non
woven polyester inlay and modified bituminous compound presenting high thermal
stability, plasticity and flexibility characteristics.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/5
December 2010

Specifications
The typical characteristics of a 4 mm thick membrane shall be as follows:

Tests
Thickness
Aeric Mass
Tensile strength
Long
Tranv
Elongation
Long
at
Tranv
Tear
Long
at
Unit
Value
Tolerance
mm
Kg/m
N/5 cm
N/5 cm
4
5.25
700
550
5%
10%
20%
20%
break;
%
%
45
45
15%
15%
UEAtc
strength;
N
N
140
160
>140
>160
UEAtc
-50
100
400
150
18
< -5
>100
>400
>150
5
UEAtc
UEAtc
DIN 16935
ASTM D36
ASTM D5
break;
Tranv
Cold Bending
Form Stability
Water pressure resistance
Softening point R & B
Down penetration 250C (770 F)
ii)
C
C
KPa
0
C
dmm
0
Test
Method
UEAtc
UEAtc
UEAtc
Workmanship
The membrane shall be handled and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions. Surfaces to be covered shall be clean, flat, dry and free from any
matter likely to adversely affect the performance of the waterproofing. The manufacturer's
primer shall be applied prior to laying the membrane.
The membrane shall be dressed and bonded into mouths of rainwater outlets and well
fitted and sealed around openings.
When roofing abuts against vertical surfaces such as walls of parapets, upstands,
platforms, columns, etc., it shall be carried up for a minimum height of 150 mm or as
shown on drawings; forming triangular fillets and tucked into purpose made grooves 20 x
20 mm and sealed with a sealant compatible to the membrane as recommended by the
membrane manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
Pipes and other structures piercing the roof shall be primed and the roofing membrane
shall be dressed up to required heights, over properly formed triangular fillets all around.
An approved flashing shall be provided covering the top and sealed using sealant.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/6
December 2010

Specifications
All angles and corners, internal and external or other obstacles shall be provided with
reinforcing strips of minimum 200 mm width.
All exposed surfaces at skirtings to walls, around pipes and obstructions, etc., shall be
provided with an additional layer of mineral chipping faced bituminous felt of 4 mm
thickness and shall be adequately bonded and sealed.
C)
SBS Waterproofing Membrane for Roofing R33

The waterproofing membrane for protection of concrete slabs exposed to water at paved
areas above basement shall be a SBS heavy laminate bituminous felt of a type suitable for
hot climates, reinforced with 200 gm/m2 of non woven polyester inlay and modified
bituminous compound presenting high thermal stability, plasticity and flexibility
characteristics as detailed on drawings and as specified in this Section. The thickness of
the membrane shall be 4 mm as specified and indicated on drawings.
The typical characteristics of a 4 mm thick membrane shall be as follows:
Tests
Unit
Required Val.
Tolerance
Test
Method
Thickness
Mm
5%
UEAtc
Aeric Mass
Tensile strength at break;
Long
Tranv
Elongation at break;
Long
Tranv
Tear strength;
Long
Tranv
Kg/m
5.25
10%
UEAtc
UEAtc
N/5 cm
N/5 cm
900
800
20%
20%
%
%
50
50
15%
15%
UEAtc
UEAtc
N
N
170
180
>170
>180
Cold Bending
-250
< -25
UEAtc
Form Stability
100
>100
UEAtc
KPa
400
>400
DIN
16935
115
>115
ASTM
D36
dmm
32
ASTM
D5

Down penetration 250C (770 F)
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/7
December 2010
D)

Specifications
Slip Sheets/Filter Membrane

A slip sheets/filter membrane shall be provided where it is called for and as shown on the
drawings or as described elsewhere in the specification. The membrane shall be lap
jointed with minimum of 200 mm over lap.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings the slip sheet/filter membrane shall be of 140
g/m2 weight as specified for roofing works. The slip sheet shall exhibit the following
characteristics when tested in accordance with the relative BS/DIN Standards appropriate
to the specified thickness/weights as per the table below:-
Weight
Thickness under
2 kN/m2 pressure
200 Kn/m2 pressure
Strip Tensile strength
- Breaking load
- Extension at max load
Grab Tensile Strength
-Breaking Load
-Extension at failure
Trapezoidal Tear 75 mm
GBR Puncture
Resistance
Burst Strength
Permeability 100 mm head
Pore size O90
O50
Unit
Test Method
G/m2
Mm
Mm
ASTM D 3776
Sizes
140
1.6
0.7
200
1.8
0.9
280
2.6
1.2
KN/m
%
ASTM D 4595
8.0
25
12
25
18
20
N
%
ASTM D 4632
BS 6906/1
600
75/50
900
75/50
N
N
ASTM 1117
DIN 54307
BS 6906/1
ASTM 3786
300
1600
450
2100
1300
75/5
0
700
3100
1400
2200
3200
100
70
60
40
40
20
KPa
1/m2/s
m
m
The composition of the membrane shall be 70% polypropylene and 30% polyethylene.
The membrane shall not be affected by salt water, oil and petrol and shall be fully ultra
violet stabilized and resistant to growth of fungi and bacteria and to mild dilution of alkalis
and acids between PH 2 and PH 12 values.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/8
December 2010

Specifications
E) Thermal Insulation (Extruded Polysterene Boards)

i)
Material
The thermal insulation material shall be an inorganic plastic material and preformed into
rigid foam slabs by pressure extrusion method. The foaming and extrusion process shall
ensure 100% closed cell formation and smooth hard unbroken skin on all external faces.
The insulation slabs shall be extruded polystyrene boards of 50 mm uniform thickness and
shall conform to B.S. 3837:Part 2:1990 Extruded boards. It shall be type A, grade SHD
(extruded boards with skins) having a standard dimension of 1250 x 600 x 50 mm.
The material shall exhibit the following characteristics:
Five year aged average thermal conductivity of maximum 0.032 W/mk when tested at 24
C. in accordance with DIN-52612 or ASTM C-518-76, C-177-76.
Compressive strength of 43 psi or 300 kps average when tested in accordance with DIN53421 or ASTM D-1621.
Water absorption of maximum 1% average when tested in accordance with ASTM D2842.
Water vapour permeability of 0.6 perm inch average when tested in accordance with
ASTM C-355-64.
ii)
Workmanship
Insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
Cutting and shaping shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Surfaces to receive insulation shall not be contaminated with any matter likely to affect the
performance of the material.
F)
Pre-Cast Concrete Slabs

Pre-Cast concrete slabs shall be hydraulically pressed units size 400 x 400 x 40 mm thick.
The surface of the slabs shall be fairly smooth and light gray in colour. Transverse
strength, water absorption and all other characteristics shall be in accordance with BS
7263: Part 1: 1990.
Concrete slabs shall be laid loose on proprietary PVC rings capable of adjustment of
levels. Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to the under lying layers.
Broken or damaged slabs shall be rejected.
A 200 mm wide strip with gravel filling instead of tiles shall be provided adjacent to
parapet walls, other walls, shaft walls and other penetrations.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/9
December 2010
G)

Specifications
Gravel Layer
Gravel for roof shall be rounded wadi gravel of size 15 to 20 mm without any sharp edges
or protrusions. Gravel shall be that which passes through No. 28 Sieve and is retained on
No. 20 sieve as per BS 410: 1886, "Test sieves", with the allowable tolerances and shall be
devoid of dust. The gravel shall be reasonably sound and durable and to the approval of
the Engineer.
Gravel to roofs shall be laid to thicknesses indicated on the drawings over a layer of filter
membrane. Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to the underlying layers.
1.07
Liquid Applied Waterproofing Membrane
A.
Material
Liquid applied waterproofing membrane shall be a cold applied, seamless, two component,
extended polyurethane, elastomeric material in liquid form which when applied cures to a
rubbery membrane in 24 hours. The membrane shall form a tough durable resilient,
impermeable barrier to water and most aqueous reagents, adhering to the structural
surface. The membrane shall be suitable for hot climates.
A primer or bonding agent as recommended by the manufacturer of the membrane shall be
provided, before the application of the liquid membrane.
The minimum thickness of the membrane shall be 2 mm thick.
The membrane shall meet the requirements indicated in the table below:
Property
Tensile Strength
Unit
Kg/cm2
Value
40
500
ASTM D412
Kg/cm
20
Softening Point (Ring & Bell)
163
ASTM D624
Dic "C"
ASTM D2398
Low Temp. Brittleness
-50
ASTM D648
50 min
ASTM D2240
Perms
0.555
ASTM E96
Kg/cm2
25
Elcometer
Mg
1.2
ASTM C501
Elongation at Break
Tear Strength
Hardness (Shore A)
Permeability (100 mill sheet at
100 F
Adhesion to Concrete
Abrasion Resistance, Wt. Loss, Taber
Abraser CS-17 Wheel, 1000gr/1000
rev.
Recovery (from 100% extension after
5 mins.)
99
Method of Test
ASTM D412
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/10
December 2010
B.

Specifications
Workmanship
The membrane shall be handled and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions. Surfaces to be covered shall be clean, flat, dry and free from any
matter likely to adversely affect the performance of the waterproofing. A primer or
bonding agent recommended by the manufacturer shall be applied prior to application of
the membrane material. The liquid membrane shall be mixed and applied in two coats by
spray or squeegee to obtain the minimum thickness indicated, strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
The membrane shall be dressed and bonded into mouths of rainwater outlets and sealed
around openings.
The membrane abutting vertical surfaces such as walls of parapets, upstands, platforms,
columns, etc., shall be carried up for a minimum height of 150 mm or as shown on
drawings and/or to the approval of the Engineer. Pipes and other structures piercing the
roof shall be primed and the membrane shall be dressed up to required heights, over
properly formed triangular fillets all around.
All surfaces that are left exposed to sun shall be provided with aluminium flashing and/or
an additional layer of 1 mm thick two component, extended polyurethane, aluminium
blended liquid membrane as required and approved by the Engineer.
1.08.
Anti Root Water Proofing Membrane For Flower Boxes

The waterproofing membrane shall be a layer of minimum 3 mm thick heavy laminate
bituminous felt of a type suitable for hot climates, doubly reinforced with 50 gm/sq.m. of
fibreglass inlay and 250 gm/sq.m of a special antiroot non-woven polyester, all
encapsulated with high quality modified bituminous compound over one layer of
minimum 3 mm thick SBS modified bituminous membrane as detailed on drawings.
The antiroot membrane shall exhibit the following characteristics:
Property
-

Dow Penetration @ 25oC
Tensile Strength at break
Dimensional stability
after 28 days @ 70oC
Hot shape stability
Unit
Method of Test
> 150oC
18 5 dmn
Long 450 N/5 cms
Transv. 350 N/5 cms
Long 0.2%
Transv. 0.2%)
120oC
4 ATM
ASTM D2398
ASTM D 573
UEA tc
UEA tc
UEA tc
DIN 16935
The membranes shall be torched on and applied as per the manufacturer's instructions.
Exposed portions shall be provided with one additional area of mineral chipping faced
membrane or aluminium flashing as approved by the Engineer. The membrane shall be
protected by a layer of protection board as specified under Protection boards in Section 03
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/11
December 2010
1.09

Specifications
Waterproofing to Balconies, Bathrooms, Pantries, Wet Areas, etc.

Waterproofing to bathrooms, toilets, pantriess, shaft floors and all internal wet areas shall
be a cold applied, seamless, two component, extended polyurethane, elastomeric material
in liquid form which when applied cures to a rubber membrane in 24 hours. Materials and
testing.
The membrane shall be applied on the concrete/screed floors before any tiling operations
are carried out. The membrane shall be carried up walls, columns, abutments, etc., to at
least 100 mm above the finished floor level for all areas and upto 100 mm above the
bathtub rim before application of wall plaster. An additional 1 mm thick layer shall be
applied for the walls and shall be sanded to provide key to plaster. Tiles shall then be
glued to plastered surfaces or applied with cement/sand backing over the prepared
surfaces.
Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent any damage to the water proofing membrane
during the application of floor and wall finishes.
Contractor shall provide guarantee as directed by the Engineer.
1.10
Liquid Applied Facade Damproofing

Damproofing for surfaces of facades to receive cladding or curtain wall shall be carried
out by the application of a solvent free SBS elastomeric bitumen gelified emulsion with
an elongation at break of at least 100 % elastic recover, having thixotropic performances.
The cured membrane shall be waterproof but shall have a water vapour permeability of at
least 0.3 g/m2/24H.
The damproofing shall be applied over clean, dry and smooth concrete or blockworks
surface. All pipes, details, anchors, etc. which have to penetrate the structure must be in
place prior to any damproofing application.
Damproofing system shall be laid with brush or roller, in one coat at a rate of 650 g/sq.m.
minimum (on block work and concrete surfaces) and allowed to cure for at least 12 hours.
Before erection of cladding or curtain wall, precautions shall be taken to ensure the
membrane not to be damaged.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/12
December 2010
1.11

Specifications
Cementitious Waterproofing
2 mm thick cementitious waterproofing shall be used to internal surfaces of water tanks
and internal surfaces of swimming pool.
The Cementitious waterproofing have the following characteristics:
Property
Method of Test
Resistance to water pressure 2 mm thick.

Containment of drinking water.
Adehsion to concrete after 28 days.
Compressive strength after 28 days.
Resistance to abrasion after 28 days.
Resistance to sulphates (penetration).
Resistance to chloride (penetration).
> 3 bar
DIN 1048
Suitable
> 3 MPa
EN 1542
> 25 MPa
EN 196/1
< 3g, H-22 grinding wheel
Weight 500 g, 200 cycle ASTM D4060
0 mm
0 mm
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami

Section 07100/13
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 07210
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of thermal insulation as required by the Contract and
includes the following items:
Concealed building insulation.
Extent of each item of insulation work is shown on Drawings and indicated by

provisions of this section.
1.3
Reference Standards
ASTM NO.
C 549
C 578
C 612
C 631
E 96
1.4
Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation

Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
Specification for Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering
Test Method for Water Vapour Transmission of Materials
Submittals
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation

instructions for each type of insulation material required.
Samples: In full size units of each type of insulation indicated, and if of exposed
type for each colour specified.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Thermal Insulation
Section 07210/1
December 2010
1.5

Specifications
Certified Test Report: Submit copies of certified test reports evidencing

compliance of insulation products with specified performance values, including
thermal resistance, densities, compression strengths, fire performance
characteristics, permeability ratings, water absorption ratings and similar
properties.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating arrangement of exterior

insulation and finish system, width and locations of joints and details for
installations around openings and projections (if any).
Quality Assurance
Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source. Identify materials with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.6
Related Sections
Membrane Sheet Waterproofing
Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.
1.7
Delivery Storage and Handling

Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling storage and protection
during installation.
Deliver products in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels identifying
legible and intact.
Protect insulations from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling
and other sources.
Store materials inside and under cover in a dry location, protected from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contaminated, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from
construction, traffic and other causes.
Stack insulation board flat and off the ground
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Insulating Materials
2.1.1
General: Provide insulating materials which comply with requirements indicated for
materials, compliance with referenced standards and other characteristics.
Preformed units shall be of sizes to fit applications indicated on Drawings, selected
from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths and lengths.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Thermal Insulation
Section 07210/2
December 2010
2.1.2

Specifications
Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closedcells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin
in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for:
Type VII:
35 kg/m3 minimum density.
Burning characteristics:
Maximum Flame Spread
Smoke Developed
75
450
Provide products fabricated with tongue and groove edges.

2.2
Acceptable Manufacturers
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may
be incorporated in the work shall be limited to the specialized manufacturers approved
by Engineer.
2.3
Insulation Fasteners
2.3.1
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond

insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2. 3. 2
Spindle Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle, capable of holding

insulation of thickness indicated, securely in position with self-locking washer
in place.
PART 3
3.1
Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon steel sheet 0.8 mm thick by 50 mm.
Spindle: Copper coated low carbon steel, fully annealed 2-5 mm in diameter
length to suit depths of insulation indicated.
EXECUTION
Inspection and Preparation

Examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work shall be performed. Do
not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected by the manufacturer.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapour retarder, including
removing projections that interfere with insulation attachment
______________________________________________________________________________________
Thermal Insulation
Section 07210/3
December 2010

Specifications
3.2
Installation
3.2.1
General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular of installation in each

case,
Extend undamaged, dry insulation in thickness indicated over entire area to be
insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove
projections which interfere with placement.
Apply a single layer or multiple layers of insulation to produce total thickness
indicated.
Installation of metal fittings and similar work affecting the insulation shall be finished
before work begins.
All cracks, breaks, holes, sharp projections or other unusual irregularities in the surface
shall be remedied before insulation work is begun.
Surfaces shall be clean, dry, free from grease, loose materials, excessive dust and
foreign material which would interfere with the insulation application.
Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated or required by insulating
materials or system manufacturer.
Roof decks shall be properly graded to all outlets using concrete floor screed topping as
indicated on Drawings and specified in Division-3. Deck shall be swept free of dust and
be reasonably smooth.
Protect top surface of horizontal insulation, not covered by polyethylene sheet waterproofing, from damage during concrete work by application of protection board.
3.2.2
Installation of Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated. If no

specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with small pads of adhesive spaced
approximately 600 mm o.c. both way on inside face or use mechanical anchorage to
provide permanent placement and support of units.
Seal joints between closed-cell (non-breathing) insulation units by applying mastic or
sealant to edges of each units to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill
voids in completed installation with mastic or sealant
Place vapour retarder facing warm side of construction.
Installation of Roofing Filter Fabric: The filter fabric shall be placed in the manner and
at the locations shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Thermal Insulation
Section 07210/4
December 2010

Specifications
At the time of installation, fabric shall be rejected if it has defects, ribs, holes, flaws,
deterioration or damage incurred during manufacture, transportation, storage or
placement. Visual review of the fabric shall be performed once the fabric has been
placed and prior to placement of any overlaying materials.
The fabric shall be placed with the machine direction (long dimension) down slope or
normal to the natural slope, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, and shall be laid
smooth and free of tension, stress, folds, wrinkles or creases. The strips shall be laid
smooth top provide a minimum overlap width of 300' mm, for each joint. Overlap joints
and seams shall be measured as a single layer.
The fabric shall be laid over the extruded insulation board where indicated on Drawing.
No joints or overlaps shall be within 1.0 m of roof edges or comers. The fabric shall be
out to fit closely as practical around penetrations and openings and shall be extended up
the parapet to end above the gravel level.
The fabric shall be protected at all times during construction from contamination by
surface runoff and any fabric so contaminated shall be removed and replaced with
uncontaminated fabric.
Should the fabric be damaged during any step of the installation, the torn or punctured
section shall be repaired by placing a piece of fabric which extends at least 450 mm in
all directions beyond the damage area. The fabric shall be sewn as described above, or
other methods as approved by the Engineer.
3.3
Protection of Insulation
Protect installed insulation from harmful weather exposures and from possible physical
abuses, where possible by non delayed installation of filter fabric or, where that is not
possible, by temporary covering or enclosure.
3.4
Insulation Schedule
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, apply insulating materials as follows:
3.5
50 mm thick extruded polystyrene boards for all roofs which shall be overlain by
filter fabric.
Protection
Protect installed insulation and vapour retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures or physical abuse. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected from permanent
construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Thermal Insulation
Section 07210/5
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 07841
FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS
PART 1
1.1
GENTERAL
Related Documents
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of through-penetration fire stopping and smoke seals for
penetrations through fire resistance-rated assemblies and as required by the Contract.
The extent and applications for fire stopping and smoke seals as work of this section
includes both empty openings and openings penetrating:
1.3
Floors
Roofs
Walls and partitions
Around mechanical and electric assemblies penetrating fire separations
Reference Standards
The work of this section shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements
of the specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and
the British Standard Specifications (BS).
ASTM NO.
E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E814 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stop
1.4
Quality Assurance
1.4.1
System Performance: Except as otherwise indicated, fire stopping and smoke seals are
required to establish and maintain airtight and fireproof continuous seals on a
permanent basis, within recognized limitations of wear and aging as indicated for each
application. Failures of installed fire stopping to comply with this requirement shall be
recognized as failures of materials and workmanship.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Fire Stopping and Smoke Seal
Section 07841/1
December 2010

Specifications
1.4.2
Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the
last 3 years at least 3 fire stopping and smoke seals applications similar in type and size
to that of this Project.
1.4.3
Single Source Responsibility for Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals Materials: Obtain fire
stopping and smoke seals materials from a single manufacturer for each different
product required.
1.4.4
Reconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their

adhesion to joint substrates where indicated by Engineer. Do not use sealants which fail
to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
1.5
Submittals
Specifications Sections:
1.5.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and prefabricated devices, providing
documentation, description including illustration, for specifications, handling,
preparation, installation, curing instructions and performance test data sheets for each
type of through-penetration fire stop system products.
1.5.2
Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration fire stop system, show each kind of
construction, condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of
penetrating item.
1.5.3
Certified Tests: With product data submit manufacturer's certified test reports for fire
stopping and smoke seals on aged performances as specified, including hardness, stain
resistance, adhesion, cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature
flexibility, compression set, modules of elasticity, water absorption and resistance
(aging, weight loss, deterioration) to heat and exposures to ozone and ultraviolet.
1.5.4
Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each type and colour of fire
stopping required. Install fire stopping and smoke seals samples in 12 mm wide joints
formed between two 150 mm long strips of material matching the appearance of
exposed surfaces adjacent to fire stopping and joint smoke seals.
1.6
Quali1y Assurance
1.6.1
Installer Qualification Data: An experienced installer who is qualified and has

necessary experience, submit data complying with requirements specified. Include list
of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of Engineers and
Employers, plus other information specified.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 07841/2
December 2010

Specifications
1.6.2
Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: Submit reports from fire stopping and smoke
sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and smoke
sealant backing have been tested for compatibility and adhesion for each kind of
penetration and construction condition. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of
test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
1.7

Delivery materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with intact legible
manufacturer's labels showing manufacturer product name, colour, expiration period of
use, curing time and mixing construction for multi-component materials.
Store and handle materials according to manufacturer's recommendations to prevent
deterioration, damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants or other
causes.
1.8
Project Conditions
Do not proceed with installation of fire stopping and smoke sealers where joint width
are less than allowed by through-penetration fire stopping and smoke sealer
manufacturer for application indicated.
Do not proceed with installation when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside the limits permitted by through-penetration fire stopping and smoke sealers
manufacturers, or when substrate are wet due to construction or other causes.
Do not proceed with installation of fire stopping and smoke sealers until
contaminations capable of interfacing with their adhesion are removed from joint
substrates.
Submit in writing, prior to commending installation full detailed descriptions of
materials and methods to be employed for fire stopping work.
Ventilate through-penetration fire stop system by natural means or, where this is
inadequate, forced air circulation.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
General Sealer Requirements
Provide colours indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by the Engineer from
manufacturer's standard colours. Select fire stopping and smoke sealers, joint fillers and
other related materials for compatibility with one another and with the substrate
forming joint surfaces and other indicated exposures, under conditions of services and
application required.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 07841/3
December 2010
2.2

Specifications

Provide components for each through-penetration fire stop system that are needed to
install fill materials.
2.2.1
Single-Component Silicon Sealant: Asbestos free materials and systems capable of

maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases and shall not exceed
opening sizes for which they are indicated.
2.2.2
Fiber Type: Non-asbestos mineral fiber fire stop system materials system are to meet
requirements for time rating specified on Drawings.
2.2.3
Sealant: Fire stop materials in putty, gunnable and packable forms used in combination
with other materials: damming, backing materials to prevent leakage and sagging for
vertical joints.
2.3
Primers
Shall be to manufacturer's recommendations for specific materials. Substrate and end
use.
2.3.1
Water: (If applicable), potable, clean and free from injurious amount of deleterious
substances.
2.4
Fill Materials
2.4.1
Damming and Back-up Materials

Supports and anchoring devices as manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance
with assembly being installed.
PART 3
3.1
Fire Stop Devices: Factory assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and
lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetration.
Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening dielectric, water resistant putties containing

non-solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone.
Pillow Bags: Reusable, heat expanding pillows, bags consisting of glass fiber
cloth filled with a combination of mineral fiber, water insoluble expansion agents
and fire retardant additives.
EXECUTION
Inspection
Installer must examine substrates (joint surfaces) and conditions under which fire
stopping and smoke sealer work is to be performed and must notify the Contractor in
writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with fire stopping and smoke
sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable
to Installer.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 07841/4
December 2010
3.2

Specifications
Joint Preparation
Examine size and condition of voids to be filled to establish correct thickness and
installation of materials.
Clean out joint surfaces immediately before installation of through-penetration fire stop
system. Remove all foreign materials, dust, dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other
substances which could interfere with bond. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces
as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated and where recommended by sealant
manufacturer. Confine primer/sealer to areas of bond, do not allow spillage or
migration onto, exposed adjoining surfaces.
Maintain insulation around pipes and duct penetrating fire separation without
interruption to vapour barrier.
3.3
Installation
Comply with manufacturer's instructions except where more stringent requirements are
shown or specified.
Install forming, damming, backing materials to support fill materials during their
application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depth
required.
Seal holes or voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials and penetrating
items in joint as indicated on Drawings, to achieve fire resistance rating indicated.
Coordinate with other work, do not leave voids or gaps poke-through termination
devices, and un-penetrated openings or joints to ensure that continuity and integrity of
fire separation are maintained.
Install sealant backer rod for liquid-applied sealant, except where shown to be omitted.
Fill materials that shall remain exposed, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces,
flush with adjoining finishes.
Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
Employ only proven installation techniques which shall ensure that fire stopping are
deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets. Except as
otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below
adjoining surfaces.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 07841/5
December 2010
3.4

Specifications
Cleaning
Notify Engineer when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing fire
stopping materials and services penetration assemblies.
Remove, and clean off excess materials and debris form surfaces adjacent to joints as
work progresses by method and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of
through-penetration fire stop system.
Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation to ensure
through-penetration systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 07841/6
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.2
Description of the Work

This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified
by reference to this Section:
1.2.1
Exterior-joints in the following vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces:
1.2.2
Interior-joints in the following vertical surfaces and non-traffic surfaces:
1.3
Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete

Control and expansion joints in unit masonry
Joints between different materials
Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies
Other joints as indicated on Drawings
Perimeter joints between materials and frame of doors and windows
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surface of walls

Tile control and expansion joints
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors and counters
Performance Requirements
Provide joint sealants for interior and exterior applications that establish and maintain
airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint
substrates.
1.4
Reference Standards
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/1
December 2010

Specifications
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND METHODS

ASTM NO.
C 920
C 1193
C 13330
1.5
Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backings for Use with Cold Liquid
Applied Sealants
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
1.5.1
Product data: For each Joint-sealant product indicated.
1.5.2
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's colour charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colours available for each product exposed to view.
Install joint sealants in 13 mm wide joints formed between two 150 mm. long strips of
material matching, the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
1.5.3
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
1.5.4
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and Employers and
other information specified.
1.5.5
Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on pre-construction
testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.5.6
Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the
following:
1.5.7
Materials forming joints substrates and joint-sealant backing have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and

substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/2
December 2010

Specifications
1.6
Quality Assurance
1.6.1
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint

sealants similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installation with a record of successful inservice performance.
1.6.2
Source-Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.6.3
Pre-construction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant

manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or
affect joint sealants.
Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of
joint sealants to joint substrates.
Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during
installation.
Submit not fewer than five pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals and miscellaneous materials.
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Works.
For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
1.6.4
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM
E 548.
1.6.5
Pre-construction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field

test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the Engineer
Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated
Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and Joint substrate indicated
Notify the Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will
be erected.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/3
December 2010

Specifications
Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical
representative present.
Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:
Install joint sealants in 1500 mm long joints using same materials and methods for
joint preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the completed Works.
Allow sealants to cure fully before testing.
Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts
approximately 50 mm long at sides of and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a
mark 25 mm from cross-cut end of 50 mm piece.
Use fingers to grasp 50 mm piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 25 mm

mark; pull firmly at a 90 degrees angle or more in direction of side cuts while
holding 'a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance
recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less
than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold
this position for 10 seconds.
For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately.
Do this by extending cut along side, checking adhesion to opposite side and then
repeating this procedure for opposite side.
Reports whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory
adhesion is obtained.
Evaluation of Pre-construction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
1.6.6
Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and
qualities of materials and execution.
1.7
Delivery. Storage and Handling

Deliver materials to project Site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, colour, expiration date, pot life,
curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants or other causes.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/4
December 2010
1.8

Specifications
Project Conditions
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint sealant manufacturer.
When joint substrates are wet
Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrate.
1.9
Warranty
1.9.1
General Warranty: Special Warranties shall not deprive the Employer of the rights he
may have under provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.9.2
Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by installer agreeing to repair or

replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Special Warranties exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from
the following:
1.10
Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression
caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design

specifications.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other

atmospheric contaminants.
Manufacturers
Approved Manufacturer for sealant shall be:
Tremco
Sika
Dow Corning
Or approved equal.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/5
December 2010
PART 2

Specifications
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials, General
2.1.1
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with Joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing, and field
experience.
Use only the selected type of sealant throughout the work.
2.1.2
Colours of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's

full range for this characteristic.
2.1.3
Elastomeric Sealant Standards: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant, including those for type,
grade, class and uses.
2.1.4
Continuous-Immersion-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants will

be immersed continuously in water, provide products that have been tested for initial
six-week immersion period and additional immersion periods specified below, and have
not failed in adhesion or cohesion when tested with substrates indicated for Project.
One additional four-week immersion period.
2.1.5
Stain-Test Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be non-staining

to porous substrates, provide product that have undergone testing according to ASTM C
1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
2.2
Solvent-Release Joint Sealants
2.2.1
Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Include semi-elastomeric

sealants in which the base polymer is butyl or acrylic. Can be used when movement is
limited to 71/2 % and joint is not clean.
2.3
Acoustical Joint Sealants

Provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant that can
reduce airborne sound transmission throw perimeter and opening in building.
2.4
Joint-Sealant Backing
2.4.1
General: Provide sealant backings of materials and type that are non-staining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience
and laboratory testing.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/6
December 2010

Specifications
2.4.2
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, closed-cell material with a surface skin
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
2.4.3
Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: For temporary seal use neoprene, butyl, EPDM
or silicone tubing, non-absorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at
temperatures down to minus -32C. Provide products with low compression set and of
size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to optimum sealant performance.
2.4.4
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant
failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.5
Miscellaneous Materials
2.5.1
Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated.
2.5.2
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable
of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
2.5.3
Masking Tape
Non-staining. Non-absorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
Examination
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting, joint-sealant performance.
3.2
Preparation
3.2.1
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately sealants to comply with joint
sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates, including dust, paints (except
for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and
compatibility), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water and surface dirt.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/7
December 2010

Specifications
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,

mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining from above cleaning operations by blowing out joints with oilfree compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include but shall not be limited to the
following:
-
Concrete
Masonry
Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tiles
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean non-porous surfaces with chemical cleaners that do not stain, harm
substrate or leave residue.
3.2.2
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by Joint sealant

manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's instructions.
Confine primers to areas to joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
3.2.3
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling-without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
Installation of Joint Sealant
3.3.1
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
3.3.2
Sealant Installation Standards: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for

use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.
3.3.3
Installation: Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during

application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of
installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement
capability.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealant and back of joints.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/8
December 2010

Specifications
Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
3.3.4
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates
Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability
Tooling of Nonsag, Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
Remove. excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolour
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide flush or concave joint configuration, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
3.4
3.4.1
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each type of elastomeric
sealant and joint substrate.
Perform two tests for each 300 m of joint length there after or two tests per each
floor per elevation.
Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:

-
Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts
approximately 50 mm long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one
end. Place a mark 25 mm from cross-cut end of 50 mm piece.
Use fingers to Grasp 50 mm piece of sealant between cross-cut end and mm

mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while
holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance
recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but
not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in
extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/9
December 2010

Specifications
For joints with dissimilar substrates check adhesion to each substrate

separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to
opposite side and then repeating this procedure for opposite side.
Inspect-joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration
complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log.
Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations,
whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill,
sealant configuration and sealant dimensions.
Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original surfaces are clean
and new sealant contacts original sealant.
3.5
Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered
satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing
or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results
prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
Sealant Schedule
Caulk the following areas with high modules silicone sealant with high anti-fungicide,
mildew resistant:
Joints between water-closet and floor

Around cutouts in countertops
Junction between walls and countertop
Junction between walls and backsplash
Around fixtures and drain openings passing through
Junction between ceramic tiles and door frame
Perimeter of urinals and rimless sinks
Silicone sealant is not acceptable for horizontal traffic bearing Joints, nor in Joints
between marble panels.
3.6
Cleaning
Clean off excess sealants or sealants smears adjacent to joints as the work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/10
December 2010
3.7

Specifications
Protection
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Joint Sealants
Section 07920/11
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Conditions of
Particular Applications and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
Summary
This work shall include for the supply, installation and fixing of welded steel hollow doors and
decorative steel doors as shown on the drawings and door schedules and as indicated in Bill
items.
The term "doors" in this section shall also include windows, louvers and frames manufactured
in steel.
1.3
Performance and Standards

1.
Steel doors shall comply with BS 1245. All mild steel shall comply with BS 4630 and
with BS4, Part 1. All sheet steel shall comply with BS 1449, Part 1.
2.
Fire Rating:
All fire rated doors are to be tested and certified by an accredited fire testing laboratory,
to comply with BS 476 parts 20 & 22.
All hardware used on fire rated doors should comply to same standards of fire rating as
doors and in specific of same fire rating hours.
3.
Quality Assurance:
a.
Provide steel doors and frames as manufactured by a single firm specializing in the
production of this type of product.
b.
Applicable standards: comply with British standards.
c.
Supplier should submit evidence of having executed at least three projects of

similar nature and complexity, and having an experience of minimum 3 (three)
years in such a trade.
Khatib and Alami

Section 08110/1
December 2010
1.4

Specifications
Submittals
1.
Samples of Doors
The Contractor shall provide for the Engineer's approval one full mock up sample
installed on site.
2.
Drawings
Fully detailed shop drawings showing door frame and hardware shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval before fabrication commences.
3.
Ironmongery
The Contractor shall supply to the manufacturer of doors samples of all item of
ironmongery as specified which will be fixed to the frame to ensure that proper provision
is made for their fixing, and all details are to be given to the manufacturer as to which
items apply to which frames.
The samples and information are to be given to the manufacturer before production is
commenced.
4.
Oversize Fire-rated doors

For units exceeding sizes mentioned on certificate of tested assemblies, provide
certification assessment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities that doors conform
to all standard construction requirements of tested fire rated doors.
1.4.1
Product Handling
1.
Handling Generally
All doors shall be carefully handled at works, during transportation and storage and on
site to prevent damage. Any damaged or defective frames shall be removed from the site
and replaced at no additional cost.
2.
Identification
All doors shall have suitable identification in terms of the door frame schedule marked on
them or attached in such a way that the labeling will not easily become detached. Crates
shall similarly clearly identify their contents.
Khatib and Alami

Section 08110/2
December 2010
3.

Specifications
Protection
The doors are to be suitably protected and crated to prevent damage during transportation
and storage. The protection shall be such that doors are not subject to damp.
4.
Storage
Storage on site shall be in dry conditions. Doors shall be stored in such a way that they
are not liable to distortion caused by undue weight in stacking.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
Materials
1.
General
Doors shall be manufactured from metal angles, plate & sheets, and shall comply with
BS4, Part 1 and BS 1449, Part 1. Dimensions and frame profiles shall conform to the
detail drawings.
2.
Welding
Welding shall be in accordance with BS 693 or BS 5135 as appropriate.
3.
4.
Corrosion inhibiting coatings:

a.
Primer powder coating paint compatible with respective specified finish paint.
b.
All steel doors shall be supplied factory powder coating finished with the specified
finish paint.
b.
Touch up damaged paint of same material at the building site after installation.
Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners

Manufacturers standard units suitable for the function required.
5.
Fabrication General
a.
Fabricate hollow steel units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects,
wrap or buckle. Accurately form steel to required sizes and profiles. Whatever
practical, fit and assemble units in the manufacturers plant. Clearly identify work
that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to ensure proper
assembly at project site. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects is not
acceptable.
Khatib and Alami

Section 08110/3
December 2010
6.

Specifications
b.
Exposed Fasteners: Counter sink heads of exposed screws and bolts.
c.
Finish hardware preparation: prepare hollow steel units to receive mortised and
concealed finish hardware, including cut outs, reinforcing, drilling and topping in
accordance with final finish hardware schedule and templates provided by the
hardware supplier, comply with applicable requirements of British standards.
d.
Locate Finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings.
Painting
a. Pretreatment: Surface of metal to be pretreated with zinc salt phosphatizing for proper
chemical conversion and protection of surface.
b. Composition of paint: Hybrid resin epoxy polyester to provide paint with excellent
resistence, light fastness, and heat resistance.
7.
c.
Application: Apply zinc salt phosphatizing for pretreatment, final powder coating
paint furnace treated at a temperature of 180C for proper quality and durability
paint, in addition to complete application and immersion of powder film.
d.
Thickness: Medium thickness of film to be between 60 to 100 microns.
e.
Finish: Ral color to be specified by architect. Appearance (gloss, semi gloss, matt,
semi matt) to be specified by architect.
Frames
a.
Frame Construction: Frames are constructed of 1.5mm (16 gauge) commercial

quality galvanized steel sheet for doors of 45mm thickness. All bends shall be
formed with a true sharp radii.
Each jamb shall be provided with a sill anchor and two (2) jamb anchors for heights
up to and including 1524mm and an additional anchor for each additional height of
762mm or a fraction thereof. For fire rated doors supply 4 jamb anchors on each
side.
1.
Khatib and Alami
Frames: To be factory Knocked down and assembled smooth. All frames shall
be provided with a removable shipping strut welded across the jambs at the
base. All frames must include the appropriate anchors to match the wall
construction they are intended to be installed in and the appropriate hardware
reinforcing.

Section 08110/4
December 2010

Specifications
2.
b.
8.
Slip-On Drywall Frames: All slip-on dry wall frames shall be provided with
steel corner tabs, steel corner tabs, steel corner reinforcing and compression
lugs for field assembly over the finished wall. Attachment at the base of the
frame shall be by screws through holes provided in the face of the frame or by
screws through concealed base clips. All frames must include appropriate
hardware reinforcing.
Hardware Preparation
1.
Hinge Preparation: Provide frames with 5.0mm thick steel hinge

reinforcements welded to the frames in compliance with BS 7352. Standard
hinge preparation is to be 4" x 3" for regular weight, three preparations
through 2286mm (7'6") height and four preparations over 2286mm (7'6") and
up to 3048mm (10') height.
2.
Strike Preparation: Provide frames with 3.0mm thick steel lock strike
reinforcement with tapped holes welded to the frames. Standard strike
preparation is to be for locks in compliance with doors manufacturer fire test.
3.
Closer and Other Reinforcements: Provide all frames with minimum 2.0mm
(14 gauge) reinforcement as necessary to support the scheduled hardware.
Closers to be in compliance with EN 1144.
4.
Plaster Guard: Provide 1.2mm thick steel plaster guard or mortar boxes at the
back of hardware cut-outs in the frames.
Hollow Doors
a.
Hollow Door Construction: Provide doors of 45mm thick full flush construction
fabricated from 1.25mm (18 gauge) galvanized steel sheet to BS 4630. Provide top
and bottom channel of 1.5mm thick steel welded to door skins on 150mm centers.
Top channel is to be flush, bottom channel inverted.
b.
Core Construction: Provide doors with structurally bounded resin impregnated

honey comb to give extra sturdiness and rigidity, complying with BS 476 parts 20
& 22.
c.
Hardware Preparation
1.
Khatib and Alami
Hinge Preparation: provide doors with 5.0mm thick steel hinge

reinforcements welded to the door skins. Standard hinge preparation is to be
4" x 3" for regular weight, three preparations through 2286mm height and
four preparations over 2286mm and upto 3048mm height in compliance with
BS 7352.

Section 08110/5
December 2010
9.

Specifications
2.
Lock Preparation: Provide doors with 3.0mm thick steel formed lock
reinforcements with tapped holes welded to the door skins. Provide internal
reinforcements to support door skins as required for the type of lock that is
specified. Standard lock preparation is to be for mortise lockset with a 76mm
backset to manufacturers test.
3.
Flush Bolt Preparation: Provide inactive leaf of pair door with 3.0mm thick
steel flush bolts reinforcements at top and bottom.
4.
Closer and Other Reinforcements: Provide all doors with minimum 2.0mm
(14 gauge) reinforcements as necessary to support the scheduled hardware.
Closers to be in compliance with EN 1144.
d.
Glazing: Where required by the plans, doors are prepared for installation of glazing.
Door supplier shall provide the cut-out and steel glazing bead.
e.
Louvers: Where required by the plans, provide louvers in the doors in compliance
with BS 476 part 1.
f.
Painting: After fabrication provide doors and frames thoroughly cleaned, coated
with a factory powder coating with the required finish paint. Touch up damaged
paint with the same finished paint material to be applied at the building site after
installation.
g.
Fire protection
1.
Provide fire doors and frames tested in accordance with BS 476 parts 20 &
22.
2.
Certificates: All sizes and construction of fire doors to be within the

acceptable manufacturers fire test.
Decorative Doors
Decorative Door Construction: Provide doors of dimensions, thickness and details as
shown on drawings, fabricated from commercial quality steel members. Doors shall be
supplied shop primed and factory painted with the required finished paint. Touch up
damaged paint with the same finished paint material to be applied at the building site
after installation.
10.
Approved Manufacturer:
Khatib and Alami
Fitzpatrick sal
Martin Roberts
Or approved equal

Section 08110/6
December 2010
PART 3
3.1

Specifications
EXECUTION
Workmanship
1.
Preparation
Steel shall be free of scale, dust, grease, oil and surface adhesives before priming.
2.
Profiles
Profiles shall be formed as shown on drawings and shall be appropriate to the thickness
of the doors.
3.
Joints
Joints shall be welded to proper lines.
4.
Provision for Ironmongery

The frames and door panels shall be factory-prepared to receive specified ironmongery.
a.
The hinges shall be welded to doors and frames.
b.
Striking plates for the specified locks and latches shall be fitted, complete with
mortar guards.
c.
Bolt holes for double doors shall be drilled at works and provided with mortar
guards.
d.
Fixings or all other specified ironmongery which fixes to the frame shall be
provided, tapped as necessary, reinforced by backplates where necessary, and
provided with mortar guards where the fixing penetrates the frame.
e.
The manufacturer shall make provision for and shall fit all items of ironmongery for
the steel doors and frames.
f.
Where ironmongery is not specified for a particular door the provision of section
ironmongery shall apply.
Khatib and Alami

Section 08110/7
December 2010
5.

Specifications
Frame Fixings
The provisions for jamb fixing shall be as shown on drawings. In addition there shall be a
mild steel horizontal plate at the foot of each jamb welded in all drilled with 6mm holes
for fixing down to the floor.
6.
Alignment
The doors supplier shall provide a steel for alignment purposes.
7.
Fixing
Frame Installation: Contractor to provide installation of the frames plumb, square and in
true alignment in compliance with BS 476 part 8. Use wood installations spreader at base,
strike and mid-top locations to ensure constant and proper jamb opening for door.
Where frames are built in temporary struts shall be positioned between jambs to prevent
bowing.
Doors Installation: Contractor to provide installation of the door plumb, square and in
true alignment. Adjust doors to required clearances and tolerances complying with BS
476 parts 20 & 22.
8.
General Quality of Finished Work

Any parts of the installation which are indented, distorted, out of alignment, visible welds
not ground flush, or defective in any way shall be rejected and replaced at no additional
cost or made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Any damage to the painting shall be made good immediately on completion of the frame
and door fixing.
9.
Painting
All frames and doors shall be factory painted in accordance with the Specification for
Painting in section 09900.
3.2
Adjusting and Cleaning
Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dust and other substances. Lubricate
hardware and other moving parts, clean glass after installation of windows.
Khatib and Alami

Section 08110/8
December 2010

Specifications
Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact joints a weatherstripping for smooth operation and a weathertight closure.
Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protection wrapping

from doors and frames.
END OF SECTION
Khatib and Alami

Section 08110/9
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 08520
ALUMIN1UM WINDOWS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to work of this section.
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of aluminium windows as required by the Contract and
includes the following types:
Horizontal sliding windows

Projected windows
Pivoting windows
Extent of each type of aluminium window is indicated on Drawings and in window Tables.
1.3
Reference Standards
Aluminium windows work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of
the latest edition of provisions of the American Architectural Manufacturers Association
(AAMA) and the specifications of the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM),
British Standards (BS) as referenced to throughout this section, or other equivalent
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
AAMA NO
101
Voluntary Specification for Aluminium Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doors
608.1
Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically

Deposited Colour Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminium.
701.2
Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-1
December 2010

Specifications

ASTM NO.
C 509
E 283
E 330
E 331
E 547
E 699
E 783
E 987
1.4
Specification for Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material

Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors
Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows. Curtain Walls and
Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential
Practice for Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality
Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components in Accordance with Test
Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E-6.
Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior
Windows and Doors
Test Method for Deglazing Force of Fenestration Products
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division - 1
Specification Sections for the approval of the Engineer:
1.4.1
Product Data: Submit product data for each type of aluminium window unit required.
Include the following:
1.4.2
Certificates of compliances
Manufacturer's standard construction details
Profiles and dimensions of individual components
Data on finishes, hardware and accessories
Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing for fabrication and installation of each type of
aluminium window required. Include information not fully detailed in manufacturer's
standard product data and the following:
Layout and installation details including anchors

Typical unit elevations
Full-size details of typical composite members including reinforcement
Glazing details
Hardware and accessories
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-2
December 2010

Specifications
1.4.3
Samples for Initial Colour Selection: Submit samples of each specified finish on 300 mm.
long sections of frame and sash members. Where finishes involve normal colour variations,
include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1.4.4
Samples for Verification Purposes: The Engineer reserves the right to require additional
samples that show fabrication techniques and workmanship and design of hardware and
accessories.
1.4.5
Material Test Reports: Engage a recognized testing laboratory to perform tests specified.
Provide certified test results showing that each type, grade and size of window unit
complies with performance requirements indicated.
1.5
Quality Assurance
1.5.1
Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage an experienced manufacturer who has successfully

manufactured aluminium window units similar in design and extent to those required for
this project.
Units must be assembled and installed by the manufacturer or his representative. The
manufacturer in all cases shall be responsible for the work.
1.5.2
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide aluminium windows produced by a single

manufacturer who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to
those required.
1.5.3
Field Measurements: Check actual window openings in construction work by accurate field
measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
1.5.4
Coordination: Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay

where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements and coordinate
fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fitting of aluminium windows.
1.6
System Performance Requirements
1.6.1
General: Provide aluminium window units that comply with performance requirements
specified and as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding stock systems.
Units shall be fabricated and installed. to withstand normal thermal movement wind
loading, impact loading without failure, and for air infiltration and water penetration
requirements indicated for each grade and performance class required.
Design wind velocity at project Site is 110 kg/h.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-3
December 2010
1.6.2

Specifications
Testing Requirements: Test each grade and size of window units by a recognized testing
agency, according to ASTM E 330 for structural performance, ASTM E 283 for air in filtration and both ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547 for water penetration. Provide certified
test results.
All tests required shall be performed at the Contractor's expense.
1.6.3
1.7
Performance Requirements: Each required aluminium window unit shall comply with the
following performance requirements.
Structural Performance: Provide window units with no failure or permanent deflection

in excess of 0.4 percent of any member's span after removal of the imposed load, for a
positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 140 kg/m2.
Air Infiltration: Provide units with an air infiltration rate of not more than 35.0 liter
minute/m of operable sash joint for an inward test pressure of 8.0 for horizontalsliding-type windows and of 30.00 kg/m2 for other window types.
Water Penetration: Provide units with no water penetration as defined in the test
method at an inward test pressure of 15 percent of the design pressure.
Warranty
The period of warranty shall be 5 years after the date of completion. The contractor shall
repair or replace window units that fail in material or workmanship within this period.
Failure includes but shall not be limited to:
1.8
Structure failure including excessive deflection, leakage or air infiltration
Faulty operation of sash and hardware
Deterioration of metal, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.

Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for delivery, storage and handling of
aluminiurn windows.
1.9
Related Sections
07900
08800
Joint Sealers
Glass and Glazing
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-4
December 2010
PART 2
2.1

Specifications
PRODUCTS
Aluminium Windows, General
Aluminium window units shall be heavy commercial grade.
2.2
Materials
2.2.1
Aluminium Members: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the window units
manufacturer for the corrosion-resistance and for the strength and required finish. The
aluminium alloy shall contain less than 0.4% of copper.
Ultimate Tensile Strength: 1547 kg/cm2

Brinnel Hardness: 80
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, aluminium profiles shall not be less than 2.0 m
thick at any location for the main frame and sash members.
The aluminium must be free from defects prejudicial to its use and the finish surface of the
sections shall be free from flow lines, streaks, blisters, tears and any other surface
imperfections. Anodic coating shall be at least 25 microns on exposed aluminium parts.
2.2.2
Aluminium Finish: Plastic Powder Coating as follows:

Coating material shall consist of powder particles of resinous materials and additives.
2.2.3
Chemical Finish:
Pretreatment:
Plastic Powder:
Thickness
Application
Colour and Texture:
Texture:
Cleaning with compatible inhibiting chemicals

Thermosetting of chrome layer
Epoxy polyester powder, with no additives
60 microns minimum dry film thickness
Electrostatically sprayed, 10 minutes drying time at 200C
Medium bronze from manufacturer's standard colours
Rough or as indicated by Engineer
Fasteners: Provide aluminium nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials non-corrosive

and compatible with - aluminium window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other
components of window units, and shall be of size and strength to adequately perform their
function. Materials not compatible with aluminium including steel anchors, shall be
properly insulated from aluminium. Provide glazing clips, glazing beads and neoprene or
rubber glazing strips.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-5
December 2010

Specifications
Reinforcement: Where fasteners are screw-anchored into aluminium, reinforce the

interior with aluminium or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or
provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in splined grommet nuts.
Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use
exposed fasteners. To apply hardware, use Phillips flat-head screws that match the
finish of the member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
2.2.4
Anchors, Clips and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips and sliding glass units accessories
of aluminium, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip zinc- coated steel, of sufficient strength
to withstand design pressure indicated.
2.2.5
Compression Weatherstripping: Provide the manufacturer's standard compressible

weatherstripping of neoprene gaskets or moulded EPDM.
2.2.6
Sliding Weatherstripping: Provide woven-pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene or

nylon pile, with resin-impregnated backing fabric and an aluminium backing strip.
Provide weatherstripping locked into extruded grooves in sash.
2.2.7
Insect Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of tubular-shaped extruded or formed aluminium

members of 2 mm minimum wall thickness with mitered or coped joints and concealed
mechanical fasteners.
Finish screen frames to match window units.
2.2.8
Insect screen Fabric: Provide 1.2 x 1.2 or 1.2 x 1.4 mm: mesh of 0.2 mm stainless steel wire
or 0.3 mm plastic-coated glassfibre threads woven and fused to form a screen that is
resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage and weather deterioration.
2.2.9
Colour of Fabric: Shall be selected from manufacturer's standard product line.
2.2.10
Wickets: Provide sliding or hinged-type wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and
durability during handling.
2.2.11
Glazing Materials: Provide glazing materials that comply with requirements of Division-8,
Section 08800 "Glass and Glazing". Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere, glass shall be
double glazed.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-6
December 2010

Specifications
2.3
Fabrication and Assembly
2.3.1
General: Fabricate aluminium window units to comply with Drawing and indicated
standards include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window
units.
Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
2.3.2
Subframes: Where required, provide subframes with anchors for window units. Subframes
shall not be less than 1.50 mm thick extruded aluminium finished to match window units.
Profile and dimensions shall be according to approved shop drawings. Miter or cope corners
and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical Joint fasteners.
If required subframe can also be of "Yellow Fir Wood" according to "Finish Carpentry" of
not less than 25 mm thick constructed to the profile and dimensions indicated.
2.3.3
Thermal-Break Construction for Units of Double Glazing: Fabricate window units with an
integral concealed low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and
window members exposed on the interior in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal
contact.
Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3 years, has been
tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and has been
tested to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.
Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging
thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.
2.3.4
Weepholes: Provide weepholes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to the
exterior.
2.3.5
Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown on Drawings, matching window units
complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for
erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion
and building deflections in the manner indicated.
2.3.6
Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied or snap-on glazing stops, coordinate with glass
selection and glazing system indicated. Finish glazing stops to match window units.
2.3.7
Preglazed Fabrication: Preglazed window units at the factory where possible and practical
for applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of Division-8,
Section 08800 "Glass and Glazing".
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-7
December 2010

Specifications
2.3.8
Window Frames: All frames shall be provided with metal cramps for grouting in substrates
where no subframes are employed and shall contain internal fishplates for connecting
adjacent units where a wide frame is manufactured in more than one unit.
2.3.9
Assembly: Windows shall be securely assembled to assure neat, weathertight construction.

Corners of frames shall be welded from unexposed side leaving exposed surface in corners
free of any excess metal. A permanent watertight joint shall be made at the Junction of the
sill and frame iambs, make provision in sill for exterior drainage of water as specified
hereinbelow. Multiple units shall be jointed together with the manufacturer's recommended
mullions, except where otherwise indicated. Windows shall be factory made prepared for
single or double glazing as indicated in Division-8. Section 08800 or on Drawings using
glazing compound, chloroprene glazing strips and glazing beads, gaskets, glass adaptors and
glazing compound shall be of materials that are compatible with aluminium. The glazing
beads and other members shall be stiff enough and fixed at a sufficient number of points to
withstand the design wind load.
Hardware shall be securely attached. Exposed parts shall be free from surface blemishes.
Welded joints shall be ground and buffed flush and furnished to match adjacent parts.
Sliding sash shall operate on bronze roller bearings and sheave devices that facilitate the
movement and prevent the direct contact between the sashes and the aluminium track.
Sheaves shall be secured to bottom rail with bronze axles. Each sliding unit shall have two
sheaves or more as necessary. Perimeter stiles and rails shall be hollow extruded sections
arranged to hold and conceal weatherstripping. Sash shall be removable from the inside.
Provide cover plates, mullion caps and corner caps of special extrusions as necessary.
2.3.10
Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior or ventilator. Locate
screens on the inside or out side of the window sash or ventilator depending upon window
type. Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting removable
arrangement with minimum fasteners and latches.
2.3.11
Weather Stripping: Provide sliding-type weatherstripping where sash rails slide horizontally
or vertically along the unit frame.
Provide compression-type weatherstripping at the perimeter of each sash where sliding-type

is not appropriate.
Provide weatherstripping located in extruded grooves in the sash.
2.4
Hardware
2.4.1
General: Provide hardware necessary to properly operate, tightly close and securely lock
window units. Do not use aluminium in frictional contact with other metals.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-8
December 2010

Specifications
2.4.2
Metal: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from wrought aluminium, solid
white metal with special coating finish or other corrosion- resistant material compatible with
aluminium and of sufficient strength to perform the function for which it is intended.
2.4.3
Colour: Colour of exposed hardware shall be black.
2.4.4
Horizontal Sliding Windows

Window units shall successfully pass operating force test performance.
Provide window units with sash that can be removed from inside for cleaning
2.4.5
Sash Rollers: Steel lubricated ball-bearing rollers with nylon tires (minimum 2 per
sash with maximum interval of 600 mm)
Sash Lock
At Meeting Rails: Cam action sweep sash lock and keeper at meeting rails
At Jambs: Spring-loaded snap-type lock (1 per sash)
Projected Windows
Unit shall successfully pass operating force test.
Hinges: Concealed four-bar friction hinges with adjustable slide shoe (minimum 2 per
ventilator),
Provide ventilator operation that permits cleaning of the outside glass face from the
interior.
2.4.6
Sash Lock: Compaction sweep lock handle with surface-mounted strike (2 locks with
units over 1.0 m wide) For high (1.80 m and over from finished floor) projected
windows with ventilators, sash lock shall be pole-operated spring catch lock.
Limit Device: Stay bar with an adjustable hold-open device (1 at each jamb)
Pivoted Windows
Pivoted Windows: Can rotate 3600 around its axis, they require pivots, limited-access
locks and double-row weather stripping. They also require latches in both partially and
fully open position. Window units shall successfully pass the following test
requirements:
Torsion-test
Horizontal concentrated load test
Vertical concentrate load test
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-9
December 2010

Specifications
Hardware: stainless-steel pivot assembly

Lock: internal, key operated, limited access locks (1 per jamb).
2.5
Sealant
For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by the
manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking and non-migrating complying with Division-7, Section 07900 "Joint Sealers".
2.6
Protective Coating
A removable protective coating, compatible with aluminium alloy and finish shall be
applied on all exposed portions of window and other aluminium parts
Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
Inspection
Inspect opening before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is
correct and the sill is level.
Wood subframes (if used) shall be dry, clean, sound and well fastened, free of voids and
without offsets at joints. Ensure that head of nails and screws are driven flush with surfaces.
3.2
Installation
Install aluminium windows in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
Drawings. Install windows plumb, level, square, true to line or curvature as required, in
alignment with work of other trades, free from waves, buckles, sags or other defects.
Provide secure anchorage for all parts of work at a distance not exceeding 450 mm.
Coordinate with related trades to ensure proper mating and connecting of the work.
Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage units.
Isolate aluminium and other corrodible surfaces from contact with dissimilar metals and
materials, other than stainless steel, and from sources of corrosion and electrolytic action by
applying on contact surfaces a heavy coat of approved alkali-resistant bituminous paint; or
separate surfaces with a non-absorptive tape or gasket.
Install work in prepared openings. Conform with applicable requirements for assuring use
of proper materials and procedures to prevent electrolytic deterioration.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-10
December 2010

Specifications
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of work.

Provide weepholes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior.
Provide caulking and sealing as indicated to make work watertight and properly finished
including Joints between frames and adjoining construction. If joint opening is too deep, it
shall be filled to within 12 mm with appropriate back-up material such as untarred oakum,
fiber glass, polythene foam but no oily or asphaltic type materials shall be used, the fill shall
be uniform to provide the sealant depth required. Special compound, where indicated, shall
be provided for metal to metal contacts, in lieu of other caulking, applied by conventional
caulking gun or pressure equipment.
Joint sealant materials shall not harm adjacent materials or finishes.
Prior to using caulking compound, joints shall be cleaned of mortar and foreign materials,
joints wider than 6 mm and deeper than 20 mm shall be backed as specified. Brush coat of
primer shall be applied and caulking compound applied with gun. Joints shall be completely
filled and neatly finished flush with adjoining surfaces.
3.2.1
Moving Parts: There shall be no aluminium to aluminium contact between hardware parts or
window members which move relative to each other and remain in contact.
3.2.2
Hardware: Install finish hardware to hardware manufacturers instructions and installation

templates.
Hardware shall be replaceable without removing the outer frame from the structure.
3.3
Adjusting
Adjust operating sashes and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and
weatherstripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
Surface finishes shall be anodized with mechanical pretreatment such as grinding and
polishing to give high decorative finish for all apparent aluminium units.
3.4
Cleaning
Clean aluminium surfaces promptly after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealing compounds, dirt and other
substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-11
December 2010

Specifications
Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installing window units. Wash and polish glass
on both faces not more than 4 days prior to the date scheduled for final inspection. Comply
with manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in other
ways during the construction period, including those by natural causes, accidents and
vandalism.
3.5
Protection
Institute and maintain protective measures and other precautions required through remainder
of construction period. to ensure that except for normal weathering, aluminium window
uruits shall be without damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Windows
Section 08520-12
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 08540
ALUMINIUM DOORS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General Conditions, Conditions
of Particular Application and Division 1 specification section apply to work of this section.
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of Aluminium Entrances and Storefronts as required by the
Contract and include the following.
Aluminium doors
Extent of aluminium entrances and storefront is indicated on Drawings and in Doors and
Windows Tables.
1.3
Related Sections
The following sections contains requirements that relate to this section:
Joint sealants
Glazing
1.4
Reference Standards
Aluminium entrances work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of
the latest edition of the provisions of the American Architectural Manufacturers Association
(AAMA) and the specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM),
British Standards (BS) as referenced to throughout this section, or other equivalent
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
AAMA NO.
101
Voluntary Specification for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doors
608.1
Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytic ally

Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
701.2
Voluntary Specification for Pile Weather stripping
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-1
December 2010

Specifications
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTINGAND MATERIALS

ASTM NO.
A 123
B 221
C 509
E 283
E 330
E 331
E 547
E 699
E 783
E 987
Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products
B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and
Tubes
Specifications for Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material
Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors
Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential
Practice for Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality
Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components in Accordance with Test
Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E-6
Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage through Installed Exterior
Windows and Doors
Test Method for Deglazing Force of Fenestration Products
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE

ANSI NO.
A 156.1
A 156.4
A 156.5
A 156.8
A 156.16
1.5
American National Standard for Butts and Hinges

American National Standard for Door Controls- Closers
American National Standard for Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products
American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Holders
American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware
Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the following for the approval of the Engineer:
1.5.1
Product Data: For each type of aluminium. elevation, and entrance unit required, include the
following:
Manufacturer's standard construction details relative to materials

Profiles and dimensions of individual components
Data on finishes, hardware and accessories
Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-2
December 2010
1.5.2

Specifications
Shop Drawings: For each type of aluminium unit required show details of fabrication and
installation.
Include information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard product data and the
following:
Layout and installation details, including anchors

Typical unit elevations
Full-size details of typical composite members, including reinforcement
Glazing details
Hardware and accessories schedule and locations
1.5.3
Samples for Initial Colour Selection: Samples of each specified finish on 300 mm long
sections of frame members. Where finishes involve normal colour variations, include
sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1.5.4
Cutaway Sample: Of each vertical to horizontal framing intersection of systems of

minimum 200 mm length of full size components.
1.6
Quality Assurance
1.6.1
Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage an experienced manufacturer who has successfully

manufactured aluminium entrances similar in design and extent to those required for this
project.
1.6.2
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer of aluminium entrances similar in

design and extent to those required for this project.
1.6.3
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide aluminiurn entrances and storefront through one

source produced by a single manufacturer who is capable of indicating prior successful
production of units similar to those required.
1.7
Project Conditions
1.7.1
Field Measurements: Check actual openings in construction work by accurate field

measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
1.7.2
Coordination: Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.

Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements and coordinate
fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fitting of entrance
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-3
December 2010

Specifications
1.8
System Description
1.8.1
Performance Requirements: Provide aluminium entrance assemblies and storefront capable

of withstanding loads, thermal and structural movement requirements without failure with
specified performance characteristics. Each system shall be tested by a recognized testing
laboratory or agency in accordance with specified test methods. Provide certified test
results.
Thermal Movement: Provide systems capable of withstanding thermal movements

resulting from an ambient temperature range of 67C, that could cause a metal surface
temperature range 100C within the framing system.
Wind Loading: Provide assemblies capable of withstanding a uniform test pressure

100 kg/m.2 inward and 100 kg/m2 outward when tested in accordance with ASTM E
330.
Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of

clear span or 19 mm whichever is smaller
1.8.2
1.9
Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.
Thermally Broken Construction: Provide system that isolates aluminium. exposed to

exterior from aluminium exposed to interior with a material of low thermal
conductance.
Fixed Framing Transmission Characteristics: Provide aluminium entrance elevation and

framing system that complies with requirements indicated for transmission characteristics.
Air Infiltration: Provide framing systems with an infiltration rate of not more than 183
litre minute per sq m of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of 30.5 kg/m2.
Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no water penetration (excluding

operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 30.5 kg/m.2,
Clearance: Provide a minimum 3 mm clearance between members and top of glazing

or other fixed part immediately below.

Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for delivery, storage and handling of
components of aluminium entrances.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-4
December 2010
1.10

Specifications
Special Warranty
The Contractor warrants and agrees to repair or replace aluminium entrance doors and store
front that fails in material or workmanship within a period of 5 years from the Date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Aluminium Members: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance and application of required finish.
Ultimate Tensile Strength:
1547 kg/cm2.
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, aluminium profiles for components of elevations

and entrances shall be of 2.0 mm minimum wall thickness at any location
Aluminjurn Finish: Plastic Powder Coating as follows:
Chemical Finish: Cleaning with compatible inhibiting chemicals
2.1.2
Pretreatment: Thermosetting of chrome layer

Plastic Powder: Epoxy polyester powder, with no additives, 60 microns minimum dry
film thickness
Application: Electrostatic, 10 minutes drying time at 200C
Colour and Texture: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's standard colours
Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminium, non-magnetic stainless steel or other materials

warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminiurn
components, hardware, anchors and other components.
Reinforce members as required to retain fasteners threads
2.1.3
Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminium less than 3.00 mm thick,
reinforce the interior with aluminium or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads
or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts.
2.1.4
Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use
exposed fasteners. For the application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of
member or hardware being fastened. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed
fasteners.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-5
December 2010

Specifications
2.1.5
Concealed Flashing: Provide 1.3 mm minimum dead-soft stainless steel or 0.70 mm

minimum extruded aluminium of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility
with other components.
2.1.6
Brackets and Reinforcements: Where feasible, provide high-strength aluminium brackets

and reinforcements; otherwise provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip steel
compatible with adjacent materials.
2.1.7
Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Provide concrete and masonry inserts fabricated from hot-dip
galvanized cast iron, malleable iron or steel complying with ASTM A 123.
2.1.8
Compression Weather-stripping: Provide manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible

weather-stripping gaskets of moulded neoprene complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
2.1.9
Sliding Weather-stripping: Provide manufacturer's standard replaceable weather-stripping of

wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminium strip backing,
complying with AAMA 701.2.
2.1.10
Glass and Glazing Materials: Glass and glazing materials shall comply with requirements of
Section 08800 "Glass and Glazing". Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, glass shall be:
2.1.11
Panels: Where indicated on Drawings, provide manufacturer's flush-laminated panels of

thickness indicated, fabricated with rigid closed-cell urethane core, laminated with
waterproof glue between two sheets of aluminium.
2.2
6 mm clear sheet glass for entrances and elevations.
Panel Thickness: 12.00 mm, minimum

Aluminium Sheet Thickness: 1.60 mm
Components
Alurninium Door Frames, General: Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies, as
indicated hereinafter, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's
standards; reinforce as necessary to support required loads.
Stile-and Rail Type Aluminium Doors
Frame: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy
inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts.
Design: Provide 45 mm thick, glazed doors with minimum design indicated on Drawings.
Mechanically fasten comers with reinforcing brackets, 3 mm thick extruded tubular rail and
wide stile (over 100 mm width).
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-6
December 2010

Specifications
Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of

stiles. and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminium glazing stops with exterior stops
anchored for non-removal.
Flush-Type Aluminium Doors
Frame: Provide tubular frame members with reinforced mechanical or welded joints in
accordance with manufacturer's standard fabrication methods, limit frame exposure to 18
mm maximum width on door faces, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings
Core Material: Provide rigid, non-combustible mineral insulation board core.
Faces: Fabricate faces of Minimum 1.60 mm thick aluminium sheet, mechanically
interlocked with frame members or laminated to core and framing with waterproof glue to
form 45 mm thick door.
Lights: Provide glazed openings as indicated, with manufacturer's standard aluminium
mouldings and stops; provide non-removable stops on the outside
2.3
Hardware
2.3.1
General: Provide manufacturer's heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or

required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number and type
recommended by manufacturer for service required, finish to match door.
2.3.2
Ball-Bearing Butts: Provide 5-knuckle, 2-bearings, steel ball bearing butts sized to comply
with ANSI A 156. 1, Grade 1; provide 3 butts for doors 2.20 m or less, 4 for taller
doors.Provide non-removable pins at hinges exposed to door outside.
2.3.3
Offset Pivot Sets: Provide offset pivot assemblies complying with ANSI A 156.4, Grade 1;
provide exposed parts of cast aluminium alloy; provide an intermediate pivot for doors over
2.20 m high.
2.3.4
Center Pivot Sets: Provide center pivot assemblies complying with ANSI A 156.4, Grade 1;
provide exposed parts of cast aluminium alloy, provide top and bottom pivots at each door
leaf
2.3.5
Surface-Mounted Overhead Closers: Provide surface-mounted overhead closers, modern

type with cover, for hinge side installation Comply with manufacturer's recommendations
for size of closer, depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of
use. Include the following:
Hold-open arm
delayed-action closing
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-7
December 2010

Specifications
2.3.6
Keyed Cylinders: Provide mortise type, 5-pin tumbler, inside cylinder units with cast
aluminium face; comply with ANSI A 156.5, Grade 1
2.3.7
Deadlocks: Provide mortised maximum security type deadlocks, with minimum 25 mm

long pivoted bolt and stainless steel strike box, comply with ANSI A 156.5, Grade 1.
2.3.8
Deadlatches: Provide mortise type deadlatch with stainless steel strike box, comply with
ANSI A 156.5, Grade 1.
2.3.9
Lever Handles: Provide cast aluminium alloy inside lever handle units.
2.3.10
Flush Bolts: Provide standard edge mortised lever extension type flush bolts. Provide flush
bolts at top and bottom for inactive leaves of pairs of doors only.
2.3.11
Push-Pull Plates: Provide standard aluminium push-pull plates of style from manufacturer's
standard range.
2.3.12
Pull Handles: Provide standard aluminium pull handles of style from manufacturer's
standard.
2.3.13
Push Bars: Provide aluminium full door width single bar push bar.
2.4
Fabrication
2.4.1
General: Sizes of door and frame units and profile requirements are indicated on Drawings.
Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required to
achieve design requirements and coordination with other work.
2.4.2
Prefabrication: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints
with ends coped or mitered. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their
locations. Before delivery to the project Site, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing,
hardware application and other work to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble
components only as necessary for delivery and installation.
Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible.
Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project
Site.
Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of
metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Prepare components to receive
concealed fasteners and anchors for hardware, perform these operations prior to application
of finishes.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-8
December 2010

Specifications
Store front: fabricate framing in profile indicated for flush glazing. Provide subframes
and reinforcing of types indicated. Factory assemble components to greatest extent.
Entrances: Fabricate door framing to profile indicated. Reinforce as required to

support improved loads. Factory assemble door frame units at factory and install
hardware to greatest extend possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required for
installing hardware.
2.4.3
Welding: Comply with American Welding Society (AWS) recommendations, weld in

concealed location to greatest extent, weld before finishing components grind exposed welds
smooth and restore mechanical finish.
2.4.4
Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and necessary for performance
requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.
2.4.5
Dissimilar metals: Separate dissimilar metals with zinc chromate primer, bituminous paint or
other separator that will prevent corrosion.
2.4.6
Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting
members.
2.4.7
Uniformity of Finish: Abutting extruded aluminium members shall not have an integral
colour or texture variation.
2.4.8
Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
2.4.9
Weather-stripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weather-stripping against fixed

stops; at other edges provide sliding weather-stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised
into door edge.
Provide EPDM or vinyl blade gasket weather-stripping in bottom door rail adjustable for
contact with threshold.
At interior doors and other locations without weather-stripping, provide neoprene silencers
on stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
2.5
Warranty Period
Without depraving the Employer of other rights he may have under other provisions of the
contract documents and in addition to them. Submit a written warranty to repair or replace
components of entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials and workmanship
within a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-9
December 2010
PART 3
3.1

Specifications
EXECUTION
Installation
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.
Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints, free of burrs and distortion.
Set units plumb, level and true to fine, without warp or rack of framing members, doors or
panels. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. Rigidly secure non-movement
joints. Seal joints watertight.
Separate aluminium and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion of
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. by painting contact surfaces with
primer or by applying, sealant. Comply with requirements specified under paragraph
"Dissimilar Materials" of AAMA 101. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surfacemounted hardware items. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template
requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.
Install perimeter sealant. Set sill members, flashing and other in bed of sealant or with joint
fillers or gaskets to provide weather tight construction. Comply with requirements of
Division-7, Section 07900 "Joint Sealers" for sealants, fillers and gaskets. Refer to Division8, Section 08800 "Glass and Glazing" for installation of glass and other panels indicated to
be glazed into doors and framing and not preglazed by manufacturer.
Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured
3.2
Adjusting
Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points.
Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding and
for weather tight closure.
3.3
Erection Tolerance
Install entrance and storefront system to comply with the following:
3.3.1
Variation from plane: Limit variation from plane to 3mm in 4 m.
3.3.2
Diagonal measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 3 mm.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-10
December 2010
3.4

Specifications
Cleaning
Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to
avoid damage to coatings.
Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in Division8, Section 08800 "Glass and Glazing" for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess
glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substance from aluminium surfaces.
3.5
Protection
Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period
to ensure that aluminium entrances and storefront shall be without damage or deterioration,
other than normal weathering, at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Aluminium Doors
Section 08540-11
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Conditions
of Particular Application and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2
Summary
Provide material, labor, equipment, services, and perform operations in connection with the
furnishing and delivery of Finish Hardware and related work as indicated on the drawings,
and specified herein.
This section includes the following types of access doors:
Finish Hardware.
Templates
Key control system and cabinet.
Coordination with related trades and contracts.
1.3
Related Sections
Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for access tile in suspended or furred acoustical tile ceiling.
1.4
Submittals
Schedule: Submit a detailed Finish Hardware schedule identifying each item by
manufacturer, catalog number, and location. Provide complete keying information. Provide
catalog cuts on each product listed.
Samples: Provide samples of each product, as requested.
Templates: Furnish complete sets of manufacturers templates with the final finish Hardware
schedule to all trades preparing products for installation of hardware.
Wiring Diagrams: Furnish wiring diagrams and installation instructions for each item of
electrical hardware. Furnish a schematic diagram for each door equipped with electrical
devices, showing connections, operation and relative locations of hardware.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/1
December 2010
1.5

Specifications

Delivery: Deliver and check-in all hardware at the jobsite. Identify each item with door
number.
Storage: Store all hardware in secure dry location prior to installation.
Delivery of Keys and Cylinder Cores: Ship all permanent keys and cylinder cores to the
owner via registered mail. Deliver the construction keys with the locksets.
1.6
Quality Assurance
Product Qualification: The specified manufacturers and their product catalog numbers listed,
establish the standard of qualify and design required for the various categories of Finish
Hardware. Equivalent products of other manufacturers not listed may be acceptable subject
to review by Owner's.
1.7
Manufacturers
Manufacturers for Ironmongery shall be as mentioned in revised Hardware Schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
General
Architectural ironmongery/finish hardware shall facilitate building use and maintenance,
prevent unauthorized access and (where required) egress, allow escape from, protect against
and inhibit the spread of fire, smoke and other hazards, protect doors and other surfaces and
create desired aesthetic effect.
Ironmongery shall be Master Keyed to a Grand Master Key System with the hierarchy as
approved by the Engineer.
Unless stated, hardware to aluminium units shall be by the aluminium fabricator in
accordance with this specification but with finishes to match his section or as approved by
the Engineer. Floor spring units, boxes and cover plates and master keyed cylinders shall be
obtained by the aluminium fabricator from the general hardware supplier. The cost of the
above shall be borne by the aluminium fabricator. The contractor shall ensure that hardware
supplied meets with the Engineer's requirements, and if any item proposed or specified
detracts therefrom the Engineer shall be informed.
The Contractor shall state in his tender his proposed source of supply of hardware, if
different to that specified and that source shall not be changed without the approval of the
Engineer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/2
December 2010

Specifications
The Contractor shall submit a complete comprehensive schedule of ironmongery for the
approval of the Engineer before placing any supply order. It shall be the Contractors
responsibility to ensure that all doors are accounted for correctly and the appropriate
Ironmongery sets are scheduled to meet the intended usage of the doors, cupboards, etc.
The Engineer's approval of such schedule shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing all
items of ironmongery required under the Contract nor from the responsibility to provide
complete ironmongery for the efficient functioning of all doors, windows, cupboards, etc.
The Contractor shall provide ironmongery from a common manufacturers suite of
ironmongery and shall be compatible and visually consistent, from one of the sources
indicated in the list of Vendors, if different to that specified it shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide approved weatherproof storage facilities for all hardware
delivered to the work site.
The Contractor shall check the hardware on installation for correct operation, maintain each
item in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, protect it against damage by other
trades and adjust, clean and lubricate it on completion of the works.
The Contractor shall not fix hardware until background finishes are complete. Hardware
previously fixed shall be removed before any finishing process.
Ironmongery shall be supplied complete with all matching fixings.
British or other approved standards set minimum requirements. If this specification requires
higher standards, the more stringent requirement will apply. Use of manufacturer references
will not limit the contractor's duty to comply with the specification or the current editions of:
BS
Title
476
Fire tests on building materials and structures
729:1994 Hot dip galvanized coatings
1210:1963 Wood screws
1224:1996 Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium
1449
Steel plate, sheet and strip
1706:1990 Electroplated coatings of cadmium and zinc
2870:1980 Copper and copper alloys
2873:1969 Copper & copper alloys wire.
2911:1980 Letter plates
3621:1980 Thief resistant locks
4951:1995 Builder's hardware - Lock and latch furniture
5499
Fire safety signs notices and graphic symbols
5588
Precautions against fire.
5839
Fire detection and alarm system for building
5872:1995 Locks and latches for doors in building
6100:Sub sec.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/3
December 2010

Specifications
1.3.6:1997 Jointing products, builder's hardware & accessories.

6496:1991 Powder organic coatings for application and stoving to aluminium alloy.
7352:1990 Hinges
8220
Guide for security of building against crime
BSEN 1125:1997
Panic exit devices operated by a horizontal bar
BSEN 1154:1997
Controlled door closing devices
B. Designs, Materials and Finishes
Regardless of other provisions, materials shall meet fire safety requirements and not be
subject to bimetallic corrosion with background materials or other ironmongery.
Every finished surface of one material, whether extruded, rolled, cast or stamped, shall
match exactly in colour and texture indicated on drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer
and all items on any one visible door face shall be finished to an identical appearance.
Unless otherwise stated, minimum standards shall be:
Aluminium: HE9-TF alloy, hand polished and anodized to 15 microns thickness.
Stainless Steel: Grade 316 (chromium-nickle-molybdenum group) satin finished or polished
to a mirror like reflectance as required. Other grades or thin stainless steel cladding on other
metal bases are unacceptable.
Coloured Finishes: Electrostatically applied, oven cured powder coated to BS 6496: 1991,
on Grade HE9-TF aluminium alloy, anodized before coating, applied in a BS 5750 quality
assured accredited factory and tested for light fastness, detergent resistance, impact and
abrasion resistance (conical mandrel to ASTM D 522 and falling ball to BS 3900: Part E7:
1992), adhesion (1mm crosscut to BS 3900: Part E7: 1992)) and scratch resistance (2000 g
load to BS 3900: Part E2: 1992).
Brass: CZ 121/2874 alloy, hand finished stain or mirror polished as required and protected
by a transparent electrostatically applied, oven cured powder coating as specified for
coloured finishes.
Bronze:
CZ 121/2874 alloy, hand finished, bronze plated, acid relieved and protected
by a transparent electrostatically applied, oven cured powder coating as specified for
coloured finishes.
2.2
Fixing Devices
Fixing devices shall be suitable, matching, metric and rust-proofed to suit the location and
background, of allen key, or equivalent positive locating drive types.
Pull handle fixings shall be passivated steel bolt through type, with cups, unless otherwise
specifically required.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/4
December 2010
2.3

Specifications
Fire Resisting and Emergency Exit Doors.

The UK Guide of Architectural Ironmoger's Code of Practice sets minimum requirements
but if a higher standard is required by this specification, by statute or by the Fire Service
Department, the higher standard shall apply.
Ironmongery to fire rated door assemblies shall be of types and materials which will not
compromise the specified rating. Fire and smoke control doors, escape route doors and final
exits shall have closers as described hereafter.
Emergency exit devices shall be mortice types of BS 5725: Part 1: 1981, with stainless steel
crossbars, unless otherwise required. Visible latches or vertical bolts are aesthetically
unacceptable.
"FIRE EXIT" and "PUSH BAR TO OPEN" signs to BS 5499 and other signs required by the
Fire Services Department will be provided, unless otherwise specified.
Where latches or night latches are used, with a lever(s). on escape route doors, provide at no
extra cost specially moulded polycarbonate, non-toxic, non-radioactive, visually unobtrusive,
luminous rose surrounds and/or insert escutcheons, able to store natural or artificial light and,
when lights are doused or fail, of emitting a bright luminosity for up to eight hours, to
indicate the position of the lever. Such indicators shall be to DIN 67510 with a measured
value FL.2.1-280 green and 2.10 mcd/m2 (minimum luminous density) at one hour after
excitation.
2.4
Hinges
Hinges shall be suitable types matching other items in the door, independently tested and
certified as suitable for the door weight, size and usage intended. Hinges to fire rated doors
and doors with closers shall be ball bearing type, to minimize closing friction and prevent
wear, independently tested and certified as not compromising the specified rating and shall
not contain low melting point materials, like aluminium or plastics.
If the aluminium or brass hinges are required they shall have double stainless steel washers,
lugged to minimize wear.
Stainless steel butts shall be of ball bearing type. Stainless steel plain, washers or rising butts
are unacceptable, due to high friction wear.
Rising butts are acceptable only on WC/shower cubicle doors.
unacceptable unless specifically required.
2.5
Spring hinges are
Lockes and Latches

Lock suites for use on fire rated door assemblies shall be independently tested and certified
as not compromising the fire rating and shall not contain plastics, zinc or other low melting
point components.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/5
December 2010

Specifications
Mortice locks and latches shall be heavy duty type to performance requirements of BS 5872:
1980 Category 8 and, in addition, shall have:
-
25 mm double throw deadbolts incorporating anti-sawing hardened steel rollers.
Special springing against progressive lever droop (levers with sprung roses are
unacceptable due to potential for damage and corrosion) for lever handles.
Soft springing with two way action and 70 mm minimum backset for knobs.
Facility for full reversal of hand, without opening the case.
19 mm throw stainless steel three part, low friction, guided latchbolts.

Suitable forends, strike plates and rebate components for rebated meeting styles, of
non-corroding materials to match handles (including coloured finishes).
Six pin cylinders with practically infinite differs, incorporating rotating pins and side
locking bars, finished to match handles and trim (includes coloured finishes), easily
removable with the door open, without dismantling trim but not removable if closed for
high security areas only.
Three keys per lock.
The actual number of grand master, master and sub-master keys required shall be as
directed by the Engineer at the time of placing orders.
Unless otherwise stated, locks shall be master keyed to a system of Grand master, Master
and Sub-master suites, without compromise to security standards.
A proprietary, lockable key filling/security cabinet with space for one key for each lock,
including locks for fittings, fixtures, etc. plus 20% spare capacity and four plastic key tags
with card inserts and five "key-out tags" for each space shall be provided.
2.6
Lever Handles, Roses and Backplates

Lever handles should be of rounded section stainless steel minimum 19 mm dia. unless
otherwise stated.
The levers shall be supplied complete with corrosion proof hardened steel spindle suitable
for door thicknesses between 35mm and 54mm.
Roses and backplates with ball bearing shall be of a 2 mm material with polished edges and
the former should be capable of being fixed rigidly to the associated lock case by the use of
metal thread screws provided, or fixed to the door with screws.
Lever handles should have a return section at free end to within 5 mm of the door face.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/6
December 2010
2.7

Specifications
Pull Handles
Pull handles should be of an approved stainless steel section and shall be located directly
opposite each other where handles are required each side of a door.
They shall be provided with bolt through fixings employing countersunk bolts with cup
washers and locking patches.
Where appropriate, levers and pulls shall be of a type that allows forearm operations in
addition to being suitable for hand operation. Pull handles, with a free end should have a
return at the free end to within 5mm of the door face.
2.8
Door Closing Devices

Door closers generally shall be fully adjustable, hydraulic check types, incorporating the
following features:
-
Closing speed fully adjustable between two and thirty seconds (if delayed closing is
specified the door, when opened to 90 degree or beyond, shall stand motionless for a
period adjustable up to 60 second, before starting to close).
Snap action closing to overcome latch resistance with a switch to negate such action
for doors without latches.
Opening and closing from any angle upto 175 degrees, with check adjustable to
operate from any angle between 135 degrees and closed.
Hydraulic reverse check or backcheck action, fully adjustable for angle of operation
unless otherwise specifically stated.
Ten years guarantee for use in local ambient conditions, including positions of extreme
exposure and, for backcheck closers, even if stops are not specified.
No visible manufacturer's markings, except those of BS 6459: Part 1: 1984.
Hold open the door at any pre-selected angel between 85 to 110o where specified.
Produced in factories with a BS quality assurance kitemark.
Overhead closers shall be to BS 6459: Part 1: 1984. Standard units shall have power
adjustable between sizes 2 and 6 of BS 6459 (other sizes when necessary). They shall have
plain, rectilinear, solid extruded bodies (not loose covers) finished identically to other items
on the door, suitable rustproofed arms, fully concealed fixings and adjustment controls and
only one fixing position, established by template, to minimize potential for incorrect fitting.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/7
December 2010

Specifications
Floor mounted closers shall be of the type suitable for single or double action, wood or
metal doors by use of compatible fittings, with concealed fixing cover plates matching other
ironmongery on the door and specially reinforced galvanized main boxes allowing
mechanical adjustment vertically, longitudinally and transversely after installation.
Closers to fire/smoke control doors, escape route doors and external doors shall conform to
and have passed the rated fire door test reference FR 1202 to BS 476: Part 22: 1987. On
operation of the fire alarm signal in an emergency the closers shall be released to the Fail
Safe (closed position) through an electromagnetic mechanism incorporated within the
closers.
Closers to fire/smoke control doors, escape route doors, external doors and doors opening
through more than 90 degrees shall be to BS 6459 class C and shall be certified by the US
Underwriter's laboratory or other approved independent body as not compromising the fire
rating of the door assembly.
If both leaves of a pair of doors have closers and one must close first, due to rebated styles,
etc. provide suitable selectors, which will not obstruct other ironmongery.
2.9
Bolts
Flush bolts having a 25mm throw shall be provided at top and bottom on non active leaves of
pairs of doors. The flush bolts shall have a 225 mm long body with a dove tail return to
resist damage to the door.
Bolts located inside plant rooms, cupboards, etc. shall be of a lever action pattern and bolts
on doors within escape corridors shall have slide knob operation.
Suitable bolt sockets or keeps shall be provided and shall be the easy clean "boat" type
generally but of a spring loaded dirt excluding type at external or dirty locations.
2.10 Door Stops

Suitable stops of types with robust holders and replaceable rubber inserts, matching other
ironmongery on the door shall be provided. Door stops are unnecessary if doors have standopen or backcheck closers, unless opening against a wall.
Where practical, wall bumpers with round roses and buffered coat hooks within bathrooms
and toilets shall be used. Elsewhere, floor stops 38 mm (minimum) high 47 mm diameter,
with expansion shield fixings shall be used, unless these will cause safety hazards to
occupants, or if doors are undercut. Overhead limit stays shall be provided where necessary.
Roller bumpers shall be provided if doors open onto each other.
2.11 Cabinet Hardware
Suitable ironmongery to fittings, fixtures, etc. to suit the location, type and function and to
match door ironmongery shall be provided.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/8
December 2010

Specifications
The Contractor shall purchase signs and nameplates as specified on the drawings from a
source approved by the Engineer.
Signs and nameplates shall comply with the appropriate British Standard as detailed herein.
2.12 Signs and Nameplates
Signs and nameplates shall be in Arabic and English script (except for graphic only signs)
and the Arabic script shall be above the English script.
Signs and nameplates shall be mechanically fixed to the background material by such means
as approved by the Engineer. The use of adhesive shall not be permitted without the written
approval of the Engineer.
2.13 Technical Support
The supplier shall offer full technical support and he or his agent must have suitable
qualified resident staff, able to prepare/amend proper ironmongery schedules and advise on
technical matters, including master key systems and problems of specification, installation
and operation.
2.14 Door Protection
Door protection shall be by means of a high impact vinyl acrylic sheet fixed to door shutter
with adhesive from an approved manufacturer.
The Contractor shall exhibit to the Engineer through documents that the Door protection
sheets have a proven record of at least 5 years of use in Hospital/ health care projects.
Door protection sheets shall not be less than 1.52 mm thick with bevel edges. Unless
otherwise specified door protection sheets shall be provided to the outer door surface to a
height of 900 mm and the colour shall be to the Engineer's approval. The sheets shall extend
the full door leaf width less deduction for rebated edges on the appropriate faces and shall be
fixed with approved adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer of the sheet.
No site cutting shall be allowed. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the
material is obtained based on actual site measurements.
The sheet colour shall be uniform and integral throughout the entire thickness and not be
surface coated. The material shall exhibit Izod impact strength of not less than 24 lbs per
inch of notch when tested in accordance with BS 131: Part 1: 1989 and shall be fire rated as
class 0 surface spread of flame as per BS 476: Part 6: 1989 and Part 7: 1987.
Samples of the material along with detailed catalogues shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before placing orders.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/9
December 2010

Specifications
2.15 Manufacturers' Guarantees

Before supply commences, provide a guarantee, per the draft in Appendix A, specific to
ironmongery for the project and unlimited by disclaimers of responsibility for ironmongery
schedules, undertaking to repair or replace, free of charge, items which are or become
defective due to faulty material or workmanship, or unsuitability for intended building use or
prevailing external or internal environmental conditions, subject only to fixing according to
approval of ironmongery schedules and installation instructions supplied.
2.16 Submittals
Make submittals in three stages as follows:
a) Stage 1
Stage 1 Submittals shall comprise:
-
Details of the supplier's qualifications and experience of local representative staff.
General catalogues, suitably marked to indicate each item of ironmongery proposed.
150 x 150 mm samples illustrating each finish proposed

handles, closers, etc.
Independent test certificates providing compliance with relevant British Standards,

including:
to be supplied for locks,
. Locks to BS 5872 category B.

. Panic exit devices to BS 5725
. Closers to BS 6459 and, in particular to class C thereof.
. Stainless steel to BS 3100: 1991 and BS 1449: Part 2: 1983,
Grade 316.
-
The Draft Guarantee in Appendix A, signed to indicate full acceptance of the Conditions
thereof.
Technical literature detailing local range(s) proposed, marked to indicate equivalent

types proposed and showing exact comparisons with functions of the locks specified.
Comparisons of ironmongery proposed with this specification, detailing each deviation

from the requirements hereof.
A representative sample board, showing items for typical doors, including a hinge, an
operation lock with handles and trim fitted, a pull handle and an overhead door closer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/10
December 2010

Specifications
b) Stage 2
Upon Stage 1 approval; Stage 2 submission shall comprise:
-
A full ironmongery schedule, using the door-by-door set types principle, with each set
fully detailed and listing every door for which the set type is proposed.
Any further information required by the Engineer.
c) Stage 3
Upon Stage 2 approval; Stage 3 submission shall comprise:
-
Samples of items not submitted at stage 1 or 2.

The final signed manufacturers' guarantee.
Approved samples will be kept and compared with items installed.

The granting of any stage approval will not guarantee Approval at subsequent stages, nor
will approval limit the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that ironmongery complies with
the specification and is suitable for the required use. If items supplied are found not to
comply with this specification and if such deviation was not included in the list of deviations
in Stage 1 above, the supplier may be required to replace such items with items complying
with the specification, at his own expense.
2.17 Operation, Maintenance, etc.
On practical completion the Contractor shall delivery to the Engineer the following:
.
.
.
.
Any spares and parts required by the contract documents.

Two full sets of fixing and operating tools.
Bound operation manuals with, in clearly labelled sections:
Copies of manufacturer's guarantee required above.
General maintenance and fixing instruction sheets.
Full performance / construction specification, operations, adjustments and maintenance
instructions for all locks, cylinders, handles, spindles, door closing devices, panic exit
devices, hinges, etc.
Final as-installed ironmongery and keying schedules.
Such other information as may be reasonably required.
2.18 Work Incidental to Ironmongery

The Contractor shall execute such incidental work as:
- Coordination with other trades.
- Factory mortising and reinforcing wood or metal doors.
- Protecting from damage and deterioration during construction.
- Removing fixed items before finished processes and refixing.
- Checking, maintaining, adjusting, cleaning and lubricating.
- Forming holes, mortises, chases and the like, reinforcing hollow constructions, making
good finishes and protective and decorative painting where required.
- Providing wiring, accessories, etc. for electrical items.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/11
December 2010

Specifications
2.19 Card Access System

Card Access System shall be similar to Vincard 2000 or any approved equal.:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into
surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage
and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the
Division 9. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the
substrate.
Set unit level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and
hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth
openings for spindles, bolts and similar items.
Screw thresholds to substrate with Number 10 or larger screws, of the proper type for
permanent anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact with
the threshold metal.
At exterior doors, and elsewhere as indicated, set thresholds in a bed of either butyl rubber
sealant or poly-isolbutylene mastic sealant to completely fill concealed voids and exclude
moisture from every source. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess
sealant.
3.2
Adjust and Clean

Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation
or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and
smoothly as intended for the application made.
Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such
space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of
hardware and doors.
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/12
December 2010

Specifications
APPENDIX A
DRAFT
SUPPLIER'S WARRANTY
PROJECT:
TO: (The Employer)
We,
Ltd., having examined the floor plans, door schedules and ironmongery
specification for the above, hereby warrant that the ironmongery set out in the attached
ironmongery/schedules, dated
20 , is suitable for use on the above project. We agree to repair
or replace, free of charge, items which are or become, defective due to faulty materials or
workmanship or unsuitable for the intended building use or prevailing external or internal
environmental conditions, subject only to installation instructions provided, for the following
periods after installation:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Hinges: five years (including guarantee against wear)

Locks and panic exit devices: five years
Floor mounted or overhead surface mounted closers: ten years including, for backcheck
closers, if no stops are fitted.
Non- mechanical items (plates, handles, etc.) ten years (subject to normal wear characteristics
of the materials and finishes supplier in accordance with the specification).
Signed on behalf of
Date:
End of Draft Guarantee
We, hereby undertakes and agree, if we are awarded a contract to supply ironmongery to the above
project, to give a guarantee, favouring the Employer, in terms as set out above, based on
ironmongery schedules which we will prepare according to the specified submittal requirements.
Date:
Signed on behalf of:
- END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Khatib and Alami
Finish Hardware
Section 08710/13
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Conditions of Particular Application and Division - 1 Specification Sections apply to
work of this section
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of glass and glazing as required by the Contract for the
following applications:
Windows
Doors
"Glass" includes both primary and fabricated glass products. "Glazing" includes glass
installation and materials wet or dry used to install glass.
Extent of each type of glass and glazing work is indicated on Drawings and in Finishing
Tables.
1.3
Reference Standards
Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the British
Standards (BS) and American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), or other
equivalent international standards.
BS NO.
952
Glass for Glazing

ASTM NO.
C 509
C 864
Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Materials

Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting
Blocks, Setting Blocks, and Spacers
C 1048 Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass - HS, FT Coated and Uncoated glass
C 1172 Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
D 412 Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion - Adhesion to Flexible Substrates.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-1
December 2010
1.4

Specifications
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division - 1
Specification Sections for the approval of the Engineer:
1.4.1
Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated
glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions.
1.4.2
Samples for Verification Purposes: 300 mm square samples of each type and colour of
glass indicated and 300 mm long samples of each colour required for each type of
sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of
material representative of adjoining framing system in colour.
1.4.3
Certificates: Certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing
materials furnished for project where tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel
substrates and compatibility with other materials. Provide testing for:
1.5
Different type of glass

Glazing sealants
Glazing gaskets
Performance Requirements
Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact load without failure. Including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication and installation; failure of sealants and
gaskets to remain water tight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials or other
defects in construction.
1.5.1
Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimal and are for detailing only.
Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thickness indicated but not less
than thickness in strengths required to meet or exceed the following:
1.5.2
Wind Loads: Determine wind loads applicable to project in minute per second at 10.0 m
above grade.
1.5.3
Maximum lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges provide thickness
required that limits enter deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side
length or 25 mm whichever is less.
Minimum thickness for exterior glass lites: Not less than 6 mm.
1.5.4
Thermal Movement: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movement resulting from
maximum change in ambient and surface temperature acting on glass framing members
and glazing components.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-2
December 2010

Specifications
1.6
Quality Assurance
1.6.1
System Performance: Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and
installed without defective manufacture, fabrication and installation.
1.6.2
Single Source Responsibility: Provide materials from one source for each type of glass
and glazing product and accessories indicated and installation method indicated.
1.6.3
Safety Glass Standards: Where safety glass is indicated on Drawings, provide types of
products which comply with the Specifications and testing requirements. Provide safety
glass permanently marked with certification label.
1.7
Delivery Storage and Handling

Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with
manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass and damage to
glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, temperature
changes, direct exposure to sun or other causes.
For insulating-glass units comply with manufacturer's recommendation for venting and
sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
1.8
Project Conditions
1.8.1
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer
or when channel substrates are wet due to rain, condensation or other causes. Install
glazing sealants only when ambient and substrates temperatures are above 15C.
1.9
Warranty
Without depriving the Employer of any rights under provision of the Contract A special
warranty shall be agreed from glass manufacturer to furnish replacement to all glass that
deteriorate from normal use within the period indicated below:
Coated glass or insulating glass: 10 years from date of substantial completion
Laminated Glass: 5 years from date of substantial completion
Factory sealed double glazed units are guaranteed against leakage, malfunction and
other defects under normal usage for a period of ten (10) years form date of
substantial completion.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-3
December 2010
PART 2
2.1

Specifications
PRODUCTS
Primary Float Glass Products
Float Glass
drawings).
-
ASTM C1036, Type I (Transparent glass, flat Class as indicated on
Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing, and light-reducing where indicated).
Refer to coated glass product requirements for tint colour and performance
characteristics of coated tinted glass for monolithic glazing relative to visible light
transmittance, U-values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance.
Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of
assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light
transmittance, U-values, shading coefficient and visible reflectance.
2.2
Heat Treated Float Glass Products

Fabrication Process: by horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as indicated, unless otherwise indicated. Tongheld
method is not acceptable.
Uncoated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated
surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select),
kind as indicated below:
-
Kind HS (Heat Strengthened) where indicated.

Kind FT (Fully Tempered) where indicated.
Uncoated,Tinted, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated

surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and lightreducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), with tint colour and performance characteristics
for 6 mm thick glass matching those indicated for annealed primary tinted float glass;
kind as indicated below:
-

Coated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other coated
glass), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), with
coating type and performance characteristics complying with requirements specified
under coated glass products; kind as indicated below:
-

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-4
December 2010

Specifications
Coated, Tinted, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other coated
glass), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and light-reducing),
Quality q3 (glazing select), with kind, coating type, and performance characteristics
complying with requirements specified under coated glass products.
Tempered glass shall comply with ANSI Z97.1 and shall be heat checked or heat soaked.
2.3
Coated Monolithic Glass Products

General: Performance characteristics designated for coated monolithic glass products are
nominal values based on manufacturer's published test data for glass products 6.0 mm
thick, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements specified including those
for primary and heat-treated float glass products as they relate to properties of glass to
which coatings are applied.
Provide heat-treated coated float glass of kind indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,
kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with
system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where coated
safety glass is designated or required.
Provide Kind HS (Heat-strengthened) coated float glass and Kind FT (Fully Tempered)
products where coated safety glass is designated or required.
Coated glass shall be hard coated so as to enable application of silicone sealant directly
on the coated suface without requiring any descaling of the coating for the retainer strips
and insulated glass.
Coated, Heat-Treated Spandrel Glass:
-
Kind HS (Heat Strengthened).

Kind FT (Fully Tempered).
Opacifier as indicated on drawings.
Low Emissivity-Coated (Low-E) Glass: Units coated with a durable, neutral-colored,

low-emissivity metallic coating, of pyrolytic type and on surface indicated.
2.4
LAMINATED GLASS PRODUCTS

Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other
requirements specified.
-
Kind LA : Two Lites of annealed Type I glass.

Kind LHS : Two Lites of heat-strengthened Type I glass.
Kind LT : Two Lites of full-tempered Type I glass.
Interlayer: Interlayer material as indicated below, and of thickness indicated with a

proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical
properties after laminating glass lites and installation.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-5
December 2010

Specifications
Interlayer-Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets, 1 mm thick, clear.
Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign

substances and air or glass pockets as follows:
Laminate lites with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure.
2.5
Insulated Glass Products

Sealed Insulation Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites
of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E774 and with other
requirements indicated.
Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,
Kind HS (Heat Strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with
system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (Fully Tempered) where safety
glass is designated or required.
Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass are nominal values
based on manufacturer's published test data for units with lites 6.0 mm thick and
nominal 12 mm dehydrated space between lites, unless otherwise indicated.
Sealing System: Dual seal; primary sealant (minimum width 3.0 mm): Polyisobutylene;
secondary sealant: silicone.
Spacer Material: Manufacturer's standard metal.
Desiccant: Manufacturer's standard; either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.
Corner Construction : Manufacturer's bent and welded construction.
2.6
Mirror Glass
Clear float glass conforming to specified standard, quality q1, silvering, 6 mm thick.
Cut glass to sizes indicated and complete edge treatment. Grind, polish and bevel mirror
edges not framed. Coat back of glass with chemically deposited silver, covered by film
of electrically or chemically deposited copper, and coated with manufacturer's standard
0.05 mm dry film of organic coating.
2.7
Low E Glass
Low - emissivity glass shall be high performance type with emissivity 55 % lower than
first generation pyroplytics. Low - E glass shall be used as inner panel for all double
glazing units.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-6
December 2010
2.8

Specifications
Glazing Sealants
General
:Comply with the following requirements:
Elastomeric Sealant Standard :Provide elastomeric sealant which complies with

ASTM C 920 requirements.
Colors
2.9
:Provide color as selected

manufacturer's standard colors.
by
Engineer
from
Miscellaneous Glazing Materials

Compatibility:
Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation.
Cleaners, Primers and Sealers:
Type recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Setting Blocks:
Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants,
80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, 100 mm minimum length by width to suit glass
thickness.
Shims and Spacers:
Shims and spacers used with setting blocks shall be of the same material, hardness,
length and width as the setting blocks.
Edge Blocks:
Same material as setting blocks, of 50 to 60 Shore A durometer, of size to limit lateral
movement of glass.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-7
December 2010
2.10

Specifications
Glass Types
Provide the following glass types subject to compliance with the criteria specified herein
and as detailed below:
A)
Insulated Glass Vision Panel

As a reference the performance characteristics of a 1" (26 mm) insulated glazed unit for
typical vision panel with clear glass is based on,
6 mm
12 mm
6 mm
B)
Reflective tempered glass outer panel.

Airspace
Tinted Inner glass panel shall be low-E glass
Clear Sheet Glass

Clear sheet glass shall be transparent, flat, relatively thin glass having a glossy, firefinished, plain and smooth surface. The defects permitted in the central area of the type
of glass are a few seeds, an occasional large seed not more than 6mm. long, faint
strings or lines, and very light scratches and other surface defects detected only by
close security. No pane (separate piece of glass) shall contain all of these defects and
those present may not be clustered when in the central area. In general, the central area
of light shall be as free from defects as possible and the appearance of the light as a
whole shall be such that there is no perceptible interference with sight through the
glass.
The clear sheet glass shall not weight less than 10 kg/m2 when 4mm thick and not less
than 15 kg/m2 when 6mm thick.
C)
Polished Plate Glass

Polished plate glass shall have its two surfaces perfectly flat and parallel so that they
provide undistorted vision and reflection. Polished plate or float glass shall not weigh
less than 10 kg/m2 when 4mm thick and not less than 15 kg/m2 when 6mm thick. The
respective weights of the 8, 10, and 12mm thick polished plate glass shall be as
manufactured by "PILKINGTON", "SAINT GOBAIN" or approved equivalent.
Mirror glass shall be 6mm thick or as shown on the Drawings or stated in the Bills of
Quantities. It shall be of selected quality plate glass silvered on one side, electro- copperbacked followed by a coating of shellac varnish and painted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Tinted polished glass shall be "Parsol Bronze" as manufactured by "Saint Gobain" or of
an approved equivalent.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-8
December 2010
D)

Specifications
Tempered Float Glass

Tempered float glass shall be "Securit" or approved equal. Tempered glass shall impart
mechanical strength and shall be impact resistant. When under terrific impact, it shall
disintegrate into innumerable small, blunt edged fragments and not into sharp-like
ordinary glass.
E)
Wired Glass
1.
General
The wired glass shall be fire retardant conforming to the applicable requirement of
B.S. 476, Part 22. Wired glass shall be either Transparent Georgian Polished Wired or
Translucent Georgian Wired Cast as specified hereinafter.
2.
Transparent Georgian Polished Wired
The transparent Georgian polished wire (where shown on the Drawings) shall be a glass
with a polished plate finish having a fine 13mm square mesh wire reinforcement which
is electrically welded at each intersection. The thickness of transparent Georgian
polished wire shall not be less than 6mm weighing not less than 15 kg/m2 and having
80% diffused light transmission.
3.
Translucent Georgian Wired Cast
The translucent Georgian wired cast shall be a roughcut glass with a 13mm square mesh
wire reinforcement electrically welded at each intersection. The thickness of
translucent Georgian wired cast shall not be less than 6 mm weighing not less than
17.1 kg/m2 and having 75% diffused light transmission.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
General
Verify compliance with applicable tolerances; for functioning of weep system; for face
and edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Report conditions detrimental
to glazing work. Perform glazing work after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Clean glazing channels immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not
firmly bonded to substrates.
Comply with the combined recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers
of sealants and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are
indicated by referenced glazing standards.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-9
December 2010

Specifications
Glazing channels are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and
face clearances and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as
required by Project conditions during installation.
Project glass from damage. Remove and dispose of glass units with damage or
imperfections of kind that impairs performance or appearance.
Prime joint surfaces as required for adhesion of sealant.
Install setting blocks one quarter of glass width from each corner but with edge nearest
corner not closer than 150 mm from corner of 0.125 times glass width, whichever is
greater. Install blocks to prevent movement.
Provide spacers of correct size and spacing for clearances, for glass sizes larger than
1200 united millimeters (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes are
used for glazing. Provide 3 mm minimum bit of spacers on glass and use thickness
equal to sealant width, or slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
Provide edge blocking to comply with referenced glazing standard. Install edge blocks
securely, between the midheight and top corner of the glass and antiwalk blocks as
required.
Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of appearances.
Provide compressible filler rods as recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers, to
prevent sealant from clogging weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface
and to control depth of sealant.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting"
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to
provide a "wash" away from glass.
3.2
Insulating Glass
Insulating glass units shall be 24 m thick, consisting of two panes of 6 mm glass
separated by a desiccant filled metal spacer with bent, welded or fused corners, and
welded or fused splices or joints to provide a continuous 12 mm hermetically sealed and
dehydrated space. Insulating glass seal shall be dual seal with polyisobutylene and
silicone sealants and certified for compliance with seal classification "CBA" by the
Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) and shall meet the requirements of ASTM
E774 when tested in accordance with the following ASTM test methods. Secondary seal
for structural silicone glazed units shall be a silicone edge seal certified for use in
structural silicone glazing applications over the temperature range and structural loading
as called for by the performance criteria section of this specification.
-
E773 Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
E774 Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
E546 Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-10
December 2010

Specifications
E576 Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical
Position.
The glass shall be fully heat strengthened or tempered as specified to assure adequate
glass performance at the design pressures specified under the performance criteria. Glass
manufacturer's recommendations are to be accompanied by wind load and thermal stress
analysis.
The contractor shall provide certification from the glass producer/fabricator that the
glass producer/fabricator has reviewed glass thickness and finds it suitable for the
purpose intended in accordance with his published literature and in accordance with
these specifications.
3.3
Mirrors
Apply one additional coat of backing paint and allow to dry. Apply mirror mastic to
cover not more than 25% of back of mirror. Set mirror on base support, on setting
blocks or continuous gasket, and press against substrate to ensure bond of adhesive.
Leave open ventilation space, 3 mm or more in thickness between mirror and substrate.
Do not seal-off ventilation space at edge of mirror.
3.4
Tape Glazing
Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are
flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make
them fit opening.
Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills
first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by
applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
openings.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-11
December 2010
3.5

Specifications
Gasket Glazing (Dry)

Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit
openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets
producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. Gaskets shall have moulded
corners.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6
Sealant Glazing (Wet)

Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face
clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until
sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed
sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away
from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of
channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
3.7
Heat Soaking of Tempered Glass

All tempered glass shall be subject to heat soaking tested prior to delivery to site.
3.8
Protection and Cleaning
3.8.1
Protection: Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of
crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers
to surfaces of glass. Remove non-permanent labels and clean surfaces.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact
with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped. cracked, abraded or damaged in
other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and
vandalism.
3.8.2
Cleaning: Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of
project.Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Glazing
Section 08800-12
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 09220
PLASTERING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of plastering as required by the Contract.
Metal lath and accessories

Portland cement plaster
Stucco finishes
Extent of each type of plaster work is indicated on Drawings and in Finishing Tables.
1.3
Reference Standards
Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the Specifications
of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the British Standard
Specifications (BS) latest edition as noted hereinbelow or other International Standards
and Codes of Practice.
1.4
Related Sections
The following specification sections include requirements which relate to this section
Concrete Masonry
Joint Sealers
Rough Carpentry
1.5
Submittals
Submit the following In accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division - 1
Specification Section'.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-1
December 2010
1.5.1

Specifications
Product Data
Materials list and manufacturer's data including test results and certificates of
compliance.
1.5.2
1.5.3
Samples
Representative samples of all materials and colour chart.
Three 1 meter square panels as samples for each type of plaster finish
Three 300 mm long samples of galvanized metal corner beads and galvanized
metal joint control angles (plaster stop).
Shop Drawings
1.6
Shop drawings showing location of different kinds of plaster, materials or

textures, relation with different surfaces, finishing., and other units of work
Storage of Materials
Metals shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter and shall be
protected from corrosion.
Cementitious materials shall be stored in their original, unbroken packages or
containers in a weathertight and dry place, until ready for installation.
Immediately upon receipt at the Site, cement shall be stored in dry, weathertight
properly ventilated structures.
Sand shall be piled in a manner that shall provide good drainage and prevent
intermixing with foreign matter and damage from construction traffic and other causes.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Materials: The contractor shall ensure that supplies of materials are sufficient to give
consistent and uniform colour to surface finishes which are not to be painted.
2.1
Cement
Shall be a gray standard brand of Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to ASTM 150
and BS 12.
White cement shall comply to BS and ASTM standards.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-2
December 2010
2.2

Specifications
Sand
Shall be natural siliceous sands from approved pits hard, durable, clean and free from
adherent coating such as clay and from any appreciable amount of clay in pellet form. It
shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, salts, coals or other organic
impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, flaky or elongated particles in
such a form or in sufficient quantity to affect adversely the hardening, strength,
durability or appearance of any material in contact with it. The various sizes of particles
of which sand is composed shall be uniformly distributed throu2hout the mass and shall
be graded within the following limits
Sieve Size
8
16
30
50
100
Percent Passing (By Weight)

95
75-90
30-55
10-35
0-7
Except as otherwise indicated, for finish coat of cement plaster, use sand passing No. 12
sieve. For floated finish coat use sand passing No. 16 sieve. For trowelled finish coat
use sand passing No. 20 sieve
2.3
Lime
Shall be high calcium hydrated lime containing not less than 90% by weight of calcium
oxide and conforming to BS and ASTM standards.
2.4
Lime Putty
Shall be made of quick lime properly slaked and screened through a 3 mm mesh sieve,
stored and properly protected for 15 days before using.
2.5
Water
Shall be drinking water or water of chemical composition acceptable for drinking,
except for bacteriological limits and shall be clean water free from oil, salt, acid, alkali,
organic or other deleterious matter.
2.6
Colour Pigments
Shall be of an approved manufacturer, lime-proof, non fading and complying with BS
1014.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-3
December 2010
2.7

Specifications
Metal Lath
Shall conform to ES No. 261 and be plain expanded metal lath No. 22 (steel) formed
from steel metal, free from broken strands and corrosive pitting, rectangular, weighing
not less than 135 kg/m2 meshes shall be 38 x 38 mm thickness of ribs shall not be less
than 1 mm rib depth shall not be more than 3 mm and painted during, manufacturing
with a black cold applied bitumen solution as BS 3416
Unless otherwise on indicated on Drawings, suspension of metal lath f'alse ceilings
shall be with the following items:
2.7.1
Runner Bars: Supporting suspended ceilings shall be galvanized steel rods, hot rolled
mild steel, round bars, conforming, to ES 262, 8 mm diameter, spaced not more than
500 mm in two cross-wise directions, fastened to hangers supplied in section of
reinforced concrete.
2.7.2
Tying Wire: Shall be galvanized as BS 443, double annealed galvanized steel wire, soft
temper. Except where otherwise required shall be 1.2 mm diameter Ends of wire shall
be bent away from face of plastering.
2.7.3
Vertical Supports (Hangers): Normal mild galvanized steel bars 8 mm diameter with
one end attached to concrete slab and other end bend to form a loop for inclusion of
horizontal supports (runners).
2.8
Plaster Accessories
Coordinate depth of accessories with thickness and number of coats required.
Metal beads shall be galvanized steel with PVC protective nosing.
2.8.1
Metal Corner Beads: Shall be small nose comer beads fabricated from 0. 5 mm thick
alvanized steel sheets, with expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond lath to allow full
firm encasement by plaster.
2.8.2
Metal corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large mesh, diamond metal lath fabricated
from zinc alloy or welded wire mesh of 1.2 mm diameter, zinc coated wire and
specially formed to reinforce external corners.
2.8.3
Metal Joint Control Angles (Plaster Stop): Shall be 0.5 mm thick galvanized steel
prefabricated angles 26 x 13 mm, with expanded flange of large-mesh diamond lath to
allow full encasement by plaster. The longer leg of the angle, shall have 4 mm diameter
perforations at 250 mm centers.
2.8.4
Steel Channels: Shall be 0. 5 mm thick galvanized steel channels 20 x 13 mm with

anchors and expanded flange of large mesh diamond lath to allow full fixation to
subbase and full encasement by plaster.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-4
December 2010
2.8.5
PART 3

Specifications
Control Joints: Prefabricated of zinc alloy 0.6 mm thick can be in one price in M
configuration with expanded metal flanges, or in 2 pieces beads with back flanges
formed to provide slips-joint action adjustable for joints width from 6 mm to 20 mm
Provide removable protection tape on plaster face of control joints.
EXECUTION
3.1
Workmanship
3.1.1
General: The whole of the work shall be executed in a neat workmanlike manner, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Any work rejected through non-compliance with the
specification shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall commence work when instructed and shall clear all unused materials
and plaster waste from Site when the work is complete.
Surfaces of masonry walls or concrete shall be well cleaned by wire brush, joints on
masonry shall be raked out at least 15 mm then shall be thoroughly wetted with water
before spatter-dash is applied.
Projections, loose mortar and concrete fins shall be hacked off. Spatter-dash shall be
sprayed with water for a period of 5 days.
Dots and bands shall be used to produce plaster surfaces level and true. Dots shall be
plumb of 50 x 100 mm dimension and thickness as required but not less than 15 mm
and shall be made of gypsum at Intervals not exceeding 2.0 m in horizontal and vertical
directions, to cover the entire surface to be plastered.
Dots shall be also at intersection of ceiling with walls and corners.
Bands shall extend in a horizontal or vertical direction between dots and be formed of
the same mortar as that of the coat applied
Plaster base coat shall be applied between bands to cover the entire work surface.
Dots shall be removed and the resulting voids shall be filled with plaster and finished as
adjacent surfaces.
All faces shall be true and flat and angles shall be straight, level, and plumb.
Surface of undercoats shall be well scratched to provide a key for finishing coats.
Surfaces indicated as floated shall be finished with a wood or felt float to a flat surface
free from trowel marks.
Surfaces indicated as trowelled smooth shall be Finished with a steel trowel to a smooth
surface free from trowel marks.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-5
December 2010

Specifications
Beads and stops shall be fixed plumb, square and true to line and level, plaster shall be
flat with opening's frames
3.1.2
Samples: Samples shall be prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer for
finishing coat of different items.
3.2
Corner Beads
Corner beads shall be provided on external angles of the plastered surfaces. including
heads and jambs of openings having plastered reveals and where shown on Drawinas.
Corner beads shall be mitred, closely fitted to solid backgrounds and shall be securely
anchored at intervals along each Side. Corner beads shall be carried either from floor to
door or window lintels, or from floor to ceiling.
3.3
Metal Joint Control Angles

Angle sections shall be fixed on the wall at joints edges or where shown on Drawings,
through the expanded legs by means of plaster dabs and fishers fasteners 4 mm
diameter, at 250 mm centers along each side of the corner The plaster shall be applied
after fixing the angles.
The arise of beads and stops shall be fixed plumb, square and true to line and level into
final position.
Control-joints shall be at location indicated. Joints shall be filled as specified in Section
07900 "Joint Sealers".
3.4
Metal Lathing
Coordinate installation of hangers with pouring of concrete slabs to ensures inserts and
other anchorage provisions have been installed in a manner that will develops their full
strength and at spacing required.
Metal sheets shall be applied with the long way of the mesh at right angles to the
bearings or supports, with all mesh strands sloping in the same direction. Lathing shall
be fixed from the center outwards so that it is well stretched taut out and secured to
each bearings at 200 mm intervals with 1.2 mm diameter galvanized tie wire.
Lath shall be lapped at sides not less the mm 15 mm, and at ends not less than 20 mm.
End laps of sheets shall occur over supports and fixed with tying wire at not more than
100 mm center. Each tie shall be tightly wrapped three times around supporting bars.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-6
December 2010
3.5

Specifications
Measuring Plaster Mix

Ingredients of the plaster mix shall be proportioned and measured by means of
calibrated boxes or containers so that the quantities can be readily and accurately
checked
3.6
Mixing of Plaster
3.6.1
Mixing shall preferably be by machine. The plaster ingredients shall be thoroughly.

mixed together, and no more shall be mixed at one time than can be properly
incorporated in the work within 1/2 hour after mixing. The mixing shall continue for
such time as shall ensure uniform distribution of materials and uniform colour and
consistency. It is important to note that the quantity of water used shall be carefully
controlled. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials
No material shall be allowed to remain overnight in the mixers or mixing boxes. Do not
retemper or use retempered plaster. Tools and implements used in mixing or
transporting plaster shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use, and kept clean and free
from previous mixes.
3.6.2
Stucco Finish Coat: add water only to factory packaged materials according to
manufacturer's instruction.
3.7
Curing
All plaster coats made of mortar containing cement shall be kept in a constant
moistened condition by being sprayed as often as required for five (5) days.
3.8
Drying
Protect plaster from too rapid drying and provide air circulation when drying is too
slow,
For exterior plastering the Contractor shall provide a protective covering with tarpaulins
or canvas rolls which must be hung so that it is clear of the finished surface. Any
defects caused by inadequate protection shall be remedied at the Contractor's expense.
3.9
Compositor and Application of Plaster

All surfaces shall be thoroughly sprayed with water and free water allowed to disappear
before plaster is applied.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated by the Engineer. plaster coat shall be two-layers
work, except for ceiling. Each coat shall be applied to each wall and ceiling surface in
one continuous operation and shall be applied at full thickness down to floor level,
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-7
December 2010

Specifications
The mix of each successive layer or coat must never be richer in cement than the mix
used for the coat to which it is applied
Two coats having the same mix properties can only be applied successively if the
second coat is thinner than the first.
The type and mix of plaster shall be for each location as indicated on Drawings and on
finishing table. Adjust mix proportions below within limits to attain workability.
3.9.1
Interior Plastering for Walls
Spatter-dash (Tartasha): Shall be done by forcibly throwing on wet mix of

portland cement and coarse sand in the proportion of 450 kg cement to 1 M3 sand
and shall be kept wet with a fine water spray until set and shall be allowed to
harden before the next coat is applied
Base Coat 1st layer shall be applied to a thickness of 15 mm (including dash coat)
unless otherwise 'mentioned. The surface shall be brought to true planes with all
angles and corners to a right angle with rod and darby, well scored, combed or
cross-scratched in two directions to prepare a good mechanical key for the
following coat.
When plastering is applied in one coat the scratching shall be omitted
Base coat mix shall be proportioned as follows:
-
3.9.2
1 m3 sand
250 kg ordinary cement
Finishing layer (Float Coat): Shall be 5 mm thick of same proportions of 1 layer

and shall be applied as soon as 1 layer has set firmly bonded to the background.
Steel trowel to uniformly smooth surfaces or wood float as directed, except where
other finish is required.
Interior Plastering for Ceiling

Spatter-dash coat and one 15 mm thick coat as specified hereinbefore in, Clauses 3 9.1.
3.9.3
Exterior Plastering
Spatter-dash: Shall be done as Clause 3.9.1.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-8
December 2010

Specifications
Base Coat: Shall be 15 mm thick and proportioned as follows:

-
300 kg ordinary portland cement 1 m3 sand

Lime may be added as required.
Base coat shall be finished as per Clause 3.9.1.
Finishing Coat Shall be

a.
Proportioned as in Clause 3.9.3) applied by hand and the finish shall be

smooth, done by either steel trowelling, wood floating, or by sponge to give
a smooth texture
b.
Shall be proportioned as follows:

-
White cement
Marble or stone. Powder
Lime
Coloured finish coat plastering shall be coloured by the addition of

colouring agents and pigments to the engineer approval.
Finish shall be smooth or rough texture or pebble-dash (sprayed finish) as
required.
Smooth rendering shall be done by either steel trowelling or wood floating.
Textured rendering shall be done by using special tools, cork, carpet float
hacks and blades or the edge of steel trowels.
Pebble dash (sprayed finish) shall be applied with an approved machine
hand operated or mechanically operated to give a honeycomb finish of even
texture and thickness. The sprayed finish shall be applied in an approved
number of separated coats allowing time for drying between coats.
Application in one continuous spraying operation to obtain a thick layer
shall not be permitted
3.10
Plaster on Metal Lathing

Forcibly hand applied scratch coat shall be of cement mortar composed of 450 kg
cement to 1 m3 sand to cover metal lath completely, followed by, spatter-dash
undercoat and finishing coat as specified on the Finishing Tables The overall thickness
shall be 50 mm.
Shall be cured by spraying with water during at least 3 consecutive days.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-9
December 2010
3.11

Specifications
Cement-Sand Plaster - Skirtings and Bases

Shall be a mix of 1 m3 sand to 350 kg cement for undercoat and finishing coat. Except
where otherwise noted, cement plaster finish shall be floated to a uniform medium sand
rough finished texture. Where smooth cement plaster is designated, use steel trowel to
uniformly smooth surfaces. Cement-sand plaster shall be used for skirtings and bases,
or as indicated in drawings.
3.12
Patching, and Repairs

Prior to start painting operations, damaged portions of plaster shall be repaired.
Patching and repairing shall be neatly and accurately done and shall match the finish of
the adjoining work. Where plaster surfaces are marred, discoloured, stained or
otherwise damaged, patching and repairing shall be carried to the limits as determined
and where necessary, the finish coat shall be removed and be replaced with new
acceptable work. Patching, repairing and joining work shall be neatly done. Cut out
broken or damaged portions of plaster and repair with new work. Cut out cracks not
less than 2.5 mm wide and plaster full and smooth. Moisten edge of patch area before
new plaster is applied. Match plaster patches to adjacent existing work that is to remain.
3.13
Cleaning
Upon completion of plastering work, sweep and clean floors throughout, including
ledges or other surfaces carrying plaster droppings.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Plastering
Section 09220-10
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
Conditions of Particular Application and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the ceramic floor and glazed wall work as indicated on Drawings
and required by the Contract and shall include the following items:
Glazed Wall Tiles

Unglazed Floor Ceramic Tiles
Quarry Tiles
Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles
Extent of ceramic tiles is indicated on the Drawings and finishing tables.

1.3
Reference Standards
BS NO.
1281
1286
1.4
Glazed Ceramic Tiles and Tile Fittings for Internal Walls

Clay Tiles for Flooring
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division-1
1.4.1
Product Data: Materials list and manufacturer's data for each type of tile mortar, grout or
other product specified.
Installation and maintenance instructions.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Ceramic Tiles
Section 09310-1
December 2010

Specifications
1.4.2
Shop Drawings: Including complete installation details and layout plans, location of
expansion, control joints in the tile substrates. Tile patterns and locations
1.4.3
Samples: In triplicate of all tiles, special pieces and fittings in each manufacturer's
colour, texture and pattern available. Include samples of accessories involving colour
selection.
Grout samples showing the fill range of colour available.
1.4.4
Test Reports: Material test report from qualified testing laboratory indicating test results
relative to compliance of tile, tile setting and grouting products with requirements
indicated and as per international standards.
1.5
Protection
Maintain temperature at 30C or more in tiled areas during installation and for 5 days
after completion.
Provide tile protection whenever required. Material likely to stain or deface tile shall not
be used. Close grouted tile floors to traffic completely for 24 hours after installation;
thereafter, permit traffic on ceramic tile floors after 4 days and only over protective
covering of cardboard or equivalent.
1.6
Quality Assurance
1.6.1
Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each colour, grade, type and variety of tile from a single
source.
1.6.2
Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform

quality from one manufacturer for adhesive, and admixture components, and from one
source for each aggregate.
1.6.3
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has successfully completed

tile installations similar in material and extent to that indicated for work.
1.6.4
Field constructed Mock-Ups Before installing tiles, erect mock-ups for each form of
construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution.
1.7
Related Sections
The following sections include requirements which relate to this section
Unit Masonry Assemblies
Joint Sealants
Metal Lath and Plaster
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Ceramic Tiles
Section 09310-2
December 2010
1.8

Specifications
Delivery and Storage

The Contractor shall deliver ceramic tile materials to the Site in the manufacturer's
unopened original containers and shall store them in a shaded protected locations.
Adhesive, cement, lime, packaged materials for mortar and grout shall be furnished in
bags displaying the manufacturer's trademark and indicating type of material. Materials
for mortar and grout shall be dry and free of lumps and shall be stored above ground in
weather tight locations.
Sand shall be stored and handled in such a manner as to prevent intermixing with
foreign matter.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
Materials
Shall be first grade as shown on the drawings and shall conform to the requirements of
the Standard Specifications of the country of origin. Tiles shall be true to shape, flat, free
from flaws, cracks or crazing and keyed on the reverse side. The glazed surface shall
show no objectionable surface blemishes or defects when examined. Thickness and
facial dimensions of tiles shall be as indicated on Drawings or in Finishing Tables. The
Engineer shall select colours, textures, patterns and other appearance characteristics.
The following marks shall be legibly and indelibly impressed on the unglazed back of
each tile, and tile fittings:
The name of the manufacturer and identifying mark.

The name of the country where the tile is made.
2.1.1
Glazed Wall Tiles: Shall be units with impervious glazed finish fused to a non-vitreous
body of soft white-ware bisque, composed of suitable materials such as shale, feldspar
or quartz. Water absorption shall not exceed 4%. Finish shall be matte glaze square
edge. Minimum thickness shall be 6 mm.
2.1.2
Ceramic Floor Tiles (Unglazed) : Shall be impervious dust pressed unglazed tiles made
of refined natural clay composition or refined and blended ceramic powders kiln fired
above red heat to a temperature of 1300 to 2000C and with abrasive content for slip
resistance. Water absorption shall not exceed 6%. Tiles shall be uniform in composition
with a glazed surface and of excellent wearing qualities consistent throughout their
thicknesses. Minimum thickness shall be 8 mm, or 7% of the longest diagonal
dimension and a maximum thickness of 18 mm
2.1.3
Quarry Tiles: Shall be formed by the extrusion process from unrefined natural clay or
shale and hard burnt. Water absorption shall not exceed 5%. Shall be unaffected by
moisture, acids, oils or chemicals. Quarry tiles shall be unglazed with an abrasive
aggregate embedded into surface for slip resistance, durable, machine made and of
minimum thickness of 10 mm. Color of the body shall be the same throughout as that of
the exposed surface. Quarry tiles shall conform to BS 6431.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Ceramic Tiles
Section 09310-3
December 2010
2.1.4

Specifications
Special Pieces: Provide special units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to
comply with following requirements:
-
External and internal comers bull-nose shape.
Tapered transition tile, with shape assigned to effect transition between thickness
of tile and adjoining finishes of different thicknesses.
Curved units for transition from wall to horizontal floor.
2.1.5
Ceramic Skirting: Units are prepared in the same way as ceramic tiles, but must also
have one top surface and bull-nose glazed. Units shall be of the same colour and length
of the adjoining floor tiles, and the height shall be as required.
2.1.6
Bedding mortar: shall be cement and sand in accordance with BS and ASTM added in
accurate proportions.
2.1.7
Sand: Shall be clean and sharp, properly graded for the purpose and containing not
more than % by weight of clay, loam, silt or other deleterious matter.
Cement: For mortar beds and backing shall be a standard brand of Portland cement
conforming with BS 12 and ASTM A150.
Acid proof Cement: For grouting and mortar joints in ceramic floor tiles of toilets
and shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
Water: Only potable water or water whose composition is acceptable for drinking
except in respect to bacteriological requirements shall be used for mixing mortar.
Grout and Pointing
Cement Sand: Shall be white or coloured cement mixed with water to a creamy
consistency,
Latex Portland Cement Grout: Shall be the mixture of the above grout with a latex
additive added in a concentrate or dilute form at the site, or a factory prepared dry
mixed combining cement with aggregate and polymer additive to which only water
is added at the sites.
Latex-based mortar grouting shall be used for the kitchens and where specified. Care
must be taken, as latex-portland cement grout is very difficult to remove from the
exposed tile-face.
2.1.8
Expanded Metal: Shall be 40 mm mesh 17 gauge (1.37 mm) galvanized poultry wire.
2.1.9
Adhesive Styrene: butadiene rubber adhesive or cement-based adhesive, shall be. From
an approved manufacturer and shall comply with the performance requirements of C.P.
212 Part 1.
For kitchens an epoxy-based adhesive shall be used.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Ceramic Tiles
Section 09310-4
December 2010
2.1.10

Specifications
Elastomeric Sealants: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric

sealants of base polymer and characteristics that comply with requirements of Section
07920 "Joint Sealants".
Provide colours of exposed sealant to match colours of grouting tile adjoining sealed
joints.
2.1.11
Trim Units: Provide trim units to match adjoining flat tile and the requirements indicated
in Drawings or requested by Engineer, and shall comply with the size and coursing of
adjoining flat tile.
2.1.12
Bordering Edge Trim: Listelly profile, smoothly rounded to protect the borders of tiling,
sections shall be in aluminium or PVC according to colour and Engineer instructions,
with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
Preparation
Prior to setting tiles, inspect surfaces and arrange for the satisfactory correction of
defects. Grounds, bucks, outlet and receptacle boxes, rough plumbing and other fixtures
and fittings, shall be in place and trenches, chases or other openings in floors and walls
shall be properly closed.
Substrates for setting tiles shall be firm, dry, clean and free from oil or waxy films or
curing compounds.
Remove coating, curing compounds and other substances incompatible with tile setting
material by using a concrete grinder, or polishing machine equipped with a heavy duty
brush.
3.2
Workmanship
Work shall be set in accordance with the applicable manufacturer's

recommendations except where in conflict with this section. Work shall be
carefully laid out, providing symmetry about center lines of the space or areas and
adjust to minimize tile cutting, avoiding small, unsightly cuts. Use of thin cuts and
pieces, chipped, spalled or otherwise disfigured tiles, will not be allowed. Unless
otherwise required tile heights of walls may finish one-half course above or below
indicated heights to avoid cutting of tile. Dampen wall surface with clean water
and apply a spatter dash coat composed of one part cement to one and one-half
parts sand. Spatter dash coat shall be applied at least 16 hours prior to setting tiles.
Immediately before applying the mortar setting beds on wall surfaces, the
underlying scratch coats or spatter dash coats shall be moistened with clean water
to prevent it absorbing water from the bedding coat. Each tile shall be buttered
evenly with mortar and tapered firmly into position so that the bed is solid
throughout.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Ceramic Tiles
Section 09310-5
December 2010

Specifications
Joints shall be even and not more than 3 mm wide, they shall be continuous both
horizontally and vertically.
Any necessary adjustment of tiles shall be made within 10 minutes of fixing, and
tiles shall be cleaned off after not less than two hours.
3.3
Setting Beds
3.3.1
With Mortar
The mortar for setting beds shall be composed of one part Portland cement to four parts
sand with sufficient mixing water. The mortar shall be spread to true even planes, at
proper thickness for the finish, using screed strips, No more setting mortar shall be
spread than can be covered with tile before the mortar reaches its initial set. Should more
mortar be spread than can thus be covered, the unfinished portion of the setting bed shall
be cut back to a clean beveled edge and removed. Setting beds of thickness more than 50
mm or over membrane waterproofing shall have wire reinforcement with edges lapped
at least 50 mm. Beds that have partially hardened shall not be retempered.
3.3.2
With Adhesive
Provide a concrete or cement plaster substrate flat and plumb, or use trowelable levelling
and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and depression.
3.4
Cement based adhesive or epoxy based adhesive shall be prepared and used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to form a bed of not more
than 3 mm thick. Tiles shall be laid dry and tamped well down into the adhesive to
ensure proper bond and a level surface.
Adhesive shall be applied not more than 1 m2 at a time to prevent premature

drying out.
Bordering trim shall be applied flush with the adjoining tile surfaces, shall be cut
into the necessary length and pressed into the tiling mortar or adhesive, distributing
the mortar or adhesive within the fluting on both sides.
Setting of Tile
Mortar set non-vitreous tile shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one
hour prior to setting and shall be applied to setting beds while damp, but without free
water on the back of tile. Tile shall be accurately set, firmly pressed and beaten into full
mortar beds with flush, well fitted joints in true planes, graded or levelled and neatly cut
and fitted closely against abutting work. Intersections and returns shall be accurately
formed, and cuts rubbed smooth with fine stone. Edges of tiles to be set at protruding
corners shall be quirk metered. Cut edges shall be set against fixtures or other tile with at
least a I mm joint and shall fit sufficiently close to plumbing, For electric fixtures,
outlets, pipes and other projecting elements for coverage of joints use special plates,
escutcheons and collars. The splitting of tile, except where no alternative is possible,
will not be allowed.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Ceramic Tiles
Section 09310-6
December 2010

Specifications
Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint width layout tile work and center
tile in both directions in each space or on each wall.
Floor tile shall be set true to straight edge. Tile floors shall finish flush with the gratings,
strainers and drains.
Extend tile work into recess and under and behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruption.
3.5
Grouting
Joints shall be grouted up not less than 24 hours after fixing tiles.
Thoroughly wash out wall and floor tile joints and saturate with clean water before
grouting. Grout joints after setting beds are dry according to location with epoxy based
grouting or with neat cement grout white or coloured grouting cement mixed with water
to a creamy consistency and thoroughly forced into joints to fill entire depth.
Joints shall be grouted up solidly without voids, filled to full thickness of tile and
finished flush and neat with face of tile.
Surplus grout shall be cleaned off from faces of tiles.
When corved a skirting are not provided between floor and walls matching silicone
sealant shall be in the joint.
3.6
Expansion Joints
Locate expansion joints, and other sealant-filled joints, including: control, contraction
and isolation joints where indicated, during installation of setting materials, mortar beds,
and tile.
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrate.
Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with Section 07920 "Joint Sealants".
3.7
Curing
Water shall not be allowed on new tilling until bedding and grouting have completely
set.
Tiled surfaces shall be kept moist for a period of five (5)days to adequately cure the
cement mortar,
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Ceramic Tiles
Section 09310-7
December 2010
3.8

Specifications
Cleaning
After grouting has sufficiently set or hardened, tile surfaces shall be cleaned using soap
powder and clean water. Traces of cement or dust accumulations and foreign matter
shall be completely removed. Unglazed tiles may be cleaned with an acid solution
consisting of ten percent of muriatic acid and ninety percent water and rinsed with clean
water. Where acid solution is used, exposed hardware and plumbing trim shall be
covered with a coating of vaseline to protect the metal from the acid and its fumes.
Following cleaning, the vaseline coatings shall be removed. Do not use acid solution to
clean glazed tile.
Clean-up of all masking materials, equipment and debris from work area is the
responsibility of the Contractor.
3.9
Protection
Provide tile protection wherever required, material likely to stain or deface tile shall not
be used. Completely close grouted tile floors to traffic for 24 hours after installation.
Thereafter permit traffic on ceramic tile floors only over protective covering of
cardboard or equivalent.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Ceramic Tiles
Section 09310-8
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 09350
CEMENT TILES AND TERRAZZO
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of inlaid cement tiles and terrazzo tiles for floors and
bases as indicated on Drawings and required by the Contract.
Sand cushion cementitious terrazzo

Cement tiles
Extent of cement tiles or terrazzo tiles is shown on Drawings and schedule of

finishing.
1.3
Reference Standards
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
Product Data: Materials list and manufacturer's data of each type of terrazzo
components and material, include details of precast terrazzo construction of
materials, dimension and profiles.
1.4.2
Shop drawings including complete installation details and layout plans of dividers,
layout of base and border-strips. Show large scale details of terrazzo patterns.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 09350-1
December 2010

Specifications
1.4.3
Samples in triplicate of all units in each manufacturer's colour, texture and pattern
variation, prepare samples of the thickness and from the same material to be used.
1.4.4
Maintenance Data: Installation and maintenance instructions of each terrazzo type.
1.5
Related Sections
The following section includes requirements which relate to his section:
"Concrete and Reinforced Concrete"
1.6

Handle tiles in a manner not to chip edges or cause cracking to surfaces. Stacking
area should be clean and level. Tiles should be stocked under a covered area or be
protected from the weather by means of a tarpaulin or other suitable waterproof
covering.
Tiles should also be protected against penetration of water from the ground.
Tiles should always be stacked face to face.
Cement, packaged materials for mortar and grout shall be furnished in bags
displaying the manufacturer's trademark and indicating type of material.
Cement shall be dry and free of lumps and shall be stored above ground in a dry and
weathertight location.
Sand shall be natural stored and handled in such a manner as to prevent intermixing
with foreign matter.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
General
Material shall be standard grade as specified hereinafter and shall conform with the
requirements of the ASTM Standard Specifications.
Colour and pattern of tiles shall be selected by the Engineer.
Tiles shall be cast in strong metal moulds hydraulically pressed, made from cement
and aggregates to the proportions and size required and shall be square, their edges
and surfaces shall be at night angles to one another, all arises shall be sharp and
true. Tiles shall be cured, ground, filled and polished before distribution to site.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 09350-2
December 2010
2.2

Specifications
Inlaid Cement Tiles

Tiles shall be composed of two layers. Concrete backing shall be composed of
cement mortar 13 (by volume) cement to fine aggregate. Finish layer or facing laver
shall provide a minimum wearing and shall have a thickness of the tile thickness but
of a minimum thickness of 6 mm and a permissible deviation not exceeding I mm or
6% of the overall tile thickness and shall be composed of one part of stone powder
and two parts. of ordinary Portland or white or coloured cement as specified or
requested by Engineer.
2.3
Terrazzo Tiles
The finish layer or facing layer of the tiles shall be composed of one part of crushed
marble or granite chips, one part of marble powder and two parts of white or
coloured cement. Marble or granite chips applied as a facing shall be selected to
avoid off colour or contaminated materials and shall be crushed by a process that
largely eliminates flat or sliver-like chips and accurately graded by size.
Instead of ships large fractured marble set in mortar can be used. Wide irregular
joints between marble shall be filled with terrazzo matrix.
For outdoor uses, hard material such as iron grid or copper powder shall be added to
the mix to improve wearing resistance. The finish layer shall have a minimum
thickness of 8 mm.
Cross sections of tiles shall not show any separation between layers. Top surface
shall be smooth level, free from projections and depressions, with opposite edges
parallel homogeneously coloured and free of bucks, hair cracking, flaking and
efflorescent. Ground, grouted and reground to a fine grit finish aggregates shall be
evenly distributed,
The tiles shall not be delivered until a period of at least 7 days after pressing has
elapsed.
2.4
Cement
For manufacturing of tiles and for mortar beds cement shall be a standard brand of
gray Portland cement conforming to BS 12 and ASTM 150. White cement for
topping shall be as per ASTM standards.
2.5
Sand
Shall be clean, sharp. properly graded for the purpose, loam and silt content shall
not exceed 3 %.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 09350-3
December 2010
2.6

Specifications
Water
Only drinking water or water whose composition is acceptable for drinking except
in respect to bacteriological requirements shall be used for mixing mortar.
2.7
Marble Chips
Size shall be standard for mix indicated with a high abrasive-hardness value, and
maximum 0.75% absorption in 24 hours, dust content shall be less than 1% by
weight and containing no deleterious or foreign matter.
2.8
Matrix Pigments
Pure mineral or synthetic pigments, alkali resistant, colour stable, and compatible
with matrix binder.
2.9
Under Bed Bonding Mortar

Cement sand mortar mixed with water.
2.10
Heavy Top Divider Strips

Straight of type indicated, of depth required and with anchoring device.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
Preparation
Prior to setting all units, inspect surfaces and arrange for the satisfactory correction
of defects. Grounds, bucks, outlet and receptacle boxes, rough plumbing and other
fixtures and fittings shall be in place and trenches, chases or other openings in floors
properly closed.
3.2
Workmanship
Work shall be carefully laid out, providing symmetry about center lines of the areas
and avoiding small, unsightly cuts. Use of thin cuts and pieces, chipped, spalled or
otherwise disfigured tiles, shall not be allowed.
3.3
Setting Beds for Tiles

The mortar for setting beds shall be composed of 350 kg cement per 1 m3 of sand
with sufficient mixing water. The mortar shall be spread at proper thickness of 20
mm over a bed of fine aggregate for the required levels, using screed strips. No
more setting mortar shall be spread than can be covered with tile before the mortar
reaches its initial set. Setting beds over membrane waterproofing shall have wire
reinforcement with edges lapped at least 50 mm. Beds that have partially hardened
shall not be retempered.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 09350-4
December 2010
3.4

Specifications
Setting of Tiles
The minimum period between pressing and laying, should be 21 days to 28 days.
Tiles shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour prior to setting
and shall be applied to setting beds while damp, but without free water on the back
of tile.
Spread sand on surfaces to receive sand-cushion
Tiles shall be layed with alignment level true to dimension and accurately set firmly
pressed and tamped into full mortar beds with well fitted joints in true planes,
graded or level and neatly cut and fitted closely against abutting work.
When hit after setting tiles shall give a solid firm sound. if a hollow sound is
produced tiles and motor layer shall be removed and replaced.
Intersections and returns shall be accurately formed and cuts rubbed smooth with
fine stone. Tiles when cut shall not be less than half their original size. Cut edges
shall be set against fixtures or other tile with at least a 1 mm joint.
For terrazzo tiles install divider strips where required. Joints shall not exceed 2 mm
and for cement tiles laid on roof joints shall be staggered and clearance shall not be
less than 5 mm.
Mortar shall not be allowed through joints.
3.5
Grouting
Allow at least 48 hours before grouting.
All tiling, shall be grouted up on completion with neat cement.
Thoroughly wash out floor tile Joints and saturate with clean water before grouting.
Grout joints after setting bed is dry with grey, white or coloured grouting cement
mixed with water to a creamy consistency and thoroughly forced into all joints to
fill entire depth.
Finish grout shall be uniform in color, smooth and without voids pin holes or
depressions.
Any surplus grout shall be cleaned off the face of the tiling and surrounding
surfaces immediately and all tiling shall be carefully cleaned off
Cure grout and finish tile.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 09350-5
December 2010
3.6

Specifications
Bases
Bases for roof cement tiles shall be an inclined tile to comply with height indicated
on Drawings and to cover the damp-proofing membrane.
Bases shall be a tile or part of tiles cut by the use of suitable cutting saw to comply
with heights indicated on Drawings.
The proceeding pieces shall be matching and of sharp edges, and shall not be
chipped, spalled or otherwise disfigured.
Special terrazzo base units shall have a bull nose top edge and a cove end for
transition from wall to horizontal floor tiles and shall be produced in the same way
using the same mix as for tiles.
Adhesive material or cement mortar grout shall be used to install bases in place, The
cement mortar grout shall solidly fill any space between backing walls and bases.
3.7
Cleaning
After grouting has sufficiently set or hardened, tile surface shall be cleaned and
traces of cement or dust accumulations and foreign matter shall be completely
removed.
A layer of clean sand shall be spread over tile floor and shall be kept wet with water
for a period of ten days for curing and shall be left or replaced by a non-staining
sawdust to protect tile floor surface while other works are being done till the
Engineer's order to clear and clean the floor surface.
The floor should be thoroughly scrubbed with soap and water.
The surface of terrazzo tiles shall be polished on completion to the Engineer's
satisfaction.
Large areas shall be wet polished by means of approved machines using
carborundum wheel.
Any surface too small for convenient machine polishing may be polished by hand
using carborundum stone and water.
On completion of final polishing, the paving should be thoroughly clean and left to
dry naturally.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 09350-6
December 2010
3.8

Specifications
Protection
Provide tile protection whenever required. Material likely to stain or deface tile shall
not be used. Close grouted floors and stairs to traffic completely for 24 hours after
installation, thereafter, permit traffic on tiled floors only over protective covering of
cardboard or equivalent.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Section 09350-7
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 09800
SPECIAL COATINGS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of special coatings as required by the Contract and
includes the coating employing chemically curing binders:
Epoxy resin
Polyurethane resin
Extent of special coatings is indicated on Drawings and in Finishing Tables.

1.3
Submittals
Specification-Sections:
1.3.1
Product Dam Submit manufacturer's product data including:
Technical information including basic material analysis
Application and maintenance instructions for coating material specified

Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number.
Provide list of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.
1.3.2.
Samples: Submit samples for review of each colour, material and texture. Resubmit
samples as requested unit the required sheen, colour and texture is achieved
Prior to beginning of the work, the Engineer shall furnish colour chips for surfaces
be coated. Use representative colours when preparing samples for review.
to
Provide 2 samples of each colour and material to be applied with texture to simulate
actual conditions on representative samples of the substrate.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-1
December 2010
1.4

Specifications
Reference Standards
Special coating work shall be performed in strict accordance with the specifications,
drawings and the stipulations of the British Standard Specifications (BS) and the
corresponding Standard International Specifications.
BS NO.
03900
06150
Method of Test for Paints

Code Practice for Painting of Building
1.5
Quality Assurance
1.5.1
Single Source Responsibiliy: Provide priming, undercoat and sealing materials

produced the same manufacturer as the finish coat. Use only thinners recommended by
manufacturers and within recommended limits.
1.5.2
Material Quality: Provide the best quality grade of the various coating as regularly
manufactured by acceptable coating manufacturers. Provide written certification from
the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed the specified requirements
1.5.3
Field Samples: Final acceptance of coating system shall be from job applied samples.
The Engineer shall select a surface, to represent surfaces and conditions of each type of
substrate to be coated. Apply coating on interior or exterior surface as specified, until
required sheen, colour and texture are obtained. Simulate finished lighting conditions
for review of in-place work. Minimum dimensions for field samples shall be as follows:
Ceiling, wall and the like:

Bases:
3x3m
3m
After finishes are accepted, this surface shall be used for evaluation of coating systems
of similar nature.
1.6

Deliver materials to the Site in the manufacturer's original new, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name, label requirements and information to suit
specific project circumstances including the following:
Name of materials e Manufacturer's name. date of manufacture

Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents
Thinning instructions
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-2
December 2010

Specifications
Application instructions
Colour name and number
Handling instructions and precautions
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated store
Maintain containers used in storage area in a clean condition free of foreign materials
and residue. Keep storage area neat and orderly, remove oily rags and waste daily. Take
precautionary measures and provide adequate ventilation to ensure that work areas are
adequately protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and
application of coating.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Epoxy Coating Over Concrete or Plaster walls

Sealer: Provide manufacturer's factory-formulated filler material for coarse or porous
surfaces, compatible with the substrate, primer and finish coat material indicated
hereinafter. Sealer shall be pigmented material suitable for application over
cementitious surfaces and concrete under high performance epoxy coating.
Prime Coat: Provide the factory formulated prime coat compatible with the substrate
and finish coat.
Bond Coat: Provide bond coat material compatible with substrate and finish coat.
Intermediate Coats: Provide intermediate coat material (undercoat) compatible with the
substrate, primers and finish coat materials.
Finish Coat: Material for finish coat shall be factory formulated compatible with
substrate, prime, and intermediate coat. Shall be high performance architectural coating
material supplied as 2 pack materials which builds tough, extra durable, organic coating
film and cures to a hard glaze finish. Finish coating material shall be based on a resin
system of epoxy polyester or polyurethane and shall be resistant to persistent heat,
humidity, abrasion, staining, chemicals and fungus growth.
Finish coat material shall be factory-formulated epoxy coating of 2 components,
suitable for application over cementitious surfaces and concrete and of high-gloss.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-3
December 2010
2.1.2

Specifications
Epoxy Coating over Ferrous Metal

Primer: Provide the manufacturer's recommended primer for ferrous metal compatible
with the substrate, base coat and finish coat indicated.
Finish Coat: Provide factory formulated 2 components polyamide epoxy coal-tar finish
coat materials compatible with the primer, intermediate or base coat material indicated.
Coating: Shall be 2 components supplied in two pack materials, the components shall
be combined shortly before use.
Colour: Shall be aluminium or as indicated by Engineer if not indicated on Drawings.
2.1.3
Heat Resistant Coating

Primer.: When indicated provide primer for ferrous metal under a heat resisting black
enamel coating for surfaces exposed to temperature up to 2000C
Heat Resistant Coating: Aluminium. pigmented silicone based heat-resistant coating
over ferrous metal subject to temperature up to 600T.
2.1.4
EPOXY RESIN BASED COATING SYSTEM
a.
Material
Epoxy nonslip coating system to concrete floors shall be a proprietary, two component, non
solvented liquid, epoxy resin based compound similar to Mastertop 1210 of Master
Builders Technologies (MBT) or superior approved.
The coating system shall consist of the following:-
Polyurethane seamless sealants for sealing expansion and construction joints, cracks
and penetrations if/as required.
Primer coat applied at a rate of 0.125 litre per m2.
First coat applied at a rate of 0.25 litre per m2.
Heavy duty hard wearing aggregate as Mastertop aggregate No. 2 of MBT or equal
and approved.
Top coat applied at a rate of 0.300 litre per m2.
However the total thickness of the coating shall not be less than 500 micron thickness.
The colour of the system shall be as directed by the Engineer.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-4
December 2010
b.

Specifications
Workmanship
Epoxy coating system shall be carried out by an approved and qualified specialist subcontractor, having not less than 5 years successful experience of similar works and fully
trained in the applications and techniques involved and in strict compliance with the
The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment, to enable the completion of work to
the total satisfaction of the Engineer.
The surface to which the epoxy overlay is to be applied shall be prepared as specified by
the manufacturer and to the approval of the Engineer. The concrete surface shall be at least
28 days old and the relative humidity at the surface shall not be more than 75% when
measured with a hygrometer (BS 8201-81).
The surfaces shall be prepared by any of the following methods as directed by the Engineer:
a)
b)
Vacuum shot blasting.

Grit blasting.
The prepared surface should be dry, clean and free of oil, grease and loose materials. If
acid etching has been employed the floor shall be rinsed copiously with clean water and
allowed to dry. Dust and loose particles are to be vacuumed off the surface.
If contamination of oil or grease exists then the surface shall be cleaned using a degreaser
similar to FEB Degreasing Crystals.
Any repairs to arises etc. shall be carried out with the appropriate compatible repair systems
recommended by the manufacturer of the epoxy coating system.
Epoxy coating material shall be mixed strictly as specified by the manufacturer and shall
be applied as per his written instructions ensuring that the rate of application is adequate to
provide the required thickness and shall follow the timings laid down by the manufacturer
The application shall be allowed to dry and shall be protected against traffic, water,
spillages and wind for 48 hours.
Immediately following application of the first coat, the aggregate shall be broadcasted onto
the surface and blinded to saturation. i.e. the first coat should not be visible. This shall be
allowed to dry for a minimum of 12-hours and then removed by industrial vacuum. The
surface is then coated with a top-coat at the specified rates.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-5
December 2010
2.1.5

Specifications
VEHICULAR TRAFFIC DECK COATING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Provide a complete polyurethane waterproofing coating system where
indicated on the Drawings, including all applicable sealants and elastomeric flashings
needed to ensure a complete waterproof and weathertight system for deck, ramp and raised
curb surfaces at locations indicated.
B. Related work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements;
3. Shop Drawings or catalog illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface
of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;
4. Manufacturer's current recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by
Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures
used on the Work.
5. Written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects of similar
scope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for
verification.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Applicator qualifications:
1. Applicator shall have at least three years experience in installing materials of types
specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of similar scope and
complexity.
2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all
times during installation.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-6
December 2010

Specifications
C. Convene a pre-installation job-site conference four weeks prior to commencing work of

this Section:
1. Secure attendance by Architect, Contractor, applicator, and authorized representatives of
the coating system manufacturer and interfacing trades.
2. Examine Drawings and Specifications affecting work of this Section, verify all conditions,
review installation procedures, and coordinate scheduling with interfacing portions of the
Work.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels intact
and legible at time of use.
B. Maintain the products in accord with manufacturer's recommendations with proper
precautions to ensure fitness of material when installed.
1.05 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS
A. General:
1. Provide applicator with surfaces that are broom clean, dry, sound and free of voids,
bugholes, rockpockets, honeycombs, protrusions, excessive roughness, foreign matter,
frost, ice and other contaminants which may inhibit application or performance of the
waterproofing coating system.
2. Using suitable abrasive methods, remove residue of form release, curing compound,
chemical retarders and other surface treatments, mortar smear, sawcutting residue, mill
scale, rust, loose material and other contaminants from concrete, masonry and ferrous
metal surfaces to receive the work of this Section.
B. Concrete: Where work of this Section will be applied to concrete, provide surfaces that are
smooth with finish equal to one that is light steel troweled followed by a fine hair broom.
C. Decks:
1. Slope deck surfaces to drains that have flanges at coating level which are flush with deck
surfaces.
2. Rigidly install pipe, vents and other surface protrusions, properly flash them, and cover to
prevent entry of coating materials.
D. Metal flashings: Where metal flashings are substrate to waterproofing coating, set the
flashings in continuous bedding bead of urethane sealant; install sealant S-bead between
metal laps and mechanically fasten to substrate along leading edges at every 4" on center,
staggered linearly, to lay flat without fishmouths.
E. Joints: Configuration shall be consistent with this Section and with all other requirements
of the Contract Documents.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Deliver to the Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against defective
materials and workmanship for a period of two years following date of completion.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-7
December 2010
1.
2.

Specifications
Warrant that installed waterproof coating system shall be free of defects including adhesive
failure, cohesive failure, weathering deficiencies and waterproofing failure resulting from
substrate cracking up to 1/16 inch. Abrasion resistance at 120psi cycles should have a
value of 100,000 or more. Tensile strength of top coat should be greater than 4000psi.
Manufacturer's standard warranty covering materials of 10 years.
Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide a complete liquid applied polyurethane waterproofing coating system having the
following minimum attributes:
1. System designed for concrete decks subject to vehicular traffic;
2. Complying with ASTM C957-91 and having a Class A fire rating on concrete surfaces;
3. Install manufacturer's standard-duty vehicular traffic deck system on parking areas from
curbs to end of striped parking stalls and raised curb areas indicated;
4. Install manufacturer's heavy-duty vehicular traffic deck system on ramps, drive aisles and
turn areas indicated;
5. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range.
6. Acceptable products:
a. Vulkem 350/950 or 951
b. or prior approved equal
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.
2.
3.
Primer: As recommended by coating system manufacturer.

Joint backing: Closed-cell, polyethylene rod as recommended by coating manufacturer.
Aggregate: 20-30 mesh silica sand; local aggregate approved by coating manufacturer
Sealant:
Vulkem 922
Vulkem 227
or prior approved equal
2.03 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the coating system
manufacturer as compatible, subject to review of the Architect.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-8
December 2010

Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the
work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed.
1. Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements;
2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect;
3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation and detailing procedures to be in accord with waterproof coating
system manufacturer's instructions and recommendations except where more stringent
requirements are indicated.
B. Abrade concrete surfaces by light bead-blast to remove laitance and provide surface texture
resembling 100 grit sandpaper.
C. Clean all deck surfaces to receive coating system in accord with manufacturer's
instructions; vacuum clean or blow clean with oil-free compressed air all surfaces to
receive sealants, detailing materials or coatings immediately prior to installation.
D. Rout, clean, prepare and detail surface cracks in accord with manufacturer's instructions;
install backer rod where required.
E. Clean metal surfaces to bright metal by wire brushing or mechanical etching; scuff-sand
lead flashing and plastic surfaces.
F. Prime surfaces in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Install 1/4" diameter backer rod into corner of all horizontal-to-vertical junctures subject to
movement and cover with 1" detail cant of approved sealant; install 1" detail cants at
projections, curbs and other horizontal-to-vertical junctures.
H. Install detail coats, joint and crack treatments, and liquid flashings in accord with
I. Allow detail applications to cure in accord with manufacturer's instructions prior to general
application of coating.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Install waterproof coating system in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions as applies to the Work except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Grid deck surfaces to assure proper coverage rates and verify coating wet-film mil
thickness with gauges as work progresses.
2. Retain empty product containers during course of work to aid in determining whether
completed coating system complies with manufacturers average thickness requirements.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-9
December 2010

Specifications
B. Verify proper dry condition of substrate using method recommended by coating system
manufacturer; perform adhesion checks prior to general application of coating system
using field adhesion test method recommended by manufacturer.
C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive coating system.
D. Wipe clean all detail coats with white rags wetted with Xylene solvent; do not saturate
detail coat.
E. Apply coating base coat uniformly and allow to cure in accord with manufacturer's
instructions.
F. Feather edge when entire area cannot be completed in one day; clean area 6" wide along
edge of coating with Xylene solvent on clean white rags prior to startup on next working
day; use interlaminary primer per manufacturer's instructions as needed; overlap existing
work by 6" with new work.
G. Mix and apply coating system intermediate wear coats in accord with manufacturer's
instructions for wear balance specified; immediately broadcast aggregate into wet material
at rate recommended by manufacturer; disperse aggregate through a hopper fed, low
pressure air blower in a manner to ensure uniform coverage over entire surface and
backroll to evenly distribute and totally encapsulate; allow to cure per manufacturer's
instructions.
H. Apply coating system finish coat in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP
A. Promptly remove primer or coating material from adjacent surfaces with MEK, Toluene or
Xylene; leave work area in broom clean condition.
B. Allow completed Work to cure 72 hours before opening to vehicular traffic.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
Conditions
Examine substrates and conditions under which coating shall be performed for
compliance with requirements for application of coating. Do not proceed with
application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85% or on damp and wet
surfaces, unless permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions. Allow wet surfaces to
dry thoroughly and attain the temperature and conditions recommended by
manufacturer before proceeding with or continuing the coating operations.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-10
December 2010
3.1.1

Specifications
Field Safety
Safety and hygiene in connection with the painting work shall be controlled.
When surfaces are to be prepared by blast cleaning or the use of power tools, use
protectors such as goggles.
When painting, and using organic solvent in an airtight environment, provide

appropriate ventilating and lighting equipment. Additionally wear appropriate
protectors as gas-masks.
3.2
Preparation
3.2.1
Surface Preparation: Remove hardware accessories, plates light fixtures and similar
items which are not to be coated. Perform surface preparation and cleaning in
compliance with manufacturer's instructions for the particular substrate conditions.
Clean surfaces before applying coating on surface treatments, schedule cleaning and
coating application so that dust from cleaning process shall not fall on wet, freshly
coated surfaces.
Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare surface of concrete, cement plaster and similar surfaces
by removing surface efflorescence. chalk, dust, dirt, release agents, grease and oils.
Use abrasive blast cleaning methods if recommended by the coating system
manufacturer.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be coated by performing
appropriate tests. Do not apply coatings over surfaces where moisture content exceeds
that permitted in the manufacturer's printed directions.
Acid-etch concrete floor surfaces scheduled to receive special coating with a 5%
solution of muriatic acid or other proprietary cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water
to remove acid and neutralize with ammonia and rinse; allow to dry and vacuum
Ferrous Metal Surfaces: Clean non-galvanized, ferrous metal surface that have not
been shop coated, remove oil, grease dirt, loose mill scale and foreign substances.
Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods sandblast can be used if
recommended by manufactures, treat surfaces after sandblasting with metal
treatment wash coat prior to priming.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-11
December 2010
3.2.2

Specifications
Wood Surfaces: Clean wood of dirt, oil or foreign substances using scrapers,
mineral spirits and sand paper if required. Sand surfaces smooth and dust off
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac
before application of primer.
Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials in compliance with the
coating manufacturer's directions. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture
of uniform density and as required during application. Do not stir film, which may form
on surfaces, into the material. Remove film and if necessary, strain the coating material
before using.
Tinting: Tint each under coat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat
where multiple coats of the same material are to be applied.
3.3
Application
Apply special coatings by brush, roller, spray, squeegee or other applications in
accordance with manufacturer's directions. Apply a prime coat to materials to be coated
or finished and which has not been prime coated by other The number of coats and film
thickness required shall be the same regardless of the application method.
Do not apply succeeding, coat until the previous one has cured. Sand between
application where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface.
Apply each material at not thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading
rate.
Provide finish coats compatible 1xith the primers used.
3.4
Completed Work
Match approved samples for colour texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or recoat
work not in compliance with specified requirements.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch-up and restore damage or
defaced coated surfaces.
3.5

Field quality control procedures as specified in Clause 3.5, Section 09900 "Painting"
shall be followed for completed work of special coatings.
Apply additional coats when undercoats, or other conditions shown through the final
coat until the film is of uniform coating, colour, and appearance.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-12
December 2010
3.6

Specifications
Cleaning
At the end of each working day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags and other discarded
materials from the Site.
Upon completion of work, clean glass and spattered surfaces and do not damage
finished surfaces.
3.7
Protection
Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not, against damage from coating.
Correct damage by cleaning, repaining. replacing and recoating as acceptable to the
Engineer. Leave other trades work in an undamaced condition.
Provide "Wet-Paint" signs to protect newly coated furnishes.
3.8
Special Coatings Schedule

Apply the following, coating systems for substrates indicated.
3.8.1
Epoxy Coating (Metal Surface): Provide a primer coat or bond coat and two finish coat
with a total dry film thickness not less than 125 microns.
Primer Coat: Manufacturer's recommended primer coat (thinned coal-tar epoxy)
Finish Coat:
2 pack epoxy coating of:
Colour:
Aluminium or as required
Heat Resistant:
primer
For surface temperature up to 200C provide 2 coats over metal
Polyamide Epoxy
Chlorinated Rubber
Silicone Alkyd
Heat Resistant
Primer Coat: Manufacturer's recommended metal primer

First Coat: Heat resistant enamel
Second: Coat Heat resistant enamel
For surfaces up to 600C provide 2 coats:
First Coat:
Second Coat:
Aluminium pigmented, silicone based heat resistant coating

Aluminium pigmented, silicone based heat resistant coating
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-13
December 2010
3.8.2

Specifications
Epoxy Coating (Concrete-Plaster) - Provide one coat of high gloss polyester epoxy coating
over pigmented sealer. Total dry film thickness shall not be less than 4 mils.
Sealer Coat: Manufacturer's recommended pigmented sealer
High-gloss polyester epoxy
Finish Coat: shall be as selected
Moisture curing polyurethane
Chlorinated rubber coating
Polyamide epoxy
3.8.3
Wood: Provide 2 finish coats over a bond coat with a total dry film of 15 mils.
Bond coat:
First coat
Second coat
Thinned coal-tar epoxy

Coal-tar epoxy
Coat-tar epoxy
END OF SECTION
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Special Coating
Section 09800-14
December 2010

Specifications
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Related Documents
1.2
Description of Work
This section covers the work of painting as required by the Contract and includes :
Emulsion Paint
Enamel Paint
External Paint
Wood Paint
Steel Paint
Extent of special coatings is indicated on Drawings and in Finishing Tables.

1.3
Submittals
Specification-Sections:
1.3.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including:
Technical information including basic material analysis

Application and maintenance instructions for coating material specified
Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number.

Provide list of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.
1.3.2
Field-Samples: .The Engineer shall select one room, wall or surface exterior and interior
to represent surfaces and condition for each type of coating and substrate to be painted.
Apply full coating finish on this room, wall, surface of not less than 9 m2 until required
sheen, colour and texture is obtained, simulate finished lighting, conditions for review.
After finishes are accepted, this room or surface shall be used for evaluation of coating
of a similar nature.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-1
December 2010
1.4

Specifications
Reference Standards
Special coating work shall be performed in strict accordance with the specifications,
drawings and the stipulations of the British Standard Specifications (BS) and the
corresponding Standard International Specifications.
BS NO.
03900
06150
BS CP 3012
1.5
Method of Test for Paints

Code Practice for Painting of Building
Cleaning and Preparation of Metal Surfaces.
Definitions
Paint includes coating systems, materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers
and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish
coats.
1.6
Quality Assurance
1.6.1
Single. Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other under-coat paint produced by
same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer
and use only within recommended limits.
The contractor shall only be allowed to use materials delivered to the site in sealed cans
bearing the manufacturer's name.
1.6.2
Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime

paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility to total coatings system for various
substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of
finish materials provided for use, to ensure that compatible prime coats are used.
Notify the Engineer of problems anticipated using materials specified.
1.7
Delivery and Storage

Deliver materials to job Site in original, new and unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name, label and following information:
Product name or title of material.

Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture and expiry date.
Manufacturer's name.
Contents by volume. for major pigment
Thinning Instructions
Application instructions
Colour name and number
Product description (generic classification or binder type)
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-2
December 2010

Specifications
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at
a minimum ambient temperature as recommended by manufacturers. Maintain
containers used in storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
Protect from over heating where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove
oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas
are adequately protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing
and application of paints.
1.8
Job Conditions
All paints shall be used within six (6) months of delivery.
Apply water-base paints or solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to
be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 10C and 35C, unless
otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
Precaution shall be taken to keep down dust before and during painting process.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
The time and conditions necessary for a paint to dry must be checked.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
General
Material Compatibility: Provide fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related
materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the
various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's
product identification will not be acceptable.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's
material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
Colors: Provide color selections made by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full
range of standard colors.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-3
December 2010
2.2

Specifications
Filler
Filler Coat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated,
latex-type concrete masonry block fillers that are compatible with the finish materials
indicated. All fillers shall be of same manufacture of paint products.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fillers that may be
incorporated in the Work:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
High-Performance Latex Filler
2.3
Primers
Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primers that are
compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. All primers shall be of same
manufacture of paint products.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, prime coat materials that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Concrete and Masonry Primers: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.
Gypsum Drywall Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.
Exterior Primer Coating: Exterior, alkyd wood primer.
Ferrous Metal Primers: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primers.
Ferrous Metal Primers: Alkyd-type primers.
Galvanized Metal Primers
2.4
Under Coat Materials

Undercoat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated
undercoat materials that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. All
undercoat materials shall be of same manufacture of paint material.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, undercoat materials that
may be incorporated in the Work:
Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel.
Interior Emulsion Undercoat: Ready-mixed emulsion.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-4
December 2010
2.5

Specifications
Exterior Finish Paint Materials

Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat
materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. All exterior
finish paint material shall be of same manufacturer.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that
Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat, acrylic paint.
Exterior, Polyvinyl Acetate Emulsion:
paint.
Quick-drying, flat, polyvinyl acetate (PVA)
Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather-resistant, air-drying, high-gloss enamel.

Deep-Color, Exterior Alkyd Resin Trim Paint: Deep-color, ready-mixed alkyd paint.
Medium-Shade, Exterior, Ready-Mixed Oil Paint: Medium-shade, ready-mixed oil or
alkyd-oil paint.
Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Weather-resistant, high-gloss enamel.
Deep-Color, Exterior, Alkyd Resin Trim Paint: Deep-color, ready-mixed alkyd paint.
Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: Flat, alkyd-based enamel.
Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Weather-resistant, high-gloss enamel.
2.6
Internal Finish Paint Materials

Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat
materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. All interior
finish paint shall be of same approved manufacturer.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that
Interior, Flat, Latex-Based Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for a flat finish.
Interior, Flat, Odorless, Alkyd Paint:
enamel.
Ready-mixed, interior, flat, low-odor, alkyd
Interior, Semigloss, Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Semigloss, low-odor, alkyd enamel.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-5
December 2010

Specifications
Interior, Flat, Latex-Based Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint.

Interior, Gloss, Alkyd Enamel:
2.7
Wood Finish Materials

Wood-Finishing Materials:
Provide the manufacturer's recommended factoryformulated, wood-finishing materials that are compatible with the substrate and
undercoats indicated. All wood interior finishing material shall be of same manufacture
of paint material.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, wood-finishing materials
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Varnish-Type Surface Sealer.
Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain: Slow-penetrating, oil-type wood stain.
Cut Shellac: Quick-drying, rosin-free, clear, general-purpose shellac varnish.
Paste Wood Filler: Solvent-based, air-drying, paste-type wood filler.
Oil Rubbing Varnish: Clear, oil-type, rubbing varnish for use on interior stained or
natural-finished woodwork:
Paste Wax: Provide paste wax as recommended by the coating manufacturer for use on
interior stained and natural-finished woodwork.
2.8
Paint for steel work

Epoxy paint shall be used to steel work , paint shall be one under coat of 2 pack epoxy
primer with polyamide hardener to a DFT of not less than 100 microns and two topcoats of 2 pack epoxy paint of DFT 30 microns each. The total DFT shall not be less
than 175 microns. Any touch up to damaged shop coats shall be primed and puttied with
zinc rich epoxy primer and compatible putty.
The Contractor shall ensure that all materials specified to be painted with epoxy paint
shall be primed/ shop coated with the appropriate Primer (Zinc rich Epoxy Primer)
compatible to the proposed paint system.
2.9
Manufacturers
Emulsion paint, Oil paint, Primers, wood paint, steel paint, under coats & Epoxy shall be
as manufactured by Joutan, Hempel, National or any approved equal.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-6
December 2010
PART 3
3.1

Specifications
EXECUTION
Conditions
Examine substrates and conditions under which painting shall be performed for
compliance with requirements for application of painting. Do not proceed with
application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Do not apply paint when relative humidity exceeds 85% or on damp and wet surfaces,
unless permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions. Allow wet surfaces to dry
thoroughly and attain the temperature and conditions recommended by manufacturer
before proceeding with or continuing the paint operations.
3.1.1
Field Safety
Safety and hygiene in connection with the painting work shall be controlled.
When surfaces are to be prepared by blast cleaning or the use of power tools, use
protectors such as goggles.
When painting, and using organic solvent in an airtight environment, provide

appropriate ventilating and lighting equipment. Additionally wear appropriate
protectors as gas-masks.
3.2
Surface Preparation
3.2.1
General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint

manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate
condition.
Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and
grease prior to mechanical cleaning by means of a suitable solvent or by high pressure
water jetting or steam cleaning with, if necessary, an alkaline cleaning agent (Na3Po4).
Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process shall not fall
onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required.
Notify the Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating
systems with substrates primed by others
Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures,
and similar items already in place and are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied
protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Following completion of
painting of each space or area, clean and prefix or reinstall removed items in position.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-7
December 2010
3.2.2

Specifications
Ferrous Metals. Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil,
grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or white spirit and
succession of clean swabs, to the extent-that the only traces remaining are slight stains in
the form of spots or stripes.
Excessive rust scale shall be removed using impact cleaning tools.
Blast steel surfaces if necessary. Treat base and sand blast or pickled clean metal, with a
metal treatment wash coat before priming.
All bolt holes shall be solvent-cleaned prior to blast cleaning.
Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other
sections of these specifications.
Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer.
3.2.2.1
Blast Cleaning: Metal surfaces can be cleaned by blasting. Suitable abrasives for use in
blast cleaning are
Steel grit
Steel shot
Malleable iron shot
Crushed steel wire
Aluminium oxide (corundum)
Blast furnace slag
Copper slag,
Sand and other potentially silica-containing materials shall not be used, unless permitted
by local authorities and accepted by the Engineer.
The abrasive shall be free from oil, grease, moisture, salts, and not be rusty.
3.2.2.2
Grade of Surface Finish: Blast cleaning shall apply, with degree of surface roughness
(peak-to-valley) height of not more than 80 Micron. Finally, the surface shall be cleaned
with a vacuum cleaner, clean dry compressed air or a clean brush.
It is essential to ensure that no condensation occurs on blasted steel. Blast cleaning shall
not be done in open areas close to painting operations or wet coated surfaces, to prevent
dust and abrasive contamination.
3.2.2.3
Cleaning: A dry blast-cleaned surface shall be brushed with clean brushes made of hair,
bristle or fibber, blown-off compressed air (free from oil and water) or vacuum-cleaned
to remove all traces of blast cleaned products from the surface or from pockets and
comers. Particular care shall be taken to prevent rusting/or contamination of cleaned
surfaces. The substrate shall be thoroughly dry before painting is applied.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-8
December 2010

Specifications
3.2.3
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil, corrosion and surface contaminants with nonpetroleum based solvent or chemical washes solvent free of chloride.
3.2.4
Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, and

cement plaster to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils,
and by roughening as required to remove glaze.
Surface should weather for one month before painting.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and
burning of finish paint, correct this condition before aces where moisture content
application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
Surfaces which are to receive water paint shall be treated with one coat of petrifying
liquid applied by brush and allowed to dry for at least 24 hours before application of
water paint.
Porous surfaces may require a block filler or a cement grout/latex primer.
Stopping and filling shall be, when hard and dry, rubbed down level with the
surrounding surfaces.
3.2.5
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, dust, oil and foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits and sand-paper as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off
Scrape and clean small, dry seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or
other recommended knot-sealer before application of primer. After priming fill holes and
imperfections in finish surfaces with putty, sand smooth when dried, all nail holes,
cracks and other small holes shall be filled after the full prime coat.
Prime, stain or seal ,wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges. ends.
faces, undersides and backsides of wood, including, cabinets, counters, cases and,
paneling.
When transparent finish is required, back-prime with spar varnish.
Back-prime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
Seal tops, bottoms and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or
sealer immediately upon delivery.
Unless otherwise described, all coatings to timber work shall be applied by brush.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-9
December 2010
3.2.6

Specifications
Woodwork Required to be Stained: Surfaces shall be cleaned to remove arease and dirt.
The wood shall then be stopped, filled and rubbed down. In the case of oak surface shall
be cleaned with white spirit to remove free oil.
Hard stopping for surfaces tinted shall be an approved tinted filler to match the colour of
the surface.
Stain for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil stain complying with BS 1215.
All hardwood and softwood to receive decorative staining shall receive two (2) coats of
pigmented stain and three (3) coats of silk-lacquer, sand surfaces between coats.
3.3
Materials Preparation
Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
Maintain containers used In mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
Sir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if
necessary, strain material before using.
3.4
Application
3.4.1
General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being, applied.
Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
Apply additional coats when putty undercoats, stains or other conditions show through
final coat of paint. until paint film is of uniform finish, colour and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and
exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime
coat only before final installation of equipment.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat,
non-specular black paint.
Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-10
December 2010

Specifications
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

It is essential to use grade of abrasive paper appropriate to surfaces, the surface shall be
sanded in the direction of and not across the grains.
first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up
painted, unless otherwise indicated.
Each stage of the work shall be subjected to inspection and approval.
3.4.2
Painting Procedure: Apply primer coat or first-coat material to surfaces that have been
cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after
preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
After preparation and the prime coat, apply on the over all surface a smoothing
and levelling putty (filling) the material must be stiff and applied with a putty or
stopping knife, firmly pressed into cavity, and knifed flush with surrounding surfaces, it
may be required filling in two stages.
The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application
method. Sand between application to produce an even smooth surface.
Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying, Do not
recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting,
or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
3.4.3
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate. to establish a total dry film thickness on the entire
surface as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer
3.4.4
Mechanical Work (if required): Painting of mechanical work limited to those items
exposed in occupied spaces and exterior areas exposed to view.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
3.4.5
Piping, pipe hangers, and supports

Tanks
Ductwork, insulation
Motor, mechanical equipment, and supports
Accessory items
Prime Coats: Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished
and which has not been prime coated by others.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-11
December 2010

Specifications
Priming paint shall be brushed well into the surface and shall be allowed to dry and
harden before application of subsequent coats.
3.4.6
Stipple - Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave
no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surfaces
imperfections.
3.4.7
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface

of uniform finish, colour, appearance and coverage. Sand surfaces smooth prior to
applying primer and after applying putty. Cloudiness, spotting, laps, brush marks runs
sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections shall not be acceptable.
3.4.8
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film of
even luster Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, colour irregularity, runs, brush
marks, orange peel, nail holes or other surface imperfections.
Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5

The Engineer shall invoke the following material testing procedure at any time, and any
number of times during period of field painting.
Encage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used.
Samples of materials delivered to project site shall be taken, identified and sealed, and
certified in presence of Engineer.
Testing laboratory shall perform appropriate tests for any or all of following
characteristics: Abrasion resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, washability,
absorption.. accelerated weathering, dry opacity, accelerated yellowness, skinning,
colour retention. alkali resistance and quantitative materials analysis.
If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified
requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove noncomplying paint; repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint. Remove rejected paint from
previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coating's are
non-compatible.
3.6
Completed Work
Match approved samples for colour, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint
work not in compliance with specified requirements.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-12
December 2010
3.7

Specifications
Clean-up and Protection

Clean-up: During of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and
rags at end of each work day.
Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care
not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by
painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and
repainting, as acceptable to Engineer,
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after
completion of painting operations.
At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced
painted surface,
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib and Alami
Painting
Section 09900-13

Site Layout Str. &amp; Arc.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Site Layout Str. &amp; Arc.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAUDI RAILWAY (SAR) PROJECT

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

GROUPING # 2- AL NARIYAH YARD

North South Railway Project

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Measurement and Payment

Cutting and Patching

Reference Standards and Definitions

General Materials Plant and Equipment

Project Record Documents

Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials

North South Railway Project

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE WORK

Cast-In Place Concrete

Beds and Screed

North South Railway Project

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Waterproofing and Roofing

Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Steel Doors and Frames

Glass and Glazing

Cement Tiles and Terrazzo

North South Railway Project

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Measurement and Payment

Cutting and Patching

Reference Standards and Definitions

General Materials Plant and Equipment

Project Record Documents

Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials

North South Railway Project

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE WORK

Cast-In Place Concrete

Beds and Screed

North South Railway Project

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Waterproofing and Roofing

Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Steel Doors and Frames

Glass and Glazing

Cement Tiles and Terrazzo

North South Railway Project

The Project Documents comprises the written Tender/Bid Documents, Contract

This Project Documents is not intended as a detailed description of installation methods,

Mention in the Project Documents or indication on the Drawings of materials, products,

If discrepancies or conflicts in, or omissions from Drawings, Specifications or other

Khatib and Alami

North South Railway Project

Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents are intended to be in compliance

Khatib and Alami

North South Railway Project

In areas where equipment is to be installed, check dimensional data on equipment to

Khatib and Alami

North South Railway Project

Relocation of Doors and/or Partitions

Relocation of Mechanical/Electrical Items

Codes and Standards

The purpose of referring to standards in the Specifications is to establish minimum

Site Layout Str. & Arc.

Site Layout Str. & Arc.